Service Guide

HP 8753E Network Analyzer

HEWLETT
PACKARD
HP part number: 08753-90374 Supersedes October 1998
Printed in USA February 1999
Notice.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material,
including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors
contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with
the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

@Copyright 1998-1999 Hewlett-Packard Company

Network Analyzer Documentation Set
The Installation and Quick Start
Guide familiarizes you with the
network analyzer’s front and rear
panels, electrical and environmental
operating requirements, as well as
procedures for installing, conGguring,
and verifying the operation of the
analyzer.

The User’s Guide shows how to make

measurements, explains
commonly-used features, and tells you
how to get the most performance from
your analyzer.

The Quick Reference Guide provides

a summary of selected user features.

The HP-IB Programm iug and

Command Reference Guide provides
programming information for
operation of the network analyzer
under HP-IB control.

...
III
The BP BASIC Programming
Examples Guide provides a tutorial
introduction using BASIC programming
examples to demonstrate the remote
operation of the network analyzer.

The System Veracation and Test

Guide provides the system verification
and performance tests and the
Performance Test Record for your
analyzer.
Contents
1. Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
lhble of Service Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l
Principles of Microwave Connector Care . . . . . . . . . . . . l-5
Analyzer Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-7
Option lD5, High Stability Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . l-7
Option 002, Harmonic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-7
OptionOO6,6GHzOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-7
Option 010, Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-7
Option 011, Receiver Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-7
Option 075,750 Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-8
Option lDT, Delete Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-8
Option lCM, Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles . . . . . 1-8
Option lCP, Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handies . . . . . . . l-8
Service and Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-9
Option W32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-9
Option W34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-9

2. System VeriIkation and Performance ‘lksts

System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-l
Instrument SpecBcations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System Verification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
How to ConfIrm Performance to System Specifications . . . . . 2-3
How to ConfIrm Performance to Instrument Specifications . . . 2-3
Certificate of Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Sections in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Performance Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
System Verification Cycle and Kit Re-certification . . . . . . . . 2-7
HP 8753E System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Initiaiization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Measurement Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Device Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

contmts-1
 In Case of DifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy . . . . . . . 2-18
In Case of Difficuhy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
InCaseofDifficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
3. Test Port Output Power Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
InCaseofDifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
4. Test Port Output Power Range and Linearity . . . . . . . . . 2-27
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
5.MinhnumRChannelLevel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) 2-38
Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) 2-39
Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) 2-39
Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) 2-40
Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) . 2-40
Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) . 2-41
Port 1 Noise Floor Level for 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) . . 2-41
Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) . 2-41
InCaseofDifficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
7. Test Port Input Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 1 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . 2-44
Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . 2-47
Power Meter Calibration on Port 2 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . . . 2-48
Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . 249
Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . 2-49
Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz 2-51
Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 1 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz : 1 2-52
Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . 2-53
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
8. Test Port Crosstalk 2-54
CrosstaurtoTestPort2from30d1;H;.tb3GI;z’ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2-55
Crosstalk to Test Port 1 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . . . . . 2-55
CrosstaIktoTestPortlfrom3GHzto6GHz . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Crosstalk to Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . . . . . . . . 2-56
InCaseofDifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
9. Calibration Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
First FulI 2-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Directivity (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Source Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . 2-61

Contents-2
 Transmission Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . 2-61
Reflection Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . 2-61
Load Match (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Transmission Tracking (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . 2-62
Second FuiI 2-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Load Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Directivity (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Source Match (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Reflection Tracking (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . 2-64
10. System Trace Noise (Only for Analyzers without Option 006) . 2-65
System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
System Trace Noise for A/R Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
System Trace Noise for B/R Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
In Case of DifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
11. System Trace Noise (Only for Analyzers with Option 006) . . 2-68
System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude from 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . 2-69
System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . 2-69
System Trace Noise for A/R Phase from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . . . 2-69
System Trace Noise for A/R Phase from 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . 2-70
System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude from 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . 2-70
System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . 2-70
System Trace Noise for B/R Phase from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . . . 2-70
System Trace Noise for B/R Phase from 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . 2-71
InCaseofDifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
12. Test Port Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
13. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . 2-77
Initial CalcuIations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Power Meter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Adapter Removal Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Measure Test Port 2 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . 2-85
Measure Test Port 1 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . 2-87
InCaseofDifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
14. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Test Port 2 Magnitude Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Test Port 1 Magnitude Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
15. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Test Port 2 Phase Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Test Port 1 Phase Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94

Contents-3
 In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
16. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 Analyzers
without Option 006 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
‘l&t Port Output Worst Case 2nd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Test Port Output Worst Case 3rd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Port 1 Input Worst Case 2ndHarmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
PortlInputWorstCase3rdHarmonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Port2InputWorstCase2ndHarmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Port 2 Input Worst Case 3rd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
17. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 Analyzers with
Option 006 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Test Port Output Worst Case 2nd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Test Port Output Worst Case 3rd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Port 1 Input Worst Case 2ndHarmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
PortlInputWorstCase3rdHarmonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
Port2InputWorstCase2ndHarmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
Port2InputWorstCase3rdHarmonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
18. Test Port Output Harmonics (Analyzers without Option 002) . 2-107
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108

2a. Performance ‘lkst Record

For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . 2a-1

2b. Performance ‘l&t Record

For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 30 kHz to 6 GHz . . . . 2b-1

3. Adjustments and Cmmction Constants

Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
A9 Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45) . . . . . . 3-8
Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48) . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
IF Arnphfier Correction Constants (Test 51) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) . . . 3-18
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz . . . . . . 3-20
Sampler Correction Constants Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Contents4
 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54) . . . . 3-28
Spur Search Procedure with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Spurs Search Procedure without a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55) . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56) . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
LoadingFirmware.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
LoadingFirmwareintoanExistingCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
LoadingFirmwareintoaNewCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
In Case of DifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Instruments with Option ID5 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment . . . . 3-54
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants . . 3-60
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
How to Load Sequences from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . 3-63
How to Set Up the High/Low Band Transition Adjustments . . . . 3-63
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Sequence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Sequence for the High/Low Band Transition Adjustment . . . . 3-64
Sequences for the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . 3-65
Sequences for the Fractional-N Avoidance and FM Sideband
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

4. Staxt Troubleshooting Here

Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Having Your Analyzer Serviced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Step 1. Initial Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Initiate the Analyzer Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Step 2. Operator’s Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Contents-5
 Step 3. HP-IB Systems Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
If Using a Plotter or Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
IfUsinganExternaiDiskDrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals . . . . . . . 48
Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Check the Rear Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Digital Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Observe the Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Verify IntemaI Tests Passed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Phase Lock Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Check Source Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
No Oscilloscope or Power Meter? Try the ABUS . . . . . . . . 4-15
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
ObservetheAandBInputTraces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Receiver Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Faulty Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Accessories Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

5. Power Supply Troubleshooting

Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
StartHere. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Check the Green LED and Red LED on Al5 . . . . . . . . . . 54
Check the Green LEDs on A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Measure the Post Regulator Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
If the Green LED of the Al5 Is not ON Steadily . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse . . . . . . . 5-7
IftheRedLEDoftheA15IsON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Check the A8 Post Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Verify the Al5 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Check for a Faulty Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Check the Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Inspect the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
IftheGreenLEDsoftheABarenotalION . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Remove AS, Maintain A15Wl Cable Connection . . . . . . . . 5-14
Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Contents-6
 Remove the Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Inspect the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Error Messages 5-19
Check the Fuses and Isolate .A8 . 1 : 1 . 1 1 1 : 1 : 1 1 1 : 1 5-20
Pan Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Fan Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Check the Pan Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Short ABTP3 to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Intermittent Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

6. Digital Control Troubleshooting

Digital Control Group Block Diagram . . . . . . ........ 6-2
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . ........ 6-3
CPU Troubleshooting (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 64
A9 CC Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-4
Checking A9 CPU Red LED Patterns . . . . . ........ 6-5
Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27) . . ........ 6-7
Evaluating your Display . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-7
Backlight Intensity Check . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-8
Red, Green, or Blue Pixels Specifications . . ........ 6-9
Dark Pixels Specifications . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-10
Newton’s Riis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-10
Troubleshooting a White Display . . . . . . . ........ 6-12
Troubleshooting a Black Display . . . . . . . ........ 6-12
Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems ........ 6-12
Front Panel Troubleshooting (Al, A2) . . . . . . ........ 6-13
Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset . . . . . ........ 6-13
Identify the Stuck Key . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-14
Inspect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-16
Test Using a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-16
Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . ........ 6-17
If the Fault Is Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-19
Repeat Test Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-19
HP-IB Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-19
 7. Source Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Before You Start Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
1. Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) . . . . . . . . 7-3
2. RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) . . . . . . 7-3
3. Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) 7-3
Phase Lock Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
A4 Sampler/Mixer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
A3 Source and All Phase Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Al2 Reference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Analog Bus Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Oscilloscope Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
1OOkHzPulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
PLREF Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
REFSiiAtAllTP9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
HighBandREFSii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
LowBandREFSiial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
FNLOatA12Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
4 MHz Reference Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
2ND LO Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band . . 7-21
InPhase2ndLOSignalsinLowBand . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Al2 Digital Control Siials Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
LENREFLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
LHBandLLBLines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
A13/A14 Fractional-N Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Fractional-N Check with Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Al4 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Al4 VCO Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
A14-to-Al3 Digital Control Siials Check. . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
HMBLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
A7 Pulse Generator Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . 7-32
Rechecking the A13/A14 Fractional-N . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . 7-34
All Phase Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Contents-8
 Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus . . . . . 7-38
Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Phase Lock Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Broadband Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

8. Receiver Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Receiver Failure Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
ChecktheAandBInputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Troubleshooting When AU Inputs Look Bad . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
RunIntemalTests18and17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Check 2nd LO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Checkthe4MHzREFSiiaI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Check A10 by Substitution or SiiaI Examination . . . . . . . 8-8
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good . . . . . . 8-11
Checkthe4kHzSiial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants Off . . 8-12
Check 1st I.0 Siial at Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

9. Accessories Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Inspect the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Inspect the Test Port Connectors and Calibration Devices . . . . 9-3
Inspect the Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Verify Shorts and Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

10. Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Service Key Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-l
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-l
Service Key Menus . Internal Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-2
Tests Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Test Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-5
Self Diagnose Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo.7
Test Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-7
Internal Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-7

Contents-9
 External Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
System Verification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Adjustment Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Display Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-16
Service Key Menus - Service Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Service Modes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-18
Service Modes More Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Description of the Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-22
TheMainADC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-23
The Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-23
Analog In Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-24
Analog Bus Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-26
A3 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-26
A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-33
All Phase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-34
A12 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Al4 Fractional-N (Digital) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
PEEK/POKE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Firmware Revision Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-47
HP-IB Service Mnemonic Deiinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-48
Invoking Tests Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Analog Bus Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

11. Error lkrms

Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose . . . . . . . . 11-l
FuII Two-Port Error-Correction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Error l&m Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values . . . . . . . . 11-9
Uncorrected Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Error Term Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Directivity (EDF and EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Significant System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Affected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Source Match (ESF and ESR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Significant System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
.
Affected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Contents-l 0
 Reflection Tracking (ERF’ and ERR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Significant System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Affected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Isolation (Crosstalk, EXF and EXR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Significant System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Affected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
LoadMatch(ELF’andELR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Significant System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Affected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Transmission Tracking (ETF and ETR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Significant System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Affected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

12. Theory of Operation

How the HP 8753E Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
The Built-In Synthesized Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
The Source Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
The Built-In Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
The Receiver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
The Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Required Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups . . . . . . . . 12-4
Power Supply Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Al5 PrereguIator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Line Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Preregulated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Regulated +5 V Digital Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Shutdown Indications: the Green LED and Red LED . . . . . 12-6
A8 Post Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Voltage Indications: the Green LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Shutdown Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Variable Pan Circuit and Air Flow Detector . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Display Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Probe Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Digital Control Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Al Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
A2 Front Panel Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

Contmte11
 A9 CPU/A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Main CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
MainRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Digital SiiaI Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Al8 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
A19 GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
A27 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Al6 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Source Theory Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
A14/A13 Fractional-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Al2 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
A7 Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
All Phase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
A3 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Source Super Low Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Source Low Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Source High Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Source Operation in other Modes/Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Harmonic Analysis (Option 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
External Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Tuned Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Signal Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
TheBuiIt-InTestSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
A21 andA22’IWPortCouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
A23LEDFrontPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
A24 Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
A25 Test Set Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Receiver Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
A4lA5lA6 Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
TheSamplerCircuitinHighBand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
The Sampler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band . . . . 12-29
The2ndLOSignaI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
The Mixer Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
AlODi@talIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30

Contents-12
13. Replaceable parts
Replacing an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Replaceable Part Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Major Assemblies, ‘Ibp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Major Assemblies, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Cables, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Cables, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Cables, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Cables, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Cables, Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
F’ront Panel Assembly, Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
kont Panel Assembly, Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Rear Panel Assembly, Option lD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Hardware, Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Hardware, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Hardware, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Hardware, Test Set Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
Hardware, Disk Drive Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Hardware, Memory Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
Hardware, Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
Chassis Parts, Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Chassis Parts, Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

14. Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Replacing an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Procedures described in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
LineFuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Removing the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Removing the side covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Removing the bottom cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Contents-13
 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies (Al, A2) . . . . . 14-10
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies (A18, A27) . . . . . . . . 14-12
‘Ibols Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
‘Ibois Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
‘Ibols Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
A3 Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . 1426
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
AS, AlO, All, A12, A13, Al4 Card Cage Boards . . . . . . . . . 14-30
lbois Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
A9 CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
A9BTl Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Al5 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438

Contents-14
 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
Al7 Motherboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
A19 Graphics Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
A20 Disk Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Required Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
Prehminary Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Install the replacement disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
Test the disk-eject function, and adjust if required. . . . . . . 1448
Reinstall the covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
A21, A22 Test Port Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50
A23 LED Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52
Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52
A24 Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54
A25 Test Set Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option lD5) Assembly . 14-58
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58
Bl Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462

Contents-l 5
15. Safety and Licensing
Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Shipment for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Instrument Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Safety Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Before Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements . . . . . 15-9
Compliance with German Noise Requirements . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Index

Content*16
Figures
2-l. System Verification Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-2. Connections for Measurement Calibration Standards . . . . . . 2-12
2-3. Transmission Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-4. Connections for the 20 dB Verification Device . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-5. Connections for the 50 dB Verification Device . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-6. Mismatch Device Verification Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-7. Mismatch Device Verification Setup 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-8. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy Test Setup . . 2-19
2-9. External Source Mode Frequency Range Test Setup . . . . . . 2-22
2-10. Source Output Power Accuracy Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-11. Test Port Output Power Range and Accuracy Test Setup . . . . 2-28
2-12. Minimum R Channel Level Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-13. Flexible RF Cable Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2-14. Connections for Substituting the R Sampler (A4) . . . . . . . . 2-35
2-15. Setup for Checking the R Sampler (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2-16. Source Input Noise Floor Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2-17. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 1 . . . . . . . 2-44
2-18. Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response Test Setup . . . . . . . 2-47
2-19. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 2 . . . . . . . 2-48
2-20. Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response Test Setup . . . . . . . 2-49
2-21. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 2 . . . . . . . 2-50
2-22. Setup for Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response . . . . . . . . 2-51
2-23. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 1 . . . . . . . 2-52
2-24. Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response Test Setup . . . . . . . 2-53
2-25. Test Port Crosstalk Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
2-26. HP 8753E Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
2-27. First FulI 2-Port Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2-28. Transmission Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2-29. Second FuR 2-Port Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
2-30. Transmission Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
2-31. System Trace Noise Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2-32. System Trace Noise Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Conteints-17
 2-33. Sll l-Port Cal Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2-34. Test Port 2 Input Impedance Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2-35. S22 l-Port Cal Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2-36. Test Port 1 Input Impedance Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
2-37. Power Meter Calibration for Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . 2-81
2-38. FulI 2-Port Calibration with Adapter Removal . . . . . . . . . 2-83
2-39. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Measurement . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
240. Test Port Magnitude Compression Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
2-41. Test Port Phase Compression Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
242. Test Port Output Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2-43. Receiver Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2-44. Test Port Output Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
245. Receiver Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
246. Test Port Output Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
3-l. A9 Correction Constants Switch 3-6
3-2. RF Output Correction Constants T&t’S&up’fdr ‘the HP 8753E : : 3-14
3-3. First Connections for Insertion Loss Measurement . . . . . . . 3-20
34. Second Connections for Insertion Loss Measurement . . . . . . 3-21
3-5. Connections for Sampler Correction Routine . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-6. Connections for Sampler Correction at 6 GHz . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-7. Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2 . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-8. Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2 for 6 GHz . . . . 3-25
3-9. Connections for the Second Through Cable . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-10. Setup for Cavity Oscihator Frequency Correction Constant
Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-11. Typical Display of Spurs with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-12. Typical Display of Four Spurs without a Filter . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-13. lhrget Spur Is Fourth in Display of Five Spurs . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-14. Target Spur Is Almost Invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-15. Location of the FN VCO TUNE Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-16. Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment Display . . . . . . . 346
3-17. Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3-18. Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3-19. High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3-20. High/Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3-21. High/Low Band Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3-22. Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 3-55
3-23. Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3-24. Location of All Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments . . . 3-58
3-25. Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes . . . . . . . . . 3-59
4-l. Preset Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Contents-l 8
 4-2. Troubleshooting Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-3. Al5 Prereguiator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
44. kont Panel Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-5. Equipment Setup for Source Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-6. ABUSNode 16: 1 V/GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
4-7. Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-8. Typical Measurement Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-9. HP 8753E Overall Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
5-l. Power Supply Group SimpIified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2. Location of Al5 Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3. A8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-4. Removing the Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-5. Power Supply Cable Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-6. A15Wl Plug Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-7. kont Panel Probe Power Connector Voltages . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-8. Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
6-l. Digital Control Group Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2. Switch Positions on the A9 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-3. CPU LED Window on Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-4. Backlight Intensity Check Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-5. Newtons Rings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-6. Preset Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
7-l. Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup . . . 74
7-2. Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-3. Sampler/Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram . . . . 7-7
74. Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-5. Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC
Tune Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-6. 1 V/GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL Off. . . . . . 7-11
7-7. YO- and YO+ Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PLL
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-8. Sharp 109 kHz pulses at A13TP5 (any frequency) . . . . . . . 7-16
7-9.HighBandREFSiiaI(~l6MHzCW). . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-10. REF’SiiaIatAllTP9(5MHzCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7-11. Typical F’N LO Waveform at A12Jl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-12. 4 MHz Reference SiiaI at A12TP9 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-13. 90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Siiais (116 MHz
cw). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-14. In-Phase Low Band 2nd LO SiiaIs (14 MHz CW) . . . . . . . . 7-22
7-15. L ENREP Line at A12P2-16 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-16. Complementary L HB and L LB Signals (Preset) . . . . . . . . 7-24

Contents-19
 7-17. 10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14Jl . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7-18. 25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14Jl . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7-19. 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14Jl . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-20. LC OUT Waveform at A14J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-21. Al4 Generated Digital Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7-22. H MB Signal at A14Pl-5 (Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep) . 7-31
7-23. Pulse Generator Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7-24. HighQuaiityComb’Ibothat3GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-25. Stable HI OUT SiiaI in FRACN TUNE Mode . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7-26. Typical 1st IF Waveform in FRACN TUNE/SRC TUNE Mode . . 7-35
7-27. FM Coil - Plot with 3 Point Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
8-l. Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-2. Typical Good Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-3. 4 MHz REF Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-4. Digital Data Lines Observed UsingL INTCOP as Trigger . . . . S-10
8-5. Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger . . . S-10
8-6. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-7. Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and Off . . . . . . . 8-13
9-l. Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables . . . . . . 9-5
9-2. Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short (a) and Open (b) . . . 9-7
10-l. Internal Diagnostics Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-2. A9 CPU Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-S
10-3. Service Feature Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-18
104. Analog Bus Node 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-27
10-5. AnaiogBusNode2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-28
10-6. Analog Bus Node 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-29
10-7. AnalogBusNode4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-30
10-B. Analog Bus Node 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10-9. Analog Bus Node 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-32
10-10. Analog Bus Node 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-35
10-11. Analog Bus Node 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-36
10-12. Analog Bus Node 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-37
10-13. Counter Readout Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-38
10-14. Analog Bus Node 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10-15. Analog Bus Node 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-40
10-16. Analog Bus Node 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
10-17. Analog Bus Node 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
10-18. Analog Bus Node 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
10-19. Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display . . . . . 1047
11-l. Standard Connections for Fuli Two-Port Error-Correction . . . 11-4
11-2. ‘ljpical EDF/EDR without and with Cables . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Contents-20
 11-3. Typical ESF/ESR without and with Cables . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
114. Typical ERF/ERR without and with Cables . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11-5. Typical EXFLEXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 kHz
Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11-6. Typical ELFLELR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11-7. Typical ETFLETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
12-1. Simplified Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System . . . 12-2
12-2. Power Supply Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram . . . 12-5
12-3. Digital Control Group, Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . 12-9
12-4. Low Band Operation of the Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12-5. High Band Operation of the Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12-6. Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12-7. External Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12-8. Tuned Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12-9. Simplified Block Diagram of the Built-in Test Set . . . . . . . . 12-27
12-10. Receiver Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . 12-28
13-1. Module Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Contents-21
Tables
l-l. Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l
l-2. Service Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2
l-3. Connector Care Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-6
2-l. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Calculations . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
3-l. Related Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2. PEEK/POKE Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
5-l. A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-2. Output Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-3. Recommended Order for RemovaYDiscoMection . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-4. Recommended Order for RemovaVDiscoMection . . . . . . . . 5-18
6-l. Front Panel Key Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-2. Internal Diagnostic Test with Commentary . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
7-l. Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-2. Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-3. Al2 Reference Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-4. AlX-Related Digitd Control SiiaIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-5. VCO Range Check Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7-6. A14to-A13 Digital Control Siiai Locations . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7-7. 1st IF Waveform Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-8. All Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
8-l. SiiaIs Required for A10 Assembly Operation . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-2. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Siiai Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-3. 2nd LO Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
9-l. Components Related to Specific Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . 94
10-l. Test status Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
11-l. Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
1 l-2. Uncorrected System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
12-1. Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12-2. Low Band Subsweep Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12-3. High Band Subsweep Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12-4. Mixer Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
13-1. Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Options . . . . . . 1348
14-1. Related Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462

Contents-22
 1
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
‘lhble of Service Test Equipment
‘Ihble l-l. Required ‘Idols
T-8, T-10, T-15, T-20, and T-25 TORX screwdrivers
Flat-blade screwdrivers-small, medium, and large
5/164nch open-end wrench (for SMA nuts)
2-mm extended bit allen wrench
3/16, 5/16, and 9/16-&h hex nut drivers
5/164nch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
2.5~mm hex-key driver
Non-conductive and non-ferrous adjustment tool
Needle-nose pliers
Tweezers
Antistatic work mat with wrist-strap

Service Equipment and Analyzer Options l-1

 ‘able 1-2. Service lkst Equipment
llequired Critical J&commended Use*
Equipment specmcatioM Model

Spectrum Analyzer Freq. Accuracy f7 Bz HP 86633 A, T

Spectrum Analyzer BP 8696E P

Frequency Counter Frequency: 300 kB2 - 3 GBz (0 GBz BP 6364B/SlB/62B P

for Option 006)

Synthesized Sweeper Idaxhnum spuriomr input: < -30 dBc HP 8362OA P

Residual FM: <20 kBz

OBCillosCOpe Bandwidth: 1OOMiiz any T

Accuracy: 10%

LXgital Voltmeter Besolution: 10 mV any T

lbol Kit No substitute HP part number T

0876340023

Power Meter (HP-IB) Elk’ 436Al437l433A A, P, T

Power Meter (BP-ES) Single channel, 437B emulation mode BPM-441A A, P, T

Power Sensor Frequency: 300 kI&3 Ma, 600 W 8482A A, P, T

Power Sensor (for Option 006) Frequency: 3 G*6 GBz m848lA A, P, T

Power Sensor Prequency: 303 kIh+3 GBz, 760 BPS483AOpt. BO3 A, P

Photometer ‘lbktronix 516 A

Photometer Probe lbktronlx 56603 A

hi&t Occluder lbktronlx 016030640 A

Printer HP ThhMet, DeskJet, P

LmerJet

Floppy Disk 3.6inch HF’ 02192A (box of 10) A

Mibration Kit 7 mm, 600 No substitute HP 8603lB P

Calibration Bit N-Type, 600 No substitute HP 86032B P

Calibration Bit Type-N, 760 No substitute HP 86036B P

Verification Bit 7 mm No substitute HP 8602OB P

Low Pam Filter >60 dB @ 2.06 Bz and pamband that BP P/N Q136-0198 A
includes 803 IdBz

Step Attenuator No substitute HP 8496A Opt. 001, Bl8 P

* P - Performance lb&a
A - Adjustment
T - Troubleshooting

l-2 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options

 able l-2. Service ‘l&t Equipment (2 of 3)
Eesnired Critld Eecvmmended Use*
Equipment spedficstions Model

Attenuators (tied): l&tum loss: >s2 dB APG7 20 dB (2) l-lP 8402A Opt. 020 CT

Attenuators (tied): Type-N 20 cm (2) HP 84QlA Opt. 020 P, T

Power splitter Z-Way, 500 BP 11667A P, T

MinhnumLossPad Type-N, 6OU to 76Q HP 11862B P, T A

Adapter APGI to Type-N (f) ElP 11624A A, P

AdaPt= (2) APG7 to Type-N (m) EIP 11626A A, P

Adapter APG7 to 3.6 nun (m) ElP P/N 126@1746 A, P

Adapter APG7 to 3.6 nun (f) HP P/N 1260-1747 A, P

Adapter BNC to Alligator Clip ElP P/N 8120-1292 A

Adapter APGS.6 (m) to Type-N (f) la P/N l26@1760 A, P

Adapter APGS.6 Q to Type-N Q El’F’ P/N 1260-1746 A, P

Adapter BNC (m) to Type-N (f) HF’ PIN 1260-1477 P

Adapter M-N Q to Type-N Q HP P/N 1260-0777 P

RF Cable (2 each) 24-inch, APG7 HP P/N 812Ck4770 A, P

RF Cable Bet APG7, 6ou BF’ 11867D A, P

RF+ Cable 24~inch, APG7, 6OQ (2) HF’ P/N 812G4770 P, A

RF Cable 24-inch, Type-N, 7W (2) HP P/N 8120-2408 A, P

RF Cable 24-inch, Type-N, 600 (3) BP P/N 8120-4781 A, P

RF Cable Bet ‘be-N, LOU HP 11861B P, A

HP-El Cable HP 10833A/B/t/D A

Coax Cable BNC BP P/N 8l20-1840 A

coax cable BNC (m) to BNC (m), 600 HP 106OSA A

8 P - Performance lbst9
A - mtauent
T - Troubleshooting

Service Equipment and Analyzer Options l-3

 able 1-2. Service ‘l&t Equipment (3 of 3)
pestid critical Recommended Use*
Equipment speciflcatioM Model

Antistatic wrist Btrap BP P/N 0so&1367 A, T P

Antistatic wrist strap cord HP P/N 030&0080 A, T P

Gtatic-control lbble Mat and HP P/N 03oo-o707 A, T P

Earth Ground Wire

Non-Met&c Adjustment lbol HPP/N8830-0024 A

BNC Alligator Clip Adapter BF’ P/N 8120-1292 A

BNGto-BNC Cable HP P/N 81213l&IO A

8 P - Performance lb&s
A - A&ustment
T - Troubleshooting

14 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options

Principles of Microwave Connector Care
Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate,
repeatable measurements.
Refer to the calibration kit documentation for connector care information.
Prior to making connections to the network analyzer, carefully review the
information about inspecting, cleaning, and gaging connectors.
Having good connector care and connection techniques extends the life of these
devices. In addition, you obtain the most accurate measurements.
This type of information is typically located in Chapter 3 of the calibration kit
manuals
For additional connector care instruction, contact your local Hewlett-Packard
Sales and Service Office about course numbers HP 8505OA + 24A and
HP 8505OA + 24D.
See the following table for quick reference tips about connector care.

Service Equipment and Analyzer Options l-5

 ‘Ihble 1-3. Connector Care Quick Reference
HandUng and Storage
Do Do Not
Keep connectors clean Touch mating-plane surfaces
Extend sleeve or connector nut Set connectors contact-end down
Use plastic end-caps during storage

vit3uaI Inspection
Do I Do Not
Inspect all connectors carefully Use a damaged connector-ever
Look for metal particles, scratches, and dents

connector CI-
Do Do Not
‘lYy compressed air first Use any abrasives
Use isopropyl alcohol Get liquid into plastic support beads
Clean connector threads

Gaging Connectors
Do Do Not
Clean and zero the gage before use Use an out-of-spec connector
Use the correct gage type
Use correct end of calibration block
Gage all connectora before first ufx

Making
conueetions I
Do Do Not
Align connectors carefully Apply bending force to connection
Make preliminary connection lightly Over tighten preliminary connection
Turn only the connector nut Twifrt or screw any connection
Use a torque wrench for final connect Tighten past torque wrench ‘break” point

l-6 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options

Analyzer Options Available

Option lD5, High Stability Frequency Reference

This option offers f0.05 ppm temperature stability from 0 to 60° C
(referenced to 25O C).

Option 002, Harmonic Mode

This option provides measurement of second or third harmonics of the test
device’s fundamental output signal. Frequency and power sweep are supported
in this mode. Harmonic frequencies can be measured up to the maxinuun
frequency of the receiver. However, the fundamental frequency may not be
lower than 16 MHz.

Option 006, 6 GHz Operation

This option extends the maximurn source and receiver frequency of the analyzer
to 6 GHz.

Option 010, Time Domain

This option displays the time domain response of a network by computing
the inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain response. It shows
the response of a test device as a function of time or distance. Displaying the
reflection coefficient of a network versus time determines the magnitude and
location of each discontinuity. Displaying the transmission coefficient of a
network versus time determines the characteristics of individual transmission
paths Time domain operation retains all accuracy inherent with the correction
that is active in of such devices as SAW filters, SAW delay lines, RF cables, and
RF antennas.

Option 011, Receiver Configuration

This option allows front panel access to the R, A, and B samplers and receivers.
The transfer switch, couplers, and bias tees have been removed. Therefore,
external accessories are required to make most measurements

Service Equipment and Analyzer Options l-7

Option 075, 7563 Impedance
This option offers 75 ohm impedance bridges with type-N test port connectors.

Option lDT, Delete Display

This option removes the built-in flat panel display, allowing measurement results
to be viewed with an external VGA monitor only.

Option EM, Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles

This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary
hardware to mount the instrument, with handles detached, in an equipment
rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches) horizontal spacing.

Option lCP, Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles

This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary
hardware to mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack
with 482.6 mm (19 inches) spacing.

l-8 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options

Service and Support Options
The analyzer automatically includes a three-year warranty for repair at a
Hewlett-Packard facility.
The following service and support options are also available. Contact your local
sales or service office.

Option W32
This option provides three years of return to HP calibration service.

Option W34
This option provides three years of return to HP Standards Compliant
Calibration.

Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1-9

 2
System Verification and
Performance lksts
The performance of the HP 8753E network analyzer is specified in two ways:

Specifies warranted performance of the wu?asurm system when making

error-corrected S-parameter measurements. The measurement system
includes the analyzer, test cables, and calibration kit. The System Verification
Procedure is used to conti performance of the measurement system to the
System Specilications.

Specifies the network analyzer’s output and input behavior and its
uncorrected measurement port characteristics. Performance tests are used to
confirm performance of the analyzer to the Instrument Specifications.

System Specifications
System Specifications, also called Measurement Port Specifications, are
described in Chapter 7 of the HP 8753E User’s cuides. They specify warranted
performance of the entire TTMXISU~ tqpctem when making error-corrected
S-parameter measurements The measurement system includes the analyzer, test
cables, and calibration kit. System Specifications are expressed in two ways:
n graphs of measurement uncertainty versus reflection and transmission
coefficients
n residual errors of the measurement system-the corrected Measurement Port
Characteristics
System Specifications, conhrmed by the System Verification Procedure, are
applicable when the measurement system is used to make error-corrected
S-parameter measurements

System Verification and 2-l

Performance Tests
Instrument Specifications
Instrument specifications comprise the following sections and tables in Chapter
7, “Specifications and Measurement Uncertainties, n of the HP 8753E User’s
Guide:
w all specifications in the section “Instrument Specifications”
w ‘lhble 7-3 “Measurement Port Characteristics (uncorrected) for HP 8753E (5OQ)
with 7-mm ‘l&t Ports”
w ‘lhble 7-7 “Measurement Port Characteristics (uncorrected) for HP 8753E (75Q)
with 7-mm Test Ports”
These specifications apply when the analyzer is used to make measurements
other than error-corrected S-parameter measurements An example would be
the measurement of amplifier gain compression. In such cases, the analyzer’s
output and input behavior-such as source power, receiver accuracy, and
receiver linearity-are important and are covered by Instrument Specifications.

System Veriffication Procedure

The System Verillcation Procedure tests the network analyzer measurement
system, as dellned above, against the System Specillcations. If conllrmation
is successful, the measurement system is capable of making S-parameter
measurements to the accuracy specified by the graphs of measurement
uncertainty. An outline of the System Verification Procedure follows:
w The measurement system is calibrated with the calibration kit to be used
for future measurements The measurement system’s systematic errors are
determined by this procedure.
n The S-parameters of verification-kit test-devices are measured with error
correction applied.
n These measurements are compared to measurement data stored on a unique,
serial-numbered data disk included with the verification kit.
n The measurement system passes the System Verification Procedure if the
measurements of the test devices differ from the measurement data on
the data disk by less than specified test limits. The test limits account for
the specified accuracy of the measurement system and the measurement
uncertainties attributed to the stored data for the test devices.

2-2 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Note Calibration kits are different from verification kits. Culibrution
kits are used to determine the systematic errors of a network
analyzer measurement system. Vmttin kits are used to
conErm system speciEcations and are not used to generate
error-correction. For example, the HP 85031B is a 7-mm
calibration kit, but the HP 85029B is a 7-mm verification kit.

Performance Wsts
Performance tests are used to confirm analyzer performance against the
Instrument SpeciEcations. If conErmation is successful, the analyzer meets the
Instrument SpeciEcations as deEned above. If the calibration kit to be used for
measurements is also certiEed, successful completion of the Performance Tests
also ensures that the network analyzer measurement system meets the System
Specifications.

How to Confirm Performance to System Specifications

w Complete the System VeriEcation Procedure in this chapter using a certiEed
verification kit, or
n Complete all of the performance tests and certify (or re-certify) the
calibration kit to be used for future measurements. This alternative verifies
both the System Specifications and the Instrument Specifications for the
analyzer.

How to Confirm Performance to Instrument Specifkations

n Complete the Performance Tests

System Verification and 2-3

Performance Teete
Certificate of Calibration
Hewlett-Packard will issue a Certificate of Calibration for the product upon
successful completion of System VeriEcation or completion of the Performance
Tests. The Certificate of Calibration will include a S@~T?Z Attachment if the
System Verification Procedure is used to confirm the System SpeciEcations.
If the Performance Tests are used to conErm Instrument Specifications, the
CertiEcate of Calibration will not include a System Attachment. The equipment
and measurement standards used for the tests must be certiEed and must be
traceable to recognized standards.

Note If you have a measurement application that does not use all of
the measurement capabilities of the analyzer, you may ask your
local Hewlett-Packard Customer Service Center to verify only a
subset of the speciEcations. However, this creates the possibility
of making inaccurate measurements if you then use the analyzer
in an application requiring additional capabilities.

24 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Sections in This Chapter
n System Verification
n Performance lksts
1. Test Port Output F’requency Range and Accuracy
2. External Source Mode kequency Range
3. Test Port Output Power Accuracy
4. Test Port Output Power Range and Linearity
5. Minimum R Channel Level
6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level
7. Test Port Input Frequency Response
8. Test Port Crosstalk
9. Calibration Coefficients
10. System Trace Noise (only for Analyzers without Option 006)
11. System Trace Noise (only for Analyzers with Option 006)
12. Test Port Input Impedance
13. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
14. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression
15. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression
16. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 Analyzers without Option
006 only)
17. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 Analyzers with Option 006
OdY)
18. Test Port Output Harmonics (Analyzers without Option 002)

System Verification and 2-5

Performance Tests
Performance ‘I&t Record
Find and use the appropriate “Performance ‘I&t Record” in the following
subchapters:
n Performance Test Record for 30 kHz to 3 GHz
n Performance Test Record for 30 kHz to 6 GHz

2-6 System Verification and

Performance Tests
System Verification Cycle and Kit Re-certification
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you verify your network analyzer
measurement system every six months. Hewlett-Packard also suggests that
you get your verification kit re-certified annually. Refer to HP 85029B r-mm
V’ttin Kit Operating and Seruice Manual for more information.

Note The system veriEcation procedures can also apply to analyzers

with Option 075 (75 ohm analyzers) if minimum loss pads and
type-N (m) to APC-7 adapters are used.

Check to see how the veriEcation kit floppy disk is labeled:

n If your veriEcation disk is labeled HP 8753D Verification Data Disk, or
HP 8753D& HP 8753EVerificationDataDisk, you may proceed with the
system verification.
n If your veriEcation disk is not labeled as indicated above, you may send
your HP 85029B 7-mm veriEcation kit to the nearest service center for
recertiEcation, which includes a data disk that you can use with the
HP 8753E.

System Verification and 2-7

PerformanceTeete
HP 8753E System Verification
Equipment Required
Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B
Verification Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 85029B
Test Port Extension Cable Set, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11857D
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP ThinkJet/DeskJet/LaserJet
Additional Equipment Required for Option 075 Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pad (2), 50 Q to 75 Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B
Adapter (2), APC-7 to Type-N (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11525A
Anulgzer warmup time: 1 hour
This system veriEcation consists of three separate procedures:
1. Initialization
2. Measurement Calibration
3. Device Verification

2-9 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Initialization
1. Clear all internal memory.

Caution This will erase all instrument states that may be stored in
internal memory.
Perform the following steps to save any instrument states that
are stored in internal memory to a floppy disk.

d. If the instrument state file was not saved to disk with the
same name that it had while in internal memory, you may
wish to rename the tie.
Press ~~.~~:~~~~~~~~~~ .~~~~~~~~ enter the de&e-j
./ .:. . :;. . . y
name, and press ~##,3@8J.
_.. . . . . . . . . . . .
e. Repeat steps a through d for each instrument state that you
wish to save.

To
,. _ _ ,. _clear alliM!rnal memory, press (s) ,~~~~~.~~~~ . _. ._. . 3JSlJKJ~j3@
. _ -..-.._- . _ - ._. . . . . . . .
.:jgj##$:
_. .__.. . . . - . _. --lJmm@ . . . _.. LPreset).
. _._. . - . .-.......

System Verification and 2-9

Performance Tests
 2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-l. Let the analyzer warm up
for one hour

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

Figure 2-1. System Verification ‘l&t Setup

3. While the equipment is warming up, review the “Connector Care Quick
Reference” information in Chapter 1. Good connections and clean,
undamaged connectors are criticaI for accurate measurement results.
4. Insert the verification kit disk into the analyzer disk drive.
5.

6.

Note If you switch on the record function, you CAiWOT switch it off
during the verification procedure.

7. Position the paper in the printer so that priuting starts at the top of the
page.

2-10 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 8. If you have difficulty with the printer:
n If the interface on your printer is HP-IB, verify that the printer address is
set to 1 (or change the setting in the analyzer to match the printer).
n If the interface on your printer is serial or parallel, be sure that you
selected the printer port and the printer type correctly (refer to the
HP 8753ENetuwrk Anulgzer User’s Guide for more information on how to
perform these tasks).

10. The analyzer displays Sys Ver Init DONE; the initialization procedure is
complete.

Caution Do NOT press (Preset or recall another instrument state. You

must use the instrument state that you loaded during the
initialization procedure.

Measurement Calibration

14. Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination (supplied in the
calibration kit) to reference test port 1, as shown in Figure 2-2.

System Verifcationand 2-11

PerformanceTests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

REFERENCE TEST - REFERENCE TEST

PORT 1 PORT 2

sg62e

Figure 2-2. Connections for Measurement Calibration Standards

16. When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the “short” end
of the open/short combination to reference test port 1.

18. When the analyzer hnishes measuring the standard, connect the 50 ohm
termination (supplied in the calibration kit) to reference test port 1.
19. Pres ~~~~~~~~
* .. ... .
20. When the analyzer 6nishes measuring the standard, connect the “open” end
of the open/short combination to reference test port 2.
21. mess ~~~~~~~~~.
-.._. . . . " . :.-: ~.~.~.~.~.~.~. -~. ~.~. ~:.~.~: ~
22. When the analyzer hnishes measuring the standard, connect the “short” end
of the open/short combination to reference test port 2.

24. When the analyzer Gnashes measuring the standard, connect the 50 ohm
termination to reference test port 2.
25. press ~~~~~~~~
~.:. ~.: . ~.~:. :.~.: ~~.“‘-~ ..:.,_:. ~.~:. ~.~.: .: ~~~.~.: .: .~ -
2-l 2 System Verification and
Performance Tests
 The analyzer briefly displays COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS.
27. Connect the test port cables as shown Figure 2-3.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

- P ORT 1

H P 11857D
EXTENSION CABLE SET

Figure 2-3. Transmission Calibration Setup

28. Press .~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~:.

.,.
..~......................-..........~~~~~ ii-.:::..................~.......... ._....A.....~.c.~.~.~.. ......il_.^i...ii ..__G_ ..:.... A u ......../....i...........~...~......~ ..___............

29. mess ~,~~~~~~~~~;,.~~.

\. ,.,.,..:::, .,. ; .,. _

_i .._...............__._.I.~...~.... :::.L..iL.: /:...

3(-J. Press (-, ~~~~~~~~ , , g,:qs= ~~~~-,:,~~~~. ~~;...y:c+y < . ;. , , , ; ,;. . . . :. .: .: .: ~~~ ~~~~~~~~, to
e i. . . . s. . . .2. . .A. . . . . . . . . . . ._. _. _.. . . ._.__.. . .~. . . . . ~. i.vLv. . ~..._..~L.
. . . .~. . . . .i .A. . . .L..A~.. . . .,. . . . . . . . . . . . . .-. . . ~. . . . .-. ~.i.: :.i
save the calibration into the analyzer internal memory.
,,,.,.,~,~,., :...::.:.y ..:.:.: . . . ..y .) ...

3 1. men the a&rzr mhes saving the instrument state, prt?SS -@%@j@; ~. . . . <..;.:., . s . _i. .~. . . .~@gBg . . . i ... a. . . >A.
~~~~~~~~~.
,. .,i. . . . i.: i. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..__.._......- . _._. . ._. . .

System Verification and 2-13

Performance Tests
Device Verification

33. At the prompt, connect the 20 dI3 attenuator (supplied in the verification
kit) as shown in Figure 2-4.

,.
If you switched OFF the record function, you have to press ~~~~~
. , ,. . ,. . . . . . . . . .
after each S-parameter measurement.
If you switched ON the record function, the analyzer measures all
S-parameters (magnitude and phase) without pausing. Also, the analyzer
only displays and prints the PASS/FAIL information for the S-parameter
measurements that are valid for system verification.

.HP
. . R753F
-. ---
NETWORK ANALYZER

Figure 2-4. Connections for the 20 dB Verification Device

35. When the analyzer fmishes all the measurements, connect the 50 dB
attenuator (supplied in the vetication kit), as shown in F’igure 2-5.

2-14 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

“ERlFlCATlON D E V I C E
sg65e

Figure 2-5. Connections for the 50 dB Verifkation Device

37. When all measurements are complete, replace the verification device with
the verification mismatch, as shown in Figure 2-6. Be sure that you connect
Port A of the verification mismatch to reference test port 1.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

T2

sg66e

Figure 2-6. Mismatch Device Verification Setup 1

39. When the analyzer finishes all the measurements, connect the mismatch
verification device, as shown in Figure 2-7. Notice that Port B is now
connected to reference test port 1.

Syetem Verification and 2-l 5

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

PORT 2

7
PORT 1

(rORT
VERIFICATION MISMATCH
sg67e

Figure 2-7. Mismatch Device Verification Setup 2

:. :. ;:<-;---.“i” .=:..:A$ .:,.i., .: : : : _
40. press ‘~~ :~~~~ 131) (xl) ~~~~~ ~@J@$$~~
. . _. . - --.. -: . .._.._.......
., ., . . . . . . .-. . ..-...._.. : : L.:.i .A . .:.: .:. . . ._-. :. . . . A.:. . *
41. You have completed the system verification procedure when the analyzer
displays Ver Def 4 DONE.

2-16 System Verification and

Performance Tests
In Case of Difiblty
1. Inspect alI connections.

Caution Do NOT disconnect the cables from the analyzer test ports.
Doing so WILL lNkYLU?B the calibration that you have done
earlier.

2.
Press [EJ ‘Save/Recall, +&g@$$g&K. ~~~~~~~~~ f&@g. using the

_. - i: _... >u i - __,..... ..:.:.: .._ .: ..:. :...i.. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,...,.........................._... .: .._... .::::..,...... A......::::::: .:: -.:

front panel knob, highlight the,,title

. . . ,.; ,. ,. ,. : ;: of the full 2-Port calibration that you
have done earlier, then press ~~~~~~~~.
3. Repeat the “Device Verification” procedure.
4. If the analyzer still fails the test, check the measurement calibration as
follows:
a. Press [preset).

d. Connect the short to reference test port 1.

g. Check that the trace response is 0.00 f 0.05 dB.

h. Disconnect the short and connect it to reference test port 2.

j. Check that the trace response is 0.00 f 0.05 dD.

k. If any of the trace responses are out of the specified limits, repeat the
“Measurement Calibration” and “Device Verification” procedures.
5. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here,” for more troubleshooting
information.

System Verification and 2-17

PerfonnanEe Tests
1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy
Specifications

Frequency Range Frequency Accuracy1

30 kHz to 3 GHz f10 ppm
1 3GHzto6GHz2 1 &lo ppm I
1 At 25O C f5* C.
2 Only for analyzers with Option 006 - 30 kHz to
6GIIzrange.

Required Equipment
kequency Counter (30 kHz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5350B/51B/52B
F’requency Counter (500 MHz to 6 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 5350B/51B/52B
Cable, 500 Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 81204781
Adapter, APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1745
Adapter, APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 11524A
Adapter, Type-N (f) to BNC (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1477
Additional equipment needed for an HP 8753E with Option 075
Minimum Loss Pad, 5OQ to 75Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B
Aruzlgzer warmup time: 30 minutes
Perform this test to verify the frequency accuracy of the HP 8753E over its
entire operating frequency range.

2-l 8 Syetem Veriiication and

Performance Tests
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-8.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075 FREQUENCY COUNTER

ADAPTER
PORT1 * w-3.5 ( f )
I TO NPE-N(f)

P
5on 17s
MIMIMUM
LOSS PAD

5Ofl T Y P E - N C A B L E A S S E M B L Y

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER

ADAPTER
APC-3.5 ( f )
TO TYPE-N(f)

* D I R E C T (:ONNECTlON ig68e

Figure 2-8. lkst Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy ‘I&t Setup

2. Press (IFKGQ [Menu) t%Xmi$.

3. Press 13oJ Ck/m) and write the frequency counter reading on the “Performance
Test Record. n
4. Repeat step 3 for each instrument frequency listed in the “Performance Test
Record. n

System Verification and 2-19

Performance Tests
In Case of Difljiculty
1. If any measured frequency is close to the specification limits, check the time
base accuracy of the counter used.
2. If the analyzer fails by a significant margin at all frequencies (especially if
the deviation increases with frequency), the master time base probably needs
adjustment. In this case, refer to the “Frequency Accuracy Adjustment”
procedure, located in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants. ’
The “Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment” also affects frequency
accuracy.
3. Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” for related troubleshooting
information.

2-20 System Veriication and

Performance Tests
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range
Specifications

Frequency Range
300 kHz to 3 GHz
300 kHz to 6 GHzl

1 Only for analyzers with

OptionOO6- 3OkHzt.o
6GHzrange.

Equipment Required
External Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 83620A
Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Adapter, APC-3.5 (f) to APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1747
Adapter, APC-3.5 (m) to APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1746
Aruzlgzer warmup time: 30 minutes
Perform this test to verify that the analyzer’s reference channel, input R, is
capable of phase locking to an external CW signal.
1. On the external source, press [Presets Icw) LloJ (j-J [POWER LEVEL) m
12o)(i~.

2. Connect the equipment as shown in F’igure 2-9.

System Verification and 2.21

PerformanceTests
 H P 83620A
SYNTHESIZER

r ADAPTER
R CHANNEL IN *

APC-3.5 (m)
T O WC-7

P \ CABLE APCG7 24 INCH J

* DRECT CONNECTION
sgE121e

Figure 2-9. Exterml Source Mode Frequency Range lkst Setup

5. Check to see if the analyzer is phase locking to the external CW signal:

H If the analyzer displays any phase lock error messages, write “unlock” in
the “Performance Test Record” for the set CW signal.
w If the analyzer does not display any phase lock error messages, write “lock”
in the “Performance Test Record” for the set CW signal.
6. On the external source, press m L20) [j].
7. On the analyzer, press I2oJ m.
8. Repeat step 5 through 7 for the other external source CW frequencies listed
in the “Performance Test Record.”

2-22 System Verification and

Periormance Tests
In Case of Difkulty
If the analyzer displayed any phase lock error messages:
1. Be sure the external source power is set within 0 to -25 dBm.
2. Make sure the analyzer’s “Ext Source Auto” feature is selected. In addition,
verify that the analyzer is set to measure its input channel R.
3. Verify that all connections are tight.

System Veriication and 2-23

Performance Tests
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter. For more information of how to perform
this task, refer to the power meter operating manual.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-10.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

H P 43BA

A D A P T E R APC-7

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

POWER SENSOR

Figure 2-10. Source Output Power Accuracy lkst Setup

System Verification and 2-25

Performance Tests
3. Press-.

Note The factory preset test port power is 0 dBm.

.; . . . . . .
4. Press m &IE;~.‘@@Z~~j (300_) (i$J. Set the calibration factor on the power
meter for this CW frequency.
5. Write the power meter reading on the “Performance Test Record.”
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each CW frequency listed in the “Performance Test
Record.” For analyzers with Option 006, use the HP 8481A power sensor for
all frequencies above 3 GHz.

In Case of Difficulty
. . . .~ .~. :.:
1. Be sure the source power is switched on. Press IMenu) .:$&@$. A . v s . iii . A . : A%..; Check
the ~~~~~ softkey; “on” should be highlighted. Otherwise, press
; :. ,. , < <~j~ ~ y ;~,~,: :~.~~.$.:.:>:. :.2:.~.:.:;~.::~:.~.:.:.:+s,.~.~;.i_,:..:,~. ~~;,. ,. :,. ,. ,. a.>, . ./
~~~~~~
J#2_ii.:,_. . . . . . . i. . ._..._i to switch on the source power.
2. Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting
information.

2.26 System Verification and

Performance Tests
4. Test Port Output Power Range and Linearity
Specifications

Power Range 1 Power Level Linearity1 1

1 -15 to +5 dBm I f0.2 dB
1+5to +10dBm21 f0.5 dB I
+5 to +8 dBm3 I f0.5 dB

1 Relative to 0 dBm output level.

2 Applies to instruments not using Option 076.
3 For Option 075 only.

Required Equipment
Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 437B/438A
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8482A
Adapter, APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A
Additional Required Equipment for Analyzers with Option 006
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A
Additional Required Equipment for Analyzers with Option 075
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8483A Option HO3
Analgzm warmup time: 1 hour
Perform this test to verify the analyzer’s test port output power range and
power level linearity at selected CW frequencies.

System Verification and 2-27

Performance Tests
 1. Zero and calibrate the power meter. Refer to the power meter operating
manual for more information on how to do this task.
2. On the network analyzer, press (GJ LG_) ~~.~~~~~~ Isdo_) Lk/m. Set the
power meter calibration factor for this CW frequency.
3. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-11.

H P 0753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

H P 438A

PORT 2 P

A D A P T E R APC-7 t o N ( F )

H P 8481A H P 8482A
POWER SENSOR POWER SENSOR
3 - 6GHz 30KHz - 3GHz

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

H P 438A

POWER SENSOR

/
* DIRECT CONNECTION sg61 l e

Figure 2-11. ‘l&t Port Output Power Range and Accuracy ‘Ikst Setup

2-28 System Verification and

Performance Tests
4. On the HP 438A, press (REL). This sets the current power level for relative
power measurement.
. . _... . .
5. h the network maJyzer, press LMenu_] @@& ~~~~~~~~~~~ 1--15) a).
. . . . . . . . . . . ..~...~ii.: . ... . . . . . . . . .: : /i............i .. . . . .%___.__.......
6. Write the power meter reading in the “Results Measured” column on the
U Performance Test Record. ’
7. Calculate the difference between the analyzer test port power (which
appears on the analyzer’s display) and the power meter reading. Write the
result in the “Power Level Linearity” column on the “Performance Test
Record. n
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other power levels listed in the
“Performance Test Record. n
9. After all required power levels have been measured, press @ Lxl) to reset
power to 0 dRm.
. . . /. .; . :. /;.
10. Press ~~~~~~:.._......_.._.__-_.. . . . @a.
11. Set the power meter calibration factor for this CW frequency and press m
to set the reference at this new frequency.
12. Press m g&$&&Y
_.. . . . . L-15] Lxl).
13. Write the power meter reading in the “Results Measured” column on the
“Performance Test Record. n
14. Calculate the difference between the analyzer test port power and the
power meter reading. Write the result in the “Power Level Linearity”
column of the “Performance Test Record.”
15. Repeat steps 11 through 13 for the other power levels listed in the
“Performance Test Record. n
16. Repeat steps 9 through 13 for 6 GHz using 8481A sensor.

In Case of Dii3culty
1. Ensure that the power meter and power sensor(s) are operating to
specifications. Be sure you set the power meter calibration factor for the CW
frequency that you are testing.

Syctem Verification and 2-29

Performance Tests
2. Verify that there is power coming out of the analyzer’s test port 1. Be sure
you did not accidentally switch off theCCCCmaIyzer’s internal source. If you did
so, press 1Menu) &j#j@
_.. . . - - ~~~~~~~.~~
-_..- .._........_....... . u; .,. . . . .‘$Ep
_ - -.. :.
3. Repeat this performance test.

2-30 System Verification and

Performance Tests
5. Minimum R Channel Level
Specifications

1 Frequency Range 1 Minimum B Channel Level 1

1300kHzto3GHz 1 c-35 dBm I
13GHzto6GHzl 1 c-30 dBm I
1OnlyforanalyzerswithOption006-3OkHzto6GHz
range.

Required Equipment for 500 Analyzers

Adapter, APC-3.5 (m) to APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1746
Cable, APC-7 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Required Equipment for 75 ohm Analyzers (Option 075)
Minimum Loss Pad, 5OQ to 75Q . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B
Cable, 508 Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 8120-4781
Adapter, APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1750
An&m warmup time: 1 hour
Perform this test to determine the minimum R channel input power level at
which phase lock can be accomplished.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-12.

System Verification and 2-31

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
NETWORK ANALYZER

I Q
T m , ‘I R C H A N N E L R (
c PORT1 PORT2

ADAPTER 5on /7x-l

APC-3.5 ( m ) MINIMUM
T O APCG7 LOSS PAD

C A B L E APC-7 2 4 I N C H

sg612e
* DIRECT CONNECTION

Figure 2-12. Minimum I1 Channel Level ‘I&t Setup

4* mess CSca,e Ref, ~~~~“~~~~~~ 1-701 Ixil.

5. Press Ihnenul ~~~~~~ ~ ~.

-.-...-...._......... L~.:. <. AW.:>
. . A., ., . . . .;,.; ., ., . . : . :. .:
6- Press LMenu) !E&&fg @TJ @.
The analyzer displays the message CAUTION : NO IF FOUND : CHECK R INPUT
LEVEL.
7. Press @J to increase the test port power by 1 dBm.
8. If the analyzer displays a phase lock error message, continue increasing the
test port power until phase lock is achieved.
9. Write the test port power, that is displayed on the analyzer, on the
“Performance Test Record. n
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for the other CW frequencies listed in the
“Performance Test Record. n

2-32 Syetem Verification and

Performance Teete
In Case of DilEculty
1. Check the flexible RF cable (W8, as shown in Figure 2-13) between the R
sampler assembly (A4) and the All phase lock assembly. Make sure it is
connected between AllJl (PL IF IN) and 1st IF Out.

Caution a0 not push cable W8 down next to the All phase lock
assembly.

System Verification and 233

Performance Tests
 A10 A8 All A12

Figure 2-13. Flexible RF Cable Location

2-34 System Verification and

Performance Tests
2. Using an ohmmeter, verify that the RF cable is not open. In addition,
examine both the cable connectors-measure the resistance between the
cable center pin and the cable connector and make sure it is not close to
zero.
3. Check the R sampler by substituting it with the B sampler (A6).
a. Move cable W8 to the B sampler (A6), as shown in Figure 2-14.

All

sg6115-z

Figure 2-14. Connections for Substituting the B !kmpler (A4)

4. Connect the equipment as shown in F’igure 2-15.

System Verification and 2-35

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

- 24-INCH CABI

Figure 2-15. Setup for Checking the B Sampler (A4)

5. Repeat the test, but select the B sampler (A6) by pressing m

~:~~~~~~~~: ‘B h step 2. Use the following specific&ions:
..__ ._...____i.,., _ _. . . . . . . . . . . . _
300 kHz to 3 GHz c-27 dBm
3 GHz to 6 GHz c-22 dBm
6. If the analyzer fails the test, replace the All assembly.
7. Verify that the high/Iow band adjustments are still within specifications For
more information on how to perform this task, refer to the “High/Low Band
Transition Adjustment” located in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction
Constants n
8. Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting
information.

2-36 System Verification and

Performance Tests
6. ‘Jkst Port Input Noise Floor Level
Specifkations

Frequency Range ‘l&t Port IF Bandwidth Average

Noise Level
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz Port 1 3kHz - 8 2 dBm
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz Port 1 10 Hz -102 dBm
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz Port 2 3 kHz - 8 2 dBm
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz Port 2 10 Hz -102 dBm
3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz’ Port 1 3kHz - 7 7 dBm
3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHzl Port 1 10 Hz - 9 7 dBm
3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHzl Port 2 3kHz - 7 7 dBm
3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz’ Port 2 10 Hz - 9 7 dBm
1 Only for analyzer with Option 006 - 30 kHz to 6 GHz range.

Equipment Required for 508 Analyzers

Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B
Equipment Required for 75 ohm Analyzers
Calibration Kit, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85036B
An&zerwarmuptime:1 hour
Perform this test to determine the HP 8753E port 1 and port 2 noise floor levels
at the input test ports

Syctem Verification and 2-37

Performance Tests
Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
(lFHw = 3kHz)
1. Connect the equipment as shown in F’igure 2-16.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

50R TERM,NAmJNS
sg614e

Figure 2-16. Source Input Noise Floor ‘l&t Setup

5. When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value (which
appears on the analyzer display).
6. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using
this equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 * [log&near magnitude mecrn value)]

Note Notice that the mean value that is displayed on the analyzer is
in ~Units So, for example, if the displayed value is 62 /rU, the
value that you would put in the equation is (62 x 106).

7. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record.”

2-36 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
(IF BW = 10 Hz)

10. When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
11. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using
this equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 * [lOgIO(Zinear magnitude mean value)]
12. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record.”

Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz

(IFBW = 1OHz)

15. When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
16. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using
this equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 * [log,,(Zinear magnitude mean value)]
17. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record.”

System Verification and 2-39

Performance Tests
Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
(IFm = 3kHz)
i. .;-... .:‘<~$
18- Press @ 8~~~~ @ Ck/m) to change the IF bandwidth to 3 kHz.

20. When the analyzer tlnishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
21. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using
this equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 * [log&inear magnitude mean v&e)]
22. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record. n
23. This completes the “Test Port Input Noise Floor Level” procedure if your
analyzer does not have Option 006. Otherwise continue with the next
section.

Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz)

24. Pressm@m[Stop-l@&J.
............................ ............
25. Ress m .~~~~~~~~,
. . s...i..i . ., . . . . . . . : . ~~~~~.
. . . . . 4.. .s. . .. . . .i,i__i..i ,. . ,. . . . . . . . . . ~. . . . ~. ~.~.
26. When the analyzer Rnishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
27. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using
this equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 * [log,,-,(Zineclr magnitude mean value)]
28. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record.”

240 System Verification and

Performance. Tests
Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz)
29. Press &) $@@@
._ (iiJ [xl] to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz.
/::::::.. . . . i. . .: .I. . /
30. Press IMenu) .;~~.~~~
.;... . . . . __.. . . . _. . . . . . . . . . .. . .A. . Li. . . ... . . . . . . . . %YXgm. ..--..- i...ii
31. When the analyzer hnishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
32. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using
this equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 * [log,o(Zinear magnitude mean value)]
33. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record.”

Port 1 Noise Floor Level for 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz)

. . . . . . . . / ..., ., .,. . . . . . ;. ,. ,. . . . . . . . . . .,.. . . . . ,. . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . I

35. press (Menu) .~~~~~~~ , ;,_,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ei_i. .~.~__._.,._.,._. ~~~~~~.
.~
36. When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
37. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using
this equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 * [logI,,(Zinear magnitude mean value)]
38. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record.”

Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz)

. ,. :.s,,,
39. press &) &j$+~~:>
- . _ --. @ m.
.................................................
40. Press LMenu) ~~.~~~~~~~~ . . . . . . . . . . . . .m
. . .aw.. ; . ; . . . . . . . . .:.:.: . :.L ~~~.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :. . :. . . . .2 . _.:.::
41. When the analyzer hnishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
42. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using
this equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 * [lo&-,(Zinear magnitude mean value)]
43. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record.”

System Verification and 241

Performance Tests
ln Case of Difficulty
1. Perform the “ADC Linearity Correction Constants (Test 52),’ located in
Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants n
2. Repeat the “Test Port Input Noise Floor Level” procedure.
3. Suspect the A10 Digital IF assembly if the analyzer fails both test port input
noise floor tests.
4. Refer to Chapter 8, “Receiver Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting
information.

242 System Verification and

Performance Tests
7. Test Port Input Frequency Response
Specifications

Frequency Range lkst Port Input

Frequency Response
300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 1 fl dH
300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 2 fl dB
3 GHz to 6 GHzl Port 1 52 dE3

1 3GHz to 6 GHzl 1 Port2 1

1 Only for analyzers with Option 006 - 30 kHz to 6 GHz range.

Equipment Required for 5OQ Analyzers

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 436AI437W438A
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8482A
Cable, APC-7 24inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 81204779
Adapter, APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 11524A
Additional Equipment Required for Analyzers with Option 006
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A
Equipment Required for 75Q Analyzers
Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 436AJ437Bl438A
Power Sensor ..*................................... . . . . . . . HP8483AOptionH03
Cable, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408
Anulgger warmup time: 1 hour
Perform this test to examine the vector sum of all test setup error vectors in
both magnitude and phase change as a function of frequency.

System Verification and 243

Performance Tests
Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 1 from 300 KHz to 3 GHz
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-17.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075
/’

Figure 2-17. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on ‘I&t Port 1

3. Press m m 1300_) Lk/m.

4. Only for Analyzers with Option 006: Press [Stop_] (T’J &J.
5. Press (-..@ ~.~~~~~~~~~~~.
_., ., ., ., ., ., ., i __~_.,._ .,_ _., ., _.,._.,._._.,._ _i., ., ., ~.~._.__
6. Press ~~,,,~~~~~~~ . . . . . _ . . . and ~~~~~~ Mtil the malyzer shows the correct

power meter model.

24 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 ....... “......,,,,,,,,,.,, ;.::...;. ‘...... ,,,.. ;; /....

7. Press ~~~~~~:,~:-g #T&j%!&. ., The default power meter HP-IB address

is 13. Make sure it is the same as your power meter HP-IB address.
Otherwise, use the analyzer front panel keypad to enter the correct HP-IB
address for your power meter.
8. Press ~ I~~.:~~~~~~~~~.l . . . . . . . . . . . ,. ;., ;, .: L51) Ixl).
. . /_ii~~.. . . . .-//-.. . . ~ ii .: . : : :.: . . :. :. . . . i
“‘:y:: ..~.y”,. .d.d; , ;x; g .:f ‘.;“. ::::::i
9. Press @@j% ‘~~~~~~,~~~~ to turn the auto power range off.

Note The analyzer displays the PRm annotation, indicating that the
analyzer power range is set to MANUAL.

“. :,. . ‘.; ‘.; ; .;~~, f , ,“; E

10. Press ?#$@I@ SW&I4 to uncouple the test port output power.

their corresponding frequencies.

Note The analyzer’s calibration factor sensor table can hold a

muximum of 12 calibration factor data points

The following softkeys are included in the sensor calibration factor entries
menu:
_.._ __;_ _.__; ,.,. . ,. ;_;_ _.;.:. .;.
gggi#ggi:
_;_)_~.-.: . :. :. . ~.: ~~:~~~~; press to select a point where you can use the front
panel knob or entry keys to enter a value.
. ,._. . . . .. . . . . __
#g+Jg press to edit or change a previously entered value.
.A, . . ii. .w.; >.~. ~.~.~.~.~.~
press to delete a point from the sensor calibration
factor table.
~~~ select this key to add a point into the sensor
calibration factor table.
................................ “~.:.:.::;.:::::::
‘:~.;~~~~~~,~ :.:::::::.:.:.:~::::::::,.:;::::~:...:;:~..

~~~~~~~
select this key to erase the entire sensor calibration
factor table.
select this key when done entering points to the sensor
calibration factor table.

System Verification and 245

Performance Tests
Power Meter Calibration on Port 2 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
22. Connect the equipment as shown Figure 2-19.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

H P 8482A
POWER SENSOR
H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

H P 8483A

Figure 2-19. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 2

23. Press (seas) ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~.~~:~~.~.

..._..::, ...~...,...~..~...~...~..,.~~.~ .....a.G :...i~.~..,.....,.............~ :..A.. ..::::: ._.,..............~.................._..........:::..u~.L

. . ____.;
. . . . . . . . . . _. . ~~~~~~~
.... , /,. . ... _.;/, . . ../__,. ,. ,. ,. ,. . ,. ,_., . i _i_i._.,.._i_*
24. fiess (g ~~~ ~~~~~~~ to start the power meter
. -. . -..-.--_. .--_.- _.. . . _._.__.. . . . -... .~~.~.~~..~.~.~.~.~.~.~. .- - ~ -......-..--..-..-._ -
calibration for test port 2.
25. When the analyzer displays the message POWEFl METER CALIBRATION SWEEP
DONE, connect the equipment as shown as in Figure 2-20.

248 Syetem Verification and

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

-PORT 1
Figure Z-20. lkst Port 1 Input Frequency Response lkst Setup

Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz

.::.. .::>. ,, .. ::: << << :..zcg;

26. Press ideas) ~~~~~~~~~

.A. . ..__..... .: . . . . . ..A. ii T. A_. . . . . . . . .~. . .~.~ jg.
.zv.% i .

29. Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading, whichever has the larger absolute
magnitude, in the U Performance Test Record. n
30. This completes the “Test Port Input Frequency Response” procedure if your
analyzer does not have Option 006. Otherwise continue with the next
sections

Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz

31. Replace the power sensor with the HP 8481A, and then setup the power
meter:
n If the power meter is an HP 438A, press a.
n If the power meter is an HP 437B, press (PRESET/LOCAL].

n If the power meter is an HP 436A, cycle the iine power.

32. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-21.

System Verification and 249

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

H P 8481A
POWER SENSOR
HP8753F
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

H P 438A

sg617e

Test Port 2

35. Press ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~-:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~: Repeat step 12 to build

a calibration factor sensor table for the HP 8481A power sensor.
36. Press ~%~#k . .; . . to
..->. . ;. . .i_. _.. . . . ;.-.. . exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .._ . . : <;.y;:,: . . . .._ >,: :
37. m s&a the HP 8&lA power sensor, press ~~~~~~~~~~~.
_ ._...
38. Press ~~ ~~~ *ym;f

;..;I: . _._ -ci ,.=i_

:..- -_..- .~~~~~~~~~~~
. . ._._ __ to start the power meter calibration.

2-60 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
39. When the analyzer Gnashes the calibration sweep, connect the equipment as
shown in Figure 2-22.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

PORT 1 PORT 2

U
I I
CABLE
24 INCH

Figure 2-22. Setup for lkst Port 1 Input Frequency Response

........
_ ... . . . . . : . . . // . .
41. Press I-1 ~~~~~~~ c-1 ~~~~ ~~~~~~~~.. to put
~~i..................~~~;;;~;~.i ._i......./......l .: . . . . . . . . . ..L......... _...._.... . -::
/i_.......-......~r~i_i_
marker 1 at the minimum magnitude location of the trace.
:. . :. .+:. ~ / . . <. : .:,‘;. .~ ~ ~:.;~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
42. Press 1-9 ~~~~~~ cm) >~~~~~ > . . /. . . . . . . . . . . .2.2L../: . . 2. . . . . . . ... . . . : : :. ~~~~~
. . ~;. . . . . . ._. . ~. . . . _. . . . -~. : . . .i.i.::: to position
marker 2 at the maximum magnitude location of the trace.
43. Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading, whichever has the largest absolute
magnitude, in the “Performance Test Record. n

System Verification and 241

Performance Tests
Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
47. When the analyzer displays the message POWER METER CALIBRATION SWEEP
DONE, connect the equipment as shown as in Figure 2-24.

H P -.-~~
8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

U
PORT 1 PORT 2

CABLE
24 INCH

Figure 2-24. ‘Ikst Port 2 Input Frequency Response ‘lkst Setup

51. Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading, whichever has the largest
magnitude, in the “Performance Test Record.”

In Case of Difaculty
1. Be sure you have used the correct power sensor for the frequency range.
2. Verify that the calibration factors that you have entered for the power
sensors are correct.
3. Repeat this test with a “known good” through cable.

System Verification and 2-53

Performance Teete
8. lkst Port Crosstalk
Specifhtions

( Frequency Euuge 1 Crosstalk1 1

1 300 kHz to 3 GHz 1 100 dB 1
) 3GHzto6GHz2 1 9OdB 1
1 At 25O C 3~5“ C.
2 Only for analyzers with Option 006 -
30kHzto6GHzrange.

Required Equipment for 50 ohm Analyzers

Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B
Cable, APC-7 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Required Equipment for 7513 Analyzers
Calibration Kit, 75 ohm, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 85036B
Analyzer warmup time: 1 hour
Perform this test to verify the signal leakage between the analyzer’s test ports.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-25.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

- -
P O R T 11

C A B L E APC-7
24 INCH
I PORT 2 PORT

SHORT (m)
1
I * *
I PORT 2

ADAPTER
TYPE-N(m to
(75fl) TYPE-N(m i (75n)
OPEN END *
SHORT ( f )
x (75fl)

* DIRECT CONNECTION sg620e

Figure 2-25. ‘I&t Port Crosstalk l&t Setup

2-54 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 ,. . . . ., ., / . . .
2. Press (jj) [iZG) P#%B
;. .. _. . . ; ., :. @J (XJ
3. Press m ~~~~ @J (xl).

Crosstalk to Test Port 2 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz

4. Press~(3iZJ(i$J&Tj@LG/n).
.(:.~,~,~,.: ~,~,~. :.: . .:;. . : . . . . . .z.
5. Press m :~~~~~~:~,,~~~,^~~~~~~~~~.,.
. . <s.; . . ~;. . ~. . ~. . . . . ._. . . . . . . . . ...:. . . . .~. .i. . ~/-. .i.:.: . :.A.......... : ~ .~ .~ .~ .~ .
_// .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .%
6. Press csxf) ~~~,~~~~ ~-loo] (Al).
: . . . . . . . ._... ,..;/,. . . . . ._. ii. . . . . . . . . . ._. .
7. press IMenu)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .z . L. . . z. . .2. . .;:. . . LLY~ . . .._/~. . . . ~. . :$$$#a.
~~~~~~~~~~ . &. . . . .._............
_ _ .~. . . . . .~ . ; :R,. I <<<<<<<<:: ./; ; ; ; , .;M*, . :;:x;~.: : <:’
8. Press cm) #gj;k,g~ . .= i . .i . . . .y. /.. .= ;~.:. . . .../__._......... ~~~;~~~ Li. T . . . . . . . . .~. .2. . . . . . . . i- . _. ._. _. . .
9. Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the
“Performance Test Record. ’

Crosstalk to Test Port 1 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz

13. Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the
“Performance Test Record. n
14. This completes the “Test Port Crosstalk” performance test if your analyzer
does not have Option 006. Otherwise, proceed to the next section.

Crosstalk to Test Port 1 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz

15. Press@@(?$JLG/n)@m.
. :. . .: .: ; . . ,. *., .,., . . . . . . . . . . . . :.
16. Press Ihnenu) ~~~~~~~~
. ~_i__,.~,. ~,. i,. i_., . . . . . ,. ,. ,. . i_., _ _ _.$KfiW&E.
. : . _.:.i..-. :;.: . . . . .
~~ * .f,:~~‘:‘:‘:“. : .+-q c, . : .: .: .: . :. :. :. ;.: .: .:
17. Press (jj) ~~~~~’ ~~~~;;,,~~.

System Verification and 2-55

PerformanceTests
18. Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the
“Performance Test Record. n

Crosstalk to Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz

_ i . ,. ,. ,. . ,. ,. ., :i , . . . . . . :. :
..,......_ . . .._.. . ~_ _._ .__ __i. .
l- Press (Meas) _.~~~~~;,~,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.i._../. iawA>>..> .i...A..L. /. . . ~.i- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...___._-
2. Press Ihnenu_) ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~
i.~.~.~.~_. >. ~ i z.sw;. i.i . . . . . . ...ii^. . . . . . _ ./:. .: .: . . : . . .. . . . . . . .: :.;x . . A..: .s. . .: -
3. Press (-Fan_) ,,~~~~~~~~ . . . . . . . . . /,: :., ,;.,.;,.,.;. . . . * :; .: / , ~~~~~’ ,. ,.
- . - . AS ._.
4. Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the
“Performance Test Record. n

In Case of DifBculty
1. Remove the instrument top cover. Using an 8 lb-inch torque wrench, verify
that all semirigid cables connected to the sampler/mixer assemblies are
tight. In addition, tighten any loose screws on the sampler/mixer assemblies
(A4/5/6) and the pulse generator assembly (A7).
2. Remove the instrument bottom cover. Refer to F’igure 2-26. Verify that
cables Wl, W31 and W32 are tight.
3. Repeat this test.

2-56 System Verification and

Performance Tests
W32,

sg6102e
Figure 2-26. HP 8753E Bottom View

System Verification and 2-57

Performance Tests
 9. Calibration Coefficients
Specifications

Uncorrected1 Frequency Range

Error ‘kms
300 kBz to 1.3 GHz 1.3 GElz to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz2
Directivity 35 dl3 30 dB 25 dB
Source Match 16 dB 16 dB 14 dB
Load Match 18 dB 16 dB 14 dB
Transmission Tracking f1.5 dB f1.5 dB f2.5 dB
Reflection Tracking f1.5 dB f1.5 dB f2.5 dB
1 At 25’ f5O C, with less than lo C deviation from the measurement calibration temperature.
2 Only for analyzers with Option 006 - 30 kHz to 6 GHz range.

Equipment Required for 5011 Analyzers

Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B
Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 81204779
Equipment Required for 75Q Analyzers
Calibration Kit, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85036B
Cable, Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4781
Analger warmup time: 30 minutes
Perform this procedure to verify the analyzer uncorrected test port
characteristics.
Note The crosstalk calibration coefficients are omitted in this
procedure. They are covered in the “Test Port Crosstalk”
performance test.

2-58 Syetem Verification and

Performance Tests
First Full 2-Port Calibration
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-27.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

TEST PORT 1

Figure 2-27. First Full 2-Port Calibration ‘I&t Setup

2. PressLPreset)Lstart)@&EJ

5. Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination (supplied in the

calibration kit) to analyzer test port 1.
6. ~~~ ~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~.
-_...-...L i .._..~:~:....:..-- .:..:<. _..--..-..-.._.. -..- _....._........_. -.

7. Connect the “short” end of the open/short combination to analyzer test

port 1.
. .; _.,.,_ ., . ...__
8. press ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
9. Replace the open/short combination with the 50 ohm termination (supplied
in the calibration kit).

11. Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination to the reference test
port 2.

System Verification and 2-59

Performance Tests
 ,. . ,. . . ,. . : . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . .
12. press .~~~~.~~~~.
__.. . . . . . . _ -_.: . ~. . . . . . :. : . .
13. Connect the “short” end of the open/short combination to the reference test
port 2.

15. Connect the 50 ohm termination to the reference test port 2.

17. Whentheanalyzer
“‘.’ _____.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . displays PRESS 'DONE' IF FINISHED WITH STD(s), press
~~~~,l;~~~~
.111._. . ._. .I._ ./_ . .I. .1...-.-.A. *. . .* .i. . . . . . ;;;;. -.: : : .: -: . -
. . . /.;C~i
Waitforthemessage COMPUTINGCAL COEFFICIENTS to disappearfromthe
analyzer display before proceeding to the next step.
18. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-28.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

PORT 1 PORT 2
I I

Figure 2-28. Transmission Calibration lkst Setup

2-60 Syetem Verification and

Performance Tests
Directivity (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
. : : : .: . ~.: ~: ~: . .y: .: .: .: .: :. : .I -3, .+ y:~.:.: : .f+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . , . . a . , .J.
21- Press [j] ~3~~~~:~~~ :XifF!#
. . . . . . . . . . ii.. . . . . . . . . . . . ._A.A. .z.. v,c._ . : : : . . . L . . .A/.A. i . A.T. . . .i.: (32) @J .~~.~~~
22. When the analyzer finishes the test, press B.
23. Using the front panel knob, locate the maximum value of the data trace for
the 300 kHz to 1.3 GHz frequency range.
24. Write the maximum value in the “Performance Test Record.”
25. Repeat the previous two steps for the other frequency range(s) listed on the
“Performance Test Record. n

Source Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient

27. When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 22 through 25.

Transmission Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient

28. Press m ~~~~~~~ ~~~ ~37) (xl) ~~~~.

...._i _i____ __i .,.,.,.,.......,...........ii ......._ .::::_ i .......~;..~~..== _

29. When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 22 through 25.

Reflection Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient

31. When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 22 through 25.

Load lMatch (Reverse) Calibration Coemcient

33. When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 22 through 25.

System Verification and 2-61

Performance Tests
44. Replace the open/short combination with the 50 ohm termination (supplied
in the calibration kit).

46. Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination to the analyzer test
port 2.

48. Connect the “short” end of the open/short combination to the analyzer test
port 2.
49. press ~~~~~~~~~.
.,...~;.. . . .,. . . . . . . . . . . .~.~- . . ... ...- . . . ~ ~.~ . ~. ~ .
50. Connect the 50 ohm termination to the analyzer test port 2.

52. When the analyzer displays PRESS ‘DONE’ IF FINISHED WITH STD(s) , press
~:~~~~~~~~~:.
*,i_i _ i _ __ ..__1 ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. _
Wait for the message COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS to disappear from the
analyzer display before proceeding to the next step.
53. Connect the equipment as shown in F’igure 2-30.

H P 0753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

I I CABLE
24 INCH
sg618.2
Figure 2-30. Transmission Calibration ‘I&t Setup

System Verification and 2-63

Performance Tests
10. System Trace Noise (Only for Analyzers without
Option 006)

Frequency Range Ratio System Trace Noise System Trace Noise

(Magnitude1 ) (Ph-3
30kHzto3GHz A / R <0.006 dB rms <O.O38O rms
30 kHz to 3 GHz B/R <0.006 dB rms <o.03s” rms

1 At +5 dBm into test port, 3 kHz IF bandwidth, and CW sweep.

Required Equipment for 508 Analyzers

Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Required Equipment for 750 Analyzers
Cable, 75Q, Type-N 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408
Analgzer warmup time: 1 hour
Perform this test to measure the system trace noise at a designated frequency in
both the A/R and B/R ratioed measurements.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-31.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

PORT 1 PORT 2

U CABLE
24 INCH

Figure 2-31. System Trace Noise Ikst Setup

System Veriication and 2-65

Performance Teste
 ...........,.............
j_., ./_
4. Press CMarker F~“, ‘~~~~~~~~:~~~~~~~~: to activate the

.......I.._ .:::.._....../.: . i~~L~.~.~.~.~zz&..~.~

__........~.~............-........~~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~;.~ c//.~.~._.~.~.~~~~~.~.~ ....i........-..-..i..

instrument’s statistic feature.

System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude

7. When the analyzer displays the “Hld” annotation, press c-j

~~~‘:~~~~~~:
......... -
8. Write the sdev (standard deviation) value, which appears on the analyzer
display, on the “Performance Test Record. n

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase

9. press (format) ~~~~.

11. When the analyzer finishes the number of sweeps, press @8@
~~~~~~~;.

12. Write the sdev value on the “Performance Test Record.”

System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude

15. When the analyzer l?nishes the number of sweeps, press c-1

16. Write the sdev value on the “Performance Test Record.”

2.66 System Verification and

Performance Tests
System Trace Noise for B/R Phase
17. Press B &j&j$. . _. . . . . . . . . - -..
18. Press LMenu) ~~~~~~~~ ~~~‘~~~:.. ” ., . :.:.i.p&J&
.:;. , .~: .:, .y , : <::.<:.y (g (-gJ
_.. . . ._. . . . _. .: .:. _. ._. . . i~ . . . .~ . . . ~.~.~.~ .._...-.... - F ..--......--......-..........- - --.
19. When
,. /. . . _.. . .,. . ,i.. _, . ,.;,./,.the
;/ . :. .: :. analyzer
.: Finishes the number of sweeps, press @iiGXZ)
‘&~yw.
:. . . / i, ; . ~.iigq&A!J .
20. Write the sdev value on the “Performance Test Record.”

In Case of Difaculty
1. Perform the “ADC Offset Correction Constants” procedure, located Chapter 3,
“Adjustments and Correction Constants. n
2. Repeat this performance test.
3. Suspect the A10 Digital IF board assembly if the analyzer still fails the test.

System Verification and 2-67

Performance Tests
11. System Trace Noise (Only for Analyzers with
Option 006)
Specifications

Frequency Range Ratio System Trace Noise System Trace Noise

(Bfagnitudel) OPh-3
30 kHz to 3 GHz A/R <O.O06dBrms <O.O38O rms
30 kHz to 3 GHz B/R <0.006 dB m-s <0.038" rms
3GHzto6GHz A/R <O.OlO dB rms <0.0700 rms
3GHzto6GHz B/R <O.OlO dB nns <o.070° rnls
1 At + 5 dBm into test port, 3 lcHz IF bandwidth, and CW sweep.

Required Equipment
Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Analyzerwarmuptime: lhour
Perform this test to measure the system trace noise at designated CW
frequencies in both the A/R and B/R ratioed measurements.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-32.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

Figure Z-32. System Trace Noise ‘Ikst Setup

2-66 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 3. ~~~~ (m)~~~~~~~.~~, ~~~~~~,.;~~. to a&iv& the
. . . . . . . . i. . :. . . . . _ . . . . . . . . ._/. . . . ._ ,. . . . .
instrument’s statistic feature.

System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude from 30 kHz to 3 GHz

7. Write the sdev (standard deviation) value shown, which appears on the
analyzer display, on the “Performance Test Record.”

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase from 3 GHz to 6 GHz

l l- Press (Format) $fJB#$%.
- . __.. _ --
~,,,‘- ..‘.’ .“: ~:~~ . . . .T . . :. :.:. : . :, . :~~.~~~~~N, .,. ,:x~.<~ _=<::. .;s “: :( $; .<+ .+.q A,%
12. press m ~~~~~~~~~
iz:. . .s;u i.._.. ~.~. _.~. . . .. . i. . i>A._ . m. - ~~~~~~:.
: :.L;>>.- - ..-...---...... f$gfj@@i
- . -. . .-.-. . . .^ 0 (xl.
13. .When
. -_.., ,.,.,;.,. ;.‘.,. .,.~,.,.~.,._ ~ the
:~.‘:~.~.~,. ~,~,~,~.~.~., analyzer
.,:. : .: . ,_. . ,. . hnishes the number of sweeps, press (j-1
.:~~~~~.S~~~
;>;:.: <<..:z. .L&%w/. . i . . .~..z.r. ~~.~. . . . ,. ,. ., .,_. . . . .
14. Write the sdev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the
“Performance Test Record. *

System Verification and 2-69

Performance Tests
-

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase from 30 kHz to 3 GHz

16. When the analyzer finishes the number of sweeps, press (Scale)
~~~~~~.

17. Write the s.dev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the
“Performance Test Record. ’

System Trace Noise for B/R lbgnitude from 30 kHz to 3 GHz

z..;.>:. E.B.’ :<+c;. 9.~..~-:------;i . . . . .
18. Press m ~~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:~~. ., _ _ _,. ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , (Menu) :~~~~~~~~
, . , , . . , ; , : : : : : : 1::~‘=~-~~~~~~.~-““‘-”
. . . > > > . .
~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @ @).
~~:.:.~~:.:.:.:.:.~:.~.:.;.:.:.:.~.~:.~.:.:.:.;.:.:.:.:.:.~. ~ ... ( . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . .
19. When
. . . . . . .A ‘.:.:.:.the
:.:.:.~;:. : :~.‘.~:.~analyzer
,.:.: .:.:.: finishes the number of sweeps, press &iii?@
~~~~~,.

20. Write the s.dev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the
“Performance Test Record. ’

System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude from 3 GHz to 6 GHz

22. When the analyzer Gnishes the number of sweeps, press (w)
~~~~~~~~,
23. Write the sdev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the
“Performance Test Record. n

System Trace Noise for B/R Phase from 3 GHz to 6 GHz

25. When the analyzer Gnashes the number of sweeps, press cm)
~~~~~~~~.
.=,.::.,y>,.u___i.~_,,,,,,,,
26. Write the s.dev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the
“Performance Test Record. n

2.70 System Verification and

Performance Tests
System Trace Noise for B/R Phase from 30 kHz to 3 GHz

28. When the analyzer finishes the number of sweeps, press [-Ref)
~~~~,~~~~~~~.

29. Write the sdev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the
“Performance Test Record. n

In Case of Diffhilty
1. Perform the “ADC Offset Correction Constants” procedure, located in Chapter
3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants.”
2. Repeat this performance test.
3. Suspect the A10 Digital IF board assembly if the analyzer still fails the test.

System Verification and 2-71

Performance Tests
12. Test Port Input Impedance
Specifications

1 Frequency Range 1 ‘Ilest Port Input 1 Return Loss 1

LkHzto 1.3GHzI Port 1 I IlSdB I

m3Grr Port2 1 116dB 1

r 3 GHz to 6 GHz l Port 2 I 114m I
Required Equipment for 50 ohm Analyzers
Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B
Required Equipment for 75 ohm Analyzers
Cable, 750, Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408
Calibration Kit, 753, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85036B
Anulgm- warmup time: 1 hour
Perform this test to measure the return loss of each input test port.

2.72 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-33.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

REFERENCETEST--)
PORT I

sg623e
Figure 2-33. Sll l-Port Chl lkst Setup
_ . . .__ /.. ~ . . ,,,....... ., . :?A
2. Press w LAVG) ~~~~~ L3ooo) Lxl] IMenu) ~~~~~:~~~~~~s,, m (xl].
,.~._i ____
3. Press m (3iZJ Lk/ml.
. . . ;_ , ,;./, .‘.:, :,:,:,:,:) . . . . .
4. ~~~ Ical] ~~~~~~ ~~~~:,~~~~~~ ad xle& the appropriate calibration
,. ii_,. _,. . . . i. :_.: _.. . ._. -. . ~.~....~.~.....i-... .__.. _. . . . . . . . . . .~.
kit:
_
, lf your analyzer is 5oQ, press ~~~~,;~~~~~~~*
/..,/. . . . . . ,. _i _ _i_ _
.,. . . . . ., , . . . . . .;_;_i,. ,. . . . . . . . .
, lf your mdyzr is 75Q, press ~~~~~~~~~~~.

5. Press ~~ .“~~~,~“i ~~~~~~~~ . .,_., ., . ,. ,. i . . ~~~~~~~~~~. . . . .... . . . . . . . .-‘. . . . .

*.---;: ~~~_i..~. . . .E
_~.~.~;~~ .... i_.:.:.z/ . >. .:i>:.:>:.: . . . . _ -...
: ~~~~:~~~~;;~;;:~:;~.:~;;~;:.:.. -
6. Connect an open to reference test port 1, as shown in Figure 2-33.
.,, ., ,. ., _., ., ., . . . . . . . . ,. . . _
7. press :~~~~~~~~~~~. -
8. When the analyzer displays the prompt CONNECT STD THEN PRESS KEY TO
NEASUFE, connect a short to reference test port 1.
g. Press ~~~~~~~~~~~~~
., . . ; ,. ,. . /. . . . . . .._ _ _ .-,
10. At the prompt, connect a load to reference test port 1.

System Verification and 2-73

Performance Tests
12. When
:. the analyzer displays 'DONE' IF FINISHED WITH CAL, press
&$&‘:~~~~~~~~~
L-
13. Press CSa”e,Reca,,, ~~~~~~~,:,
*
14. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-34.

PORT 1 PORT 2

U-. -Z-INCHCABLE

Fiure 2-34. ‘Jkst Port 2 Input Impedance ‘Jkst Setup

g613e

15. Press e to turn the analyzer’s marker 1 on. Use the front panel knob
to locate the maximum value of the data trace for each of the frequency
ranges listed in the “Performance Test Record.”
16. Write these maximum values on the “Performance Test Record.”
17. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-35.

2-74 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

-
PORT 1 PORT 2
I
REFERENCETEST--c
I- CABLE 24 INCH
PORT 2

sg624e
Figure 2-35. $22 l-Port Cd ‘l&t Setup
,.;., ., .,. ,. .,. ,. .,
18. -ess ~cal] ..~~~~~~ &#f@ ~~~~~~~~~~~~,.
._... .._.._.............~......... -..-- -2.......... i. . zi .A. A. .i zz._..
19. At the prompt, connect an open to reference test port 2, as shown in
Figure 2-35.

21. When the analyzer displays the prompt CONNECT STD THEN PRESS KEY TO
MEASURE, connect a short to reference test port 2.

23. At the prompt, connect a load to reference test port 2.

~ .;. . ,/,.
24. press i~~:~~~~.
25. When the analyzer displays ‘DONE’ IF FINISHED WITH CAL, press
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
. _. ... _._.. . a._.~. . -:. . . .~:;. : .8:~~..~ i”_...........-....
26. press LB) ~~~~.~~~~~:~
_../. . . . . . . . . _. 2:. . . . . . i.~. . . . . ~. . . . ~. . ~i to save the l-Port calibration.
27. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-36.

System Verification and 2-75

Performanoe Tests
 PORT 1 PORT 2
CABLE
24 INCH
LJ
Figure 2-36. lkst Port 1 Input Impedance ‘I&t Setup

28. Press m to activate the analyzer’s marker 1. Use the front panel knob
to locate the maximum value of the data trace for each of the frequency
ranges listed in the “Performance Test Record. n
29. Write the maximum values on the “Performance Test Record.”

In Case of Difkulty
1. Suspect the A10 digital IF board assembly if the analyzer fails both test port
tests.
2. Refer to Chapter 8, “Receiver Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting
information.

2-76 System Verification and

Petformanca Tests
13. ‘Ikst Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
Spectications

HP8753E Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 0.3 to 3000 MHz HP8753E Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 3-6 GHz

10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -SO -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100

Test Port Power (dBm) Test Port Power (dBm)

Required Equipment
Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 436Af437Bl438A
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8482A
Step Attenuator, 110 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8496A Option 001, H18
(See notes on the following page.)
Adapter (2), APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A
Adapter, Type-N (f) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-0777
Cable (3), 509, Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4781
Cable, HP-IB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10833A
Diskette, 3.5 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Kit, Type-N, 50 Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85Og:
Additional Required Equipment for 75 ohm Analyzers
MinimumLossPad(2), 500 to 75Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B
Analgger warmup time: 1 hour

System Verification and 2-77

Performance Tests
Note The HP 8496A step attenuator (Option 001, H18) comes with a
special calibration that supports the measurement uncertainties
expressed in the test record for this performance test.
The special calibration consists of two measurements The hrst
is a measurement of the attenuation at each step. The data
reported for this measurement have the following uncertainties:
n f0.006 dB from 0 to 40 dB
w f0.015 dB from >40 to 80 dB
n f0.025 dB from >80 to 90 dB
n f0.05 dB >90 dB
The second calibration measurement characterizes match
stability between attenuator settings for each attenuator port.
The vector difference of S11 or ($2) between the reference
attenuation step and all the other steps is measured. The
magnitude of this difference is certified to be ~0.0316 (>30 dB).

Note The HP 8496A used for this test wiU have known attenuator
errors for attenuations up to 100 dB using a test frequency of
30 MHz. The attenuation used as a reference is 0 dB. If the
available calibration data is not expressed as attenuation errors,
it can be converted to such a form by the following equation:
(actual attenuation) - (expected attenuation) = attenuator error
Actual attenuation values that are greater than the expected
attenuation values wiII result in positive errors Actual
attenuation values that are less than the expected attenuation
values wiII resuh in negative errors.

2-76 System Veriiication and

Performance Tests
Initial Calculations
1. Fill in the attenuator error values (referenced to 0 dB attenuation)
in Table 2-l by referring to the calibration data for the HP 8496A
step-attenuator. Refer to the note on the previous page.
a. Find the column in the HP 8496A attenuation error table that pertains to
the attenuation errors for 30 MHz.
b. Starting with the “10 dB” step in this column, write down the value in
the corresponding space in ‘Ikble 2-l for column “B.” This value should
be placed in the row for the 10 dB HP 8496A setting.
c. Continue transferring the remaining values of the HP 8496A attenuation
errors to column “B” in lhble 2-l.
2. In ‘lhble 2-1, transfer the 10 dB error value located within the parenthesis in
column “B” to each space in column “C.”

‘Bible 2-l. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Calculations

A B c E

8496A Attn. Error 10 dB Error Attn. Brror Expected

AttZl. (ref 0 dB) Vixlne (ref 10 dB) M-ement
(corrected)
@w

0 OdB 10
10 ( 1 OdB 0
20 - 10
30 - 20
40 -30
50 -40
60 - 50
70 -60
so - 70
90 - 80

3. The values in column “D” result from changing the reference attenuation of
the calibration data of the HP 8496A to 10 dl3.

System Verification and 2-79

Performance Tests
 Calculate the attenuation error values for this column by subtracting the
values in column “C” from the values in column “B” (B - C = D).
4. The values in column “F” result from correcting the expected measurement
value by the amount of attenuator error.
Calculate the values in this column by subtracting the values in column “D”
from the values in column “E” (E - D = F).
5. Transfer the values from column “F” in ‘Iable 2-l to column “F” in the
“Performance Test Record” for both test ports.

Power Meter Calibration

6. Zero and calibrate the power meter. (Refer to the power meter manual for
details on this procedure.)
7. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-37.

2-60 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

H P 5753E

POWER METER

1 1 0 dB
STEP
ATTENUATOR
POWER SENSOR

Figure 2-37. Power Meter Calibration for Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy

System Verification and 2-61

Performance Tests
 8. Set the HP 8496A to 10 dB.
9. Set the following analyzer parameters:

10. Set up the HP 8753E for power meter calibration:

a. Select the HP 8753E as the system controller:
(Local.. _.__.; ; ; ; ~.:; :.;,.; ; ; :;i ;,.:z;<:<<:_ . . I:z<<<<:
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~,
_ _ :.~.: .: ., :.~ ~ ~:. :. :. :. . :. . :. :. :. ~.: .~.: .~.~.~.~.~.~.~ .~,~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~ :,. ,. .,.
b. Set the power meter’s address:
-~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~. 113) a
, , ,. . . . . . .
c* Select, the appropriate powerm&erby pressing :~~~~~~~~~:~~~~until
.>.~ ~ . . ?.A. . i. . L.. . . . . . . . . . i. ii. ...i. . :. . . . . ./. . . -. 2.L: . . . L.
the correct model number is displayed (HP 436A or HP 438A/437).
d. Select the cal kit and enter_ _ the . :. : __ power ._ sensor
_~~~ ___ calibration data.
(g ~~~~~~ ~~‘~~~~~,~;~~~~~
.-. ..- - . _ - . ___.. _._. . . . . . . . . - - _.- . _._ -..-.

11. ‘I&e a power meter calibration sweep.

12. Verify that the power meter reads approximately -20 dBm.

242 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Adapter Removal Calibration
13. Connect the equipment as shown in the Figure 2-38:

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

PORT I I [PORT 2

t.lNlMm.4LOSSPAD
TYPE-N
24 INCH
Cm) TO (4
Cm) TO Cm) ADAPTER
TYPE-N ( f )
TO TYPE-N (f)

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

24 INCH
(ml TO Cm)
24 INCH
Cm) TO (m) ADAPTER
TYPE-N (f)
*DIRECT TO TYPE-N ( f)
sg6118e
Figure 2-38. Full 2-Port Calibration with Adapter Removal

System Verification and 2-83

Performance Teete
14. Perform a full 2-port error correction with isolation.

Note When you are performing error-correction for a system that has
type-N test port connectors, the softkey menus label the sex of
the test port connector-not t$ @bration standard connector.
For example, the l&e1 ~tx#~~~~~~~~.~~ refers to the short that d
be connected to the female test port.

15. Save the results to disk. Name the lile “PORTl.”

16. Move the adapter to reference test port 1 and perform another full 2-port
error correction.
17. Save the results to disk. Name the file “PORT2.”
18. fiess Lcal) &$g ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
.;. ,. :., ./. . .I. . ,. . . . . . . . . ..../ . . .~. . . . M . . . . . .. ..;-, .,_, /;:. :. : ... . . . L.. . .,. . . . . . . . ~.-. . . . ~. . . . . ~. . ~ .~ ~.~.~.~.~ ~. ~ ~.~.~.~.~ ~ . i.
19. kom
. _ . . . ::; : : the ~~,..: disk
. . . . :.: . directory, choose the We “PORTl”and press
~~~~~~~~::;~~~~~~.
~:. =,:. :. ~,.: .: .: .:~ ~ .~ ,. ~ . __.;.. .;&;.j_,__.,....iin__ _
20. When
,. ,. . . . . _;., / ;. ;i. ,. ,. .this
. . i is complete, choose the fle “PORT2” and press
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
..................................... ..............
21. When complete, press J$EJE#W. ..~:::: i .._i..._
22. m enter the adapter delay, press ;~~~~~~~ L.llo] m (default for
i.: :. ... __.. . . . .As. ?. =:. : . . . i._>.~>.. ~. s.x~. :. .A. . .<-
type-N adapter 1250-1777). The analyzer display will read 110 ps.
23. mess ‘~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~:~~~.:
i_i_ . . . . . .~.. .~.~.~.~ ... . ._. . . . . . _i -. .i. . . . . . .*. . .
24. Save the results of the new cal set.

2-84 System Verification and

Performance Teets
Measure Test Port 2 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
25. Remove the type-N (f) to (f) adapter and connect the equipment as shown in
Figure 2-39. Con&m that the step attenuator is set to 10 dB.

H P B753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

PORT 11 1 PORT 2

1 1 0 dB
STEP ATTENUATOR

*
H P B753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

a-
PORT 11 I PORT 2
ADAPTER
* APC-7TO
ADAPTER
TYPE-N (t)
APC-7 TO
TYPE-N(f) CABLE500
TYPE-N
24 INCH
CABLE50R
24TYPE-N
INCH
1 1 0 dB
STEP ATTENUATOR
*DIRECT CONNECTION ,g661e
Figure Z-39. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Measurement

System Verification and 2-85

Performance Tests
26. To set up the dynamic accuracy measurement, press the following:

27- Wait for the sweep to finish, then press @i&i@ ~~~~~.~~~.~.~~
. _. . . _. .__.. . . . . . . .~ - i . _. . . . ,$k&#K&.
. i. i. :. . . . i . . . . . . /
28. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.

30. Write the mean value (which appears on the analyzer’s display) in the “Test
Port Measurement” cohunn of the “Performance Test Record.” This column
is also labeled “G.”
31. Repeat steps 28 through 30 for each setting of the step attenuator.
32. Calculate dynamic accuracy for each step by using the formula IG - FI.
Place these values in the appropriate column of the “Performance Test
Record. n

2-85 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Measure Test Port 1 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
33. Set the step attenuator to 10 dB.
34. To set up the dynamic accuracy measurement, press the following:

35. W& for the sweep to finish, then press (m) f&$3 ,;& w,. &&$g&,&&
. . .. . . . .. .. /i. . ~.~.i ~ . ~.~.~ . __i..::::..~~:.. . . . . . . . . . .... . . ../.........../.~.zu~i.. .LSS.. *
36. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.

38. Write the mean value (which appears on the analyzer’s display) in the “Test
Port Measurement” colrmm of the “Performance Test Record.” This column
is also labeled “G.”
39. Repeat steps 36 through 38 for each setting of the step attenuator.
40. Calculate dynamic accuracy for each step by using the formula IG - FI.
Place these values in the appropriate column of the “Performance Test
Record. n

In Case of Difkulty
1. If the analyzer fails the test at ALL power levels, be sure you followed the
recommended attenuator settings as listed in the “Performance Test Record.”
Repeat this performance test.
2. If both test port measured values are out of specifications:
a. Recalibrate the power meter.
b. Repeat this performance test.

System Verification and 2-87

Performance Teete
3. If the analyzer fails either test port 2 or test port 1 dynamic accuracy at
lower power levels:
a. Perform the “IF Amplifier Correction Constants” and “ADC Offset
Correction Constants” procedures (located in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants”).
b. Repeat this performance test.
c. If it stiII fails, replace the A10 Digital IF assembly.
d. Repeat the two adjustment procedures mentioned in this step and then
repeat this performance test.

2-88 System Verification and

Performance Tests
14. T&t Port Receiver Magnitude Compression
Specifications

Frequency Range ‘Jkst Port Magnitude1

300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 1 so.45 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz* Port 1 10.80 dH
300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 2 LO.45 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz* Port 2 ~0.80 dB

1 With a 10 Hz IF bandwidth.
2 OnIy for maIyzers with Option 006 - 30 IcHz to
6 GHz range.

Required Equipment for 5On Analyzers

Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Required Equipment for 75 ohm Analyzers
Cable, 750, Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408
Anul~zerwarmuptime:1hour
Perform this test to verify the compression/expansion magnitude levels of the
analyzer’s test port receiver samplers.

System Verification and 2-88

Performance Tests
l4- At the end of the sweep, press [mf) . ,~~~~~~~.
. . . . . . . . . . ... . ~. . .~ . .A. >.a>: .. . . . . . . . . . .A. . . s . . ...i.>>>>.
,.::::.:: .

17. Write the absolute value of marker 2 in the “Performance Test Record. n
18. Repeat steps 12 through 17 for the other frequencies listed for Port 2 on the
“Performance Test Record. n

Test Port 1 Magnitude Compression

. . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . ,: : : .: : : : :.:
19. Press (Meas) ~~~~~~~~~~~ :;~,~~~~.~~~~~~~.

20- Press B i&ii+.

. _. _. . 3!J#.iJQ~~
- - [sol (TiJiJ

25. Write the absolute value of the marker 2 reading in the “Measured Value”
column of the “Performance Test Record. n
26. Repeat steps 20 through 25 for the other CW frequencies listed for Port 1 in
the “Performance Test Record.”

In Case of DifIkulty
1. If the analyzer fails “Test Port 2 Magnitude Compression”:
a. Repeat this test.
b. Replace the A6 B sampler assembly if the analyzer stiII fails the test.
2. If the analyzer fails “Test Port 1 Magnitude Compression”:
a. Repeat this test.
b. Replace the A5 A sampler assembly if the analyzer stiII fails the test.

System Verification and 2-81

Performance Tests
15. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression
Specifications

CW Frequency lkst Port Phase1

300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 1 16”
3 GHz to 6 GHz2 Port 1 57.5”
300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 2 16”
3 GHz to 6 GHz2 Port 2 <7.5O

1 With 10 Hz IF bandwidth.
2 Only for analyzer with Option 006 - 30 kHz
tQ6GHZrsnge.

Required Equipment for 500 Analyzers

Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Required Equipment for 75 ohm Analyzers
Cable, 75 ohm, Type-N,
24inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408
Anulgzer warmup time: 1 hour
Perform this test to verify the compression/expansion phase relationships of the
analyzer’s test port receiver samplers.

2.82 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Test Port 2 Phase Compression
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-41.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

Figure 2-41. ‘Ikst Port Phase Compression ‘&St SetUP

11. Write the absolute value of the marker 2 reading in the “Measured Value”
coh,unn of the “Performance Test Record.”
12. Repeat steps5 to 11 for the other CW frequencies listed for Port 2 in the
“Performance Test Record. *

System Verification and 2-83

Performance Tests
lkst Port 1 Phase Compression

................. _ ..: . :. .:, ~” ,.,;. .

15. Press LMenu) ~~~~~~ t&gggy.
:~=~.: .i: . -.: ~~.. : : ~:~~ . . : : :;: ; ;s:.i .;: . L.i. i . i sm>../
16. At the end of the sweep, press LScaleJ -~~~~~.
17. Press (j-f-&q ;m. :cl’x< ‘-.;.. . ..=.;.., ” ..a;:: (jj, ~~~~~ ~~~~~~~.
.@&$;i,F;,;$~i
. X. .~. ~.. . . . . . . I._. . . . . .2s. . . i.. . . i. . . . . . .w~.. . u_I. : A.. :. -.: :. . . . s.,. . X.. . . . .//_.i. . . . . .,. . . .~.~~~ . _. . . . . . . . . __.. . . . ._,. . . . . . ,. . .
18. Press ~ ;~~~ CMarker Fct”, ~~~~ ~~,:,,~:,~~~~~.

19. Write the absolute value of the marker 2 reading in the “Measured Value”
column of the “Performance Test Record.”
20. Repeat steps 14 to 19 for the other CW frequencies listed for Port 1 in the
“Performance Test Record. ’

ln Case of DifEculty
1. If the analyzer fails the “Test Port 2 Phase Compression” test:
a. Repeat this test.
b. Replace the A6 B sampler assembly if analyzer still fails the test.
2. If the analyzer fails the “Test Port 1 Phase Compression” test:
a. Repeat this test.
b. Replace the A5 A sampler assembly if analyzer still fails the test.

2.94 System Verification and

Performance Tests
16. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002
Analyzers without Option 006 Only)
Specilkations

lkst Port Harmonic Limit

output 2nd c-25 dBc @I + 10 dBm
Output 3rd c-25 dBc @I + 10 dBm
Input Port 1 2nd c-15 dBc @ +8 dBm
InDut Port 1 3rd c-30 dBc @ +8 dBm
1 Inout Port 2 1 2nd 1 <-15dBc@+8dBm 1
I InDut Port 2 I 3rd I <--3OdBc@ +8dBm 1

Equipment Required for 500 Analyzers

Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Attenuator (2), 20 dB, APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8492A Option 020
Equipment Required for 75 ohm Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pad (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B
Cable, Type-N . . . . . . ..,....................,.................. HP P/N 8120-2408
Attenuator (2), 20 dB, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8491A Option 020
Anulgwr warmup time: 30 minutes
Perform this test to determine the spectral purity of the HP 8753E input and
output test ports

Note The test port input 3rd harmonic specifications are better than
the test port output 3rd harmonic specifications

System Verification and 2-85

Performance Tests
Test Port Output Worst Case 2nd Harmonic
1.

2. Press IstartJ (iZJ (E&J IstopJ 11.51 Cc/n] to set the frequency range.
3. Press m ~~~~~~ [lol @ to set the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz.

4. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-42.

H P 8753E
H P i3753E NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 0 7 5

PORT 11 I PORT 2
CABLEAPC-7
20 dE FIXED 2VINCH MINIMUM LOSS PAD MINIMUM LOSS F‘AD
ATTENUATORS
20 dB FIXED CABLE TYPE-N
ATTENUATORS

ip

Figure 2-42. ‘l&t Port Output Harmonics ‘Ikst Setup

5.
6.

7.
._........_..........................;..............,.,.,;...

8. ~~~~~ one sweep, press [m, ~~~~~~~ to get a better viewing of the

trace.
9.

2-96 System Verification and

Performance Tests
10. Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the
“Performance Test Record. n This is the worst case test port output 2nd
harmonic

Test Port Output Worst Case 3rd Harmonic

11. Press @ 0 @JJ to change the stop frequency to 1 GHz.
_ .,_. . . . . . . ., ., :
12. Press @iiG) lfi&JfQggQ i#Ei& lQk!B!~~~E lI&!j@~.
,. .,. , ,. i
13. After one sweep, press @j@ ‘~~~~~~~~~. &&&&f@f to nom&e the
. _. . . __.. . . . . . . . ~. . . /i
trace.
.*).i.
14. Press Is-= ~~~~~ ~~~~~~ @ (xl) to get a better viewing of
the trace.
i . . . . .I. .; :. :.:.
15. Press @ZE) ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~.~~~.

16. After one sweep, press &XT@ ~~~~~~~~.

17. press (m) ~~~~ ‘~~:~~~~.
..__~.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i i. . . . . . . . . .~.i . . . ._. :.
18. Write the marker 1 value on the “Performance Test Record.”

Port 1 Input Worst Case 2nd Harmonic

19. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-43.

System Verification and 247

Performance Tests
Port 1 Input Worst Case 3rd Harmonic
29. Press m @ m to change the stop frequency for measuring the receiver
3rd harmonic

..;. . . .
35. Press @jij) ~~~,~~~~~ ~~~~~~.
:.:.: ... . . ... ._~.-. . . . . . .~~~.. ~ .A. x: . . .i.: ~~ . . . ~.~ : :. .. A. .? .ii.>ASS ii~. ~. ~. ~. ~. ~ _/.~ .~ .~ .
36. Write the marker 1 value on the “Performance Test Record.”
. ;,. .,... ..... . :. .: . . .: . :. . .: . . . . ..... . p(,Z. :. ,: .:.: .._
:_ . . . . .,. ,..,.; _.. . . .;;/ ._. : . . : i . :.zE<:. . :c+‘:
37. Press m. . . .~~~~~~~..~~~~
. . _. __M. ~~~~~~~~~~~~.
. . .&. . . . . L. . . ..>:.A.....i. . . . . ~. . . . . . . .: : .:. . a.2 . . _ ~....i.i_.......i . _. . . . . . .

Port 2 Input Worst Case 2nd Harmonic

38. Press Istoe) (XJ @J to set the stop frequency for measuring the 2nd
harmonic
d ,. *;. . . ,:~. : : .:.:.: .: .:.: . . , ,., __, , , . . . .: : . : .) 7<:: “‘.“8. ......~... +&
39. Press @ :~~~~~~.~~~~~~~~~~.~~,; .~~~~,~~~~~~ g$ , :.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~. . . . . .i . .. . . . . .~._.._. ._. .__.. . . . ...-..i.C>Li . .>.A. i. . . . ~. -. ..._. . . . . --~.r.&-~: . . . . .A. . .
: .: : : :. ‘?. T ..mr ::Gs.m.; :s,.<<q Ygf+; ..:
40- After one sweep, press [md ~~~~~,~~~~~ _ -...-...-. _. .__.. . . .__. .z. .......v.i:;~~~~~~
_- _.. - . ..-......-..-.-.. to normalize the
trace.
*, ., .:,. :<~ . .. :.: ~.:~e?% fg: Gj -“::‘Px< Z? ., _., ., . ., ., .,_. . . . _. . . . . . .
4 1 . Press @+Q .~~a~~~~~.~
: : :. . . . . j./.;. . . . i .=.A.-.....z.wA.. .~. . ._. ..A.s!L: : ~~~~~~~~~:,~~~~~~.
2 . . . /. .~. . . . . . .~. . . -. . . . .-. . - -. u . . z.Li _.. . i... . . _. . i. . .K.. 2 ..A
42. After one sweep, press ~-Ref_) ~~~~~~~~ to get a better tiewing of the

2...A.f...&s._.. ..:z.:....T..i i... A. .A....w.: ....~:L~:::&

trace.
. . . . . _ . . ~: ”_;,. ,. ;, .,.:,. .-. :“; .)
. ._. ._. . . _.. ,.: . __
43. press CM-1 ::~.~~~
. . . /i. :. /._i:.: : . ~.~. ~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~:.
. . . .~.. L. .s.d~.!.u. ;. .LA.. . . . ..... .T . . . . /.
44. Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the
“Performance Test Record. D This is the worst case port 2 input (receiver
channel B) 2nd harmonic

System Verification and 2-99

Performance Tests
Port 2 Input Worst Case 3rd Harmonic
45. Press Lstoe) (iJ LG/n to change the stop frequency for measuring the receiver
3rd harmonic
46, mess csystem, ~~~~~~~, . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . ~.,
~~~~~~~~~~.
. ,. . ...__... . ..._....~ ~., ., ., . . _....... ..____.. =
__. . ._ .... ........
47. Mter one sweep, press w ~~~~~~~~~ ~gg$~~mI to nomm the
../..:. .,-. . . .u;..: . . . . . i.. . .-~. . ~~.~.~.~~.. .~. . i . ..A. . . . . . i.: . .:.
trace.
w:........... ‘yg ~Eg<g.~ .:<s :y”’ . i .(. ,; :. .,y. ?Y: ““”
48. Press [SGLEZ) ~~~~~~~ . . . .. . . . _. : ,. :. *. . . . 2s . . . .%w. . ii WC: ~~~~~~~: r.. . i ., . . .:... . ....: . ._.._...: : . u;. (iJ Ixl) to get a better viewing of
the trace.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .
49. Press w :~~~~~~~: ~~~~~~~~~~.
_,. ,. ,. ,. ,. . . . . ii. . . ._._ . . i . . . i. -. . . . . . . ,. . __.._. . ;,.,. . . .- . _ - ._.
_ ..................................

50. After one sweep, press [scale) ~~~.~~~~~.

.__,,_i_/;..:..:...._........i.,... ___

51. Press (jj, ~~~~ ~~~~~~.

. . ._ . . . ii.. . . ._. . ._ .,
. . ..:::..-_.::: ,. . .i . . e,. . . . .i..__.._.___.,.___-.-_-...
52. Write the marker 1 value on the “Performance Test Record. n

2-l 00 System Verification and

Performance Tests
17. ‘I&t Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002
Analyzers with Option 006 Only)
Specifications

T&t Port Harmonic Limit

&ltDUt 2nd c-25 dBc @I + 10 dBm
I output I 3rd I<-25dEk@ +lOdBmI
I Input Port 1 I 2nd I<-15dEk@ +8dESm I
I Input Port 1 I 3rd I<-3OdBc@ +8dESm I
I InDut Port 2 I 2nd 1 <-15dBc@ +8dESm 1
I InDut Port 2 I 3rd I <-3OdEk@ +8dBm I

Equipment Required
Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Attenuator (2), 20 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8492A Opt 020
Analggm warmup time: 30 minutes
Perform this test to determine the spectral purity of the HP 8753E input and
output test ports

Note The test port input 3rd harmonic specifications are better than
the test port output 3rd harmonic specifications.

System Verification and 2-101

Performance Tests
Test Port Output Worst Case 2nd Harmonic
l- Press (jjj (jj) .$$w
.: .i 2:. . ..i._. . .: :., Ilo) Ixl) to set the test port power to + 10 dBm.
2. Press m (16) a @ @ Cc/n to set the frequency range.
3. Press &iJ ~&$&& @ Lxl] to set the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz.
4. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-44.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

PORT 1 1 PORT 2
CABLEAPC-7
20 CIB FIXED 24 INCH
ATTENUATORS

s g629e
Figure Z-44. ‘l&t Port Output Harmonics ‘lkst Setup

6. After one sweep, press ~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~; to normalize the

i” i::::._.. c:_... i.i . .._............. ii SW... - . _. . ._. . - . __.. .

trace.
. . <.y:< < . ;,.: < ......p~.:~.: .: . . ,.: .: . .::::y::::::::::::y .: .: .: .: .: ~:. .: .~. : : .
7. Press &ZG) ~~~~~~~~: ~~~~~~~-..~~~~~~. _-_.... .._.......__._.-__......_...__.....__
8. After one sweep, press Cw- :~~~~~~~~ ., to get a better viewing of the
. _, . ..,_. _.-_.
,; ; .,.,.,_. . i. .L. .
trace.
g.
__.. ..- . _. ._ - _.. . . . - . _. - _.. . . . .
10. Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the
“Performance Test Record.” This is the worst case test port output 2nd
harmonic

2-l 02 System Verification and

Performance Tests
Test Port Output Worst Case 3rd Harmonic
11. Press @ 0 m to change the stop frequency to 2 GHz.
s ; ; ;. . . . .+. :-. .~. :, ., $ , ., ., ., ., . ,. . . . ..... _.... <.: .“‘.:y ‘.:’ i
12. Press (3-j
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .::..~~~~~~‘~.~~
. . . . ... . ... . .. . _i -/.i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . /a. . . .;. .~~~~~~~:~~~
. . . . .i. . . .V.G% ...~. . . . . . . : z . . . . . .. . :. A. . ./.:. -
13. After one sweep, press 1-I ~~~~~~~~~ ;$ATA&$%# :.;,v. c.<. ‘.=:< to normalize the
:....~. ~. U.i ~.~-. . . . . . . .- .:. . \z. :. _. . . . . . ,. .:. . : ::._-.-.. . . . .i. . . . . . . . s. .
trace.
14. Press Cm, ::&$ :;.;&.#+;: .~~~~~~,:, o o to get a better viewing of
the trace.
.
15. press (=I ~~~~~~.“,,~~:~ ~~~~~~~~.~~~
. . . . . .::. . . . . ...~. ~. ~. ~. ~.i ..: . . . . . ... . . ... . .: :. .i ., . . . . . . .;>>;.A.~. . ~.~.~.~._i . :L.. . ... . ... . . >.. .T . : : . :-.L ./._../.. . i. ..._.: ... : -
16. After one sweep, press CSca,e Rep ~~~~~~~~;.
. ., ,. . ., ,. , / ., . , /, . . .
_ ‘.i..: .,,, :I,, ... .;;.::. . . . . . ;.:.:.:
17- P r e s s ljiiZXGFctn_) ~~~~~~ ~~~~~.~~.

18. Write the marker 1 value on the “Performance Test Record.”

System Verification and 2-l 03

Performance Tests
Port 1 Input Worst Case 2nd Harmonic
19. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-45.

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

-PORT 1 PORT 2
-
II I I CABLEAPC-7
sg630e
Fiiure Z-45. Eeceiver Harmonics lkst Setup

22. Press m (16) m m @ Lc/n to set the frequency range.

.. . . . . . . .. . ., . . ..~...:.:.:.:.~.:.:.‘:.:.:.:...:.:.:...:,:~:::.:~.,:.:..::~,,:,,

24. After one sweep, press m ~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~ to nom&e the

-....._.~.....................
____..i .......i_ ................................... -SW ......2::......3:....=...i....~...............

trace.

26. After one sweep, press Cm. ~~~~~~~~~~ to get a better tiewing of the

A .................... ,..,.. . ..:,,..A/........i.l.z:>;>

trace.

28. Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the
‘Performance Test Record.” This is the worst case port 1 input (receiver
channel A) 2nd harmonic

2-l 04 Systam Verification and

Performanw Tests
Port 1 Input Worst Case 3rd Harmonic

., . :. .: .: .: .: .: .~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~_.~ ,~ ~,~,~_.~ .~.,_., . . . ..,,;. : ; ,. .: :. , . :. :. :. :

35. press [j) ~~~~~ ~~~~~.
36. Write the marker 1 value on the “Performance Test Record.”
: 7:. _:.:.:.:.~:. :.:.:.:.:.:. ~:
37. press (T-1 ~~~~~,~~~~~ -i~~~~~~~~~~~.

Port 2 Input Worst Case 2nd Harmonic

43* Press cm, ;~~~~ ~~~~~.

i/.. . . . .//~.. . ~.~. ~ ~.~.~. . . . . . . . ~ .~ ......~.~.~. .~. . . . . . . . . . . ~.~ . _ -_..-_.. -
44. Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the
“Performance Test Record.” This is the worst case port 2 input (receiver
channel B) 2nd harmonic

System Verification and 2-l 05

Performance Tests
Port 2 Input Worst Case 3rd Harmonic
45. Press &TJ (FJ (ZJZJ to change the stop frequency for measuring the receiver
3rd harmonic
. . .. . J. <. +:. . <. <:. .z. . . :. :. ‘. ‘. x. F. Y. . . . .: . . . . . . .: . :.,.;.,. ~. .~.~.~. .,~.,~.,~., .,. ,. . ,. ., _.,. ,. ,. .,./. ;. .; ., . , ~ .: : :
46. Press [w) ~~~~~~.~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~.
. .2.2; . . . . . . . . T. . . . .s . . . .. .: . . . . . . .~,.~. . . ~.~.~. ~.~.~ 1.. _. ~:: : . A. . . i__i__ .: :_.,._._._.,._._ .,.,.,.,_
I .........

52. Write the marker 1 value on the “Performance Test Record.”

2.106 System Verifmation and

Performance Tests
18. ‘Ikst Port Output Harmonics
(Analyzers without Option 002)
Speciikations

1 For HP 87633 Option 075: + 8 dF%m source output;

limits valid for frequencies below 2 GHz

Equipment Required for 50 ohm Analyzers

Spectrum analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85953
Cable, 509, type-N (m) to type-N (m), 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 81204781
Adapter, APC-7 to type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A
Adapter, type-N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1476
Cable, 503, BNC (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-1840
Additional Equipment Required for 75 ohm Analyzers
Minhmmvloss pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B
z.$r warmup time: 30 minutes (network analyzer and spectrum

Perform this test to determine the spectral purity of the network analyzer
RF source. Use this procedure with HP 8753E network analyzers without
Option 002 (harmonic measurement capability).

System Verification and 2-l 07

Performance Tests
Procedure
1. Calibrate the spectru?n analg~:
a. Connect the BNC cable between the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT
connector and the 508 input. Use the type-N (m) to BNC (f) adapter at the
5OQ input.
b. FVess m).

f. Remove the BNC cable and adapter.

2. Connect the equipment as shown in F’igure 2-46.

2-l 08 System Verification and

Performance Tests
 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
.
4’

PORT 1
ADAPTER
APT: TO TYPF-N if)
CABLE
50R TYPE-N 24 INCH
Cm) TO Cm)

H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTIONS 0 7 5

*DIRECT CONNECTION

Figure Z-46. ‘lkst Port Output Harmonics Ttkst Setup

3. Set the netuwrk analgm source power to + 10 deem:

a. Press @iERJ.
b. Press @i’GZ).
f ,. ‘) .~: .y<

d. Press Llo] [x. (For 750 analyzers, press (ZJ @‘J)

e. press:~:
-: . . _.: .:. . -, . -

Syotem Verification and 2-l 09

Pwformance Tests
4. Set up the spectrum anulgzer display:
a. Press m.
b. Press L2o)m.
c. Press (E&J
d. Press (3ooJ m.
.““” ...., ..,...~
..... ~::::::, : : : : .: :. : . : : :
e. press ~~#~~~~~~~~:.

f. Press @ @%Q.
g. Press QiiKiFS].
., . ,. .; .: :.: :. ., w. ,. ,. . . . . .;,.a. . . .:.
h. Press .~~~~~~~.
- . _ - . _. -...
i. Press (iZJ @KY).
5. Set the network anulgzer and spectrum analyzer to the harmonic frequency.
Use the appropriate test record to choose the proper harmonic frequency.
Refer to the test record in Section 2a for 3 GHz network analyzers, or the
test record in Section 2b for 6 GHz network analyzers.
n Network Anulyzer
a. Press ~~:~~~~

_._-,. .....::./
- ..._.._.
...................--.
. .. .. .. .. *

b. Enter the harmonic frequency from the test record. For example, press
(iZJ m to set the network analyzer to the second harmonic of the first
ftmdamental frequency in the 3 GHz test record.
n Spectrum Analgger
c. Press (jm).
d. Enter the harmonic frequency from the test record. For example, press
(iCJ @ to set the spectnmt analyzer to the second harmonic of the first
fundamental frequency in the 3 GHz or 6 GHz test record.
e. Press fjj).
f. Press ~~~~~~~.

g. Press @EDiiF).
h. Press LMKR).
_ ; , . :. ,.: .: .: ;. ‘.: .: .
i. Press ;~~~.

2-l 10 System Verification and

Performance Tests
6. Set up the network unuZ@zr to output the fundamental frequency:
/ .: . :. .; . . .,
a. Press ~$Bj$gi$.
b. Enter the fundamental frequency. For example, press lso) m to enter
the hrst fundamental frequency in the 3 GHz test record.
7. Measure and record the power in the second or third harmonic by taking a
single sweep with the spectrum aruzlgzer:
a. Press @iTZVKQ.
b. Read the MARKER A measurement, and record it in the appropriate row
of the test record under Measurement Value (dBc).
8. Reset the spectrum un&z@r marker:

9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for the remaining second and third harmonic
frequencies, and the fundamental frequencies listed in the test record.

System Verification and 2-111

Performance Tests
 2a
Performance Xkst Record
For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of
30 liEIz to 3 GHz

Note See the next “Performance Test Record” section if your analyzer
frequency range is from 30 kHz to 6 GHz (Option 006).

Performance Test Record 2a-1

 HP 8753E Performance Test Record (1 of 13)

Calibration Lab Address: Report Number

Date
Last Calibration Date
Customer’s Name
Performed by

Model HP 8753E
Serial No. Option(s)
F’irmware Revision
Ambient Temperature ’ C Relative Humidity %

‘Ikst Equipment Used:

Description Model Number Trace Number CM Due Date
Frequency Counter
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Calibration Kit
Verification Kit
Notes/Comments:

2a-2 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t Record (2 of 13)
For 30 kEIz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-lbkard Company
vlodel HP 8753E Report Number

3erialNnmber Date

b) 1. Test Port Ontpnt Frequency Range and Accuracy

CW Preqnencies Results Measured Mensnrement
(MW t=i WW El Uncertainty
WW

0.03 0.029999 7 0.030 000 3 fO.OOO 000 050

0.3 0.299 997 0.300003 f0.000000520
5.0 4.999 950 5.000 050 f 0.000 009
16.0 15.999 840 16.000 160 l 0.000 028
31.0 30.999 690 31.000310 f 0.000 054
60.999999 60.999 390 61.000 610 f 0.000 106
121.0 120.998 790 121.001210 f 0.000 207
180.0 179.QQ8200 180.001800 f 0.000 307
310.0 309.995 900 310.003106 f 0.000528
700.0 699.930 000 700.007000 f0.001192
1300.0 1299.987 1300.013 f 0.002 212
2 ooo.0 1 999.980 2000.020 f 0.003 403
3 ooo.0 2 999.970 3 000.030 f 0.005 104

)) 2. External Source Mode Preqnency Range

!kst Preqnencies (GHz) lh3Illts

0.010
0.020
0.100
1.000
2.000
3.000

Performance Test Record 2a-3

 EIP 8753E Performance ‘Jkst Record (3 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Eewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 87683 l&port Number

Serial Number DlLt4?

bb 3. Test Port Output Power Accuracy

!lkst Frequencies n?st Port Speciilcation Measured Measurement
output w9 Value Uncertainty
Power 0-w WV
(aBm)
Center Frequency
3oolcHz 0 fl f 0.465
20 MHz 0 fl f 0.10
5OMHZ 0 fl f 0.10
1OOMHZ 0 fl f 0.10
200 MHZ 0 fl f 0.10
500 MHz 0 l 1 f 0.10
1GHz 0 fl f 0.13
2GHz 0 fl f 0.13
3GHz 0 fl f 0.27

bb 4. ‘Jkst Port Output Power Range and Linearity

T&t settings Eeslllts Power Level Specillcation Measnr ement
Measured Linearity WI Uncertainty
VW WI VW
TW Frequency = 300 kHz
- 15 f 0.2 f 0.03
- 13 f 0.2 f 0.03
- 11 f 0.2 l 0.03
- 9 f 0.2 f 0.02
- 7 f 0.2 f 0.02
-6 f 0.2 f 0.02
- 3 f 0.2 l 0.02
- 1 f 0.2 f 0.02
+l f 0.2 f 0.03
+3 f 0.2 f 0.03
+6 f 0.5 f 0.03

2a4 Parfonnance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance ‘I&t Record (4 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GHZ Analyzers
Hewlett-PackardCompany
lode1 HP 8763E Report Number

krial Number Date

)) 4. !Cest Port Output Power Ra.nge and Linear5ty (continued)

Test settings EesIllts Power Level SpecificationMeasnrement
Measured Linearity WV Uncertainty
ow (W WI

+7 f 0.5 f 0.03
+8 f 0.5 f 0.03
+Q f 0.5 f 0.03
+ 10 f 0.5 f 0.03
CW Frequency = 3 GHz
- 15 f 0.2 l 0.03
- 13 f 0.2 f 0.03
- 11 f 0.2 f 0.03
- 9 f 0.2 f 0.02
- 7 f 0.2 f 0.02
-6 f 0.2 f 0.02
- 3 f 0.2 f 0.02
- 1 f 0.2 f 0.02
+l f 0.2 f 0.03
+3 f 0.2 f 0.03
+5 f 0.6 f 0.03
+7 f 0.5 f 0.03
+8 f 0.5 f 0.03
+Q f 0.6 f 0.03
+ 10 f 0.5 f 0.03

Performance Test Record 2a-5

 HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t Record (5 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GEz Analyzers
Hewlett-Ikckard Company
Model HP 876QE Beport Number

%xialNnmber Date

bb6. MinimnmBChaunelLevel
CW Prequency Speciilcation lkst Port Power Measurement
WV Uncertainty
m

300 kH2 < -35 f 1.0

3.29 MHz < -35 f 1.0
3.31 MHZ < -35 f 1.0
15.90 MHz < -35 f 1.0
16.10 MHz < -35 f 1.0
30.90 MHz < -35 f 1.0
31.10 MHz < -35 f 1.0
1.6069 GHz < -35 f 1.0
1.6071 GHz < -35 f 1.0
3.000 GHz < -35 f 1.0

bb 6. Test Port Input Noise Ploor Level

Frequency Bange Test Port IP Specification Calculated Yeast-ement
Bandwidth (-1 Value Uncertainty

3OOkHz-3GHz Port 1 3lcHz - 82 N/A

3OOkHz-3GHz Port 1 10 Hz - 102 N/A
3OOkHz-3GHz Port 2 10 Hz - 102 N/A
3OOkHz-3GHz Port 2 3kHz -82 N/A

2a-6 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance Test Record (6 of 13)
For 30 kEiz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8763E Beport Number

SerialNumber Date

bb 7. Test Port Input Frequency Response

Preqnency Bange Test Port Speci&ation Measured Value Measurement
w9 WI Uncertainty
uJ.9

300 kHz-3 GHz Port 2 fl 0.47

300 kHz-3 GHz Port 1 fl 0.47

b) 8. Test Port Crosstalk

Test settings SpeciHcation MeasuredValue Measnrement
WI WV Uncertainty
CrosstdktoTfestPort2
300 kHz-3 GHz < -100 N/A
Cro&aUc t.0 l&t Port 1
300 kHz-3 GHz < -100 N/A

Performance Test Record 2a-7

 HP 8753E Performance TLkst Record (7 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GEIz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Compnny
Model HP 8768E Beport Number

Serial Number D&4.?

bb 9. Calibration CoeiHcients
‘l&t Description Frequency Hange Spee. Measured Value Yeasnrement
VW (W Uncertainty

Forward Direction
Directivity 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz 2 35 f 0.9
Directivity 1.3GHz-3GHz 2 30 f 0.8

Forward Direction
Source Match 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz > 16 f 0.2
Source Match 1.3GHz-3GHz 1 16 f 0.2

Forward Dim&ion
Trans. Tracking 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz f 1.5 f 0.006
l-rarls. Trackiug 1.3GHz-3GHz f 1.5 f 0.009

Forward Direction
Rd. Tracking 3OOkHz- 1.3GHz l 1.5 f 0.001
Refl. Tracking 1.3GHz-3GHz f 1.5 f 0.005

F&verse Direction
Load Match 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz 1 18 f 0.1
Load Match 1.3GHz-3GHz 2 16 f 0.2

2a-8 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance ‘Ilest Record (8 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GEL Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8766E I&port Number

SerialNumber Dllh?

bb 9. Calibration Coefficients (continued)

Test Description Freqnency Bange SW. Measured Value Measurement
(-1 WI Uncertainty
WI
Reverse Direction
Trans. Tracking 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz f 1.5 f 0.006
Trans. Tracking 1.3GHz-3GHz f 1.5 f 0.009

Forward Direction
Load Match 3OOkHz-1.3GHz 1 18 f 0.1
Load Match 1.3GHz-3GHz 1 16 f 0.2

Reverse Direction
Directivity 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz > 35 f 0.9
Dire&vi@ 1.3GHz-3GHz 130 f 0.8

Reverse Direction
Source Match 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz 2 16 f 0.2
Source Match 1.3GHz-3GHz 1 16 f 0.2

Reverse Direction
Ben. Tracking 3OOkHz-1.3GHz f 1.5 f 0.001
Beil. Traclciug 1.3GHz-3GHz f 1.5 f 0.005

Performance Test Record 2a-9

 HP 8753E Performance ‘I&t Record (9 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GEJz Analyzers
Hewlett-l%ckard Company
Model HP 8762E Beport Number

Serial Number Date

bb 10. System Trace Noise

CW Frequency Bati Specj&ation Measured Vhhe M-ement
WW Uncertainty

3 An3 <0.006dBrm fO.OO1 dB

3 An3 < 0.03B” rrns fO.O1O
3 B/R < 0.006 dH rms fO.OO1 dB
3 B/R < 0.038O rms fO.O1O

bb 12. l&t Port Input Impedance

Test Port Betnrn Loss Specilkation M-ement
(aB) (aB) Uncertainty
WI

300 kHz-1.3 GHz Port 2 2 18 f 1.5

1.3 GHz-3 GHz Port 2 2 16 f 1.5

300 kHz-1.3 GHz Port 1 > 18 f 1.5

1.3 GHz-3 GHz Port 1 1 16 f 1.5

2a-10 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance Test Record (10 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Iewlett-Packard Company
lode1 JJP 8763E Report Number

lerial Number Date

bb 13. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy

G F IG - FI
Test Port 8496A l&t Port Expected Dynamic SF. Meas.
Input Power Attn. Measurement Meamr ement A-==Y PI Uncer.
VW 0-w WI (corrected) (C&alated) 0-w
PI
l&t Port 2
- 10 0 5 0.033 f 0.008
-2o(Ref) 10 0.000 <0.020 f 0.008
-30 20 5 0.031 f 0.008
-40 30 5 0.042 f 0.008
-50 40 5 0.057 f 0.008
-60 50 5 0.098 f 0.017
- 70 60 5 0.247 l 0.017
-80 70 5 0.725 f 0.017
- 90 80 5 2.097 f 0.017
- loo 90 5 5.399 f 0.027
lbstPort1
- 10 0 5 0.033 f 0.008
-2ouw 10 0.000 ~0.020 f 0.008
- 30 20 5 0.031 f 0.008
-40 30 5 0.042 f 0.008
-50 40 5 0.057 f 0.008
- 60 50 5 0.098 f 0.017
- 70 60 5 0.247 f 0.017
-80 70 <_ 0.725 f 0.017
-90 80 5 2.097 f 0.017
- 100 90 5 5.399 f 0.027

PerformanceTed Record 2a-11

 HP 8753E Performance lkst Record (11 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
EewletMa&ard Company
Model HP 8766E Beport Number

h-id Number Date

)b 14. Test Port Receiver Magnitnde Compression

CW Frequency Test Port MeamredVhlue Specification Measur ement
(aB) WV Uncertainty

50 MHZ Port 2 5 0.45 NIA

1GHz Port 2 5 0.45 N/A
2GHz Port 2 5 0.45 N/A
3GHz Port 2 5 0.45 N/A

5OMHZ Port 1 5 0.45 NIA

1GI-h Port 1 5 0.45 NIA
2GHz Port 1 5 0.45 N/A
3GI-h Port 1 5 0.45 NIA

bb 16. lbt Port Receiver Phase Compression

CW Frequency lbst Port MeasnredValne Specification Measur ement
okP=) @%-=9 Uncertainty

5OMHZ Port 2 5 6” NIA

1GHz Port 2 5 6O N/A
2GI-h Port 2 5 6O NIA
3GH.z Port 2 5 6“ N/A

50 MHz Port 1 5 6O NIA

1GHz Port 1 5 6O N/A
2GHz Port 1 5 6O N/A
3GHz Port 1 5 6O NIA

2a-12 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance lkst Record (12 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Eewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753E Beport Number

BerielNumber Date

)) 16. Test Port OutpW/lnput Harmonics (Option 002 without Option 006)
‘l&t Description Speciikntion Meamrement Value Measurement
w-3 (-3 Uncertainty
WV
l&t Port output
HZ3llUOtiCS

2nd < 25 f 1.5

3rd 5 25 f 1.5

Port 1 Input Harmouics

2nd 5 15 f 1.5
3rd 5 30 f 1.5

Port 2 Input Harmouics

2nd < 15 f 1.5
3rd 5 30 f 1.5

Performance Ted Record 2a-13

 HP 8753E Option 011 Performance lkst Record (13 of 13)
For 30 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
3ewlettPackard Company
Bode1 HP 8762E Beport Number

krial Number Date

W 18. lbst Port Output Jhrmonics (Ansly7,ers without Option 002)

Second Harmonic FbndamenW SpeciIkation Measurement blue Measurement
Frequency Fhqnenc y ww Pw Uncertainty
W)

1OOMHZ 50 MHz 5 25 f 1.6

1.0 GHz 500 MHz 5 25 f 1.6
2.4 GHz 1.2 GHz 5 25 f 1.6
3.0 GHz 1.5 GHz 5 25 f 1.6
Third Harmonic
Frequency
300 MHz 100 MHz 5 25 f 1.6
1.2 GHz 4OOMHZ 5 25 f 1.6
2.7 GHz 900 MHz 5 25 f 1.6
3.0 GHz 1GHz 5 25 f 1.6

2a-14 Performance Test Record

 2b
Performance Xkst Record
For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of
30 kHz to 6 GHz

Note See the previous “Performance Test Record” section if your

analyzer frequency range is from 30 kHz to 3 GHz.

Performance Test Record 2b-1

 HP 8753E Performance ‘I&t Record (1 of 15)

Calibration Lab Address: Report Number

Date
Last Calibration Date
Customer’s Name
Performed by

Model HP 87533 Option 006

Serial No. Option(s)
Firmware Revision
Ambient Temperature o C Relative Humidity %

‘I&t Equipment Used:

Description Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date
kequency Counter
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Calibration Kit
Verification Kit
Notes/Comments:

I I
I I

2b-2 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance Test Record (2 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GEz Analyzers
tIewletGPackard Company
Model HP 87683 Option 006 Beport Number

3erialNumber Date

bb 1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy

lb3t Frequencies Results Measured Measurement
(MW &z) (MW El Uncertainty
WJW

0.03 0.029999 7 0.0300003 f 0.000000050

0.3 0.299 997 0.300 003 f 0.000 000 520
5.0 4.9QQ 950 5.000 050 f 0.000 009
16.0 15.999 840 16.000160 f 0.000 028
31.0 30.999 690 31.000 310 f 0.000 054
80.999 999 6O.QQQ3QO 61.000610 f 0.000 105
121.0 120.998 790 121.001210 f0.000207
180.0 179.QQ8200 180.001800 f 0.000307
310.0 309.995 900 310.003100 f 0.000 528
700.0 699.930 000 700.007000 f 0.001 192
1300.0 1299.987 1300.013 f 0.002 212
2 000.0 1999.980 2000.020 f 0.003 403
3 000.0 2 999.970 3000.030 f 0.005 104
4.0 3.QQQQ60 4.000 040 f 0.008 805
5.0 4.QQQQ50 5.000050 f 0.008 506
6.0 5.QQQ940 6.000 060 f 0.010207

Perfomance Test Record 2b3

 HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t I&cord (3 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Elewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8763E Option 006 Report N&r

Serial Number Date

bb 2. Extemsl Source Mode F’reqnency Range

Test Frequencies (GHz) Result

0.010
0.020
0.100
1.000
2.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
6.ooo

bb 3. Test Port Output Power Accmaey

!lbt Frequency Test Port specification Measured Value Measurement
ontpnt PI (~1 Uncertainty
Power PI
(aBm)

300 lcl-lz 0 i l i 0.47

20 MHz 0 i l i 0.25
50 MHz 0 i l i 0.12
100 MHz 0 i l i 0.12
200 MHz 0 i l i 0.12
500 MHz 0 fl i 0.12
1GHz 0 i l i 0.12
2GHz 0 i l i 0.15
3GHz 0 i l i 0.15
4GHz 0 i l i 0.17
5GI-h 0 i l i 0.17
6GI-h 0 i l i 0.17

2b4 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance ‘Ikst Record (4 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
tIewlett-lkckard Company
Ldodel HP 876SaE Option 006 Report Nnmber

3erialNnmber Date

bb 4. ‘lbst Port Output Power Range and Linearity

Test settings lknllts Measured Power Level specmcation Mess.
WV linearity (aB) Uncert.
WI (W
CW Frequency = 300 kHz
- 15 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 13 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 11 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 9 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 7 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 5 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 3 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 1 i 0.2 i 0.02
+l i 0.2 i 0.03
+3 i 0.2 i 0.03
+6 i 0.5 f 0.03
+7 i 0.5 i 0.03
+8 i 0.5 i 0.03
+Q i 0.5 i 0.03
+ 10 i 0.5 i 0.03
CW F'requency - 3 GHz
- 15 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 13 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 11 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 9 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 7 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 5 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 3 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 1 i 0.2 i 0.02
+l f 0.2 i 0.03
+3 i 0.2 i 0.03
+5 i 0.5 i 0.03

Performance Test Record 2b-5

 HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t Record (5 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GEIz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Node1 HP 8763E Option 006 Report Number

3erial Nnmber Date

bb 4. Test Port Chzlxmt Power Ra ge and Linearity ( mtinned)

Test settings Results Measured Power Level Speciilclrtioll MeIl.8.
WV Li=a-Y WI em Uncert.
(W

+7 i 0.5 i 0.03
+8 i 0.5 i 0.03
+Q i 0.5 i 0.03
+ 10 i 0.5 i 0.03
CW Frequency = 6 GHz
- 15 i 0.2 f 0.03
- 13 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 11 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 9 i 0.2 i 0.03
- 7 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 5 i 0.2 i 0.02
- 3 i 0.2 f 0.02
- 1 i 0.2 i 0.02
+l i 0.2 i 0.02
+3 f 0.2 i 0.03
+5 i 0.5 i 0.03
+7 i 0.5 i 0.03
+8 i 0.5 i 0.03
+Q i 0.5 i 0.03
+ 10 i 0.5 i 0.03

2b-6 Performance Test Record

 RP 8753E Performance lkst Record (6 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GElz Analyzers
1Eewlett-Packard Company
.1Model HP 875QE Option 006 I&port Number

SerialNumber Date

c CW Frequency
lb 6. Minimum It Channel Level
Specification Test Port Power Meaanrement
PI Uncertainty
(9

300 kHz < -35 i 1.0

3.29 MHz < -35 i 1.0
3.31 MHz < -35 i 1.0
15.90 MHz < -35 i 1.0
16.10 MHz <-35 i 1.0
30.90 MHz <-35 i 1.0
31.10 MHz < -35 i 1.0
1.6069 GHz < -35 i 1.0
1.6071 GHz <-35 i 1.0
3.000 GHz c-35 i 2.0
4.000 GHz <-30 i 2.0
5.000 Gllz <-30 i 2.0
6.000 GHz < -30 i 2.0

bb 6. lkst Port Input Noise Floor Level

~eclaenc~ Bange l&t Port IF Speciilcation Calculated Measurement
Ba.ndwidth (-1 Value Uncertainty

300 Hz-3 GHz Port 1 3kHz - 82 N/A

300 kHz-3 GHz Port 1 10 Hz - 102 N/A
300 kHz-3 GHz Port 2 10 Hz - 102 N/A
300 kHz-3 GHz Port 2 3kHz - 82 N/A
3 GHz-6 GHz Port 2 3kHz - 77 N/A
3 GHz-6 GHz Port 2 10 Hz - 97 N/A
3 GHz-6 GHz Port 1 10 Hz -97 N/A
3 GHz-6 GHz Port 1 3kHz -77 N/A

Performance Test Record 2b-7

 J3P 8753E Performance ‘Best Record (7 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHZ Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753E Option 006 Report Number

Serial Number Date

bb 7. Test Port Input Frequency Response

Frequency Range lk?st Port Specilkation Meaared Value Meawrement
(aB) om Uncertainty
WV

300kHz-3GHz Port2 il 0.47

3OOkHz-3GHz Port1 il 0.47
3GHz-6GHz Port1 i2 0.17
3GHz--6GHz Port2 i2 0.17

I 1) 8. lkst Port crosstalk

Test settings Meaared blue Measurement
I ldH\ Uncertainty
crosstallrto~stPort2
3OOkHz-3GHz < -100 NIA
C~tQ%stPortl
300kHz-3GHz < -100 N/A
C~toTestPortl
3GHz-6GHz <-go NIA
C~to'IlestPort2
3GHz-6GHz < -90 NIA

2b-6 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance Test Record (8 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
EewletWackard Company
Model HP 87683 Option 066 Report Number

SerialNumber Date

W 9. Calibration Coeillcients
Test Description Frequency Range Spx. Measured Valne Measuremen
cm WV Uncertainty
ow
Forward Direction
Directivity 300 kHz-1.3 GHz 2 36 i 0.9
Directivity 1.3 GHz-3 GHz 130 i 0.8
Directivity 3 GHz-6 GHz 2 25 i 0.8

Forward Direction
Source Match 300 kHz-1.3 GHz > 16 i 0.2
Source Match 1.3 GHz-3 GHz 1 16 i 0.2
Source Match 3 GHz-6 GHz > 14 i 0.3

Forward Direction
Trans. Tracking 300 kHz-1.3 GJ.-Iz i 1.5 i 0.006
Trans. Tracking 1.3 GHz-3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.009
Trans. Tracking 3 GHz-6 GHz i 2.5 i 0.021

Forward Direction
Refl. Tracking 300 kHz-1.3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.001
Refl. Tradchg 1.3 GHz-3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.005
Refl. Tracking 3 GHz-6 GHz i 2.5 i 0.020

Reverse Direction
bad Match 300 kHz-1.3 GHz 2 18 i 0.1
Load Match 1.3 GHz-3 GHz 2 16 i 0.2
bad Match 3 GHz-6 GHz 1 14 i 0.2

Perfomance Test Record 2b-9

 HP 8753E Performance ‘Ikst Record (9 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8766E Option 666 Report Number

Serial Number Date

bb 9.Calibration CoeiEcients (conthned)

‘l&t Description Measured Value Measurement
(aB) Uncertainty
IdH)
Reverse Direction
Trans. Tracking 300 kHz-1.3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.006
Trans. Tracking 1.3 GHz-3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.009
Trans. Tracking 3 GHz-6 GHz f 2.5 i 0.021

Forward Direction
Load Match 300 kHz-1.3 GHz 2 18 i 0.1
LoadMatch 1.3 GHz-3 GHz 2 16 i 0.2
Load Match 3 GHz-6 GHz > 14 i 0.2

F&verse Direction
Directivity 300 kHz-1.3 GHz 1% i 0.9
Directivity 1.3 GHz-3 GHz > 30 i 0.8
Directivity 3 GHz-6 GHz 2 25 i 0.8

Reverse Direction
Source Match 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz 1 16 i 0.2
Source Match 1.3GHz-3GHz >_ 16 i 0.2
Source Match 3GHz-6GI-h 2 14 i 0.3

Reverse Direction
Refl. Tracking 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.001
Fkfl. Trsckjng 1.3GHz-3GHz i 1.5 i 0.005
R&l. Tracking 3GHz.-6GI-h i 2.5 i 0.020

2b-10 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t Record (10 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Iewlett-Packard Company
llodel HP 8763E Option 006 Report Number

kid Number Date

b) 11. System Trace Noise

Frequency Bati0 Measnred Specification Mtasurement
WW V&he Uncertainty

3 A/R (Magnitude) ~0.006dBlTUS i 0.001 dB

6 A/R (Magnitude) 5 0.010 dB mls i 0.001 m
6 AIR (P-1 5 0.0700 mw i 0.01 0
3 AIR (P-1 5 0.03v mls i 0.01 o
3 B/R (Magnitude) ~0.006dBrmS i 0.001 dB
6 B/R (Magnitude) 5 0.010 dB rms i 0.001 dB
6 B/R (P-1 5 o.070° rms i 0.01 o
3 B/R (P-1 5 o.03s” ml8 i 0.01 o

bb 12. lkst Port Input Impedance

‘lbst Description matPort Return Loss Speciilcation Measurement
(aB) m Uncertainty
(aB)

300 kHz-1.3 GHz Port 2 2 18 i 1.5

1.3 GHz-3 GHz Port 2 1 16 i 1.5
3 GHz-6 GBz Port 2 1 14 i 1.0

300 kHz-1.3 GHz Port 1 > 18 i 1.6

1.3 GHz-3 GHz Port 1 1 16 i 1.5
3 GHz-6 GBz Port 1 >_ 14 i 1.0

PerformanceTest Record 2b-11

 HP 8753E Performance lkst Record (11 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Eewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8766E Option 696 Report Number

SerialNumber Date

bb 18. ‘l&t Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy

G F IG - 4
lb& Port 8496A lkst Port Expected Dynamic spec. Mea&
Input Power Attn. Measurement Measnrement &c-y (aB) Uncer.
(aBm) WI WV (correctea) (celculated) WI
(aB)
lbtPort2
- 10 0 5 0.033 i 0.008
-2o(Refl 10 0.000 <0.020 i 0.008
- 30 20 < 0.031 i 0.008
-40 30 5 0.042 i 0.008
-50 40 5 0.057 i 0.008
- 60 50 5 0.098 i 0.017
- 70 60 5 0.247 i 0.017
-80 70 5 0.725 i 0.017
- 90 80 5 2.097 i 0.017
- 100 90 5 6.399 i 0.027
l&t Port 1
- 10 0 5 0.033 i 0.008
-2ow-l 10 0.000 ~0.020 i 0.008
- 30 20 < 0.031 i 0.008
-40 30 5 0.042 i 0.008
-50 40 5 0.057 i 0.008
-60 50 5 0.098 i 0.017
- 70 60 < 0.247 i 0.017
- 80 70 5 0.726 i 0.017
- 90 80 5 2.097 i 0.017
- 100 90 5 5.399 i 0.027

2b-12 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t Record (12 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GEIz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
lode1 HP 8751E Option 006 Report Number

IerialNnmber Date

)) 14. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression

CW Frequency lkst Port MeasuredValue Specification Measar ement
WV VW Uncertainty

50 MHz Port 2 5 0.45 N/A

1GHz Port 2 5 0.45 N/A
2GHz Port 2 5 0.45 NIA
3GHz Port 2 5 0.45 NIA
4GHz Port 2 5 0.80 NIA
SGBZ Port 2 5 0.80 N/A
6GHz Port 2 5 0.80 NIA

5OMHZ Port 1 5 0.45 NIA

1GHz Port 1 5 0.45 NIA
2GHz Port 1 5 0.45 N/A
3GHz Port 1 5 0.45 NIA
4GHz Port 1 5 0.80 NIA
5GHz Port 1 5 0.80 NIA
GGHZ Port 1 5 0.80 NIA

Performance Test Record 2b-13

 HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t Record (13 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
BewletGPackard Company
Model HP 8755E Option 006 Report Number

Serial Number Date

bb 15. lbst Port Receiver Phase Compression

cw Frequency Test Port Measured Vshe Specification Measurement
Wi?m=) vw=-) Uncertainty

50 MHz Port 2 5 6O NIA

1GHz Port 2 5 6O NIA
2GI-h Port 2 5 6O N/A
3GHz Port 2 5 6O N/A
4GHz Port 2 5 7.50 N/A
5GHz Port 2 5 7.50 N/A
6GI-h Port 2 5 7.50 N/A

6OMHZ Port 1 5 6O NIA

1GHz Port 1 5 6O NIA
2GHz Port 1 5 6O N/A
3GHz Port 1 5 6’ NIA
4GHz Port 1 5 7.60 NIA
5GHz Port 1 5 7.50 N/A
GGHZ Port 1 5 7.60 NIA

2b-14 Performance Test Record

 HP 8753E Performance lkst Record (14 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8755E Option 666 Report Number

SerialNumber Date

)) 17. OntpntIInpnt Test Port Jhrmonics (Option 662 only)

Test Description Specilkation Measurement Value Meawrement
VW ww Uncertainty
(aB)
l&t Port output
IWlllOIliCS

2nd 5 25 i 1.5
3rd 5 25 i 1.5
Port 1 Input Harmonics
2nd 5 15 i 1.5
3rd 5 30 i 1.5
Port 2 Input Harmonics
2nd 5 15 i 1.5
3rd 5 30 i 1.5

Performance Test Record 2b-15

 HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t Record (15 of 15)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Elewlett-lkckard Company
Model J3P 8755E Option 666 Report Number

Serial Number Date

bb 18. ‘l&t Port Output Harmonics (Analyzers without Option 062)

Second Harmonic Fnnd8menta.l Specification Measurement Value Measurement
Frequency Frequency Gw ww UllCerh.illty
ow

100 MHz 50 MHz 5 25 i 1.6

1.0 GHz 500 MHz 5 25 i 1.6
2.4 GI-lz 1.2 GHz 5 25 i 1.6
3.2 GI-Iz 1.6 GI-lz 5 25 i 1.6
4.0 GBz 2.0 GBz 5 25 i 1.6
5.0 GI-Iz 2.5 G&a 5 25 i 1.6
6.0 GBz 3.0 GBz 5 25 i 1.6
Third Harmonic
PreqnencY
300 MB2 100 MHz 5 25 i 1.6
1.2 GBz 400 MHz 5 25 i 1.6
2.7 GHz 900 MHz 5 25 i 1.6
3.3 GHz 1.1 GHz 5 25 i 1.6
4.8 GI-lz 1.6 GHz 5 25 i 1.6
6.0 GBz 2.0 GHz 5 25 i 1.6

2b-16 PorfonnanceTest Record

 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
This chapter has the following adjustment procedures:
q A9 Switch Positions
q Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
q Source Prettme Default Correction Constants (Test 45)
q Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)
0 Source Pretune Correction Constants (lest 48)
q RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
q IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51)
q ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)
• Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
0 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
q Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55)
q Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56)
q Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58)
q EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure
q Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure
0 Loading Firmware
q Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
q Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
q High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
q Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
q Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment
q Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants

Adjustments and Correstion Constants 3-l

 Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753E
lhble 3-l lists the additional service procedures which you must perform to
ensure that the instrument is working correctly, following the replacement of an
assembly. These procedures can be located in either Chapter 2 or Chapter 3.
mform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table.

‘able 3-l. Related Service Procedures

Replaced A@stments/ VerUlcation
Assembly Correction Constants (Ch. 3) (a. 2)
Al Front Panel None ServiCl?flestO
Keyboard Service Test 23
A2 Front Panel None Service lbt 0
[nterface Service l&t 23
service Test 12
‘Rst.s 66 - 80
k3 Source A9 Switch Positions lbt Port Output Frequency Range
Source Def CC (!&St 44) and Accuracy
Pretune Default CC (!&St 45) Test Port Output Power Accuracy
AnalogBusCC(Test46) ‘l&t Port Output Power Range and
Source Pretune CC (Test 48) Linearity
RF Output Power CC (‘l&t 47) Tl?st Port output/Input Hamlonics
Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (‘l&t 53) (Option 002 only)
Cavity OscUator Frequency CC (T&t 54)
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
EEPROM Backup Disk
WAS/A6 Samplers A9 Switch Positions MInimmu R Channel Level
Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (l&t 53) (if R sampler replaced)
IF Amplifier CC (‘l&t 51) %stPortCroWalk
EEPROM Backup Disk Test Port Input Frequency Response

A7 Pulse Generator A9 Switch Positions Test Port Input Frequency Response

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Test Port Frequency Range and
EEPROM lb&up Disk A-

A8 Post Regulator A9 Switch Positions Service l&t 0

Cavity Oscillabr Frequency CC (l&t 54) Check A8 test point voltages
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
EEPROM Backup Disk

3-2 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 ‘able 3-l. Related Service Procedures (2 of 3)
Replaeed Adjnstmentsl Verification
Assembly Correction constallts (ch. 3) w. 2)
A9 CPU A9 Switch Positions Operator’s Check
FEPROM Backup Load Firmware Service l&t 21
Disk Available) CC Retrieval Service l&t 22
Serial Number CC (‘I&t 65)
Option Number CC (Test 56)
A9 CPU A9 Switch Positions Test Port Output Frequency Range
FEPROM Backup Lead Firmware andAccuracy
Disk Not Available) Serial Number CC (l&t 56) ‘I&t Port Output Power Accuracy
Option Number CC (‘Pzst 66) lkst Port Output Power Range and
Source Def CC (lkst 44) Linearity
Pretune Default CC (‘l&t 45) Test Port Receiver Dynamic Accuracy
Am&gBusCC(%st46) l&t Port Input Frequency Response
Cal Kit Default (‘kst 67)
Source Pretune CC (T&t 48)
RF Output Power CC (‘I& 47)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (lkst 63)
ADC Linearity CC (‘&St 62)
IF Amplitler CC (lbst 51)
Cavity OsciIlator Frequency CC (Test 54)
EEPROM Backup Disk
A10 Digital IF A9 Switch Positions ‘I&t Port Input Noise FIoor Level
Analog Bus CC (‘I&t 46) l&t Port CrossbE
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (lbst 53) System Trace Noise
ADC Linearity CC (‘l&t 52)
IF Amplifler CC (lkst 61)
EEPROM Backup Disk
All Phase Lock A9 Switch Positions Minimum R Channel Level
AnalogBusCC(‘Ibst46) l&t Port Output Prequency Range
Pretune Default CC (lbst 45) andAccuracy
Source Pretune CC @St 4s)
EEPROM Backup Disk
Al2 Reference A9 Switch Positions l&t Port Output Frequency Range
II&h/Low Band Transition and Accuracy
Frequency Accuracy
EEPROM Backup Disk

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-3

 ‘lhble 3-1. Related Service Procedures (3 of 3)
l&placed Awtments/ Verification
Al9fU?mbly Correction chlstants (ch. 3) (a. 2)
Al3 Fractional-N A9 switch Positions lbst Port Output Frequency Range
(dog) Fractional-N Spur and and Accuracy
FM Sideband
EEPROM Hackup Disk
Al4 Fractional-N A9 Switch Positions lbst Port Output Frequency Range
UWW Fractional-N Frequency Range and Accuracy
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance
and FM sideband
EEPROM Hackup Disk
Al5 Preregulator None Self-l&t.
Al6 Rear Panel None Iutemal l&t 13,
Interface Rear Panel
Al7 Motherboard None Observation of Display
lksts60-80
Al8 Display None Observation of Display
‘lksta 06 - 80
A19 Graphics System None Observation of Display
Processor R&3 59 - 80

A20 Disk Drive none none

A21 lbst Port Coupler RF Output Power CC (Ibst 47) l&t Port cnxstalk
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Test Port Frequency Response
A22 lbst Port Coupler Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) ‘lbst Port Cromtalk
l
lbst Port Frequency Response

A23RdAssyLED none Self-Test (Chapter 4)

A24 Transfer Switch none Rst Port cromialk
A26 7ht Set Interface none Self-l&t (Chapter 4)

A26 H&h Stability Frequency Accuracy Adjustment !lbst Port Frequency Range
Frequency Reference (Option lD5) ~AccuTacy
* Hewlett-Packard verSes source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 source output
performance is typical.

34 Adjustments and Correction Constants

A9 Switch Positions
1. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
2. Set the analyzer on its side.
3. Remove the two lower-rear comer bumpers from the bottom of the
instrument with the T-10 TORX screwdriver.
4. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge, using a T-15
TORX screwdriver.
5. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
6. Move the switch as shown in Figure 3-l:
w Move the A9 switch to the Alter position before you run any of the
correction constant adjustment routines. This is the position for altering
the analyzer’s correction constants.
w Move the A9 switch to the Normal position, after you have run correction
constant adjustment routines. This is the position for normal operating
conditions.
7. Reins&R the bottom cover, but not the rear bumpers

Adjustments and Correstion Constants 3-5

 A9 CPU Assembly

Normal Mode Alter Mode Rocker Slide

sga me

Figure 3-1. A9 Correction Constants Switch

8. Reconnect the power line cord and switch on the instrument.

3-6 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Source Default Correction Constants (‘kst 44)
Analggm- warmup time: 30 minutes.
This internal adjustment routine writes default correction constants for the
source power accuracy.
.; . :. . . . . . . / . . . . . . z.:. . . . . . . :.y ........................ ................... .....................
1. press CpzJ (22) ;$@$$~~:,~j@@ ~~~~: L44) Lxl] .... j&@$.
2... ... . . . . . . . cw.. . . . . . . .._- _;;-.. . . ...- T. . . . . . . .._. .. .. .. . ._.. ._. . . . _i....... _. . Li... . . . . . . : : . ._ . . .-... . _ . . :.::.i./..ii. . . .
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
H If the analyzer displays *Source Def DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
w If the analyzer displays *Source Def FAIL, refer to Chapter 7, “Source
Troubleshooting. n

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-7

-

Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (X&t 45)

Anulgzm warmup time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock
pretuning accuracy.
...... . . . . . .:. . . .:.:.: : , : : :.: .:~~~~~~~~;~~::~~~~~~~~: .........................
1. press (=I L-1 ......... @ Ixl) im. ‘;$J$x. :*i.
.....................
:../ . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.. . . . . . . . . . . .._. ; A.s.zu>>>.L.L . . . . . . . 2. . . .A . . .

2. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:

n If the analyzer displays Pretune Def DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
n If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7, “Source
Troubleshooting. ’

3-8 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Analog Bus Correction Constants (‘I&t 46)
Aruzlgmr warmup time: 30 minutes.
This procedure calibrates the analog bus by using three reference voltages
(ground, + 0.37 and +2.5 volts), then stores the calibration data as correction
constants in EEPROMs.

2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:

n If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
n If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor FAIL, refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control
Troubleshooting. n

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-8

Source Pretune Correction Constants (Tkst 48)
An.u&er warmup time: 30 minutes.
This procedure generates pretune values for correct phase-locked loop
operation.

2. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:

w If the analyzer displays Pretune Cor DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
n If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7, “Source
Troubleshooting. n

3-l 0 Adjustments and Correction Constants

RF Output Power Correction Constants (T&t 47)
Required Equipment and lbols
Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 437B or HP 438A
HP-IB Cable . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10833A
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control ‘Ihble Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797
Additional Required Equipment for 5Oll Analyzers
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8482A
Power Sensor (for Option 006 analyzers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A
Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A
Additional Eequired Equipment for 750 Analyzers
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8483A Option HO3
Analgger warmup Time: 30 minutes.
This procedure adjusts several correction constants that can improve the output
power level accuracy of the internal source. They are related to the power
level, power slope, power slope offset, and the ALC roll-off factors among
others.
1. If you just completed “Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants
(Test 53),” continue this procedure with step 8.

. . . . . . . : : -: x : : : : .: “:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:~~:: : : : : :.:.:. ~;~, .~. ..<<~~~~~~,“~~~~~. : ??2&

3. &ess m ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~. me defa,& power
.. L.:.,.> __/_.;~i....-. . . _i___ _. . .__i . . . . . .-.7._::::c. . :. .a . . . . . . . . . . z?.. .vs. >. ~.. ;. . . .._G..
meter address is 13. Refer to the power meter manual as required to
observe or change its HP-B3 address
4. Press ~~~~~~~~~~~~. . . . . . . to . . toggle between *e 438A/437 and 436A
c ,,
power meters. Choose the appropriate model number.

Note If you are using the HP 438A power meter, connect the
HP 8482A power sensor to channel A, and the HP 8481A power
sensor to channel B.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-11

Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry
.f ‘_’ .$ ” ,/ .“? .~. ~., . ..., ; .,. ._ _. . . .
5. Press @--+q ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~..;~~~~3..
. , . ~..y..,O.....~.~. ‘~.~ ~. ~.~.. ~.L~ ~.~u.,~;~.:~,. <<<.z.w; ... XL. zi. . __ i_i. .i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.
: : . : .z ~ .: ;.:~:. :.~.; .: : .:~: :. : . . I . :. : :. .: .: .“i- “,:,..:.:. ;.,&~. . . . . . .__,
. ..;I.;.:. .,
~~:,~~~~~~;.~~~~~~:~~. to access the calibration fador menu for power

sensor A (HP 8482A for a 500 analyzer, or HP 8483A Option HO3 for a 75Q
analyzer).
6. Zero and calibrate the power meter and power sensor.
7. Build a table of up to 55 points (55 frequencies with their calibration
factors). ‘lb enter each point, follow these steps:

b. Input a frequency value and then press the appropriate key (@J, m,
or @I).
_..; _ ..,. ~ ,/ ._ . .

c. Press ~.~~~.~~~~ ad enter the cabration fador percentage eat

corresponds to the frequency you entered.

The cal factor and frequency values are found on the back of the sensor.
If you make a mistake, press a and re-enter the correct value.

Note The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu:

allows you to select a frequency point.

allows you to edit or change a previously entered
value.
allows you to delete a point from the sensor cal
factor table.
allows you to add a point into the sensor cal
factor table.
allows you to erase the entire sensor cal factor
table.
allows you to complete the points entry of the
sensor cal factor table.

3-12 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 . . *.
8. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Press ~~~l~,~~~~~~~~~~,~ri,.j
: . .: . . .. . . . . . . s. . . . . A2 .... .: . /... .A .>.I .A. SW; .> : .i .T to create
a power sensor calibration table for power sensor B (HP 8481A), using the
softkeys mentioned above.
9. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-13

 HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 006

HP 4388
POWER METER

PORT 2

HP 8481A HP 8482A
POWER POWER
SENSOR SENSOR
3 - 6GHz 300KHz - 3GHz HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

PORT 2

HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
\*
/’

HP 438A
POWER METER

HP-B h

sg631e

Figure 3-2. RF Output Correction Constants ‘kst Setup for the HP 8753E

3-14 Adjustments and Correction Constants

11. Press .~~, ~~~ and ~ at the prompt to alter *e correction
.:. + L.~..:...:...:..:. L . ;..:. .._.......................
constants.

12. Follow the ~s~&ions at the prompts and press ~~~~~~

*

13. When the analyzer completes the test, observe the display for the results:
n If you see DONE, press m and you have completed this procedure.
n If you see FAIL, re-run this routine in the following order:
a. Press-(Preset).
b. Repeat the “Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)” procedure.
c. Repeat the “RF’ Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)”
procedure.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-15

IF Amplifier Correction Constants (‘I&t 61)
Required Equipment and ‘lbols
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797
Additional Required Equipment for 50 ohm Analyzers
RF Cable - (5OQ) 24-inch, APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779
Additional Required Equipment for 75Q Analyzers
RF Cable - (750) 24-inch, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408
Anulgz~warrnupTime: 30 minutes.
These correction constants compensate for possible discontinuities of signal
greater than -30 dBm.
1. Connect the RF cable from Port 1 to Port 2 of the analyzer.

3. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:

z If DONE is displayed, you have completed this procedure.
w If FAIL is displayed, check that the RF cable is COMeCted from Port 1 to
Port 2. Then repeat this adjustment routine.
w If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine, refer to the
“Digital Control Troubleshooting” chapter.

3-l 6 Adjustments and Correction Constants

ADC Offset Correction Constants (‘I&t 52)
Analyzer warmup tim.e: 30 minutes.
These correction constants improve the dynamic accuracy by shifting small
signals to the most linear part of the ADC quantizing curve.

Note This routine takes about three minutes.

2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:

w If the analyzer displays ADC Of 8 Cor DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
w If the analyzer displays ADC Of 8 Cor FAIL, refer to the “Digital Control
Troubleshooting” chapter.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-17

Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants
(%?st 53)
Required Equipment and Tools
Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP 437B or HP 438A
HP-IB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10833A
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control Mat and Earth Ground Wire . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 9300-0797
Additional Required Equipment for 500 Analyzers
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8482A
Power Sensor (for Option 006 analyzers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A
Cable, (509) 24-inch, APC-7 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 81204779
Adapter APC-7 to Type-N(f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A
Additional Required Equipment for 75Q Analyzers
Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8483A Option HO3
Cable, (75ohm)24-inch, Type-N (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8120-2408
Armlgzer wamup time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment procedure corrects the overall flatness of the microwave
components that make up the analyzer receiver and test separation sections.
This is necessary for the HP 8753E to meet the published test port flatness.
1. If you just completed “Source Correction Constants (Test 47),” continue this
procedure with step 8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. ~~~~ m ~~~~~~~~~.~ ,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~. me default power
_.:._:. _.i . .__j::::i...~ .:. : : : ~.M. . . x.>. _/,. . . L..& -_- . __.. . . -~: : ~~:~~ .A.T.A.T.A.ii. . ..~ .~ .~ .~ .~ ~. ~. ~ . . .
meter address is 13. Refer to the power meter manual as required to
observe or change its HP-IB address.
4. Press ~~~~~~~~~~~~., to toggle between the 438A/437 md 436A
. ~ ~ ~ ;~ .~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ . _ i: :. .......t.........
. ;._....................,..._...._........_. - . _, . .: rF:.-. . -.-. . . . . -. . . . .
power meters. Choose the appropriate model number.

Note If you are using the HP 438A power meter, connect the
HP 8482A power sensor to channel A, and the HP 8481A power
sensor to channel B.

3-l 8 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry
/..;..- _/i . . . . . :. ....:..
5. press w $j@~. ,@f# ~~~~~~X~~~. ~~~~~~~~~~,~sT~~~~
., ,................
.....__..........._.............. .._. .:.:.._ .: Yi..l........ Li.......... .w>:> ......L_.> .:..:.::....A. . ... . A.::. . . . ;;;>2.. i..z~..i
.: ..;. . :z: I $ .T:.:::.::. . ,. : :.:;:<.: .:;:.:;:.: .:. . . ......
... .”
. . ~;~~~~~;~-~ :“-...c:: .._............
~~~:~~~~~~.~~~~~aR’ 4; to access the calibration factor menu for power
sensor A (HP 848219 for 5OQ analyzers, or HP 8483A Option HO3 for 75 ohm
analyzers).
6. Build a table of up to 55 points (55 frequencies with their calibration
factors). To enter each point, follow these steps:

b. Input a frequency value and then press the appropriate key (m, m,
or Ck/m).
:.:, ,. .,.,. .: .:
c. Press j$X@% and enter the calibration factor percentage that corresponds
to the frequency you entered.
The cal factor and frequency values are found on the back of the sensor.
If you make a mistake, press B and re-enter the correct value.
d. Press @j#; to compIete the data entry for each point,
- . _. . - . _. .

Note The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu:
:.:y . ;.: .: ,.:~. ~.: ,. .: ‘:
~$$@J$iE!J$ allows you to select a frequency point.
$iF
. . . . . . . . . . ___.. . allows you to edit or change a previously entered value.
;@w allows you to delete a point from the sensor cal
factor table.
b.&DE
._<. . .+.: . . .i allows you to add a point into the sensor cal factor table.
~~;~~~~~~~~ allows you to erase the entire sensor cal factor
table.
.&FE
_: . i>>;U;. : . .:~. allows you to complete the points entry of the sensor
cal factor table.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-l 9

 7. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Zero and calibrate the power meter
ad HP 8481A power sensor. ‘J’&n press ~~~.~~~~~~:~~~~~~.~::~~;- . ii.~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.~.~.~: ; ._............... _ _.. :
......i.. ....2x.. . ii~. . ~.~.~.~.~.~.~ ....z i
to meate
a power sensor calibration table for power sensor B (HP 8481A), using the
softkeys mentioned above.

Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz

9. PressLcenter_)(TJ@FJ(3&J(%GJIM_U.
: : ;:;: . . . ;. +:>>;;>;.;,;, .;: ~~~~.~~:~~~ ~~~, ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~.
10. Press Ical] ~~~~~
. _;. ;. >;.>A.... .: i . . s. . . . .-. . . .~. . . . . .~. . . . . ~_~~ .A.. .A . . A.. . >.~ i . . . _.. . . - . _ -...- _.._. . _ ~~~~-.: :. w.Le~.2 .............>.; .A . . . . ii. . .A .: :. -.: : i_. ~.G.~~~.i .......ii. : :.in. . . . ._. . .
11. Connect the 24 inch cable from Port 1 to Port 2, as shown in Figure 3-3.

HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

Figure 3-3. First Connections for Insertion Loss Measurement

_ ,. .,. ,. _
12. press i$&$&.. and then :~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ when the analyzer is done
measuring the through.
_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to Save *e calibration aat you just
13. fiess [W) ~~~~~~~~

made.
14. Make the connections as shown in Figure 3-4.

3-20 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 006

HP 4388
POWER METER

HP-B

PORT 2

HP 8481A HP 8482A
POWER POWER
SENSOR SENSOR
3 - CGHz 300KHz - 3GHz HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

PORT 1 PORT 2
I

HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

HP 8482A
POWER
SENSOR

Figure 3-5. Connections for Sampler Correction Routine

3-22 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 . _ . . _. _ . , _
13. Press .~&+$&@#‘$ to start the test. This part of the test will take about seven
minutes.
n If the analyzer displays Sampler Cor - FAIL, check the following:
a. The HP-IB address of your power meter is set at 13. Then rerun this
routine (“Sampler Correction Constants Routine”).
b. The HP 8482A power sensor is connected to Port 1. Rerun this routine
(‘Sampler Correction Constants Routine “).
19. For Option 006 Instruments Only: When the analyzer displays CONNECT
6 GHz SENSOR B TO PORT 1, make the connections as shown in Figure 3-6.
Then press .@WJ~.
_ . _. . . . . . . . . -. -. This part of the test will take about 20 seconds.

HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 006

POWER SENSOR

Figure 3-6. Connections for Sampler Correction at 6 GHz

20. When the analyzer displays CONNECT <3 GHz SENSOR A TO PORT 2, make the
connections as shown in Figure 3-7.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-23

 HP 4388
POWER METER

HP 8481A HP 8482A
POWER POWER
SENSOR SENSOR
3 - 6GHr 300KHr 3GHr

HP 0403A
POWER
SENSOR
( O P T I O N H03)

HP I3753E \ J
NETWORK ANALYZER

POWER
SENSOR

k J sg636e

Figure 3-7. Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2

3-24 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 . ; : . . : . . . . .,
21. press ~~cla~#B$.,- This Pa of the test a t&e about 10 hues.
22. For Option 606 Instruments Only: When the analyzer displays CONNECT 6
GHz SENSOR TO PORT 2, make the connections as shown in Figure 3-8. Then
press ~~~~~. This part of the test m t*e about $3)
. . _. . _. . . . . . . . seconds.

HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 006

POWER SENSOR

sg637e

Figure 3-8. Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2 for 6 GHz

23. When the analyzer displays CONNECT PORT 1 TO PORT 2, make the
connections of the second through cable (of which you have determined its
insertion loss) as shown in F’igure 3-9.

HP 6753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

UC
PORT 1 PORT 2

SECOND THRU CABLE

sg638e

Figure 3-9. Connections for the Second Through Cable

24.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-25

25. Enter the insertion loss of the through cable (determined in step 15) and
press .:~~~~~~.
. . . . .. . i. : :. ~. . .~. . . . ~. .~i. .~; . . . ~. For example, if the insertion loss of the through cable at
1 GHz is found to be 0.25 dB, then press 1.25) @.
26. When the analyzer completes the test, observe the display for the results:
n If you see Sampler Cor - DONE, you have completed this procedure.

n Ifyousee Sampler Cor - FAIL, it is necessary to adjust the sampler gain

offset values, which are stored in EEPROM.

b. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing $jpKK: (46) a).
............................. .y:. _ ., ‘. ~. ~.~.~,~,. . . . .... .: : :.
C- Access the second address by pressing ~~~~~~~-:~~~~ c-1
Ixl).
d. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing $&%I,@ @
@.
e. Press (FEZ] for the analyzer to use the new values.
f. Repeat the “Sampler Correction Constants Routine” starting at step 16.
n If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, refer to Chapter
7, “Source Troubleshooting. n

d. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing @$&I$: (248_)
jxl.
e. Press B for the analyzer to use the new values

3-26 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 f. Repeat the “Sampler Correction Constants Routine” starting at step 16.
n If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, refer to Chapter
7, “Source Troubleshooting. n
B Channel Sampler

b- Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing :@I& (66) (xl.
....
C- Access the second address by pressing ;~~~~~~:~~~~~~:,~
. . . . ;a :. ;.. . ..i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~. . . . ~. . . . . . ~. . . . .~. . ~. . . . .- .~~ -. . . _s. (jj)
(QiJ
_ . ,: .,
de Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing @$l$R 1128J
(XJ
e. Press w for the analyzer to use the new values.
f. Repeat the “Sampler Correction Constants Routine” starting at step 16.
w If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, refer to Chapter
7, “Source Troubleshooting. n

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-27

Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants
(Ykst 54)
Required Equipment and ‘lbols
Low-pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 91350198
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP PM 9300-0797
Additional Required Equipment for 50 ohm Analyzers
Adapter APC-7 to 3.5 mm (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1746
Adapter APC-7 to 3.5 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1747
RF Cable Set APC-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 118571)
Additional Required Equipment for 758 Analyzers
Adapter APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1745
Adapter APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1750
RF Cable Set 503, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11851B
Minimum Loss Pad 50ohm75Q to (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 11852B
Analyzer warmup Time: 30 minutes.
The nominal frequency of the cavity oscillator is 2.982 GHz, but it varies with
temperature. This procedure determines the precise frequency of the cavity
oscillator at a particular temperature by identifying a known spur

Note You should perform this procedure with the recommended

filter, or a filter with at least 50 dB of rejection at 2.9 GHz,
and a passband which includes 800 MHz. The filter makes spur
identification substantially faster and more reliable.

With the filter, you need to distinguish between only two spurs, each of which
should be 10 dB to 20 dB (3 to 4 divisions) above the trace noise.
Without the filter, you need to distinguish the target spur between four or five
spurs, each of which may be 0.002 to 0.010 dB (invisible to 2 divisions) above or
below the trace noise.

3-26 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Perform the first five steps of the procedure at least once for familiarization
before trying to select the target spur (especially if you are not using a filter).
1. Connect the equipment shown in Figure 3-10.

HP 8753E HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

LOW PASS F ILTER LOW PASS FILTER

ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER

sg639e

Figure 3-10.
Setup for Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant Routine

During this adjustment routine, you will see several softkeys:

sweeps the current frequency span; you may

press it repeatedly for additional sweeps of the
current frequency span.
sweeps the next frequency span (2 MHz higher).
enters the value of the marker (which you have
placed on the spur) and exits the routine.
exits the routine.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-29

 3. Press .~~~~~~,: to sweep the first frequenw span three times. Each new

2/..:~...=.:..:..:..~.=;~~..... .-:.;.: .......>........<.

span overlaps the previous span by 3 MHz (the center frequency increases
by 2 MHz; the span is 5 MHz). Therefore, anything visible on the right half
of the screen of one set of sweeps ,. . will appear on the left half or center of
the screen when you press :#XEg.
... _ _
4. Press #jTX~
^.. . . . . . . . -.._.i repeatedly. Watch the trace on each sweep and try to spot the
target spur With the Alter, the target spur will be one of two obvious spurs
(see Figure 3-11). Without the alter (not recommended), the target spur
will be one of four or five less distinct spurs as shown in Figure 3-12 and
Figure 3-13. When the center frequency increases to 2994.999 MHz, and
you have not “selected” the target spur, Cav Osc Cor FAIL will appear on
the display.

Spur Search Procedure with a Filter

5. press ~~~~ ~~ ~~~~~ and the o*er softkeys as required to
. : .. . .’ ..E. _i... . . - -. a .. .-/1. . ~. . . . Z.3. .~.~. . . .~. . .~. .~. . . . . . . . .~. .~. . . . . . .~. .~. .
.: i.__..__. -.-
-...-
observe and mark the target spur The target spur will appear to the right
of a second spur, similar to Figure 3-l 1.
6. Rotate~-
the front
y panel knob to position the marker on the spur and then
press ;@&&$$f.

3-30 Adjustments and Correction Constants

7. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:
H If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
H If the analyzer does not display DONE, repeat this procedure.
w If the analyzer continues not to display DONE, refer to Chapter 7, “Source
Troubleshooting. n

Spurs Search Procedure without a Filter

<. ..s.: ~~~T..
8. Press ~~~~~~~~~ &$$ ~~~~~~ and the other softkeys a required to
:.i ;:. . :x . . . . . . . . :::.::.ti.i ;.::L%..- .:::.+<:..< i... -:;....<<:..;.;. ___........... .../.. : . +. .<<. ... .d<.. .,.
observe and mark the target spur
9. The target spur will appear in many variations Often it will be difficult to
identify positively; occasionally
. ;. ” / ; (.~:;+<E;~;. fgit will be nearly impossible to identify. Do
not hesitate to press $%@I?$~~ as many times as necessary to thoroughly
inspect the current span.
The target spur usuaIly appears as one of a group of four evenly spaced
spurs as in Figure 3-12. The target spur is on the right most spur (fourth
from the left). On any particular sweep, one, any, or all of the spurs may be
large, smalI, visible, invisible, above or below the reference line.

CENTER 2 983.000 000 mz

Figure 3-12. Typical Display of Four Spurs without a Filter

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-31

On occasion the largest spur appears as one of a group of five evenly spaced
spurs as shown in F’igure 3-13. The target spur is again the fourth from the left
(not the fifth, right-most spur).

Figure 3-13. ‘Ihrget Spur Is Fourth in Display of Five spurs

Figure 3-14 shows another variation of the basic four spur pattern: some up,
some down, and the target spur itself almost indistinguishable.

3-32 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 CENTER 2 983.000 000 MHz SPAN 5.000 000 mr

Figure 3-14. ‘Ihrget Spur Is Almost Invisible

10. Rotate.) the

/,.;; front
,. ,. ,. ,. ,. panel knob to position the marker on the target spur. Then
press &@&&E@ and observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment
routine:
w If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
w If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7, “Source
Troubleshooting. n

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3.33

Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55)
Analyzer warmup time: 5 minutes.
This procedure stores the analyzer serial number in the A9 CPU assembly
EEPROMs.
Caution Perform this procedure ON= if the A9 CPU assembly has been
replaced.

1. Record the ten character serial number that is on the HP 8753E rear panel
identification label.
2.
3. Enter the serial number with an external keyboard or by rotating the front
panel knob to position the arrow below each character
.,: ., , :, of the instrument
s&d nu&er, ad then pressing ~~~:~~~ to enter ea& letter. Enter

a total of ten characters: four digits, one letter, and five 9nal digits.
press ~~~~~~~ if made a m&&e.
.* i - . _ - .: . .- -
you

4. press &id when you have mshed entering the title.

:..---::...
Caution You CMOT correct mistakes after you perform step 5, unless
you contact the factory for a clear serial number keyword.
Then you must perform the “Options Correction Constants”
procedure and repeat this procedure.

334 Adjustments and Correction Constants

6. Observe the analyzer for the results of the routine:
n If the analyzer displays the message Serial Cor DONE, you have
completed this procedure.
l If the analyzer does not display DONE, then either the serial number that
you entered in steps 3 and 4 did not match the required format or a serial
number was already stored. Check the serial number recognized by the
analyzer:

b. Look for the serial number displayed on the analyzer screen.

c. Rerun this adjustment test.
n If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, contact your
nearest HP sales or service office.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-35

Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56)
This procedure stores instrument option(s) information in A9 CPU assembly
EEPROMs. You can also use this procedure to remove a serial number, with the
unique keyword, as referred to in “Serial Number Correction Constant.”
1. Remove the instrument top cover and record the keyword label(s) that are on
the display assembly. Note that eachkeyword is for each option installed in
the instrument.
w If the instrument does not have a label, then contact your nearest
Hewlett-Packard sales or service office. Be sure to include the full serial
number of the instrument.
2. press Is) (Displad --.-.-.-.__
&&&,, ..__..
$j$&J$ ;~~~~~~~.
.:.-.:. ;. -.- . _. - . _. . -_- . _ -._
3. Enter the keyword with an external keyboard or by rotating the front panel
knob to position the arrow below each character of the keyword, and then
pressing ‘~~~~~:~:, to enter each letter.
,./,. . . . . . ._., . ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. . ,. i_.
Press .~3~~~~~~.
,_. ,._i:., .~. .: ;._,.. ., ,. ../_
. .---.. . _;-_.,.,.,i . _ -., if you made a mistake.
4. Press ,,#bs:; when you have &-&hed entering the title.
/. ./. ii /i
.._.....................

Caution Do not confuse “I” with “1” or “0” with “0” (zero).

6. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:

n If the analyzer displays Option Cor DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
w If the analyzer has more than one option, repeat steps 2 through 5 to
install the remaining options.
n If the analyzer displays Option Cor FAIL, check the keyword used in step
3 and make sure it is correct. Pay special attention to the letters “I” or “O”,
the numbers “1” or “0” (zero). Repeat this entire adjustment test.
n If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine, contact your
nearest HP sales or service office.

3-36 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Initialize EEPROMs (T&t 58)
This service internal test performs the following functions:
n Destroys ail correction constants and all unprotected options
n Initializes certain EEPROM address locations to zeroes.
Note This routine till not alter the serial number or Options 002, 006
and 010 correction constants.

1. Make sure the A9 switch is in the alter position.

2.
3. Restore the analyzer correction constants in the EEPROMs:
n If you have the correction constants backed up on a disk, perform these
steps:

b. Use the front panel knob to highhght the filename that represents your
serial number.

n If you don’t have the correction constants backed up on a disk, run all the
internal service routines in the following order:
13 Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
0 Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 45)
q Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)
0 Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)
q Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants (Test 57)
II ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)
q RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
q Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
0 IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51)
0 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-37

EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure
Required Equipment and ‘Idols
3.5~inch Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 92192A (box of 10)
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797
The correction constants, that are unique to your instrument, are stored in
EEPROM on the A9 controller assembly. By creating an EEPROM backup disk,
you will have a copy of all the correction constant data should you need to
replace or repair the A9 assembly.
1. Insert a 3.5~inch disk into the analyzer disk drive.
2. If the disk is not formatted, follow these steps:
a* fiess I-, ~.~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~. _ . . . . ., ,. . , .; . . _
. _./-. A.: . .-. -. ~-. -. -. -~-. -. ~ .~.~.~.~ ~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~. ~.~. ~. ~.~.~; ~ . . .<:.: . <. _.“”. . - . _.. .c.._;_.. . . . . . i . . . . -. . . :. :. : :. .
/.../I./i
b. Select the format type:

n m format a DOS &.., select ~~~~~~~~~.

. -...- - -...-

. . . , . . . . ,. . . /i/ /, ,7;,;, ..I. .,. ;,. ., . ., , , :;. . :,. ;,~. /., ., :, i ,.:.i . T<<. -y;:.,,
3. press w i~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~ j#ff$$> i~~~3~;~~~~~~
~ .~. ~. ~. . . . . ~ ~.-
“..s.‘.” ~ :)’ : ~ p., i i i i . . .a . _. . . . -...-..-. ~ ~ . ” . -. -. . . .-I. . i. . -. . . . . .. _. .. . . . -. . . .j-;. _,,.. A._i__.i. ._,./.i, _;.,L/,. .;.~. .;,/,.,./ /. .” _...-.......
_;. ,_. ,.. _-,. .._;-.;;;., ., .., A.;. _,,Lwr. .:. :_;;~~~~.~~.3~A~.
.,.,_.,i . p - . _. .
Sa”e Reca,, ~~~~~ ~~~‘~~~~.~~~
:. : : : :.:. : . .: <=*;
L/1 ;is__:_~..__ F.:::::. : : + ~:L~~:~~~~~ ~;;=:; ; ;:;: : :._:. :~: . ;;;,;; . _: ~*,:,:,;

Note The analyzer creates a default file “PILEO”. The filename

appears in the upper-left comer of the display. The file type
“ISTATE( indicates that the file is an instrument-state with
EEPROM backup.

4.
5. :::” “~~:~,~:,~~~;~~~~~~ ~,~~;,:~;,, ..... :;.:;;;;; ,,.;& __ ._ ,:.

press i$gJ$ :‘~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~. Use the front panel

:... .:.
_._..........__................,........~................................ ..~.~ii:.~...i ...............s.?z.....z.............L.zz..............ii.....E..
z..:...... 2.2 ........?:......z.z.............z:..:....................~~_.~...................~..
knob and *~~~~~~ softkey (or an extemal keyboard) to rename

;.....;.;,., .;...~.,..,,.,.,.,., ..,.,v,., ,.,.,.,;.,.,.,.,.,.,.,~. ,.,....a /,. ......:::.;..........,............../.....

the file “PILEO” TO “N12345” where 12345 represents the last 5 digits of the
instrument’s serial number. (The first character in the filename must be a
letter.) When you are finished renaming the ille, press $@ij&

3-38 Adjustments and Correction Constants

5. Write the following information on the disk label:
n analyzer serial number
n today’s date
n “EEPROM Backup Disk”

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-38

Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure
Required Equipment and Tools
EEPROM Backup Disk
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control ‘Ihble Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797
By using the current EEPROM backup disk, you can download the correction
constants data into the instrument EEPROMs.
1. Insert the “EEPROM Backup Disk” into the HP 8753E disk drive.
2. Make sure the A9 switch is in the Alter position.
* p f!g;-~ :>+?$?q&:. pL+y .: : .: ) :.:::y , , ,
3. Press t-1 ‘~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~. Use the front panel knob
to highhght the IiIe “N12345” where N12345 represents the file name of the
EEPROM data for the analyzer. On the factory shipped EEPROM backup
disk, the filename is PILEl.
i. . . . :. :. v. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i. . ,. .“.“’. .:.: :. .:;: :;:j.~, ,~ ~ .~: :. : : .: .: .: . : : : : :~.: : : :
4. press Tm ~~~~~~~~~~ to download the come&ion constants data into
the instrument EEPROMs.
5. Perform “Option Numbers Correction Constant (Test 56). n
6. Press preset] and verify that good data was transferred to EEPROM by
performing a simple measurement.
7. Move the A9 switch back to its Normal position when you are done working
with the instrument.

340 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Loading Firmware
Required Equipment and ‘lbols
n Firmware disk for the HP 8753E
Anulgzzr warmup l%m: None required.
The following procedures will load firmware for new or existing CPU boards in
an HP 8753E network analyzer.

Loading Firmware into an Existing CPU

Use this procedure for upgrading firmware in an operational instrument whose
CPU board has not been changed.

Caution Loading hrmware will clear all internal memory.

Perform the following steps to save any instrument states that
are stored in internal memory to a floppy disk.
~:: :::: i .~~,a~~~ . . .;yf&+?& 7 FE i <:
1. press Iv) ~~~~~~~ I~~~;“~~~~~: im .
. . . . ~.~.....A........ ._. . .: . . ..A. . . . _~.. . . . . . . .i.: :. :.A. . . ... _.-.-....................-........-..-....--......... 5.. . . . . .w;. . . . .____.........- &
2. Select an instrument state md press ~~~~~~~~

..............................................._2 .../.......:..:: L.:::L:::::.:L -

4. If the instrument state file was not saved to disk with the
same name that it had while in internal memory, you may
wish to rename the file.
,. _ .,. _ ; .,.,., i.............
., ., ., ., ... .:... ....... . . . . . . . . . . : .:
Press ~~~~,~~.~~~~:~ ~~~,:~~~~.~~ enter the desired

,. ,

z%~,:.’ s: L i.

name, and press !#@ZA&.

.i ,.~. . . . ~ :. .iii.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each instrument state that you
wish to save.

1. Turn off the network analyzer.

2. Insert the lirmware disk into the instrument’s disk drive.
3. Turn the instrument on. The llrmware will be loaded automatically during
power-on. The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware
is loaded. The display will be blank during this time.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 341

 At the end of a successful loading, the LEDs for Channel 1 and Testport 1
will remain on and the display will turn on indicating the version of lirmware
that was loaded.

I.nCa13eofDifticulty
If the firmware did not load successfully, LED patterns on the front panel can
help you isolate the problem.
n If the following LED pattern is present, the firmware disk is not for use with
your instrument model. Check that the firmware disk used was for the
HP 8753E.

n If any of the following LED patterns are present, the firmware disk may be
defective.

LEDlhttern
CJIlCE2 B L T S
.
. .
. .
. . .
.
. .
. .
. . .
. .
. . .
. . .
. .
. . .

n If any other LED pattern is present, the CPU board is defective.

342 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Loading Firmware into a New CPU
Use this procedure to load firmware for an instrument whose CPU board has
been replaced.
1. Turn off the network analyzer.
2. Insert the firmware disk into the instrument’s disk drive.
3. Turn the instrument on. The firmware wilI be loaded automatically during
power-on. The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware
is loaded. The display will be blank during this time.
At the end of a successful loading, the LEDs for Channel 1 and Testport 1
will remain on and the display will turn on indicating the version of firmware
that was loaded.
Note After the llrmware has been loaded, the correction constants
must be restored. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-l (2 of 3) to identify the
service procedures required to restore (retrieve) or recreate the
correction constants.

In Case of Diflhlty
n If the lirmware did not load successfully, LED patterns on the front panel can
help you isolate the problem.
q If the following LED pattern is present, an acceptable hrmware filename
was not found on the disk. (The desired format for gnuware filenames is
87533-07. -02.) Check that the lirmware disk used was for the HP 87533.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 343

 q If any of the following LED patterns are present, the firmware disk may be
defective.

LED pattern
CElCE2 B L T 6
.
. .
. .
. . .
.
. .
. .
. . .
. .
. . .
. . .
l .
. . .

q If any other LED pattern is present, the CPU board is defective.

Note If Grmware did not load, a red LED on the CPU board will be
flashing.

n If the following LED pattern is present on the CPU board, suspect the disk
drive or associated cabling:
l l 0 0 l l 0 0

(front of instrument 4)

344 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 F N V C O ADJ
ADJUSTMENT HOLE

sg640e
Figure 3-15. Location of the FN VCO TUNJZ Adjustment

Figure 3-16. Fractioual-N Frequency Range Adjustment Display

345 Adjustments and Correction Constants

10. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment:
n If the marker value is less than 7, you have completed this procedure.
n If the marker value is greater than 7, readjust ‘TN VCO ADJ” to 7.
Then perform steps 2 to 10 to con&m that the channel 1 and channel 2
markers are stilI above and below the reference line respectively.
w If you cannot adjust the analyzer correctly, replace the Al4 board
assembly.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 347

Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
Required Equipment and ‘Idols
Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8563E
RF Cable, 500 Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 8120-4781
Non-metallic Adjustment lb01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8830-0024
Antistatic Wrist Strap . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control ‘lhble Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797
Additional Required Equipment for 5OQ Analyzers
Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11525A
Additional Required Equipment for 750 Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B
Anul~m warmup time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment sets the VCXO (voltage controlled crystal oscillator) frequency
to maintain the instrument’s frequency accuracy.
1. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and analyzer top cover
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-17.

348 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER HP 8563A

PORTI PORT2
I I

50R M P E - N C A B L E A S S E M B L Y

HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075 HP 8563A
SPECTRUM ANALYZER

PGRTl PORT?:
I I

sq641e

Figure 3-17. Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup

Note Make sure that the spectrum analyzer and network analyzer
references are not connected.

3. For Option lD5 Instruments Only: Remove the BNC-to-BNC jumper

that is connected between the “EXT REF” and the “10 MHz Precision
Reference,” as shown in Figure 3-19.
4. Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows:

Adjustments and Correction Constants 34

 5- On the HP 8753E, press @GZj @GG) :~~~~~~~,- @ Lc/n (or @ Lc/nl for
Option 006).
6. No adjustment is required if the spectrum analyzer measurement is within
the following specifications:
n &30 kHz for the HP 8753E
n f60 kHz for the HP 8753e, Option 006
Otherwise, locate the Al2 assembly (red extractors) and adjust the
VCXO ADJ (see Figure 3-18) for a spectrum analyzer center frequency
measurement within specifications.
7. Replace the Al2 assembly if you are unable to adjust the frequency as
specified. Repeat this adjustment test.

A12 R e f e r e n c e Assembly

Figure 3-18. Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment

Note To increase the accuracy of this adjustment, the following steps
are recommended.

8. Replace the instrument covers and wait 10 to 15 minutes in order to allow

the analyzer to reach its precise operating temperature.
9. Recheck the CW frequency and adjust if necessary.

3-50 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Instruments with Option lD5 Only
10. Reconnect the BNC-to-BNC jumper between the “EXT REF” and the “10
MHz Precision Reference” as shown in Figure 3-19.

ENC T O ENC HIGH STABILITY

JUMPER FREGUENCY ADJUST

\ /

sgb42e

Figure 3-19. High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location

11. Insert a narrow screwdriver and adjust the high-stability frequency

reference potentiometer for a CW frequency measurement within
specification.

In Case of Difficulty
Replace the A26 assembly if you cannot adjust the CW frequency within
specification.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-51

High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
&x&red Equipment and 9bols
Non-metalhc Adjustment lb01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8830-0024
Amlgzer warmup time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment centers the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator) of the Al2
reference assembly for high and low band operations.

3. Press m ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ (--& a (.., Illl @-&

4. Press (Scale L.1] Lxl_] and observe the VCO tuning trace:
n If the left half of trace = 0 flOO0 mV and right half of trace = 100 to
200 mV higher (one to two divisions, see Figure 3-20): no adjustment is
necessary.
n If the adjustment is necessary, follow these steps:
a. Adjust the VCO tune (see Pigure 3-21) to position the left half of the
trace to 0 f125 mV. The variable capacitor, C85, has a half-turn tuning
range if the Al2 Reference Board is part number 08753-60209, and
seven turns if the part number is 08753-60357. Be careful not to
overtighten and damage the seven-turn capacitor.
b. Adjust the HBLB (see Figure 3-21) to position the right half of the trace
125 to 175 mV (about 1 to 1.5 divisions) higher than the left half.
n Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” if you cannot perform the
adjustment.

3-52 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 I I I I I I I I 11 I
START ii.*00 000 mz STOP 21.OdO 000 MHZ

Figure 3-20. High/Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace

Al2 R e f e r e n c e A s s e m b l y

Figure 3-21. High/Low Band Adjustment Locations

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-53

Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and
FM Sideband Adjustment
Required Equipment and ‘lbols
Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8563E
HP-IB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10833A/B/G/B
RF Cable 50 ohm, Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 81204781
Cable, 509 Coax, BNC (m) to BNC (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 10503A
Non-metallic Adjustment lb01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8830-0024
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control Able Mat and Earth Ground Wire ............ HP P/N 9300-0797
Additional Required Equipment for 5013 Analyzers
Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . .., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11525A
Additional Required Equipment for 75 ohm Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B
Anulgm warmup time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment minimizes the spurs caused by the API (analog phase
interpolator, on the fractional-N assembly) circuits. It also improves the
sideband characteristics.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-22.
2. Make sure the instruments are set to their default HP-IB addresses:
HP 8753E = 16, Spectrum Analyzer = 18.

344 Adjustments and Correction Constants

 5Ofi, C O A X , BNI.

HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER EXT REF
WITH OPTION 075 1 INPUT

PORT1 PORT2
I I

NETWORK ANALYZER
WITH OPTION 075

Figure 3-22.
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup

3. Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows:

Reference Level OdBm
Resolution Bandwidth lOOI%
Center Frequency 676.145105 MHz
Spa 2.5 kHz

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-55

 4. On the HP 8753E, press LPreset] (i&) IF- l&J w @ m {&&!“I&Q..
. . . . .s . .T.:. :T: . . ... . . . . . . L.
(pzLmiqm.
5. Adjust the 100 kHz (R77) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum
analyzer. The minimum signal may, or may not, drop down into the noise
floor.

1OOkHr API1 API2 API3 API4

ORANGE (R77) (R35j (R43j (R45) CR471

Al3 F r a c t i o n a l - N A n a l o g A s s e m b l y

Figure 3-23. Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments

6. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.051105 MHz.
7. On the HP 8753e, press m ~~~~~~~
- . _. . ._. . . . __.. . @ZiZiiZ) m.
8. Adjust the API1 (R35) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum
analyzer.
9. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.007515 MHz.
1o. on the HP 8753E, press m ~~,~~ ‘-, ms

11. Adjust the API2 (R43) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum
analyzer.
12. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.003450 MHz.
_ _

13. ()n the HP 87533, press CMenu) ~~~~~; (676.ooo45) (MIII).

__i.,. . . . .,.,.,.,. . i _ .~ ....__..
.

14. Adjust the API3 (R45) for a nuII (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum
analyzer.

3-56 Adjustments and Correction Constants

15. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.003045 MHz.
16. On the HP 8753E, press (Menu) YmFY$$Q. c-1 m.

17. Adjust the API4 (R47) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum
analyzer.
ln Case of Difliculty
18. If this adjustment cannot be performed satisfactorily, repeat the entire
procedure. Or else replace the Al3 board assembly.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-57

Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment
Required Equipment and ‘Idols
BNC AIIigator Clip Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-1292
BNC-to-BNC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 8120-1840
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797
Anulgzer warmup time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment optimizes tracking between the YO (YIG oscillator) and the
cavity oscillator when they are frequency offset to avoid spurs. Optimizing
YO-cavity oscillator tracking reduces potential phase-locked loop problems.
1. Mate the adapter to the BNC cable and connect the BNC connector end to
AUX INPUT on the HP 8753E rear panel. Connect the BNC center conductor
alligator-clip to All TPlO (labeled 4 ERR); the shield clip to All TPl (GND)
as shown in Figure 3-24.

A l lTP1 A l lip10
BROWN GND @ERR UNLK CAV ADJ

A3 S o u r c e

Figure 3-24. Location of All Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments

3-58 Adjustments and Correction Constants

5. To make sure that you have connected the test points properly, adjust the
CAV ADJ potentiometer while observing the analyzer display. You should
notice a change in voltage.
6. Observe the phase locked loop error voltage:
w If “spikes” are not visible on the analyzer display (see Figure 3-25): no
adjustment is necessary.
n If “spikes” are excessive (see Figure 3-25): adjust the CAV ADJ
potentiometer (see Pigure 3-24) on the A3 source bias assembly to eliminate
the spikes.
n If the “spikes” persist, refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting.”

I i i i i i i i i i1

a) Acceptable b) Excessive
sg637s

Figure 3-25. Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-59

Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction
Constants
Aruzlyzer warmup Tim.&- None.
This procedure stores the instrument’s unprotected option(s) information in A9
CPU assembly EEPROMs.
1. Make sure the A9 switch is in the Alter position.
2. Record the installed options that are printed on the rear panel of the
analyzer.

4. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-2 for the address of each unprotected hardware option.
Enter theoraddress
enabled the speci&
disabled.forFollow installed
the address hardware
entry option
by ~~~~. that needs to be
o Lxl.

. Press f&!$$: L-1] (xl, then w to enable the option;

.;s/ , ,:;: .
. or, press :@m
-._._-. @ (XJ), then w to disable the option.
‘Ihble 3-2. PEEK/POKE Addressies
Hardware PEEK/POKE
Options Address

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all of the unprotected options that you want to
enable.

3-60 Adjustments and Correction Constants

6. After you have entered all of the instrument’s hardware options, press the
following keys:

7. View the analyzer display for the listed options

8. When you have entered all of the hardware options, return the A9 switch to
the Normal position.
9. Perform the “EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure” located on page 3-42.
In Case of DiiTiculty
If any of the installed options are missing from the list, return to step 2 and
reenter the missing option(s).

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-61

Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
The network analyzer has the capability of automating tasks through a
sequencing function. The following adjustment sequences are available via
Access HP on the World Wide Web.
n F’ractional-N kequency Range Adjustment (F’NADJ and FNCHK)
n High/Low Band Transition Adjustment (HBLBADJ)
n Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and F’M Sideband Adjustment (APIADJ)
You can download these adjustment sequences from the following URL:
http://vaw.tmo.hp.com/tmo/pia/component-test/PIATop/~glish/
comptest,support.htmI

How to Load Sequences from Disk

1. Place the sequence disk in the analyzer disk drive.

3. Select any or all of the following sequence liles by pressing:

..........ii ., / .:. : : _: :.,:.;. ;.:,.,. . /,.,.,.;. ;.a. . . .: . . .,. . .
. Select ~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~ you if want to load the file for the “kacti0nal-N
~. . . . _. . . . . . . . i. . . .: .: .: : . . ... ._;i~. . . . . . . . . ~~~.
Spur Avoidance and F’M Sideband Adjustment. n
...............................
. ‘&led ~~~~~~~~.~~~~ if you wmt to lOad the fle for the “High/Low
Band Transition Adjustment. n

3-62 Adjustments and Correction Constants

How to Set Up the Fractional-N Frequency Range
Adjustment
1. Remove the right-rear bumpers and right side cover. This exposes the
adjustment location in the sheet metal.
2. Press (iGZ-j ~~~~~-.~..E~~~
. ~. . . . . . . . . .-: : .: : .: -.. . . Ai . i.v.uA ... . . . . . ... A. . . .-. (where X is the sequence number).
3. Adjust the “F’N VCO TUNE” with a non-metallic tool so that the channel 1
marker is as many divisions above the reference line as the channel 2 marker
is below it.
. . . . . . . ’ :. . . . .
4. Press Ipreset] ?g#?jm@J ~.~@jK$&~ (where X is the sequence number).
n If the marker value is ~7, you have completed this procedure.
n If the marker value is >7, readjust “F’N VCO TUNE” to 7. Then repeat
steps 2,3, and 4 to conlirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers are
still above and below the reference line respectively.

How to Set Up the High/Low Band Transition

Adjustments
/ ,.; _ _ _ ;
l. Press B ~~~~:~~~~~?~~~ (where X is the sequence number).
2. Observe the VCO tuning trace:
n If the left half of trace = of1000 mV and right half of
trace = 100 to 200 mV higher (one to two divisions): no adjustment is
necessary.
w If the adjustment is necessary, follow these steps:
a. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and top cover, using a TORX
screwdriver.
b. Adjust the VCO tune (Al2 C85) to position the left half of the trace
to of125 mV. This is a very sensitive adjustment where the trace could
easily go off of the screen.
c. Adjust the HBLB (Al2 R68) to position the right half of the trace
125 to 175 mV (about 1 to 1.5 divisions) higher than the left half.

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-63

 n Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” if you cannot perform the
adjustment.

How to Set Up the Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and

FM Sideband Adjustment
1. Press B ~~~:~~~,~~~~~~’ (where X is the sequence number).

2. Remove the upper-rear comer bumpers and the top cover, using a TORX
screwdriver.
3. Follow the directions on the analyzer display and make alI of the API
adjustments.

Sequence Contents

Sequence for the High/Low Band Transition Adjustment

--Sequence HB~sets the hi-band to low-band switch point.-
PRESET
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
STARTllIWu
STOP 21 M/u
MEAS
ANALOG IN 22 xl (Al2 GND)
DISPLAY
DATA>MEM
DATA-MEM
MEAS
ANALOG IN 23 xl (VCO TUNE)
MKR11IWl.l
SCALELREF .l xl

3-64 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Sequences for the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
-Sequence FND sets up Al4 (FRAC N Digital) VCO.-
DISPLAY
DUAL CHAN ON
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
MENU
NUMBER OF POINTS 11 xl
COUPLED CHAN OFF
START 36 M/u
STOP 60.75 M./u
MENU
SWEEP TIME 12.5 k/m
MEAS
ANALOG IN 29 xl (FN VCO TUN)
SCALE/REF 0.6 xl
REF VALUE -7 xl

CH 2
MENU
CW FREQ 31.0001 M/u
SWEEP TIME 12.375 k/m
MEAS
ANALOG IN 29 xl (FN VCO TUN)
SCALELREF .2 xl
REF VALUE 6.77 xl
MKR6k/m
--Sequence FNCHK check the VCO a@@stmmt.-
MENU
CW FREQ 1 G/n
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
SERVICE MODES
FRACNTUNEON

ANALOG IN 29 xl

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-65

 SCALELREF
REF VALUE 7 xl

Sequences for the Fractional-N Avoidance and

FM Sideband Adjustment
--Sequence APL4DJsets up thejhctional-N API spur a@shmnts-
TITLE
SP 2.5K
PERIPHERAL HPIB ADDR
18 xl
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 xl
TITLE
AT ODB
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 xl
TITLE
RM 1OOHz
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 xl
TITLE
CF 676.145105MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 xl
CW FREQ
676.045105Mh
TITLE
ADJ Al3 1OOKHZ
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.048105MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 xl

3-66 Adjustments and Correction Constants

TITLE
ADJ Al3 API1
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.007515MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WATT x
0 xl
CW FREQ
676.004515Mh
TITLE
ADJ Al3 API2
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.00345OMZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WMT x
0 xl
CW FREQ
676.00045OMh.1
TITLE
ADJ Al3 API3
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.003045MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WMT x
0 xl
CW FREQ
676.000045Mh
TITLE
ADJ Al3 API4

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-67

 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
The information in this chapter helps you:
n Identify the portion of the analyzer that is at fault.
n Locate the specific troubleshooting procedures to identify the assembly or
peripheral at fault.
To identify the portion of the analyzer at fault, follow these procedures:
Step 1. Initial Observations
Step 2. Operator’s Check
Step 3. HP-IB Systems Check
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-l

Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the
faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts. n
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures. n
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants. n
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, “System
Verification and Performance Tests. n

Having Your Analyzer Serviced

The HP 8753E has a one year on-site warranty, where available. If the analyzer
should fail any of the following checks, call your local HP sales or service office.
A customer engineer will be dispatched to service your analyzer on-site. If a
customer engineer is not available in your area, follow the steps below to send
your analyzer back to HP for repair
1. Choose the nearest HP service center. (A table listing of Hewlett-Packard
sales or service offices is provided at the end of this guide.)
2. Include a detailed description of any failed test and any error message.
3. Ship the analyzer, using the original or comparable antistatic packaging
materials.

4-2 Start Troubleshooting Here

Step 1. InitiaI Observations

Initiate the Analyzer Self-‘I&t

1. Disconnect all devices and peripherals from the analyzer.
2. Switch on the analyzer and press WI.
3. Watch for the indications shown in Figure 4-l to determine if the analyzer is
operating correctly.

w If the self-test failed, refer to “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation”.

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-3

Step 2. Operator’s Check

Description
The operator’s check consists of two softkey initiated tests: Port 1 Op Chk and
Port 2 Op Chk.
A short is connected to port 1 (port 2) to reflect ah the source energy back into
the analyzer for an SII (SZZ) measurement.
The first part of Port I Op Chk checks the repeatability of the transfer switch.
An SI1 measurement is stored in memory and the switch is toggled to port 2 and
then back to port 1 where another SII measurement is made. The difference
between the memory trace and the second trace is switch repeatability.
The remaining parts of both tests exercise the internal attenuator in 5 dEI steps
over a 55 dB range.
The resulting measurements must fall within a limit testing window to pass the
test. The window size is based on both source and receiver specifications.
The operator’s check determines that:
n The source is phase locked across the entire frequency range.
n All three samplers are functioning properly.
n The transfer switch is operational.
n The attenuator steps 5 dB at a time.
Required Equipment and lbols
Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . part of the HP 85031B calibration kit
Analgzm warm-up time: 30 minutes.

Procedure
1. Disconnect all devices, peripherals, and accessories (including adapters and
limiters) from the analyzer.

3. The display should show TEST 21 Port 1 Op Chk in the active entry area.

44 Start Troubleshooting Here

 4. Press ~E@WTE
/. ;.i.: . . : . ‘EST to begin the test.
5. At the prompt, connect the short to the port indicated. Make sure the
connection is tight.

7. The test is a sequence of subtests. At the end of the subtests, the test title
and result will be displayed. If all tests pass successfully, the overall test
status will be PASS. If any test fails, the overall test status will be FAIL.
8. ‘lb run the test for port 2, press the step &) key. The display should show
TEST 22 Port2 Op Chkin the active entry area.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 7.
10. If both tests pass, the analyzer is about 80% verified. If either test fails,
refer to “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation” in this section, or:
a. Make sure that the connection is tight. Repeat the test.
b. Visually inspect the connector interfaces and clean if necessary (refer to
“Principles of Microwave Connector Care” located in Chapter 1).
c. Verify that the short meets published specihcations.
d. Substitute another short, and repeat the test.
e. Finally, refer to the detailed tests located in this section, or fault
isolation procedures located in the troubleshooting sections

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-5

Step 3. HP-IB Systems Check
Check the analyzer’s HP-IB functions with a known. working passive peripheral
(such as a plotter, printer, or disk drive).
1. Connect the peripheral to the analyzer using a good HP-IB cable..
2. Press o “““““““““““““““““““” to enable the analyzer to controI the
peripheral.
3. men press -~~~~~~~~~ and the appropriate softkeys to verify aat the
L:L-.;..;; ..... . . . . . _i . . . . -. . _.-. . _. . . . . . . . ..i::::i.
device addresses will be recognized by the analyzer. The factory default
addresses are:

Device HP-IB Address

HP 87533 16

Plotter port - BP-IB 5

Printer port - BP-IB 1

Disk (external) 0

Controller 21

Power meter - I-FIB 13

Note You may use other addresses with two provisions:

l Each device must have its own address.
m The address set on each device must match the one
recognized by the analyzer (and displayed).
Peripheral addresses are often set with a rear panel switch.
Refer to the manual of the peripheral to read or change its
address.

4-6 Start Troubleshooting Here

If Using a Plotter or Printer
1. Ensure that the plotter or printer is set up correctly:
n Power is on.
n Pens and paper loaded.
n Pinch wheels are down.
n Some plotters need to have Pl and P2 positions set.
:,

2. Press Lcopy and then ,..................../

3%~~ or ;~~~.~.~~~~~~~~~.
.: . -:. . > . . . . :: . . . . ~. . . _. . . . . . . . . . _. . .: ./ . ~. -. L .A. .
q If the result is a copy of the analyzer display, the printing/plotting features
are functional in the analyzer. Continue with “Troubleshooting Systems
with Multiple Peripherals”, “Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers”, or
the “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation” section in this chapter.
q If the result is not a copy of the analyzer display, suspect the HP-IB
function of the analyzer. Refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control
Troubleshooting. n

lf Using an External Disk Drive

: : ~. ~. :. . :. . : : ~:~,~:~~.. <.F . ~.~,. ,:~. .,:.~. . . . . .~“. . . ~ .~. .

2. Verify that the address is set correctly. Press m ~~~‘~~~~~~~~~

3. Ensure that the disk drive is set up correctly:

n Power is on.
n An initialized disk in the correct drive.
n Correct disk unit number and volume number (press ILocal) to access the
softkeys that display the numbers; default is 0 for both).
n With hard disk (Winchester) drives, make sure the configuration switch is
properly set (see drive manual).

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-7

 q If the resultant trace starts at 1 MHz, HP-IB is functional in the analyzer.
Continue with “Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals”,
“Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers”, or the “Step 4. Faulty Group
Isolation” section in this chapter.
q If the resultant trace does not start at 1 MHz, suspect the HP-IB function
of the analyzer: refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”

Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals

Connect any other system peripherals (but not a controller) to the analyzer
one at a time and check their functionality. Any problems observed are in the
peripherals, cables, or are address problems (see above).

Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers

Passing the preceding checks indicates that the analyzer’s peripheral functions
are normal. Therefore, if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an
external controller, check the following:
n The HP-ID interface hardware is incorrectly installed or not operational. (See
“HP-II3 Requirements” in the HP 8753E Network Anulgzer User’s Guide.)
n The programming syntax is incorrect. (Refer to the HP 8753E Network
Aruzlgzer Programmer’s G&&e.)
If the analyzer appears to be operating unexpectedly but has not completely
failed, go to “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation.”

4-8 Start TroubleshootinN Here

Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation
Use the following procedures only if you have read the previous sections in
this chapter and you think the problem is in the analyzer. These are simple
procedures to verify the four functional groups in sequence, and determine
which group is faulty.
The four functional groups are:
n power supplies
w digital control
n source
n receiver
Descriptions of these groups are provided in Chapter 12, “Theory of Operation.”
The checks in the following pages must be performed in the order presented.
If one of the procedures fails, it is an indication that the problem is in the
functional group checked. Go to the troubleshooting information for the
indicated group, to isolate the problem to the defective assembly.
Figure 4-2 illustrates the troubleshooting organization.

I--------------------------------------------
I ISOLATE FAULTY GROUP
I

I ASSEMBLY LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING

sg645d

Figure 4-2. Troubleshooting Orgunization

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-8

Power Supply

Check the Rear Panel LEDs

Switch on the analyzer. Notice the condition of the two LEDs on the Al5
preregulator at rear of the analyzer. (See Figure 4-3.)
q The upper (red) LED should be off.
q The lower (green) LED should be on.

RED LED GREEN LED

NORMALLY OFF NORMALLY ON

UNE VOLTAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH

iI sg646e

Figure 43. Al5 Preregulator LEDs

Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs

Remove the analyzer’s top cover. Switch on the power. Inspect the green LEDs
along the top edge of the A8 post-regulator assembly.
•I Ail green LEDs should be on.
q The fan should be audible.
In case of difficulty, refer to Chapter 5, “Power Supply Troubleshooting.”

4-l 0 Start Troubleshooting Here

Digital Control

Observe the Power Up Sequence

Switch the analyzer power off, then on. The following should take place within
a few seconds:
n On the front panel, observe the following:
1. All six amber LEDs illuminate.
2. The port 2 LED illuminates.
3. The amber LEDs go off after a few seconds, except the CH 1 LED. At the
same moment, the port 2 LED goes off and the port 1 LED ilhnninates.
(See Figure 4-4.)
n The display should come up bright with no irregularity in colors.
n After an initial pattern, five red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should remain
off. They can be observed through a small opening in the rear panel.
If the power up sequence does not occur as described, or if there are
problems using the front panel keyboard, refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control
Troubleshooting. n

Figure 4-4. Front Panel Power Up Sequence

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-11

Verify Internal Tests Passed
. . . . .. . . . . . ,. .,. . . . . . ._ . ./ / . . . .
l- Press [Preset) (System) .~~~~~~~.~ . : : .ii.._ i.: : : .~; . . . . . . .:.:. : . _.._ ; .:. ;, .*T$i::
. :.: .._..... :~~~~.:~~~,
. . . . .~. . . . . ~.~. . .~ _.. ;.:.: . : .. .;:z:.:<<< . . ._ :. . . :. . . .,. .<<..
(: .:.: .a. .: .i ; . . :. .‘, .s,. .g:
;~~~~. me &splay sho~d~&cate:

TEST

0 ALL INT PASS

q If your display shows the above message, go to step 2. Otherwise, continue
with this step.
q If phase lock error messages are present, this test may stop without passing
or failing. In this case, continue with the next procedure to check the
source.
q If you have unexpected results, or if the analyzer indicates a specific test
failme, that internal test (and possibly others) have failed; the analyzer
reports the Rrst failure detected. Refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control
Troubleshooting. n
If the analyzer indicates failure but does not identify the test, press &)
q
to search for the failed test. Then refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control
Troubleshooting.” Likewise, if the response to front panel or HP-IB
commands is unexpected, troubleshoot the digital control group.
: .,
2. Perform the Analog Bus test. Press ;.m L19] a ~~~~~~~~~~~.

q If this test fails, refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”

q If this test passes, continue with the next procedure to check the source.

4-l 2 Start Troubleshooting Here

 HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER
/ \

HP 438A
POWER METER

ADAPTER WC-7 to N(f)

_- li .-,
: I
HP 8481A ’ HP 8482A
POWER POWER
SENSOR SENSOR

” 5 s9648e

Figure 4-5. Equipment Setup for Source Power Check

2. Zero and calibrate the power meter. Press LPreset] on the analyzer to initialize
the instrument.
3. on the analyzer, press LMenu) ~~~~~ ~ Lk/m) to output a cw 3oo kHz
signal. The power meter should read approximately 0 deem.
4. Press [161 m to change the CW frequency to 16 MHz. The output power
should remain approximately 0 dBm throughout the analyzer frequency
range. Repeat this step at 1 and 3 GHz. (For Option 006 include an additional
check at 6 GHz.)
If any incorrect power levels are measured, refer to Chapter 7, “Source
Troubleshooting. n

4.14 Start Troubleshooting Here

 sg641 d

Figure 4-6. ABUS Node 16: 1 V/GHz

If any of the above procedures provide unexpected results, or if error messages

are present, refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting.”

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-15

Receiver

Observe the A and B Input Traces

1. Connect the equipment as shown in F’igure 47 below. Be sure that any
special accessories, such as limiters, have been disconnected. (The through
cable is HP part number 8120-4779.)

HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

TEST PORT
THRU CABLE
sg649e

Figure 4-7. Equipment Setup

2.

3 . Observe the measurement trace displayed by the A input. The trace should
have about the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4-8.
4.

5 . Observe the measurement trace displayed by the B input. The trace should
have about the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4-8.

4-l 6 Start Troubleshooting Here

Accessories
If the analyzer has passed all of the previous checks but is still making incorrect
measurements, suspect the system accessories Accessories such as RF or
interconnect cables, calibration or verification kit devices, limiters, and adapters
can ail induce system problems
Reconfigure the system as it is normally used and reconllrm the problem.
Continue with Chapter 9, “Accessories Troubleshooting. n

Accessories Error Messages

n POWERPROBESHUTDOWN!

The biasing supplies to a front panel powered device (like a probe

or millimeter module) are shut down due to excessive current draw.
Troubleshoot the device.

4-l 8 Start Troubleshooting Here

 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting
Here.” Follow the procedures in the order given, unless:
q an error message appears on the display, refer to “Error Messages” near the
end of this chapter.
q the fan is not working; refer to “Fan Troubleshooting” in this chapter.
The power supply group assemblies consist of the following:
n A8 post regulator
n Al5 preregulator
All assemblies, however, are related to the power supply group because power is
supplied to each assembly.

Powor Supply Troubleshooting 5-l

Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the
faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures. n
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants. n
5. Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2, “System
Verification and Performance Tests ’

5-2 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Simplified Block Diagram
Figure 5-l shows the power supply group in simplified block diagram form.
Refer to the detailed block diagram of the power supply (Figure 5-8) located at
the end of this chapter to see voltage lines and specific connector pin numbers.

A17 MOTHEREOARG

PREREGULATOR

\A L L O N D U R I N G
OFF DURING N O R M A L OPERAllON
NORMAL OPERATION

\ON D U R I N G
NORMAL OPERATION
sg6105e

Figure 5-1. Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-3

Start Here

Check the Green LED and Red LED on Al5

Switch on the analyzer and look at the rear panel of the analyzer. Check the
two power supply diagnostic LEDs on the Al5 preregulator casting by looking
through the holes located to the left of the line voltage selector switch. (See
Figure 5-2.)
During normal operation, the bottom (green) LED is on and the top (red) LED is
off. If these LEDs are normal, then Al5 is 95% verified. Continue to “Check the
Green LEDs on A8”.
q If the green LED is not on steadily, refer to “If the Green LED of the Al5 Is
not ON Steadily” in this procedure.
q If the red LED is on or flashing, refer to “If the Red LED of the Al5 Is ON” in
this procedure.

RED LED GREEN LED

NORMALLY OFF NORMALLY ON
/ /

LINE VOLTAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH

sg646e

Figure 5-2. Location of Al5 Diagnostic LEDs

54 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Check the Green LEDs on A8
Remove the top cover of the analyzer and locate the A8 post regulator; use the
location diagram under the top cover if necessary. Check to see if the green
LEDs on the top edge of A8 are all on. There are eight green LEDs (one is not
visible without removing the PC board stabilizer).
q If all of the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are on, there is a 95%
confidence level that the power supply is verified. lb confirm the last 5%
uncertainty of the power supply, refer to “Measure the Post Regulator
Voltages” (next).
q If any LED on the A8 post regulator is off or Eashing, refer to “If the Green
LEDs of the A8 are not alI ON” in this procedure.

Measure the Post Regulator Voltages

Measure the DC voltages on the test points of A8 with a voltmeter. Refer to
Figure 5-3 for test point locations and Table 5-l for supply voltages and limits.

+f%v AGND +5v!? SIX -1% -12.6VPP +15V -5VU -5.2V +22v t6V

Figure 5-3. A8 Post Regulator ‘l&t Point Locations

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-5

 ‘lhble 5-1. A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages
TP SUPPlY Bane
1 + 66 V (not used) + 64.6 to + 65.4

2 AGND n/a

3 +6VD +4.0 to +6.3

4 SDIS n/a

6 -16V -14.4 to -15.6

6 - 12.6 VPP (probe power) -12.1 to -12.8

7 +16V + 14.5 to + 15.5

8 +6W + 5.05 to + 5.35

0 -5.2 V -5.0 to -5.4

10 +22v +21.3 to +22.7

11 +6V +6.8 to +6.2

5-5 Power Supply Troubleshooting

If the Green LED of the Al5 Is not ON Steadily
If the green LED is not on steadily, the line voltage is not enough to power the
analyzer.

Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse

Check the main power line cord, line fuse, line selector switch setting, and
actual line voltage to see that they are all correct. F’igure 5-4 shows how to
remove the line fuse, using a small flat-blade screwdriver to pry out the fuse
holder. Figure 5-2 shows the location of the line voltage selector switch. Use a
small flat-blade screwdriver to select the correct switch position.
If the Al5 green LED is still not on steadily, replace A15.

FUSE IN USE

\
INSERT SCREWDRIVER,
PRY OPEN

Figure 5-4. Removing the Line Fuse

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-7

If the Red LED of the Al5 Is ON
If the red LED is on or flashing, the power supply is shutting down. Use the
following procedures to determine which assembly is causing the problem.

Check the A8 Post Regulator

1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the cable A15Wl from the A8 post regulator. (See Figure 5-5.)
3. Switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15.
q If the red LED goes out, the problem is probably the A8 post regulator.
Continue to “Verify the Al5 Preregulator” to first verify that the inputs to
A8 are correct.
q If the red LED is still on, the problem is probably the Al5 preregulator, or
one of the assemblies obtaining power from it. Continue with “Check for a
Faulty Assembly”.

5-8 Power Supply Troubleshooting

 Al5 Al5Wl (To A15Wl (To A8
Pre Reguloiur A17J2 Motherboardi A812 Post Regulator) Post KegulatoI

Figure 5-5. Power Supply Cable Locations

Verify the Al6 Preregulator

Verify that the Al5 preregulator is supplying the correct voltages to the A8 post
regulator. Use a voltmeter with a small probe to measure the output voltages of
A15Wl’s plug. Refer to lhble 5-2 and F’igure 5-6.
17 If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace A15.

Pewer Supply Troubleshooting 5-9

q If the voltages are within tolerance, Al5 is verified. Continue to “Check for a
Faulty Assembly”.

‘able 5-2. Output Voltages

Pin A15WlPl (Dieeonnectea) A&J2 (connectea) Voltagee A15 Preregulatm Label
vohgw

1 N/C +68to+72 N/C

2 +126 to +loo +68to+72 +7ov

394 +22.4to+33.6 +17.0 to +18.4 +18V

696 -22.4to-33.6 -17.0 to -18.4 -18V

7 N/C +7.4 to +a.0 N/C
8 +9.4to +14 +7.4io +a.0 +8V
0,lO -0.4 to -14 -6.7to -7.3 -8V
11 N/C +24.6to +28.6 N/C
12 +32io+48 +24.6to +28.6 +26V

IOTJZ: The + 6 VD supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies at alI times, or the other voltages will
lot be correct. It connects to the motherboard connector A17J3 Pin 4.
1

5-10 Power Supply Troubleshooting

 &T
REGULATOR BOARD
SOLDER s, DE ::I:I::: : A1532

NOTE-
I 1
VOLTAGES ALL CABLES
AND ASSEMBLIES
CONNECTED

sb6130d

Figure 5-6. A15Wl Plug Detail

Check for a Faulty Assembly

This procedure checks for a faulty assembly that might be shutting down the
Al5 preregulator via one of the following lines (also refer to F’igure 5-l):
n A15Wl connecting to the A8 post regulator
n the + 5 VCPU line through the motherboard
n the +5 VDIG line through the motherboard
Do the following:
1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Ensure that A15Wl is reconnected to A8. (Refer to Figure 5-5.)
3. Remove or disconnect the assemblies listed in ‘lhble 5-3 one at a time
and in the order shown. The assemblies are sorted from most to least
accessible. Table 5-3 also lists any associated assemblies that are supplied

Puwer Supply Troubleshooting 5-11

 by the assembly that is being removed. After each assembly is removed or
disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15.

Note n Alwags switch ofl the analgzer before rewwwing or

disconnecting assemblies.
n When extensive disassembly is required, refer to Chapter 14,
“Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures. n
n Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts,” to identify specific
cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter.

q If the red LED goes out, the particular assembly (or one receiving power from
it) that allows it to go out is faulty.
q If the red LED is still on after you have checked all of the assemblies listed in
‘lhble 5-3, continue to “Check the Operating Temperature”.

‘able 5-3. Recommended Order for RemovaUDisconnection

Assembly Removal or Other Assemblies that Receive
To Remove Disconne&ion Method Power from the Removed Assembly
1. A19 Graphics Processor Remove from Card Cage None
2. A14PracNDigital Remove from Card Cage None
3. A9 CPU Disconnect W36 A20 Disk Drive
(see “Cables, Rear” in
Chapter 13)
4. Al6 Rear Panel Interface

5. A2 Front Panel Interface

5-l 2 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Check the Operating Temperature
The temperature sensing circuitry inside the Al5 preregulator may be shutting
down the supply. Make sure the temperature of the open air operating
environment does not exceed 55 OC (131 OF’), and that the analyzer fan is
operating.
q If the fan does not seem to be operating correctly, refer to “Pan
Troubleshooting” at the end of this procedure.
q If there does not appear to be a temperature problem, it is likely that Al5 is
faulty.

Inspect the Motherboard

If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of A15, switch off the
analyzer and inspect the motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable
defects. Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts The +5 VD, +5 VCPU, or
+5 VDSENSE lines may be bad. Refer to the block diagram (Figure 5-8) at the
end of this chapter and troubleshoot these suspected power supply lines on the
Al7 motherboard.

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-13

If the Green LEDs of the A8 are not all ON
The green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator are normally on.
Flashing LEDs on A8 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A8 post
regulator is protecting power supplies from overcurrent conditions by
repeatedly shutting them down. This may be caused by supply loading on A8 or
on any other assembly in the analyzer.

Remove A8, Maintain A15Wl Cable Connection

1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Remove A8 from its motherboard connector, but keep the A15Wl cable
connected to A8.
3. Short A8TP2 (AGND) (see F’igure 5-3) to chassis ground with a clip lead.
4. Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8.
q If any green LEDs other than +5 VD are still off or flashing, continue to
“Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages”.
q If all LEDs are now on steadily except for the +5 VD LED, the Al5
preregulator and A8 post regulator are working properly and the trouble
is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8.
Continue to “Remove the Assemblies”.

Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages

Check the fuses along the top edge of A8. If any A8 fuse has burned out,
replace it. If it burns out again when power is applied to the analyzer, A8 or
Al5 is faulty. Determine which assembly has failed as follows.
1. Remove the A15Wl cable at AS. (See Figure 5-5.)
2. Measure the voltages at A15WlPl (see F’igure 5-6) with a voltmeter having a
small probe.
3. Compare the measured voltages with those in Table 5-2.
0 If the voltages are within tolerance, replace A8.
q If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace A15.

5-14 Power Supply Troubleshooting

If the green LEDs are now on, the Al5 preregulator and A8 post regulator are
working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the
motherboard connections at A8. Continue to “Remove the Assemblies”.

Remove the Assemblies

1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Install A8. Remove the jumper from A8TP2 (AGND) to chassis ground.
3. Remove or disconnect all the assemblies listed below. (See Figure 5-5.)
Alwags suvitch ofl the anulgzer before removing or diswnnectircg an
ass&lg.
Al0 digital IF
All phase lock
Al2 reference
Al3 fractional-N analog
Al4 fractional-N digital
A19 graphics processor
4. Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8.
q If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing, it is not likely that any of
the assemblies listed above is causing the problem. Continue to “Briefly
Disable the Shutdown Circuitry“.
q If alI green LEDs are now on, one or more of the above assemblies may be
faulty. Continue to next step.
5. Switch off the analyzer.
6. Reinstall each assembly one at a time. Switch on the analyzer after each
assembly is instaIled. The assembly that causes the green LEDs to go off or
flash could be faulty.

Note It is possible, however, that this condition is caused by the

A8 post regulator not supplying enough current. ‘Ib check
this, reinstall the assemblies in a different order to change the
loading. If the same assembly appears to be faulty, replace that
assembly. If a different assembly appears faulty, A8 is most
likely faulty (unless both of the other assemblies are faulty).

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-15

Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry
In this step, you shutdown the protective circuitry for a short time, and the
supplies are forced on (including shorted supplies) with a 100% duty cycle.

Caution Damage to components or to circuit traces may occur if A8TP4

(SDIS) is shorted to chassis ground for more than a few seconds
while supplies are shorted.

1. Connect A8TP4 (SDIS) to chassis ground with a jumper wire.

2. Switch on the analyzer and note the signal mnemonics and test points of any
LEDs that are off. Immediately resow the jumper wire.
3. Refer to the block diagram (Figure 5-8) at the end of this chapter and do the
foIIowing:
n Note the mnemonics of any additional signals that may connect to any A8
test point that showed a fault in the previous step.
n Cross reference alI assemblies that use the power supplies whose A8 LEDs
went out when A8TP4 (SDIS) was connected to chassis ground.

5-16 Power Supply Troubleshooting

 n Make a list of these assemblies.
n Delete the following assemblies from your list as they have already been
verified earlier in this section.
A10 digital IF
All phase lock
Al2 reference
Al3 fractional-N analog
Al4 fractional-N digital
A19 graphics processor
4. Switch off the analyzer.
5. of those assemblies that are left on the list, remove or disconnect them
from the analyzer one at a time. lbble 5-4 shows the best order in which to
remove them, sorting them from most to least accessible. lhble 5-4 also lists
any associated assemblies that are supplied by the assembly that is being
removed. After each assembly is removed or disconnected, switch on the
analyzer and observe the LEDs.

Note

w When extensive disassembly is required, refer to Chapter 14,

“Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures. n
H Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts”, to identify specific
cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter.

q If all the LEDs light, the assembly (or one receiving power from it) that allows
them to light is faulty.
q If the LEDs are still not on steadily, continue to “Inspect the Motherboard”.

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-17

 ‘able 5-4. Recommended Order for Removal/Disconnection
Assembly Removal or OtherAssemblieathat Receive
To Remove Disconnection Method Power from the Removed Assembly

1. A3 Source Remove from Card Cage None

2. A7 Pulse Generator Remove from Card Cage None
3. A4 R Sampler Remove from Card Cage None

4. A5 A Sampler Remove from Card Cage None

6. A6 B Sampler F&move from Card Cage None

6. A9 CPU Disconnect W36 and W36 A20 Disk Drive

7. A2 Front Panel Interface Disconnect W17 Al Front Panel Keyboard

8. Al6 Rear Panel Interface Disconnect W27 A25 Test Set Interface
A24 Transfer Switch
AZ3 LED Front Panel

Inspect the Motherboard

Inspect the Al7 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces. In
particuIar, inspect the traces that cany the supplies whose LEDs faulted when
A8TP4 (SDIS) was grounded earlier.

5-18 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Error Messages
Three error messages are associated with the power supplies functional group.
They are shown here.
n POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!
One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly is shut down due to
one of the following conditions: overcurrent, overvoltage, or undervoltage.
Refer to “If the Red LED of the Al5 Is ON” earlier in this procedure.
n POWER SUPPLY HOT
The temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly detect an
overtemperature condition. The regulated power supplies on A8 have been
shut down.
Check the temperature of the operating environment; it should not be greater
than + 55 OC (131 OF). The fan should be operating and there should be at
least 15 cm (6 in) spacing behind and all around the analyzer to allow for
proper ventilation.
n PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN !
The front panel RF probe biasing supplies are shut down due to excessive
current draw. These supplies are + 15 VPP and -12.6 VPP, both supplied by
the A8 post regulator. + 15 VPP is derived from the + 15 V supply. -12.6 VPP
is derived from the -12.6 V supply.
Refer to Figure 5-7 and carefully measure the power supply voltages at the
front panel RF probe connectors.

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-1 g

 (C&K
+15v
GROUND)

-126”
SY
sg650e

Figure 5-7. Front Rmel Probe Power Connector Voltages

q If the correct voltages are present, troubleshoot the probe.

q If the voltages are not present, check the + 15 V and -12.6 V green LEDs on
A8.
n If the LEDs are on, there is an open between the A8 assembly and the
front panel probe power connectors, Put A8 onto an extender board and
measure the voltages at the following pins:
ASP2 pins 6 and 36 -12.6 volts
A8P2 pins 4 and 34 + 15 volts

n If the LEDs are off, continue with “Check the Fuses and Isolate A8”.

Check the Fuses and Isolate A8

Check the fuses associated with each of these supplies near the A8 test points.
If these fuses keep burning out, a short exists. Try isolating A8 by removing
it from the motherboard connector, but keeping the cable A15Wl connected
to A8J2. Connect a jumper wire from A8TP2 to chassis ground. If either the
+ 15 V or -12.6 V fuse blows, or the associated green LEDs do not light, replace
A8.

5-20 Power Supply Troubleshooting

If the + 15 V and -12.6 V green LEDs light, troubleshoot for a short between
the motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 6 and 36 (-12.6 V) and the front
panel probe power connectors. Also check between motherboard connector pins
XA8P2 pins 4 and 34 (+ 15 V) and the front panel probe power connectors.

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-21

Fan Troubleshooting

Fan Speeds
The fan speed varies depending upon temperature. It is normal for the fan to
be at high speed when the analyzer is just switched on, and then change to low
speed when the analyzer is cooled.

Check the Ran Voltages

If the fan is dead, refer to the A8 post regulator block diagram (F’igure 5-8) at
the end of this chapter. The fan is driven by the + 18 V and -18 V supplies
coming from the Al5 preregulator. Neither of these supplies is fused.
The -18 V supply is regulated on A8 in the fan drive block, and remains
constant at approximately -14 volts It connects to the Al7 motherboard via
pin 32 of the A8Pl connector.
The + 18 V supply is regulated on A8 but changes the voltage to the fan,
depending on airflow and temperature information. Its voltage ranges from
approximately - 1.0 volts to + 14.7 volts, and connects to the Al7 motherboard
via pin 31 of the ASP1 connector.
Measure the voltages of these supplies while using an extender board to allow
access to the PC board connector, A8Pl.

Short ASTP3 to Ground

If there is no voltage at A8Pl pins 31 and 32, switch off the analyzer. Remove
A8 from its motherboard connector (or extender board) but keep the cable
A15Wl connected to A8. (See Figure 5-5.) Connect a jumper wire between
A8TP3 and chassis ground. Switch on the analyzer.
q If aII the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 Iight (except +5 VD), replace the
fan.
q If other green LEDs on A8 do not Iight, refer to “If the Green LEDs of the A8
are not all ON” earlier in this procedure.

5-22 Power Supply Troubleshootins

Intermittent Problems
PRESET states that appear spontaneously (without pressing -I) typically
signal a power supply or A9 CPU problem. Since the A9 CPU assembly is
the easiest to substitute, do so. If the problem ceases, replace the A9. If the
problem continues, replace the Al5 preregulator assembly.

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-23

 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting
Here. n
The digital control group assemblies consist of the following:
n CPU
q A9
n Display
q A2, A18, A19, A27
n Front Panel
q Al, A2
n Digital IF
q A10
n Rear Panel Interface
q Al6
Begin with “CPU Troubleshooting,” then proceed to the assembly that you
suspect has a problem. If you suspect an HP-IB interface problem, refer to
“HP-IB Failures,” at the end of this chapter.

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-1

Digital Control Group Block Diagram

Figure 6-1. Digital Control Group Block Diagram

6-2 Digital Control Troubleshooting

Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the
faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants n
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, “System
Verification and Performance Tests. n

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-3

CPU Troubleshooting (A9)

A9 CC Switch Positions
The A9 CC switch must be in the NORMAL position for these procedures. This
is the position for normal operating conditions. To move the switch to the
NORMAL position, do the following:
1. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
2. Set the analyzer on its side.
3. Remove the two comer bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a
T-15 TORX screwdriver.
4. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge.
5. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
6. Move the switch to the NORMAL position as shown in Figure 6-2.
7. Replace the bottom cover and power cord.

64 Digital Control Troubleshooting

 A9 CPU Assembly

Normal Mode Alter Mode Rocker Slide

sga c8e

Figure 6-2. Switch Positions on the A9 CPU

Checking A9 CPU Red LED Patterns

The A9 CPU has five red LEDs that can be viewed through a small opening in
the rear panel of the analyzer. (See Figure 6-3.) Four LEDs are easily viewable.
The fifth LED must be viewed by looking to the left at an angle.
1. Cycle the power while observing five red LEDs
Cycle the power on the analyzer and observe the five red LEDs. After an
initial pattern, the five red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should remain off.
n If the LEDs remained off, then proceed to the assembly that you suspect
has a problem.
n If the LEDs did not remain off, switch off the power and remove the
bottom cover for further troubleshooting.

Digital Control Troubloshooting 6-5

 L CPU LED
WlNDOW

sg651e

Figure 6-3. CPU LED Window on Rear Panel

2. Cycle the power while observing all eight red LEDs

With the analyzer positioned bottom up, cycle the power and observe the
eight red LEDs while looking from the front of the instrument.

Note If Grmware did not load, a red LED on the CPU board will be
flashing. Refer to “Loading Firmware” in Chapter 3.

3. Evaluate results
q If either of the following LED patterns remain, go to “Display
Troubleshooting. n
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
l l a 0 0 l 0 a

(front of instrument 4)

q If any other LED patterns remain, replace the A9 CPU after verifying the
power supply.

6-6 Digital Control Troubleshooting

Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27)
This section contains the following information:
n Evaluating your Display
n Troubleshooting a White Display
n Troubleshooting a Black Display
w Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems

Evaluating your Display

Switch the analyzer off, and then on. The display should be bright with the
annotation legible and intelligible. There are four criteria against which your
display is measured:
n Background Lamp Intensity
n Green, Red or Blue Stuck Pixels
w Dark Stuck Pixels
n Newtons Riis

Evaluate the display as follows:

n If either the Al8 LCD, A19 GSP, A9 CPU or AZ7 backlight inverter assemblies
are replaced, perform a visual inspection of the display.
n If it appears that there is a problem with the display, refer to the
troubleshooting information that follows
n If the new display appears dim or doesn’t light, see “Backlight Intensity
Check, n next.

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-7

Backlight Intensity Check
Required Equipment and Ytbols
Photometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tektronix J16
Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..‘Pektronix J6503
Light Occluder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tektronix 016-0305-00
Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797
Analgm- warmup time: 30 minutes. Photomder warrn-up time: 30 minutes.

Note This procedure should be performed with a photometer and only

by qualified personnel.

1. Press ~~)~~~~.~~~~~'.~~~~~~~~. ~~~~~~~Iloo]Lxl], to set the &play

- . . . . .~:: : :. ..-.-..... -- -......-......-......... -- ..-. ..-- -- --.- -..
intensity at 100%.
,., , ,. . . ,._. _ ., ., ., _ __ . . . . / ,;.?. ,. . . ., _. ,. .; . . ,. ,.._
. . :. .: hy:.: *,7<;- , . : : : : : : : . :. :<:<<~:‘~~;. : ;.: 5 EEz;; .: : : : : : : .: . .:
2. press (77)
to ~~~~~~~,~ imm
.: :.: ._. . _ * . . . xi. . . . ;... .:. A .: .:.: . : : . >-.A __,. __,/ L62) Ixl) ~~~~. ~~~~~
set a white screen test pattern on the display.
3. Set the photometer probe to NORMAL. Press I-) on the photometer to
switch it on and allow 30 minutes of warm-up time. Zero the photometer
according to the manufacturer’s instructions
4. Center the photometer on the analyzer display as shown in Figure 6-4.

6-8 Digital Control Troubleshooting

 H P 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER

PHOTOMETER PHOTOMETER
PROBE
sg632e

Figure 6-4. Backlight Intensity Check Setup

Note The intensity levels are read with a display bezel installed.

5. If the photometer registers less than 50 Nits, the display backlight lamp is
bad. Refer to the “Replacement Procedures” chapter in the service manual
for information on display lamp replacement.

Red, Green, or Blue Pixels SpeciIlcations

Red, green, or blue “stuck on” pixeis may appear against a black background.
m ted for these dots, press w ~~~~~~~~~ .~~ 170) Ixl)
:~~~~~~ ~~~~~,
. ,. ,. . . .-,. _- - ._. -- -
In a properly working display, the following will not occur:
n complete rows or columns of stuck pixels
n more than 5 stuck pixels (not to exceed a maximimi of 2 red or blue, and 3
green)
n 2 or more consecutive stuck pixels
n stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-g

Dark Pixels Specidications
Dark “stuck on” pixels may appear against a white background. To test for
these dots, press I?) ~~~~~~l~~~ :&‘J$ L66) @) ~~~~~~~
::: ~.~.zsz -. . . . i_..-...::::::...... . . . . . . . . . ~. . . . . . . . . . -. . . . . . . ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ .~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ .~. ~ ~ ~ ~.
~~~~~~~..
: . . A. .........

In a properly working display, the following will not occur:

n more than 12 stuck pixels (not to exceed a maximum of 7 red, green, or
blue)
n more than one occurrence of 2 consecutive stuck pixels
n stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart

Newton’s Rings
To check for the patterns known as Newton’s Rings, change the display to white
by pressing the following keys:

Figure 6-5 ilhrstrates acceptable and non-acceptable examples of Newtons Rings

6-10 Digital Control Troubleshooting

 3 Rings
Acceptable

V
4 Rings
Unacceptable

sb8123d

Figure 6-5. Newtons Rings

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-11

Troubleshooting a White Display
If the display is white, the A27 back light inverter is functioning properly.
Connect a VGA monitor to the analyzer.
n If the image on the external monitor is normal, then suspect A2, AM, or the
front panel cabling.
H If the image on the external monitor is bad, suspect the A19 GSP or cable
W20 (CPU to motherboard).

Troubleshooting a Black Display

1. Remove the front panel with the exception of leaving cable W17 (A2 to
motherboard) connected.
2. Press 1Preset) while checking to see if there is a flash of light.
n If the light does not flash, suspect the front panel cabling, the display lamp,
or the A27 inverter.

Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems

2. Run display service test 74 as described in Chapter 10. Confirm that there
are four intensities for each color.
n If the test passes, then continue.
n If the test fails, then suspect the front panel cabling, A2, A19, or Al&
3. Connect a VGA monitor to the analyzer.
n If the image on the external monitor has the same color problems, then
replace the A19 GSl?
w If the image on the external monitor is acceptable, then there must be a
missing color bit. Suspect the front panel cabling, A2, A19, or AM.

6.12 Digital Control Troubleshooting

Front Panel Troubleshooting (Al, A2)

Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset

1. Press B on the analyzer.
2. Observe that all front panel LEDs turn on and, within five seconds after
releasing B, all but the CHl and Port 1 LED turns off. Refer to
Figure 6-6.
q If all the front panel LEDs either stay on or off, there is a control problem
between A9 and Al/A2. See “Inspect Cables, n located later in this chapter.
q If, at the end of the turn on sequence, the channel 1 LED is not on and all
HP-IB status LEDs are not off, continue with “Identify the Stuck Key”.
q If you suspect that one or more LEDs have burned out, replace the Al
keypad assembly.

Note Port 1 and port 2 LED problems may be caused by the

malfunction of the A23 LED board or the A24 transfer switch.

Figure 6-6. Preset Sequence

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-13

Identify the Stuck Key
Match the LED pattern with the patterns in ‘Ihble 6-l. The LED pattern
identifies the stuck key. Free the stuck key or replace the front panel part
causing the problem.

‘lhble 6-l. Front Panel Key Codes

DeChWl LBD fattern % Front Rrnel Block
Nnmber CEl CE2 R L T 6
0 Response
1 . E Entry
2 . & =m
3 . . -Pm
4 . Ax!
E BfXpOnSe

5 . . 0 Entry
6 . . 0 Entry
7 . . . &f.f.;j:T~ Softicey
8 . ;-.;g. MtJ=Y
9 . . El Entry
10 . . Lo/n) -try
11 . . . m Active Channel
12 . . Active Channel
13 . . . 77 Entry
14 . . . b Entry
15 . . . . g&&#&f; softkey
16 . @GJ StllllUlUS
17 . . Instrument State
18 . . @F Instrument State
19 . . . && StllllUlUS
20 . . Start StiIllUlW
21 . . . @ii2 Instrument State
22. . . . Lsystem Instrument State
23 . . . . $j?jR&$d softkey
24 . . aesponse
25 . . . Entry

6-14 Digital Control Troubleshooting

 ‘able 6-1. Front Panel Key Codes (continued)
Dedmal LED Pattern
Number CEl CE2 R L T S
26 s . .
27 . . . .
28 . . .
29 . . . .
30 . . . .
31 . . l l .
32 .
33 . .
34 . .

35 . . .
36 .
37 . .
38 . .

39 . s .
4G47 lot used
48 . .
49 . . .
50 . . .

51 . . . .
62 . . .
63 . . . .
64 . . . .

66 . . . . .

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-15

Inspect Cables
Remove the front panel assembly and visually inspect the ribbon cable that
connects the front panel to the motherboard. Also, inspect the interconnecting
ribbon cable between Al and A2. Make sure the cables are properly connected.
Replace any bad cables.

Test Using a Controller

If a controller is available, write a simple command to the analyzer. If the
analyzer successfully executes the command, the problem is either the A2 front
panel interface or W17 (A2 to motherboard ribbon cable) is faulty.

6-16 Digital Control Troubleshooting

Run the Internal Diagnostic ‘lksts
The analyzer incorporates 20 internal diagnostic tests. Most tests can be run as
part of one or both major test sequences: alI internal (test 0) and preset (test 1).
,. ,.z.;;;;,;.;~~ i . : a.; .?, :: :*~:(;(;$,~, ;f; 51’:::” zgz,, .. .._ _ .,. _ ,. / _
1. Press @&J .$&&@J&#&#$@ Iaw @ Ixl) ~~~~~~: to perform a
:..........$ .._._ .: I.._. .L. . .._............. -.._... ..-... -- -.
INT tests.
2. Then press (i-J Lxl) to see the results of the preset test. If either sequence
fails, press the Q) @) keys to Gnd the tist occurrence of a FAIL message for
tests 2 through 20. See ‘lhble 6-2 for further troubleshooting information.

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-17

 ‘ICable 6-2. Internal Diagnostic ‘I&t with Commentary
lkst Seauence’ Probable Fniled AwembliPat
- - - II
Comments and Troubleshooting Hints
0Allrnt -: Executes tests 3-11,13-16,20.
1 Preset -: Executes tests 2-11, 14-16. Runs at power-on or preset.
2IwM AOz Repeats on fail; refer to “CPU Troubleshooting (As)” in this chapter
to replace ROM or A9.
3CMosRAM AOt Beplace A9.
QMahlDRAM AOz Repeats on fail; replace A9.
5 DSP WrlRd AOz Replace A9.
6DSPRAM AOI Replace A9.
7DSPALU A& Replace A9.
8 DSP Intrpt AO/AlO: Remove AlO, rerun test. If fail, replace A9. If paw, replace AlC
9 DIP Control AOiAlO: Most likely A0 assembly.
10 DIP Counter AlO/AO/AlP: Check analog bus node 17 for 1 MHz. If correct, Al2 is
verified; suspect AlO.
11 DSP Control AlO/& Most likely AlO.
12 Fr Pan Wr/Rd A2iAlIAg: Run test 23. lf fail, replace A2. If pass, problem is on bus
between AS and A2 or on A9 assembly.
13 Rear Panel AlB/AOz Disconnect A16, and check A9J2 pin 48 for 4 IdIiz clock signal.
If OK, replace A16. If not, replace A9.
14 Post-reg AlS/A8/Destination assembly: See Chapter 6, ‘Power Supply
Troubleshootiug.”
15 FYac-N Cant A14: Replace A14.
16 Sweep !l’rig A14,AlOz Most likely A14.
17ADcLin Al& Replace AlO.
18ADcofs A10: Replace AlO.
19 ABUS lbst AlO: Replace AlO.
20 PN count A14lA13/A10: Most likely Al4 or A13, as previous tests check AlO. See
1 Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting.”
*P- part of PRESET sequence; AI -part of ALL INTERNAL sequence.
t in decreasiug order of probability.

6-16 Digital ControlTroubleshooting

If the Fault Is Intermittent

Repeat Test Function

If the failure is intermittent, do the following:
., ., ., ., ., . . . _ _ ‘. . s ;.~. ,._.,.,.; ,_. ,. .~.,. .,/ , , ,.,.,., (
1. Press (s) .~~~~~,~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~ .m!&g.: @g
_. . . . ._. . _~~.. . ~. -. . . . . -. /-._ii ..-- i _.._. . . . . __ --:;;;::;A-...;;; _........................ - -.. to turn on the
repeat function.

3. Select the test desired and press ~~~~~

:. : . . i . . . .I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . .ii .... . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . ...x.
4. Press any key to stop the function. The test repeat function is explained in
Chapter 10, “Service Key Menus and Error Messages n

HP-II3 Failures
If you have performed “Step 3. Troubleshooting HP-B3 Systems” in Chapter 4,
“Start Troubleshooting Here,” and you suspect there is an HP-IB problem in the
analyzer, perform the following test. It checks the internal communication path
between the A9 CPU and the Al6 rear panel. It does not check the HP-IB paths
external to the instrument.
., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .: .: , : . .: .: .: :.~.: .
hem m ~~~~~~~~,- :;~~~
_,i ,_,, i. . . . . . . . . i. ,.:. . . . __ . . . . _ . . . j. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ L13) Lxl] :~~~~~~~~.

• If the analyzer fails the test, the problem is likely to be the Al6 rear panel.
q If the analyzer passes the test, it indicates that the A9 CPU can communicate
with the Al6 rear panel with a 50% confidence level. There is a good chance
that the Al6 rear panel is working. This is because internal bus lines have
been tested between the A9 CPU and A16, and HP-IB signal paths are not
checked external to the analyzer.

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-l 6

 7
Source Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting
Here.” This chapter is divided into two troubleshooting procedures for the
following problems:
w Incorrect power levels: Perform the “Power” troubleshooting checks.
n Phase lock error: Perform the “Phase Lock Error” troubleshooting checks.
The source group assemblies consist of the following:
n A3 source
n A4 sampler/mixer
n A7 pulse generator
w A11 phase lock
w Al2 reference
w Al3 fractional-N (analog)
n Al4 fractional-N (digital)

Source Troubleshooting 7-l

Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here. n
Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the
faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts. n
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants. n
5. Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2, “System
Verihcation and Performance Tests. n

Before You Start Troubleshooting

Make sure ail of the assemblies are llrmly seated. Also make sure that input R
has a signal of at least -35 dBm (about 0.01 Vp-p into 50 ohms) at all times to
maintain phase lock.

7-2 Source Troubleshooting

Phase Lock Error

(USE WITH SPECTRUM ANALYZER)

H P 8753E EXT 10 MHz SPECTRUM

REF OUT ANALYZER
NETWORK , i
GIGITIZING ANALYZER
INPUT
i
OX I LLOSCOPE

I /
I
I I
I
I /
,
,
I
,
I I
I
I I
I
\ A J
.------------ _ ------------~_-__________
sg652e

Figure 7-1. Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup

Troubleshooting tools include the assembly location diagram and phase lock
diagnostic tools. The assembly location diagram is on the underside of the
instrument top cover. The diagram shows major assembly locations and RF cable
connections. The phase lock diagnostic tools are explained in the “Source Group
Troubleshooting Appendix” and should be used to troubleshoot phase lock
problems The equipment setup shown in Figure 7-l can be used throughout this
chapter.

Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check

Phase lock error messages may appear as a result of incorrect pretune
correction constants. To check this possibility, perform thepretune correction
constants routine.
The four phase lock error messages, listed below, are described in the “Source
Group Troubleshooting Appendix” at the end of this chapter.
n NO IFFOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
n NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
n PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED

74 Source Troubleshooting
H PHASE LOCK LOST
1. Make sure the A9 CC switch is in the AIZER position:
a. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
b. Set the analyzer on its side.
c. Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with
a T-15 TORX screwdriver.
d. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge.
e. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
f. Move the jumper to the AI.X position as shown in Figure 7-2.
g. Replace the bottom cover, comer bumpers, and power cord.

A9 CPU Assembly

Normal Mode Alter Mode Rocker Slide

sgs1 me

Figure 7-2. Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU

Source Troubleshooting 7-5

 .. . . .. .
2. ‘Jet& on the andyzer md press [s) :~~~~~~~~~; ;*?a$ (46) Ixl]
.,. . . . . . . ,. ., _.........A.. -~~;~.............-/..........~.......... i............ ..__... u;...:.< I ..:.:::._.:. . . . . . . . . . . . i,

new analog bus correction constants. Then press

L45) Lxl) ~~~~ to generate default
pretune correction constants
_i. . . _. . .: ,:. : _ __.. _ _ : . . .: - :.:.:.:. := . . . . x ; . z<sy .~~ _.
Press I&Z&)-...-.._....._.....Asz.
~~~~:~~~,~ ‘Q&f&
L.sA . . . . >. ;._ . . T . . /. . : . -. . __;-.... /._i&. L48) Lxl) ~~~:...~~. 1-i to
generate new pretune correction constants.
3. Press m and observe the analyzer display:
a. No error message: restore the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position. Then
refer to “Post-Repair Procedures” in Chapter 14 to verify operation.
b. Error message visible: continue with “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check”.

A4 Sampler/Mixer Check
The A4, A5, and A6 (R, A and B) sampler/mixers are similar in operation. Any
sampler can be used to phase lock the source. lb eliminate the possibility of a
faulty R sampler, follow this procedure.
1. Remove the W8 cable (Al 1Jl to A4) from the R-channel sampler (A4) and
connect it to either the A-channel sampler (A5) or the B-channel sampler
(A6). Refer to F’igure 7-3.

7-6 Source Troubleshooting

 All A12 Al3 Al4

I I

sg6116e

Figure 7-3. Sampler/Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram

2. If you connected W8 to:

3. Ignore the displayed trace, but check for phase lock error messages. If the
phase lock problem persists, the R-channel sampler is not the problem.

Source Troubleshooting 7-7

 A3 Source and A11 Phase Lock Check
This procedure checks the source and part of the phase lock assembly. It opens
the phase-locked loop and exercises the source by varying the source output
frequency with the A11 pretune DAC.

Note If the analyzer failed internal test 48, default pretune correction
constants were stored which may result in a constant offset of
several MHz. Regardless, continue with this procedure.

Note Use a spectrum analyzer for problems above 100 MHz.

1. Connect the oscilloscope or spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 7-l. (Set

the oscilloscope input impedance to 50 ohms)
2. mess (Preset, Lsyst~, ~~~~~~ . ~~~~~~~~~;
. . . . _ . ,., ,.,. . . . ,. , . ~~~~~~~~~,

, _
,,, ,.....,..... ..,,,,,, .,:. .:.:.: . ,.,.,. .,.,.,., .,., j __;__~__~
i .._ __.................,.,.,.,.,.,.....i ._.; .,. . ...-,. i_._,,_ i _,__ i _.........._____i _.. _.,.; i...=.... _i..._....... ./
......_..
. _ __.
......_
~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ to activate *e SoUTce tune (SRC ME)

service mode.
3. Use the front panel knob or front panel keys to set the pretune frequency
to 300 kHz, 30 MHz, and 40 MHz. Verify the signal frequency on the
0sciIioscope.

Note In SRC TUNE mode, the source output frequency changes in

1 to 2 MHz increments and should be 1 to 6 MHz above the
indicated output frequency.

4. Check for the frequencies indicated by Table 7-l.

‘Ikxble 7-1. Output Frequency in SEC Tune Mode

I settins! ObservedFrequency
3ookHz 1.3 to 6.3 MHZ

3oMHz 31to36MHz

4oMHz 41to46lmz

5. The signal observed on an osciRoscope should be as solid as the signal in

Figure 7-4.

7-g SourceTroubleshooting
 -SO. MO n.oc O.OMOOmet so.MO n.sc
I I t

ch.
11-
1 -
- 10.0-miv
lM.0 n voltr/dlv Off-t
Dmloy : ik5iizotYs

sg607s

Figure 7-4. Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode

6. The signal observed on the spectrum analyzer will appear jittery as in

Figure 7-5 (B), not solid as in F’igure 7-5 (A). This is because in SRC TUNE
mode the output is not phase locked.

B
sg609s

Figure 7-5.
Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC Tune Mode

Source Troubleshooting 7-9

7- Press IMenu) ~~hkd# to vary the power and check for corresponding level
changes on the test instrument. (A power change of 20 dl3 wilI change the
voltage observed on the oscilIoscope by a factor of ten.)
8. Note the results of the frequency and power changes:
If the frequency and power output changes are correct, skip ahead to “Al2
Reference Check” located in this chapter.
If the frequency changes are not correct, continue with “YO Coil Drive
Check with Analog Bus”.
If the power output changes are not correct, check analog bus node 3.

b. Press (Marker) @ Lc/n). The marker should read approximately 434 mu.
c. Press (K) @ Lc/n). The marker should read approximately 646 mu.

7-10 Sourcs Troubleshooting

YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope

Note Use the large extender board for easy access to the voltage
points. The extender board is included with the HP 8753 lb01
Kit. See Chapter 13, “Replaceable ParW, for part numbers and
ordering information.

1. Connect oscilloscope probes to AllPl-1 and AllPl-2. The YO coil drive

signal is actually two signals whose voltage difference drives the coil.

3. Monitor the two YO coil drive lines In source tune mode the voltage
difference should vary from approximately 3.5 to 5.0 volts as shown in
Figure 7-7.
q If the voltages are not correct, replace the faulty All assembly.
q If the output signa.ls from the All assembly are correct, replace the faulty
A3 source assembly.
q If neither the A11, nor theA3 assembly is faulty, continue with the next
check.

-300.000 Ins -150.000 IS 0.00000 s

z::: 1. GCG volte/div Offmet -- 7.000 volts

11-e -- 30.0
1.000 volts/div Offset - 7.000
0. OOMOvolts
I

mddiv Oeloy s
sg606s

Figure 7-7.
YO- and YO + Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PIA OFF

7-12 Source Troubleshooting

Al2 Reference Check
The signals are evaluated with pass/fail checks. The most efficient way to check
the Al2 frequency reference signals is to use the analog bus while referring to
‘Pable 7-2.
Alternatively, you can use an osciuoscope, while referring to ‘Ihble 7-3 and
Figure 7-8 through F’igure 7-14. If any of the observed signals differs from
the figures, there is a 90% probability that the Al2 assembly is faulty. Either
consider the Al2 assembly defective or perform the “A12 Digital Control Signals
Check”.
Both of these procedures are described ahead.

Analog Bus Method

counter.
2. Press L21) IXJ to count the frequency of the 100 kHz signal.
3. Press 1Menu) ~~~~~~~
: :. i ~........~...i__--.i .....1500)
. m. Verify that the counter reading (displayed
on the analyzer next to cnt :) matches the corresponding 100 kHz value for
the CW frequency. (Refer to Table 7-2.)
4. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with
the value in ‘Ihble 7-2:

able 7-2. Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies

CW Fre4pency Analog BM Node 21 Analog BUE Node 24 Analog Bus Node 25
lOOkILt 2ndLO

5ookIiz 0.100 MHZ 0.504 MHZ 0.500 MHZ

2Bm!& 0.100 MHZ 2.007 Jmz 2.000 MHZ

6OBmz 0.100 MHZ 0.996 MB2 1.000 Bmz

the frequencies listed in this table to within 3~0.1%. Accuracy may vary

Source Troubleshooting 7-13

 5. Press L24) Lxl] to count the frequency of the 2nd Lo signal.
... .
6- Press Ihnenu_) ~$ji!t~:~t~~~~ Lsoo] Ck/m. Verify that the counter reading matches
the corresponding 2nd Lo value for the CW frequency. (Refer to ‘lhble 7-2.)
7. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with
the value in Table 7-2:
n Press (FJ (i&i).

n Press (%GJ Irln_u.

8. Press L25_) Lxl] to count the frequency of the PLREF signai.

9. Press @J ~~~~~: L500) m. Verify that the counter reading matches
the corresponding PLREF value for the CW frequency. (Refer to ‘Pable 7-2.)
10. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with
the value in ‘lhble 7-2:
n Press(TJ(l&iJ

n Press(sol(KiJiJ.

11. Check the results.

q If aII the counter readings match the frequencies listed in Table 7-2, skip
ahead to “A13/A14 Fractional-N Check”.
q If the counter readings are incorrect at the 500 kHz and 2 MHz settings
only, go to ‘TN LO at Al2 Check”.
q If aII the counter readings are incorrect at aII three CW frequencies, the
counter may be faulty. Perform the “OsciIIoscope Method” check of the
signals described below. (If the signais are good, either the A10 or Al4
assemblies could be faulty.)

7-14 Source Troubleshooting

Oscilloscope Method
You need not use the oscilloscope method unless the analog bus is
non-functional or any of the signals fail the specifications listed in mble 7-2.
If the analog bus is non-functional or the previous check has revealed
questionable signals, observe the signal(s) with an oscilloscope. ‘Pdble 7-3
identifies a convenient test point and a plot for the five signals listed.

able 7-3. Al2 Reference Frequencies

Mnemonic Signal LOCdi0n see Analyzer
Description Fh3=e htting
FN1OOkIiZREF 100 kH2 Reference AlSTPb Figure 7-8 any
RF2 Phase Lock AllTP9 Figure 7-9 216MHzCW
Reference
REP Phase Lock AllTP9 Plgure 7-10 6MHzCW
Reference

mm* Fractional-N Lo A14J2 F?gure7-11 1oMHzcw

4MHzREF 4 MHZ Reference Al2TP9 F?gure 7-12 any

2ND Lo+/- Second Lo AEPl-2,4 F?gure 7-1s >lSMHzCW

2ND Lo+/- Second M Al2Pl-2,4 pisure 7-14 14MHzcw

Not an Al2 signal, but required for Al2 lowband operation.

Source Troubleshooting 7-15

100kHzPulses
The 100 kHz pulses are very narrow and typically 1.5 V in amplitude. You may
have to increase the oscilloscope intensity to see these pulses. (See Figure 7-8.)

-100.000 us 0.00000 L 100.000 “*

sg6i OS

Figure 7-8. Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 (any frequency)

7-16 Source Troubleshooting

PLREF Waveforms
REF Signal At AllTP9. REF is the buffered PLREF+ signal. The 1st IF is
phase locked to this signal. Use an oscilloscope to observe the signal at the
frequencies noted in Figure 7-9 and Figure 7-10.
High Band RJW Signal. In high band the REF signal is a constant 1 MHz square
wave as indicated by Figure 7-9.

-1.00000 us 0.00000 5 1.00000 us

ch.1
Timsboso
- SOD.0 auoltm/div
- 200 ns/drv
off&
DdCby
-- 0.00000
o.wo VOIU
s

sg611 s

Figure 7-9. High Band REF Signal (216 MHz CW)

Source Troubleshooting 7-17

Low Band REF Signal. In low band this signal follows the frequency of the RF
output signal. Figure 7-10 illustrates a 5 MHz CW signal.

sg612s
Figure 7-10. REF Signal at AllTP9 (5 MHz CW)

q If REF looks good, skip ahead to “4 MHz Reference Signal”.

q If REF is bad in low band, continue with TN Lo at Al2 Check”.

7-18 Source Troubleshooting

FN LO at Al2 Check
1. Use an oscilloscope to observe the FN Lo from.&14 at the cable
end of A14J2. Press (jj) (SystemJ. . . . . . . ~~~~~,~~~~.. . . . . .i. : . . . . . i. . . . ~.,. . . . . /. ~. . -.::: .:.<. . :~~~~.~~~~~~
: . . .U.L _.. . :. <.ti.: ..__:<. :., . . ... .~.. . W~ .... ~. . . . . . . .
.v. :.: :. .
:-FM%%
. . . . . . . .:4.:. ,.,. .TWE:n#.
,__.. ._. . - . .: . . . . . . . . . . . . .<. <.:to switch on the fractional-N service mode.
2. Use the front panel knob to vary the frequency from 30 to 60 MHz. The
signal should appear similar to Figure 7-l 1. The display will indicate 10 to
60.8 MHz.
q If the F’N Lo signal is good, the Al2 assembly is faulty.
q If the FN Lo signal is not good, skip ahead to “A13/A14 Fractional-N
Check”.

-50.000 - 0.00000 SPD 50.000 n*c

la.2 - 100.0 mvolts/div

Timdaaso - 10.0rises//iv
sg613s

Figure 7-11. Typical FN LO Waveform at A12Jl

SouroeTmbleshooting 7-19
4 MHz Reference Signal
This reference signal is used to control the receiver. If faulty, this signal can
cause apparent source problems because the CPU uses receiver data to control
the source. At A12TP9 it should appear similar to Figure 7-12.

-5oo.oon rleec 500.000l-was

ch. 1 Offset
=- 1.000 volts/dav OPlDy - o.ooo
o.oocoo volts
*PC
-
11rboro 100 nsec/div
sg614s

Figure 7-12. 4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP!3 (Preset)

7-20 Source Troubleshooting

2ND LO Waveforms
The 2nd LO signals appear different in phase and shape at different frequencies.
90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band. In high band, the
2nd Lo is 996 kHz. As indicated by Figure 7-13, the 2nd Lo actually consists of
two signals 90 degrees out of phase.

-1.00000“.OO 0.00000 mc

sg615s

Figure 7-13.
90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Signals (216 MHZ CW)

In-Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band. The 2nd Lo signals in low band, as
shown in Figure 7-14, are not phase shifted. In low band these signals track the
RF output with a 4 kHz offset.

SourceTroubleshooting 7-21
 -1M.000 - O.MMO .mc lLlo.om “UC

I I I t I I

I I I I I I I
- 2 0 0 . 0 mvoltm/dlv - ROD0 voltm
Ek=: - $O&O~ve~~;d’v m: : gL:h:
Tmobamo - oehy

sg616s

Figure 7-14. In-Phase Low Band 2nd LO

LO Signals
SSgnals (14 MHZ CW)

If any of the signals of Table 7-2 are incorrect, the probability is 90% that the
Al2 assembly is faulty. Either consider the Al2 assembly faulty or perform the
“Al2 Digital Control Signals Check” described ahead.

7-22 Source Troubleshooting

Al2 Digital Control Signals Check
Several digital control signals must be functional for the Al2 assembly
to operate properly. Check the control lines listed in ‘I%ble 7-4 with the
oscilloscope in the high input impedance setting.

‘Ihble 7-4. Ala-Related Digital Control Signals

Mnemonic Signtll Loc8tion see Analyzer
Description FIBrve -ttinB
LENREF L-Reference Enable Al2P2-6 Figure 7-15 Preset
LHB L-Hi& Band Al2P2-32 Figlm 7-16 Preset
LLB L-Low Band Al2Pl-23 Finure 7-16 Preset

L ENREF Line. This is a TI’L signal. lb observe it, trigger on the negative edge.
In preset state, the signal should show activity similar to Figure 7-15.

ch.2 - Fg>z;d’v offwt

Tim,bwm - .
sg617s

Figure 7-15. L ENREF Line at A12P2-16 (Preset)

Source Troubleshooting 7-23

L HB and L LB Lines. These complementary signals toggle when the instrument
switches from low band to high band as illustrated by Figure 7-16.

sg618s

Figure 7-16. Complementary L J3.B and L LB Signals (Preset)

If all of the digital signals appeared good, the Al2 assembly is faulty

A13/A14 Fractional-N Check

Use the analog bus or an oscilloscope to check the Al4 VCO’s ability to sweep
from 30 MHz to 60 MHz. The faster analog bus method should suffice unless
problems are detected.

Fractional-N Check with Analog Bus

. . . . ., ., . ,. . ., . :,. ,. ,.
;&&&+z&
..-.- /,.,_.,._ ;;_._. _. . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... . . -. ./._...;,_. -__ __.,.~. . .~.,. . .__i. . . . . . . . . . . ./.~._.. . . .
-~,~,~~~~~~~ ~~~~ to sMtch on the andog bus md the
.i . :. :<:<x i.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .~. . . . . . -..- - . _. -
fractional-N counter.
.:,, ..,, . ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. _
. ., . . _ . . . i : . :
2. Then press Ihnenu_) ~~~~~. ._. ._. . . . . . . . . . . . : .-: : . to set the analyzer to CW mode.
3. Set the instrument as indicated in ‘lhble 7-5 and see whether the VCO
generates the frequencies listed.

7-24 Source Troubleshootin(l

 ‘Jhble 7-5. VC0 Range Check Frequencies
Imtmment Setting Counter Qeadng 1
31Bmz 30f0.030 MHZ

6o.oooooo MHZ 60*0.060 MHZ

4. Check the counter reading at the frequencies indicated.

q If the readings are within the limits specified, the probability is greater
than 90% that the fractional-N assemblies are functional. Either skip
ahead to the “A7 PuIse Generator Check” or perform the more conclusive
“Al4 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope” described below.
q If the readings fail the specified limits, perform the “Al4 VCO Exercise”.

Al4 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope

1. Remove the W9 HI OUT cable (A14Jl to A7) from the A7 assembly and
connect it to an oscilloscope set for 50 ohm input impedance. Switch on the
analyzer.

Menus and Error Messages”, for more information-on the F’RACN TUNE
mode.
3. Vary the fractional-N VCO frequency with the front panel knob and check
the signal with the oscilloscope. The waveform should resemble F’igure 7-17,
Figure 7-18, and F’igure 7-19.
If the fractional-N output signals are correct, continue source troubleshooting
by skipping ahead to “A7 Pulse Generator Check”.

Source Troubleshooting 7-25

 Ch. 2
T~mebase -- 100.0 mvolta/div
10.0nsec/div Offrt
Delay -- 0.00000
a000 VO~+E
set
sgdi 9s

Figure 7-17. 10 MHZ HI OUT Wiweform from A14Jl

Ch. 2 - -10.0
T~nsba 100.0nmec/div
mvol+a/div

sg62Os

Figure 7-18. 25 MHz El OUT Wiweform from A14Jl

7-26 Source Troubleshooting

 -50.000 n-w 0.00000 eec SO.000 “.OC

I I I I I I I
ch.2
Tirmbo8a
- lm.0
-
wolt=/div
10.0nmos/div
0ffwt
-ioy =- aoomo
aM0 Volta
.PC
sg621 s

Figure 7-19. 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14Jl

Al4 VCO Exercise
The nominal tuning voltage range of the VCO is + 10 to -5 volts When the
analyzer is in operation, this voltage is supplied by the Al3 assembly. This
procedure substitutes a power supply for the Al3 assembly to check the
frequency range of the Al4 VCO.
1. Switch off the analyzer and remove the Al3 assembly.
2. Put the Al4 assembly on an extender board and switch on the instrument.
3. Prepare to monitor the VCO frequency, either by:
a. Activating the analog bus and setting the internal counter to the FRACN
node, or
b. Connecting an oscilloscope to A14J2 (labeled LO OUT) and looking for
waveforms similar to Figure 7-20.

Source Troubleshooting 7-27

 -50.000 - 0.00000 *es 5 0 . 0 0 0 “se.2

I-* II - ,nn n -..^>~~,.4*., nrr--r - 0. MO vo

sg613s

Figure 7-20. LO OUT Waveform at A14J2

4. Vary the voltage at A14TP14 from + 10 to -5 volts either by:

a. Connecting an appropriate external power supply to A14TP14, or
b. First jumping the + 15 V internal power supply from A8TP8 to A14TP14
and then jumping the -5.2 V supply from ASTPlO to A14TP14.
5. Conhrm that the VCO frequency changes from approximately 30 MHz or less
to 60 MHz or more.
6. If this procedure produces unexpected results, the Al4 assembly is faulty.
7. If this procedure produces the expected results, continue with the “Al4
Divide-by-N Circuit Check”.

7-28 Source Troubleshooting

Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check

Note The Al3 assembly should still be out of the instrument and the
Al4 assembly on an extender board.

1. Ground A14TP14 and confirm (as in the Al4 VCO Exercise) that the VCO
oscillates at approximately 50 to 55 MHz.
2. Put the analyzer in CW mode (to avoid relock transitions) and activate the
F’RACN TUNE service mode.
3. Connect an oscilloscope to A14J3 and observe the output.
4. With the F’RACN TUNE service feature, vary the frequency from 30 MHz to
60.8 MHz.
5. The period of the observed signal should vary from 5.5 ps to 11 p.s.
q If this procedure produces unexpected results, the Al4 assembly is faulty.
q If this procedure produces the expected results, perform the “A14-to-Al3
Digital Control Signals Check. n.
6. Remember to replace the Al3 assembly.

A14-to-Al3 Digital Control Signals Check.

The Al4 assembly generates a ‘ITL cycle start (CST) signal every 10
microseconds. If the VCO is oscillating and the CST signal is not detectable at
A14TP3, the Al4 assembly is non-functional.
Use the CST signal as an external trigger for the oscilloscope and monitor the
signals in ‘Ihble 7-6. Since these ‘ITL signals are generated by Al4 to control
A13, check them at Al3 6rst. Place Al3 on the large extender board. The
signals should look similar to Pigure 7-21. If these signals are good, the Al3
assembly is defective.

Source Troubleshooting 7-28

 ‘lhble 7-6. A14-to-Al3 Digital Control Signal Locations
Al3 Location Al4 Location

05T none TP3

L FNHOLD P2-2 P2-2

FNBIA6 P2-6 P2-6

APU P2-32 P2-32

API2 P2-3 P2-3

API3 P2-34 P2-34

API4 P2-4 P2-4

API6 P2-36 P2-36

Pl-23 Pl-63

* LFNHOLO

API14

FN LATCH

sg622s

Figure 7-21. Al4 Generated Digital Control Signals

7-30 Source Troubleshooting

H MB Line. This signal is active during the 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep. The
upper trace of F’igure 7-22 shows relative inactivity of this signal during preset
condition. The lower trace shows its status during a 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep
with inactivity during retrace only.

-1.00000 set 0.00000 *PC 1.00000 (105

sg623s

Figure 7-22.
H MB Signal at A14Pl-5 (Preset and 16 MHZ to 31 MHz Sweep)

Source Troubleshooting 731

A7 Pulse Generator Check
The pulse generator affects phase lock in high band only. It can be checked with
either a spectrum analyzer or an oscilloscope.

A7 Pube Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer

1. Remove the A7-to-A6 SMB cable (W7) from the A7 pulse generator assembly.
Set the analyzer to generate a 16 MHz CW signal. Connect the spectrum
analyzer to the A7 output connector and observe the signal. The A7 comb
should resemble the spectral display in Figure 7-23.

sg624s

Figure 7-23. Pulse Generator Output

2. If the analyzer malfunction relates to a particular frequency or range, look

more closely at the comb tooth there. Adjust the spectrum analyzer span
and bandwidth as required. Even at 3 GHz, the comb should look as clean
as Figure 7-24. For Option 006 instruments at 6 GHz, the comb tooth level
should be approximately -46 dBm.

732 Source Troubleshooting

 I I I I I I I
CENTER 2.989 88 GClL *PAN ?. .ea wiz
mas ml 36 *uz VW 363 *cIx OYP 28.8 un.5

sg625s

Figure 7-24. High Quality Comb lboth at 3 GHz

3. If the signaI at the A7 output is good, check the A7-to-A4 cable.

4. If the signal is not as clean as F’igure 7-24, observe the HI OUT input signal to
the A7 assembly.
. . . . .:<.+“:.: ’ .;. ,./. ,................ . . . . . . . . . . ./, ../ . :. ., . . . . . . .
a. On the network analyzer, press [~Systeml~~~~~~~‘.~:~:~~ #@F%$l$, !@&&
...?? : .: :,. :. . :. :,~:; : :~: ~ ~ ~ . ~ >E .;y: ( .,
~~~~~~~~~~.
: : . . . . z.2 :. . z:. . 2:. .~.;. :. . ~.i .,:si..i.;,.~. . . _~.. . .i &he&e do not readjust the instrument. Remove the
A14-to-A7 SMB cable (WQ) from the A7 pulse generator assembly
(CW B 16 MHz).
b. Set the spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 45 MHz and a span
of 30 MHz. Connect it to the A14-to-A7 cable still attached to the Al4
assembly. Narrow the span and bandwidth to observe the signal closely.
5. If the HI OUT signal is as clean as Figure 7-25, the A7 assembly is faulty.
Otherwise, check the A14-to-A7 cable or recheck the A13/A14 fractional-N as
described ahead.

Rechecking the A13/A14 Fractional-N

Some phase lock problems may result from phase noise problems in the
fractional-N loop. lb troubleshoot this unusual failure mode, do the following:
1. Set the network analyzer at 60 MHz in the FRACN TUNE mode.

Source Troubleshooting 7-33

 2. Use a spectrum analyzer, to examin e the HI OUT signal from the Al4
assembly. The signal should appear as clean as Figure 7-25. The comb shape
may vary from pulse generator to pulse generator.

sg626s

Figure 7-25. Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode

A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope
Perform this check if a spectrum analyzer is not available.
1. Remove the A4to-All SMB cable from the A4 (R) sampler/mixer output.
Connect the oscilloscope to the A4 output (1st IF).
2. Activate the FRACN TUNE
. _. . . . . . . . . . . service
...... mode
,. , _ _. ; . ., .,. ._.,., ...and
.._. _. . i_ _ __.....i . . .,. _
_ ;. ._,. t.~e,,ne.~~~~ion~~,~ t@-,
50 MHz. press Is-] ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~:~,~~~~.~~~~ [sol
m-
3. Activate the SRC TUNE service mode of the analyzer and tune the source to
,: 7 .i .:z: .~~;.;~~~~;.~~~;~; ;~~; ii
50 M&. press ~~~~.~.~~~~~ ~~~~~~~ L50) Irln_llE).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i. . _._ _ _ _ . . . . . __ _ __ ____ _ ., ., . i _ _ ,. _.,._.,_.~.._
4. Set the SRC TUNE frequency to those listed in Table 7-7 and observe the 1st
Il? waveforms. They should appear similar to F’igure 7-26.
q If the signals observed are proper, continue with “All Phase Lock Check”.
~3 If the signals observed are questionable, use a spectrum analyzer to
perform the preceding “A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum
Analyzer”.

7-34 Source Troubleshooting

 ‘Ihble 7-7. 1st IF Waveform Settings
I SRCTUNE I PBACN I HZUIUOlIiC I 1stlF I
6obfHz 6oMHz 1 ltO6MHZ
26oMHz 6oMHz 6 lto6MHz
266OBfHz 6oMHz 51 lto6MHZ

-,.00040 “0 0.04400 E 1.00400 us

I I t I I I I

Ch. 1 - 15 -00 avol+s/div Offset - 0.000 volts

T,nebnsa - 200 ns/drv Delay - 0.04400 c
Ch. I Pormetoro Froq. - 4. 21293 WL

sg627s

Figure 7-26. Typical 1st IF WAveform in FRACN lTJNE/SRC TUNE Mode

All Phase Lock Check

At this point, the All phase lock assembly appears to be faulty (its inputs
should have been verified already). Nevertheless, you may elect to use the
phase lock diagnostic routines or check the relevant signals at the assembly
itself for confirmation.
Note If external source mode is the only operating mode with phase
lock problems, replace the A11 phase lock assembly.

Source Troubleshooting 735

Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG
Refer to “Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools” in “Source Group Troubleshooting
Appendix” at the end of this chapter for an explanation of the error messages
and the diagnostic routines. Follow the steps there to determine in which state
the phase lock is lost.
q If NO IF FOUND is displayed, con&m that the analog bus is functional and
perform the “Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)” as outlined in
Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants.”
q If phase lock is lost in the ACQUIRE state, the A11 assembly is faulty
q If phase lock is lost in the TRACK state, troubleshoot source phase lock loop
components other than the A11 assembly.

Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination

lb con&m that the A11 assembly is receiving the signals required for its proper
operation, perform the following steps.
1. Place the A11 assembly on the large extender board.
2. Switch on the analyzer and press Ipreset).
3. Check for the signals listed in ‘Ihble 7-8.

‘Ihble 7-8. All Input Signals

Mnemonic II0 Accesa Notes
FE=
FMCOIL- 0 AllPl-S,SS Figure7-27 AidsYOcoILinaettingYIG.PreasLPreset)LMenu)
,._._ i .,., .__ @ @-J to *serve this s.I.
~~~~~~.

REP I AllTPD FIgwe 7-0, Observe both low band and high band CW frequencies.
Figure 7-10

YOcoIL+ 0 AllPl-2,S2 pjgure 7-7 uw .~~~~~.

._....... - _.............. I- .._... .._._.
YOCOIL- 0 AllPl-1,Sl F-lgure 7-7

WrIF I AllPLIFIN F’igure 7-26 Check for 1 MHz with tee a All jack (not at cable end) ir
high band.

7-36 Source Troubleshooting

 0.00000 3

. I . L. I
I
ti I I I t ’ II I

m. I
Tirobosn
-- 2.000 volfa/div
100 q s/div
Offs*+
0010y
-
-
0.000 volto
0.00000 s

sg628s
Figure 7-27. FM Coil - Plot with 3 Point Sweep

4. If any of the input signal is not proper, refer to the overall block diagram in
Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here,” as an aid to trouble shooting the
problem to its source.
5. If any of the output signals is not proper, the A11 assembly is faulty.

Source Troubleshooting 7-37

Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix

Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus

The analog bus can perform a variety of fast checks, However, it too is subject
to failure and thus should be tested prior to use. You should have done this in
Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here. n
lb use the analog bus to check anv one of the nodes.: Dress e. . IiI
.,
~~~~~~~ .~~~~~~~~~~~. men press m ~~~~~~~~~~~;~:~~~.
: : : . : :-.: .:-: : , .._. . .__..:.: . ;: . -.. . L;.,:.; :.; :. ;.: ., . >,:L. ., , .L’. _ :. .._:. . ..___. . . . . _. . .
..-.....................-....
and enter the analog bus node number followed by Lxl]. Refer to “Analog
Bus” in Chapter 10, “Service Key Menus and Error Messages”, for additional
information.

Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools

n error messages
n diagnostic routines

Phase Lock Error Messages

All phase lock error messages can result from improper front panel connections.
NO IF FOUND : CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means no IF was detected during pretune:
a source problem. Perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check”.
NO PHASE LOCK : CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means the IF was not acquired after
pretune: a source problem. Perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check”, earlier in
this chapter.
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED means that a calculation of prettme values was not
successful: a source or receiver failure. Perform the “Source Prettme Correction
Constants” routine as outlined in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction
Constants” If the analyzer fails that routine, perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer
Check”.
PHASE LOCK LOST means that phase lock was lost or interrupted before the band
sweep ended: a source problem. Refer to “Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines”
next to access the phase lock loop diagnostic service routine. Then troubleshoot
the problem by following the procedures in this chapter.

7-38 Source Troubleshooting

Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines
Perform the following steps to determine at what frequencies and bands the
phase lock problem occurs
_.,,. . . . . . . . , ,. . . : . : .: .:;: :.: / ..: :. . . . . . . . . :, s’: :, :, :, . ,.,., .: . < :. : . . . .“’ .i. .? . q. ” I -:. <.+- . :. : . /, .:,* ‘i .<:
1. Press (SJ Ls) ~~~~~~,~~
_..;~~.. :. .~. .~/./ .A/..A...........~ .~ i.%w..: :. .~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
: : :.: .: :- :::..:: . . d. . . A. . . . u. i . . . . . A. . i . .,. . .: , :3?LX&#JJllt
. . . . . . . L i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~@I$$$~.
. . . .::..x i i to
switch off the automatic phase-locked loop. Normally, when the phase-locked
loop detects lock problems, it automatically aborts the sweep and attempts to
recalibrate the pretune cycle. Switching off PLL AUTO defeats this routine.
2. Press ip& DX&@~~@ tothe
mode.~~~fnthis..~~~~ switch
phaseon thecycle
lock phase-locked loop diagnostic
and subsweep number areservice
displayed
on the analyzer display. (See “Service modes menu” in Chapter 10, “Service
Key Menus and Error Messages”, for more information.)
,.; . .~. ,.~ , , ,. . :. :. :_/.
3. Press %%&~:~.p&&I$~;
. .:. . __.:. :. :.-.:.:.,.:. L; . . . . . . . . . . to pause the phase lock sequence and determine where the
source is trying to tune when lock is lost.
Refer to “Source theory” in Chapter 12, “Theory of Operation”, for additional
information regarding band related problems. Then use the procedures in this
chapter to check source functions at specific frequencies.

Broadband Power Problems

This section assumes that a power problem exists across the full frequency
range, but that no error message is displayed on the analyzer. The problem may
affect port 1, port 2, or both. Assemblies in question include:
n A3 source
n A21, A22 directional couplers
n A24 solid-state transfer switch
w any cables from the A3 source to the outputs of port 1 or port 2

Source Troubleshooting 7-38

 8

Receiver Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting
Here. n Follow the procedures in the order given, unless instructed otherwise.
The receiver group assemblies consist of the following:
w A4/5/6 sampler/mixer assemblies
n A10 digital IF assembly

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-1

Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the
faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures. n
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants. n
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, “System
Verification and Performance Tests n

8-2 Receiver Troubleshooting

Receiver Failure Error Messages
The error messages which indicate receiver group problems may be caused by
the instrument itself or by external devices or connections. The following three
error messages share the same description.
n CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED
w CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED
n CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED
If any of the above error messages appear, the analyzer has exceeded
approximately + 14 dBm at one of the test ports. The RF output power is
automatically reduced to -85 dBm. The annotation PJ appears in the left
margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been
activated. lb reset the analyzer’s power and regain control of the power level,
do the following:
1. Remove any devices under test which may have contributed excess power to
the input.
2. fiess m @&&@ @ Lxl] ~~~~~~~~~~~, to return the power level to
~. . ~. . . . . . . . . . . ...-.I. . . . . . ~.. . . . . .~.. .i. . v~-~.~. ~. .~.~.~. ~ ._..i
the preset state.
q If the power trip indicator (Pi) does not reappear, reconfigure the test
setup to keep input power levels at 0 dBm or below.
q If Pl reappears, continue with “Check the A and B Inputs”.

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-3

Check the A and B Inputs
Good inputs produce traces similar to Figure 8-2 in terms of flatness. To examine
both input traces, do the following:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-1. (The through cable is HP part
number 8120-4779.)

NETWORK ANALYZER

Figure S-l. Equipment Setup

2. Check the flatness of the input A trace by comparing it with the trace in
Figure 8-2.

3. Check the flatness of the input B trace by comparing it with the trace in
Figure 8-2.
:.:............................... __ .... ...................
.~.~..~.~ ...... ._ ................................ ...) p.:.:.:.:.:.... / ::..:...:.:.:.: ....

fie3 1Meao) ~~~~~~~~., ;@) ...

..................
..............................................
............_.............-._......................._....iiii. ..................... 2.. ... :.z.x.:.:.-,.:.:.:.z.:.&...........ii.............................. .._ ........:.:.::.,_L :cz.:.m

q If neither of the input traces resembles Figure 8-2, continue with

“Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad”.
q If at least one input trace resembles Figure 8-2, continue with
“Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good”.

84 Receiver Troubleshooting
 START 030 000 MHZ

Figure 8-2. Typical Good Trace

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-5

Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad

Run Internal Tests 18 and 17

1. Press (Preset) ~ ~~~I~~~~.~~~~~~ Llsl Lxl) ~~~~~~ to I-un

- . . _. . _. . - . _. -...
..-.................-... ;:. . . _. . . .
the ADC offset.
__ _ _ ~~.
2. Then, when the analyzer finishes test 18, press L17) Lxl) .~~~~~~~~ to
run the ADC linearity test.
If either of these tests FAIL, the A10 assembly is probably faulty. This can be
conflrmed by checking the 4 MHz signal and substituting the A10 assembly or
checking the signals listed in Table 8-l.

Check 2nd LO
Check the 2nd Lo signal. Refer to the “Al2 Reference Check” section of
Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting” for analog bus and oscilloscope checks of
the 2nd Lo and waveform illustrations.
q If the analyzer passes the checks, continue to “Check the 4 MHz REF Signal”.
q If the analyzer fails the checks, perform the high/Iow band transition
adjustment. If the adjustment fails, or brings no improvement, replace A12.

8-6 Receiver Troubleshooting

Check the 4 MHz REF Signal
1. Press w.
2. Use an oscilloscope to observe the 4 MHz reference signal at AlOP2-6.
q If the signal does not resemble Figure 8-3, troubleshoot the signal source
(A12P2-36) and path.
q If the signal is good, the probability is greater than 90% that the A10
assembly is faulty. For confirmation, perform “Check A10 by Substitution
or Signal Examination”.

-500.000 nmec 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 ma0 soo.000 Mac

I I
iA
f/ I / I I

/ A / I
\ / \ /t \ / \ /

I Ch. 1 - 1.000
I
volt.s/d,v Offmet - 0.000 Volts

TImebase - 100 nwc/div OIlOY - o.ooooo se=

sg603s

Figure 8-3. 4 MHz RJIF Waveform

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-7

Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination
If the 4 MHz REF signal is good at the A10 digital IF assembly, check the A10
assembly by one of the following methods:
n Substitute another A10 assembly or
n Check the signal/control lines required for its operation. The pins and signal
sources of those lines are identified in ‘Ihble 8-1. It is possible that the A9
assembly may not be providing the necessary signals. These signal checks
allow you to determine which assembly is faulty. Some of the waveforms are
illustrated by Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5.
If the substitute assembly shows no improvement or if all of the input signals
are valid, continue with “Check the 4 kHz Signal”. Otherwise troubleshoot the
suspect signal(s) or consider the A10 assembly faulty.

8-8 Receiver Troubleshooting

 ‘Ihble S-l. Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation
Mnemonic Description A10 SW
LOCAiOU source
Dlmo Digital IF date 0 (MB) P2-27 Aopz-27
DlFDl DigitallFdatal P2-67 AQP2-67
DE-D2 DigitallFdata2 P2-28 AQP2-28
DIFD3 DigitallPdata3 P2-63 AOPZ-63
DlFD4 DigitallFdata4 F%20 AQP2-20
DEDS DigitdIFdata6 P2-69 AW2-60
DEDB DigitdIFdlIta6 P2-30 ABP2-30
DlFD7 Digital lF data 7 (MSB) P2-60 Am&60
L DIPEN Digital IF enable 0 P2-34 AQP2-34
L D-1 Digital IF enable 1 P2-6 Mm-6
L DIFEN2 Digital IF enable 2 P2-36 AoP2-36

DIFCC Digital IF conversion camp. F%33 AlOP2-33

DIRXK Digital IF aerial clock P2-4 AlOP2-4

DIF DATA Digital lF aerial data out P2-3 AlOP2-3
LFiNDlF L-enable digital IF P2-17 AoP2-17
LINTCOP L-interrupt, DSP P2-2 AlOP2-2

‘Check for Tl’L activity.

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-g

 DIFCLK

DIFDATA*

* DIF DATA consists of 16 serial bits per input conversion.

the LSB is on the right side and is the most volatile.
sg602s

Figure 8-4. Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger

Ch. 1 - 4.000 vo1tc/cirv

Ch. 2 - 1.000 voltddrv
T , **boss - 20.0 “dd2V
sg604s

Figure 8-5. Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger

g-10 Receiver Troubleshooting

 Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good
Since at least one input is good, all of the common receiver circuitry beyond the
multiplexer is functional. Only the status of the individual sampler/mixers and
their individual signal paths is undetermined.

Check the 4 kHz Signal

l- Press Lpreset) LMenu) ~~~~~.
2. Use an oscilloscope to check the 4 kHz output of the sampler/mixer in
question at the Al0 assembly. The input and output access pins are listed in
lhble 8-2. The signal should resemble the waveform of Figure 8-6.
q If the signal is good, continue with “Check the Trace with the Sampler
Correction Constants Off n.
q If the signal is bad, skip ahead to “Check 1st Lo SiiaI at Sampler/Mixer”.

‘ItLble 8-2. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Signal Locations

I Mnemonic I DeecrlPtlon I A10 Locatlou I slgual solute I
lm 4kHz AlOPl-1, 31 A4Pl-6

IFA 4kHz AlOPl-4, 34 ASPl-6

IFB 4kHz AlOPl-7, 37 A6Pl-6

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-l 1

If the trace shows no improvement when the sampler correction constants are
toggled from off to on, perform the “Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction
Constants (Test 53)” adjustment described in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants” If the trace remains bad after this adjustment, the A10
assembly is defective.

(4 04
sg643d

Figure 8-7. Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and off

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-13

Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer
If the 4 kHz signal is bad at the sampler/mixer assembly, check the 1st LO signal
where it enters the sampler/mixer assembly in question.
q If the 1st LO is faulty, check the 1st LO signal at its output connector on the
A7 assembly to determine if the failure is in the cable or the assembly.
q If the 1st LO is good, continue with “Check 2nd LO SiiaI at Sampler/Mixer”.

Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer

Check the 2nd LO signal at the pins identified in ‘0ble 8-3. Refer to the “Al2
Reference Check” in Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting”, for analog bus
and oscilloscope checks of the 2nd LO and waveform illustrations ‘Ihble 8-3
identifies the signal location at the samplers and the Al2 assembly.

‘Ihble 8-3. 2nd LO Locations

Mnemonic Description Sampler SW
LOCdl0n soluce

ZndL01 2nd Lo (0 degrees) A4/6/6 Pl-11 Al2Pl-2, 32

2nd Lo 2 2nd Lo ( - 9O degrees) A4lbl6 Pl-4 Al2Pl-4, 34

If the 2nd LO is good at the sampler/mixer, the sampler/mixer assembly is faulty.

Otherwise, troubleshoot the Al2 assembly and associated signal path.

8-14 Receiver Troubleshooting

 9
Accessories Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting
Here.” Follow the procedures in the order given, unless instructed otherwise.
Measurement failures can be divided into two categories:
n Failures which don’t affect the normal functioning of the analyzer but render
incorrect measurement data.
n Failures which impede the normal functioning of the analyzer or prohibit the
use of a feature.
This chapter addresses the First category of failures which are usually caused by
the following:
n operator errors
n faulty calibration devices or connectors
n bad cables or adapters
w improper calibration techniques
These failures are checked using the following procedures:
n “Inspect the Accessories”
n “Inspect the Error Terms”

AccessoriesTroubleshooting g-1
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the
faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants. n
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, “System
Verification and Performance Tests n

9-2 Accessories Troubleshooting

Inspect the Accessories

Inspect the Test Port Connectors and Calibration Devices

1. Check for damage to the mating contacts of the test port center conductors
and loose connector bulkheads.
2. Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and
other physical damage. Refer to the calibration kit operating and service
manual for information on gaging and inspecting the device connectors.
If any calibration device is obviously damaged or out of mechanical
tolerance, replace the device.

Inspect the Error ‘Ikmns

Error terms are a measure of a “system”: a network analyzer, calibration kit,
and any cables used. As required, refer to Chapter 11, “Error Terms,” for the
following:
n The specific measurement calibration procedure used to generate the error
terms.
n The routines required to extract error terms from the instrument.
n Typical error term data.
Use Table 9-l to cross-reference error term data to system faults

Accessories Troubleshooting g-3

 ‘lhble 9-l. Components Related to Specific Error ‘lkrms
Component

Calibration Kit

load X

open/short X X

Analyzer
sampler X X X

A10 d&ital IF X

tent port connector8 X X X X X X

External cablea X X

If you detect problems using error term analysis, use the following approach to
isolate the fault:
1. Check the cable by examining the load match and transmission tracking
terms. If those terms are incorrect, go to “Cable Test.”
2. Verify the calibration kit devices:
Loads: If the directivity error term looks good, the load and the test port
are good. If directivity looks bad, connect the same load on the other test
port and measure its directivity. If the second port looks bad, as if the
problem had shifted with the load, replace the load. If the second port
looks good, as if the load had not been the problem, troubleshoot the llrst
port.
Shorts and opens: If the source match and reflection tracking terms look
good, the shorts and the opens are good. If these terms look bad while the
rest of the terms look good, proceed to “Verify Shorts and Opens.”

94 Accessories Troubleshooting
 Cable Test
The load match error term is a good indicator of cable problems. You can
further verify a faulty cable by measuring the reflection of the cable. Perform
an Sll l-port calibration directly at port 1 (no cables). Then connect the suspect
cable to port 1 and terminate the open end in 50 ohms.
Figure 9-l shows the return loss trace of a good (left side) and faulty cable.
Note that the important characteristic of a cable trace is its level (the good cable
trace is much lower) not its regularity. Refer to the cable manual for return loss
specifications.

CHl Sll log MAG 5dB/ REF 0 dB I-: -28.426 dB CHl

Sll
log WAG 5 dB, REF 0 dB I-: -15.524 dE

START 030 000 MHZ STOP 6 000.000 000 MHz START 030 000 MHZ STOP 6 000.000 000 MHz

sg642d

Figure 9-1. Typical Return LOSS Traces of Good and Poor Cables

Accessories Troubleshooting g-5

Verify Shorts and Opens
Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type and sex as
the short and open in question. If the devices are not from one of the standard
calibration kits, refer to the HP 8753E Network A~~~lyzer User’s Guide for
hfomation on how to use the ~~~~~~~~~~~~ fMction* Set aside the short
and open that are causing the problem.
1. Perform an Sll l-port calibration using the good short and open. Then press
zpQ&g,c,,
..... _. ;ii.....:L.:!. iI --~~~~~~~~
-._- ..__.._... - . . . . .../.. to view the devices h S&h chart format.
2. Come& the good shod to poti 1. Press c-1 ~~~~~~~~~ ad

turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace
appears as a dot at the left side of the circle. (See Figure 9-2a, left.)
Replace the good short with the questionable short at port 1. The trace of
the questionable short should appear very similar to the known good short.
3. CoMect *e good open to port 1. mess lscale, ~.~~~~~~~~ and
turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace
appears as a dot at the right side of the circle. (See Figure 9-2b, right.)
Replace the good open with the questionable open at port 1. The trace of the
questionable open should appear very similar to the known good open.

g-6 Accessories Troubleshooting

Figure 9-2. Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short (a) and Open (b)

Accessories Troubleshooting 9-7

 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
These menus allow you to perform the following service functions:
n test
n verify
n adjust
n control
w troubleshoot
The menus are divided into two groups:
1. Internal Diagnostics
2. Service Features
When applicable, the HP-IB mnemonic is written in parentheses following the
key. See HP-IB Service Mnemonic Definitions at the end of this section.

Error Messages
The displayed messages that pertain to service functions are also listed in this
chapter to help you:
n Understand the message.
n Solve the problem.

Sarvics Kay Menus and Error Messages 1 O-1

Service Key Menus - Internal Diagnostics
The internal diagnostics menus are shown in Figure 10-l and described in the
following paragraphs. The following keys access the internal diagnostics menus:

sg6104e

Figure 10-l. Internal Diagnostics Menus

Note Throughout this service guide, these conventions are observed:
oq ~~~~~
m itreare dispIay
labeled detied
front pane1 keys.
keys (in the menus).
‘..;:c:.; ;..;; ,. . ..*. .&. .;:;-;>;; .;;./
q (HP-IB COMMANDS) when applicable, follow the keystrokes
in parentheses.

1 O-2 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Tests Menu
To access this menu, pressw ~~~~~,~~ :,TlZYK$:. . i ._. . /
accesses a menu that allows you to select or execute
the service tests The default is set to internal
test 1.
Note Descriptions of tests in each of the categories are given under
the heading Z&Z Lkscript&nzs in the following pages.

The tests are divided by function into the following

categories:
0 Internal Tests (O-20)
q External Tests (21-26)
q System Verification Tests (27-43)
13 Adjustment Tests (44-58)
q Display Tests (59-65)
0 Test Patterns (66-80)
‘lb access the tlrst test in each category, press the
category softkey. To access the other tests, use the
numeric keypad, step keys, or front panel knob. The
test number, name, and status abbreviation will be
displayed in the active entry area of the display.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-3

‘Ihble 10-l shows the test status abbreviation that appears on the display, its
delinition, and the equivalent HP-IB code. The HP-IB command to output
the test status of the most recently executed test is OUTPTESS. For more
information, refer to “HP-IB Service Mnemonic Definitions” located at the end
of this chapter.

‘able 10-l. l’kst Status ‘kms

Display Abbreviation Defiuition UF-IB code

PASS PASS 0

FAIL FAIL 1
-lP- lNFFmGlzEss 2

WA) NOT AVAILABLE 3

-ND- NOT DONE 4

DONE DONE 6

;;:>a “‘..‘.<~<~;>~p... s i ‘-‘>F _ _

_ _

&@$@J$., ?&#@j (EmT) runs the selected test and may display these
softkeys:
Lz:..... . . ..s.s...i . . ... .::: . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . .~~~.22> . ...A....~.W~..> ......i ....:::

y , ‘.:.:. ‘~: . .:.:~.:.:.:. . :. . . : :. ::. :. I

~~~~~~ (TEBl) continues the selected test.
_.. . _ - ._. ___.. -.__-..-.-

.m (TESRB) alters correction constants during

adjustment tests.
:,. . .
:$&J&Y$ (TESR4) displays the next choice.

.~~
__.. . . . .__.. . _ -. _. -. (TESR 6) chooses the option indicated.
,.,. .,.;

_.. . ._._. . . -...-..

~~~~~ (‘J-Em@
erminates the test and returns to
t

the tests menu.

evaluates the analyzer’s internal operation. These
tests are completely internal and do not require
external connections or user interaction.
evaluate the analyzer’s external operation. These
additional tests require some user interaction (such
as keystrokes).

104 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

 verifies the analyzer system operation by examining
the contents of the measurement calibration arrays.
The procedure is in the “System Verification and
Performance Tests” chapter. Information about the
calibration arrays is provided in the “Error Terms”
chapter.
generates and stores the correction constants.
For more information, refer to the “Adjustments”
chapter.
checks for correct operation of the display and GSP
board.

Test Options Menu

accesses softkeys that affect the way tests (routines)

run, or supply necessary additional data.
resumes the test from where it was stopped.
toggles the repeat function on and off. When the
function is ON, the selected test will rtm 10,000
times unless you press any key to stop it. The
analyzer shows the current number of passes and
fails.
toggles the record function on and off. When the
function is ON, certain test results are sent to
a printer via HP-IB. This is especially useful for
correction constants. The indent must be in
system controller mode or pass control mode to
print (refer to the “Printing, Plotting, and Saving
Measurement Results” chapter in the HP 87533
User’s Guidt?.
selects either NORMal or SPeCiaL (tighter) limits for
the Operator’s Check. The SPCL limits are useful for
a guard band.
accesses the following Edit List menu to allow
modihcation of the external power loss data table.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-5

 accesses the power loss/sensor lists menu:
‘~~~~~~~~~~,~‘~~~~:. . .._ . . . . . . ., . . ,. .s.. , . . . . . ;. . . . se1e&s the A or B power SenSOr
calibration factor list for use in power meter
calibration measurements.
.& ,,~~~~~~~~~~:~~ (CALFSENA) aCCeSSeS
L.. AL..:~:.: . . . A. . _. . . . . .i . . . ~; .: . :. . ;:...: . ..&...L :.
the Edit List menu to allow modification of the
calibration data table for power sensor A.
~~~,~.~~~~~~~~~~~~.. (CALFSENB) acceSSeS

the Edit List menu to allow modification of the

calibration data table for power sensor B.
~~~,~~~~~ (pOjVIJJST) acceSSeS the Edit I&t

menu to allow modification of the external power

loss data table that corrects coupled-arm power
loss when a directional coupler samples the RF
output.
generates printed graphs of verification results when
activated during a system verification.
Edit List Menu To access this menu, press&Z&T) ~.~~~~~~~
. . . . . . . ._.L .,., , , ,__ii~;~ _ii_; __:

_ _ . . . . . _.I.i ,. . ; “‘,.,.,.
fj$gi&@ selects a segment (frequency point) to be edited,
deleted from, or added to the current data table.
Works with the entry controls
__ i ,. ,. ,. . . . .
‘#j%$$ (SEDI[D]) allows modification of frequency, cal factor and loss
values previously entered in the current data table.
deletes frequency, cal factor and loss values
previously entered in the current data table.
adds new frequency, cal factor and loss values to the
current data table up to a maximum of 12 segments
(frequency points, PTS).
/deletes
_ _ the entire ctu~+~~data table (or list) when
:i@; b pressed. &es #&: to avoid deletion.

‘@$@’ (EDITDONE) returns to the previous menu.

1 O-6 Service Kay Menus and Error Messages

Self Diagnose Softkey
. . . . . . . :i . : . :. .: : . . .
You cm access the self d@mos~ fundon by pressing I%@) ~~~~Jr.~..~~~~
.~~~~~~~~.~~~. This fun&ion examines, in order, the pass/fail status of ail
internal tests and displays NO FAILURE FOUND if no tests have failed.
If a failure is detected, the routine displays the assembly or assemblies most
probably faulty and assigns a failme probability factor to each assembly.

Test Descriptions
The analyzer has up to 80 routines that test, verify, and adjust the instrument.
This section describes those tests.

Internal Tests
This group of tests runs without external connections or operator interaction.
All return a PASS or FAIL condition. All of these tests run on power-up and
PRESET except as noted.
0 ALL INT. Runs only when selected. It consists of internal tests 3-11,
13-16, and 20. Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and
see which failed. If aIl pass, the test displays a PASS status. Each test
in the subset retains its own test status.
1 PRESET. Runs the following subset of internal tests: first, the
ROM/RAM tests 2, 3, and 4; then tests 5 through 11, 14, 15, and 16. If
any of these tests fail, this test returns a FAIL status. Use the front
panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed. If all pass,
this test displays a PASS status. Each test in the subset retains its own
test status. This same subset is available over HP-IB as “TST?“. It is not
performed upon remote preset.
2 ROM. Part of the ROMJRAM tests and cannot be nm separately. Refer
to the “Digital Control Troubleshooting” chapter for more information.

Service Kay Menus and Error Messages 1 O-7

3 SRAM RAM. Verifies the A9 CPU SRAM (long-term) memory with a
non-destructive write/read pattern. A destructive version that writes
over stored data at power-on can be enabled by changing the 4th
switch position of the A9 CPU switch as shown in Figure 10-2.

A9 CPU Assembly

s400

Normal Mode Destructive SRAM Rocker Slide

Test Enabled

sge117e

Figure 19-2. A9 CPU Switch Positions

4 Main DRAM. Verifies the A9 CPU main memory (DRAM) with a

non-destructive write/read test pattern. A destructive version of this
test is run during power-on.
For additional information, see Internal Tests (near the front of this
section) and the “Digital Control Troubleshooting” chapter.

1 O-8 Service Kay Menus and Error Messages

5 DSP WdRd. Verifies the ability of the main processor and the
DSP (digital signal processor), both on the A9 CPU assembly, to
communicate with each other through DRAM. This also verifies that
programs can be loaded to the DSP, and that most of the main RAM
access circuits operate correctly.
6 DSP RAM. Verifies the A9 CPU RAM associated with the digital signal
processor by using a write/read pattern.
7 DSP ALU. Verifies the A9 CPU high-speed math processing portions of
the digital signal processor.
8 DSP Intrpt. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digitai signal processor to
respond to interrupts from the A10 digital IF ADC.
9 DIF Control. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to
write/read to the control latches on the A10 digitaI IF
10 DIF Canter. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to
write/read to the triple divider on the A10 CPU. It tests the A9
CPU data buffers and A10 digital IF, the 4 MHz clock from the Al2
reference.
11 DSP Control. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to
write to the control latches on the A10 digital IF. Feedback is verified
by the main processor. It primarily tests the A10 digital IF, but failures
may be caused by the A9 CPU.
12 Fr F&n Wr/Rd. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to
write/read to the front panel processor. It tests the A2 front panel
interface and processor,and A9 CPU data buffering and address
decoding. (See also tests 23 and 24.) This runs only when selected.
13 Rear mel. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to
write/read to the rear panel control elements. It tests the Al6 rear
panel, and A9 CPU data buffering and address decoding. (It does not
test the HP-IB interface; for that, see the HP-IB Programming Guide.)
This runs only when selected or with ALL INTERNAL.
14 Post Reg. Polls the status register of the A8 post-regulator, and
flags these conditions: heat sink too hot, inadequate air flow, or
post-regulated supply shutdown.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-g

15 Frac N Cont. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to
write/read to the control element on the Al4 fractional-N (digital)
assembly. The control element must be functioning, and the
fractional-N VCO must be oscillating (although not necessarily
phase-locked) to pass.
16 Sweep Trig. Tests the sweep trigger (L SWP) Iine from the Al4
fractional-N to the A10 digital IF. The receiver with the sweep
synchronizes L SWP.
17 ADC Lin. It tests the linearity of the A10 digital IF ADC using the
built-in ramp generator. The test generates a histogram of the ADC
linearity, where each data point represents the relative “width” of a
particular ADC code. Ideally, ah codes have the same width; different
widths correspond to non-Iinearities
18 ADC Ofs. This runs only when selected. It tests the ability of the
offset DAC, on the A10 digit& IF’, to apply a bias offset to the IF signals
before the ADC input. This runs only when selected.
19 ABUS ‘Wt. Tests analog bus accuracy, by measuring several analog bus
reference voltages (aII nodes from the A10 digitai IF). This runs only
when selected.
20 F’N Count. Uses the internal counter to count the Al4 fractional-N
VCO frequency (120 to 240 MHz) and the divided fractional-N
frequency (100 kHz). It requires the 100 kHz signal from Al2 and the
counter gate signal from A10 to pass

1 O-1 0 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

External Tests
These tests require either external equipment and connections or operator
interaction of some kind to run. Tests 30 and 60 are comprehensive front panel
checks, more complete than test 12, that checks the front panel keys and knob
entry.
21 Port 1 Op Chk. Part of the “Operator’s Check” procedure, located
in the “Start Troubleshooting” chapter. The procedure requires the
external connection of a short to PORT 1.
22 Port 2 Op Cbk. Same as 21, but tests PORT 2.
23 Fr Pan Seq. Tests the front panel knob entry and all A1 front panel
keys, as well as the front panel microprocessor on the A2 assembly. It
prompts the user to rotate the front panel knob, then press each key
in an ordered sequence. It continues to the next prompt only if the
current prompt is correctly satisfied.
24 Fr Fan Diag. Similar to 23 above, but the user rotates the front panel
knob or presses the keys in any order. This test displays the command
the instrument received.
25 ADC Hist. Factory use only.
26 Source Ex. Factory use only.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-1 1

System Verification Tests
These tests apply mainly to system-level, error-corrected verification and
troubleshooting. Tests 27 to 31 are associated with the system verification
procedure, documented in the “System Verification and Performance Tests”
chapter. Tests 32 to 43 facilitate examining the calibration coefficient arrays
(error terms) resuhing from a measurement calibration; refer to Chapter 11,
“Error Terms,” for details.
27 Sys Ver Init. Recalls the initiaiization state for system verification
from an HP 8753E verification disk, in preparation for a measurement
calibration. It must be done before service internal tests 28, 29, 30, or
31 are performed.
28 Ver Dev 1. Recalls verification Iimits from disk for verification device
#1 in aII applicable S-parameter measurements. It performs pass/fail
Iimit testing of the current measurement.
29 Ver Dev 2. Same as 28 above for device #2.
30 Ver Dev 3. Same as 28 above for device #3.
31 Ver Dev 4. Same as 28 above for device #4.
32-43 CaI Coef 1-12. Copies error term data from a measurement calibration
array to display memory. A measurement calibration must be complete
and active. The de9nition of calibration arrays depends on the current
calibration type. After execution, the memory is automatically
displayed. Refer to Chapter 11, “Error Terms,” for details.

lo-12 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Adjustment Tests
The tests without asterisks are used in the procedures located in the
“Adjustments” chapter of this manual, except as noted.
44 *Source Def. Writes default correction constants for rudimentary
source power accuracy. Use this test before running test 47, below.
45 *Pretune Def. Writes default correction constants for rudimentary
phase lock pretuning accuracy. Use this test before running test 48,
below.
46 ABUS Cm. Measures three 6xed voltages on the ABUS, and generates
new correction constants for ABUS amplitude accuracy in both high
resolution and low resolution modes. Use this test before nmning test
48, below.
47 Source Cm. Measures source output power accuracy, flatness, and
linearity against an external power meter via HP-IB to generate new
correction constants Run tests 44, 45,46, and 48 first.
48 Pretune Cm. Generates source pretune values for proper phase-locked
loop operation. Run tests 44, 45, and 46 first.
50 Disp 2 Ex. Not used in “Adjustments.” Writes the “secondary test
pattern” to the display for adjustments. Press (Preset to exit this
routine.
51 IF Step Cm. Measures the gain of the IF ampliliers (A and B only)
located on the A10 digital IF, to determine the correction constants for
absolute amplitude accuracy. It provides smooth dynamic accuracy and
absolute amplitude accuracy in the -30 dBm input power region.
52 ADC Ofs Cm. Measures the A10 Digital IF ADC linearity
characteristics, using an internal ramp generator, and stores values
for the optimal operating region. During measurement, IF signals are
centered in the optimal region to improve low-level dynamic accuracy.
53 Sampler Cm. Measures the absolute amplitude response of the
R sampler against an external power meter via HP-IB, then compares
A and B, (magnitude and phase), against R. It improves the R input
accuracy and AAYR tracking.
54 Cav Osc Cm. Calculates the frequency of the cavity oscillator and the
instrument temperature for effective spur avoidance.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages lo-13

55 Serial Cor. Stores the serial number (input by the user in the Display
Title menu) in EEPROM. This routine will not overwrite an existing
serial number.
56 Option hr. Stores the option keyword (required for Option 002, 006,
010 or any combination).
57 Not used.
58 Init EEPEOM. This test initializes certain EEPROM addresses to zeros
and resets the display intensity correction constants to the default
values. Also, the test will not alter the serial number and correction
constants for Option 002, 006, and 010.

1 O-14 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Display Tests
These tests return a PASS/FAIL condition. All six amber front panel LEDs will
turn off if the test passes. Press m to exit the test. If any of the six LEDs
remain on, the test has failed.
59 Dispkpu corn. Checks to con&n that the CPU can communicate with
the A19 GSP board. The CPU writes all zeros, all ones, and then a
walking one pattern to the GSP and reads them back. If the test fails,
the CPU repeats the walking 1 pattern until I&%?) is pressed.
60 DRAM cell. Tests the DRAM on A19 by writing a test pattern to the
DRAM and then verifying that it can be read back.
61 Main VRAM. Tests the VRAM by writing all zeros to one location in
each bank and then writii all ones to one location in each bank.
Finally a walking one pattern is written to one location in each bank.
62 VRAM bank. Tests all the cells in each of the 4 VRAM banks
63 VRAMhideo. Verifies that the GSP is able to successfully perform both
write and read shift register transfers. It also checks the video signals
LHSYNC, LVSYNC, and LBLANK to verify that they are active and
toggling.
64 RGB outputs. Confirms that the analog video signals are correct and it
verifies their functionality.
65 Inten DAC. Verifies that the intensity DAC can be set both low and
high.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-1 5

Test Patterns
Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments, diagnostics,
and troubleshooting, but they are not used for field service. Test patterns
are
. . . . . . . . . . . .executed............. by entering the test number (66 through SO), then pressing
~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~. me te,& pattem fl be displayed md the &aey
~:. :. i.: .: .: .: ~.: .~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~,~.~ ____
. . . . . .,. . . ,. ,. ., . . I. . . .,. . . . . . .: .: .:
labels blanked. ‘Ib increment to the next pattern, press softkey 1; to go back
to a previous pattern, press softkey 2. To exit the test pattern and return the
softkey labels, press softkey 8 (bottom softkey). The following is a description
of the test patterns.
66 ‘I&t Pat 1. Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output
of the A18 display and checks for color purity.
67-69 ‘l&t Pat 2-4. Displays a red, green, and blue pattern for verifying the
color purity of the display and also the ability to independently control
each color.
70 ‘I&t Pat 5. Displays an all black screen. This is used to check for
stuck pixels.
71 ‘l&t Fat 6. Displays a 16-step gray scale for verifying that the A19 GSP
board can produce 16 different amplitudes of color (in this case, white).
The output comes from the RAM on the GSP board, it is then split. The
signal goes through a video DAC and then to an external monitor or
through some buffer amplifiers and then to the internal LCD display.
If the external display looks good but the internal display is bad, then
the problem may be with the display or the cable connecting it to the
GSP board. This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope
for troubleshooting. The staircase pattern it produces will quickly show
missing or stuck data bits
72 Test Pat 7. Displays the following seven colors: Red, Yellow, Green,
Cyan, Blue, Magenta and White.
73 ‘Ibest Fat 8. This pattern is intended for use with an external display.
The pattern displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability
of the A19 GSP board to display 15 colors plus white. The numbers
written below each bar indicate the tint number used to produce that
bar (0 & loo-pure red, 33=pure green, 67=pure blue).
74 ‘I&t Fat 9. Displays the three primary colors Red, Green, and Blue at
four different intensity levels. You should see 16 color bands across
the screen. Starting at the left side of the display the pattern is; Black
four bands of Red (each band increasing in intensity) Black four bands

lo-16 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

 of Green (each band increasing in intensity) Black four bands of Blue
(each band increasing in intensity) Black If any one of the four bits for
each color is missing the display will not look as described.
75 ‘lbst Pat 10. Displays a character set for showing the user ail
the different types and sizes of characters available. Three sets
of characters are drawn in each of the three character sizes. 125
characters of each size are displayed. Characters 0 and 3 cannot be
drawn and several others are really control characters (such as carriage
return and line feed).
76 l&t Pat 11. Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth
of the EXTERNAL display. It consists of multiple alternating white and
black vertical stripes. Each stripe should be clearly visible. A limited
bandwidth would smear these lines together. This is used to test the
quality of the external monitor.
77 ‘I&t Pat 12. Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting, using
an oscilloscope. It is similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 32
times across the screen. Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will
then show 32 ramps (instead of one staircase) between each horizontal
sync pulse. This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing
circuit of the A19 GSP board.
78 ‘lbst PM. 13. Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the
accuracy of the color convergence of the external monitor.
79-80 l&t Pat 14-15. Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns
for testing color convergence, linearity,and alignment. This is useful
when aligning the LCD display in the bezel.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-17

Service Key Menus - Service Features
The service feature menus are shown in F’igure 10-3 and described in the
following paragraphs. The following keys access the service feature menus:

sg6103e

Figure 10-3. Service Feature Menus

Service Modes Menu

allows you to control and monitor various circuits

for troubleshooting.
tests the Al3 and Al4 fractional-N circuits. It dOWS
YOU to directly control and monitor the output
frequency of the fractional-N synthesizer (10 MHz to
60 MHZ). Set the instrument to CW sweep mode ami
then set F’RACN TUNE ON.

lo-18 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

 Change frequencies with the front panel keys or
knob. The output of the Al4 assembly can be
checked at A14Jl HI OUT (in high band) or A14J2
LO OUT (in low band) with an oscilloscope, a
frequency counter, or a spectrum analyzer. Siiai
jumps and changes in shape at 20 MHz and 30 MHz
when tuning up in frequency, and at 29.2 MHz and
15 MHz when tuning down, are due to switching
of the digital divider. This mode can be used with
the SRC TUNE mode as described in “Source
Troubleshooting” chapter.
accesses the functions that ailow you to adjust the
:.:~l.L:.,z ) i

k&g, ~~~~.‘~~~

source:
., ,..........
.I /._.._..-/__//i AL.< A..>

._
~~~~~ .~~~~~~~~ tests the p&me fun&ions

of the phase lock and source assemblies Use

the entry controls to set test port output to any
frequency from 300 KHz to 6 GHz. When in this
mode:
q Set analyzer
~,~~ ..= .. - ~ .(H(to CW frequency before pressing
~~~~~~~.~. .
q Test port output is 1 to 6 MHz above indicated
(entered) frequency.
q Instrument does not attempt to phase lock.
o Residual FM increases.
_. . . . . . . . . .~_
. . . . . i. . ._. . . . .._. . . . . . _.. :.; ., . .,. . . .,/. ,. .. ./. . . . . .
~~~~~~ &ow you to change the somce
tune frequency.
_ . : : .: .;,_ .,_;. . . . _.,.,..:..x. ..,...,..,.................. .i. ._
:~~~~~~~~
,.i_i___ __ _..~ .,. . . _ _, ., :., toggles the automatic leveling
control (ALC) on and off.
~.~~~~~~~~~
:. . i
: ;: . “.: :“ : :~: : : ~. : .: : : . :~: : : : : : : : : .; ;. : :.
~~~~~~~~~~
~~.:.~.~.& . . . . . ~. .__. . . A,,.; . ., .i., .
~~~~~~~~~ .....c. i . . . . . .i
m_____;____i_i_i
., . . , . . . . .::: . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *. . . . . . . . . . .. :<:
.~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . .; ,. .. . . .;.,.;. . . . . ,. ;. . . ,. ,. . . . . ,. ,. ,. ., .; . . . . . . . . . . . . . .: .: ~. ,h .

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-1 g

 With this mode switched OFF, the source stays in
the pretune mode and does not attempt to complete
the phase lock sequence. Also, all phase lock error
messages are disabled. The fractional-N circuits
and the receiver operate normally. Therefore, the
instrument sweeps, but the source is being driven by
the pretune DAC in a stair-stepped fashion.
Automatically attempts to determine new pretune
values when the instrument encounters phase lock
problems (for example, “harmonic skip”). With
~~~~~~~~~~~ the frequencies and voltages do
..........
not change, like when they are attempting to
determine new prettme values, so troubleshooting
the phase-locked loop circuits is more convenient.
This function may also be turned off to avoid
pretune calibration errors in applications where
there is a limited frequency response in the R
(reference) channel. For example, in a high power
test application, using band limited lllters for R
channel phase locking.
. ,., _ _ _ . . . . . ._.;.:..;,. . . . ., . . . . . . .
~~~~~~~~~~~~(SM5) displays a phase lock sequence at the beginning of
each band. This sequence normally occurs very
rapidly, making it difficult to troubleshoot phase lock
problems Switching this mode ON slows the process
down, allowing you to inspect the steps of the phase
lock sequence @retune, acquire, and track) by
pausing at each step. The steps are indicated on the
display, along with the channel (Cl or C2) and band
number (Bl through B13).
This mode can be used with PLL PAUSE to halt the
process at any step. It can also be used with the
analog bus counter.
;,;_;_ __., ., ,/. .
used only with PLL DIAG mode. $J$#&~ indicates
that it will continuously cycle through all steps of
the phase lock sequence. ;@#J$&; holds it at any step
of interest. This mode is useful for troubleshooting
phase-locked loop problems
Accesses the service modes more menu listed below.

10-20 Service Key MenusandError Messages

Service Modes More Menu

Toggles the sampler correction routine ON,

for normal operation, or OFF, for diagnosis or
adjustment purposes
‘:&#dw
. ; /.i iIJHmij,,
. . . . . . . . . . . .i . . Normal operating condition and works in
conjunction with IF GAIN ON and OFF. The A10
assembly includes a switchable attenuator section
and an amplifier that amplitles low-level 4 kHz
IF signals (for A and B inputs only). This mode
allows the A10 IF section to automatically determine
if the attenuator should be switched in or out.
The switch occurs when the A or B input signal is
approximately -30 dBm.
;~.~.~~~~~~ :##g
- . _^.. . . . . . . . . -. . . . . . . . . . i
Locks out the A10 IF attenuator sections for
checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits,
regardless of the amplitude of the A or B IF signal.
Switches out both the A and B attenuation circuits;
they cannot be switched independently. Be aware
that input signal levels above -30 dBm at the
sampler input will saturate the ADC and cause
measurement errors.
Switches in both of the A10 IF attenuators for
checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits Small
input signals will appear noisy, and raise the
apparent noise floor of the instrument.
,. (
,,,_; .__..
~~~~~~~~~~~~~; ($3~7) For factory use only.
,.,:,,
,.,.;.~.~.~.~..~,,,.......:.......j*................ .::: .. . .. .

_., .i.-__.-._.. :. T-.:.:.,.:.+L _/___,. ,. ,. ,. ,. __i., . i

. . . . .._. . . .
~~~~~~~~~~~::~ Allows you to store the correction constants that
reside in non-volatile memory (EEPROM) onto a
disk. Correction constants improve instrument
performance by compensating for specific operating
variations due to hardware limitations (refer to the
“Adjustments” chapter). Having this information on
disk is useful as a backup, in case the constants are
lost (due to a CPU board failure). Without a disk
backup the correction constants can be regenerated

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-21

 manually, although the procedures are more time
consuming.
offsets the frequency of both the A3 YIG oscillator
and the A3 cavity oscillator to avoid spurs_ _which
_ . ,. ,. . . . . . .: .:
cannot othe&e be filtered out. ~~~~~~~i:~~~.;
allows examination of these spurs for service.
enables and disables the analog bus, described
below. Use it with the analog in menu,
(a description of this menu follows).

Analog Bus

Description of the Analog Bus

The analog bus is a single multiplexed line that networks 31 nodes within the
instrument. It can be controlled from the front panel, or through HP-IB, to
make voltage and frequency measurements just like a voltmeter, oscilloscope, or
frequency counter. The next few paragraphs provide general information about
the structure and operation of the analog bus See “Analog Bus Nodes, n for a
description of each individual node. Refer to the “Overall Block Diagram,” in
the “Start Troubleshooting” chapter, to see where the nodes are located in the
instrument.
The analog bus consists of a source section and a receiver section. The source
can be the following:
n any one of the 31 nodes described in “Analog Bus Nodes”
n the Al4 fractional-N VCO
n the Al4 fractional-N VCO divided down to 100 kHz
The receiver portion can be the following:
n the main ADC
n the frequency counter
When analog bus traces are displayed, frequency is the x-axis. For a linear
x-axis in time, switch to CW time mode (or sweep a single band).

1 O-22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

The Main ADC
The main ADC is located on the A1~~~digita.l
:: ;:: IF
.;< b :assembly
<:.z.- and makes voltage
measurements in two ranges. See ~~~~~~~~~:,~, under “Analog In Menu”.

The Frequency Counter

The frequency counter is located on the Al4 assembly and can count one of
three sources:
n selected analog bus node
n Al4 fractional-N VCO (F’RAC N)
n Al4 fractional-N VCO divided down to 100 kHz (DIV F’RAC N) (frequency
range is 100 kHz to 16 MHz)
The counts are triggered by the phase lock cycle; one at each pretrme, acquire,
and track for each bandswitch. (The service mode, SOURCE PLL, must be ON
for the counter to be updated at each bandswitch). The counter
_.... ._ . , works
.; ,. ,. . _in
_ _ _swept
.,
modes or in CW mode. It can be used in conjunction with ~S~~~~~.~~~~ for
troubleshooting phase lock and source problems.
To read the counter overHP-ES, use the command OUTPCNTR.
Notes
n The display and marker units (U) correspond to volts
n Nodes 17 (1st IF) and 24 (2nd LO) are unreliable above 1 MHz.
n About 0.750 MHz is a typical counter reading with no AC signal present.
n Anything occurring during bandswitches is not visible.
n Past-moving waveforms may be sensitive to sweep time.
n The analog bus input impedance is about 50K ohms
n Waveforms up to approximately 200 Hz can be reproduced.

Serwiae Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-23

Analog In Menu
Select this menu to monitor voltage and frequency nodes, using the analog bus
and internal counter, as explained below.
lb switch on the analog bus and access the analog in menu, press:

‘I’he ~~~~~,~~~~~~~~~~~
., key toggles between low and high resolution.

R4%3OlIltiOIl -SW MiIlimnm8ignal

LOW +0.5 v -0.5 v

HIGH +lOV -10 v

~~~~~~~~~~~ &lows you to monitor the adog bus nodes (except nodes

1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 12) with external equipment (osciIloscope,

voltmeter, etc). To do this, connect the equipment to the
AUX
_ . INPUT
. . . . . -. :. :. ;.)., . . . . . . . . . . . . BNC
. . . . . . . . . connector on the rear panel, and press
~~~~;~ stilly is highlighted.
_.._........ -,

Caution To prevent damage to the analyzer, Ilrst connect the signal to

the rear panel AUX INPUT, and then switch the function ON.

switches the internal counter off and removes the counter

display from the display. The counter can be switched on
with one of the next three keys. (Note: Using the counter
slows the sweep.) The counter bandwidth is 16 MHz unless
otherwise noted for a specific node.

Note OUTPCNTR is the HP-IB command to output the counter’s

frequency data.

1 O-24 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

switches the counter to monitor the analog bus.
switches the counter to monitor the Al4 fractional-N
VCO frequency at the node shown on the “Overall Block
Diagram, m in the “Start Troubleshooting” chapter.
switches the counter to monitor the Al4 fractional-N VCO
frequency after it has been divided down to 100 kHz for
phase locking the VCO.

ServiseKeyMenusandErrorMessages lo-26
Analog Bus Nodes
The following paragraphs describe the 31 analog bus nodes. The nodes are listed
in numerical order and are grouped by assembly. Refer to the “Overall Block
Diagram” for node locations.

A3 Source
‘Ib observe six of the eight A3 analog bus nodes (not node 5 or 8), perform
step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then follow the node
specific instructions.

1 O-26 Service by Menus and Error Messages

Node 1 Bh Fwr DAC (main power DAC)

,Perform
. ,. ,. ;. step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press m
dklJ&ti# J$ fg Ixl) (Scale) .~~~~~~.
Node 1 is the output of the main power DAC. It sets the reference voltage to the
ALC loop. At normal operation, this node should read approximately -4 volts at
0 dBm with a slope of about -150 mV/dB. This corresponds to approximately
4 volts from -15 to + 10 dBm.

START -15 B dh cw 3 888.088 am PtHZ STOP IB 0 am

sg6262d

Figure 10-4. Analog Bus Node 1

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-27

Node 2 Src lV/GHz (source 1 volt per GHz)
Press the following to view analog bus node 2:

Node 2 measures the voltage on the internal voltage controlled oscillator. Or, in
normal operation, it should read -lV/GHz.

sg6263d

Figure 10-5. Analog Bus Node 2

W-28 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 3 Amp Id (ampltier current)
Press the following keys to view analog node 3:

Node 3 measures the current that goes to the main IF amplifier. At normal
operation this node should read about:
15 mA from 30 kHz to 299 kHz
130 mA from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
500 mA from 3 GHz to 6 GHz

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-29

Node 4 Det (detects RF OUT power level)
Perform step A3, described previously, to set up a power
<:, :A4,3( . . :, i ,-; sweep
::(:y~;.;;; : on the analog
bus. men press IMeas) ~~~~~~~ @ a l-j ~~~~~,~~~~.
Node 4 detects power that is coupled and detected from the RF OUT arm to the
ALC loop. Note that the voltage exponentially follows the power level inversely.
Flat segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between -15 dBm
and + 10 dBm.

1 O-30 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 5 lkmp (temperature sensor)
This node registers the temperature of the cavity oscillator which must be
known for effective spur avoidance. The sensitivity is 10 mV/” C. The oscillator
changes frequency slightly as its temperature changes. This sensor indicates the
temperature so that the frequency can be predicted.
Node 6 Integ (ALC leveling integrator output)
Perform . ?. . ,;.? ,.=;step<?. A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press (Meas)
,. . : :. . :. :. . : .i .: . . A. . @ Ixl) @iiixz) ggi&
&&u”jg&x4g . ^. ._. . . . . . ~. . . . SC=.
i .A i. _. . .
Node 6 displays the output of the summing circuit in the ALC loop. Absolute
voltage level variations are normal. When node 6 goes above 0 volts, the ALC
saturation is indicated.

sg6266d

Figure 10-8. Analog Bus Node 6

Service Kay Menus and Error Messages 1 O-31

Node 7 Log (log ampliiier output detector)
Perform step .:.: A3 to set up a :power
, : : ,: : ,: ., .: ,~ ,. ‘;:~~p;$sweep
~~: p’ on the analog bus. Then press LMeas)
:~~~~.~.~~~~~
:~~.~; :.:.:.~~~.:.~.:,. ~ _iiii., ., ., . ,. ,. ., ._ @ (XJ @izzTq ~~~~~~~~~:.
Node 7 displays the output of a logger circuit in the ALC loop. The trace should
be a linear ramp with a slope of 33 mv/dB with approximately 0 volts at
-3 dBm. Absolute voltage level variations are normal. Flat segments indicate
ALC saturation and should not occur between -15 dBm and + 10 deem.
The proper waveform at node 7 indicates that the circuits in the A3 source ALC
loop are normal and the source is leveled.

t i i i i i i i i i 1

sg6267d

Figure 10-9. Analog Bus Node 7

Node 8 A3 Gnd (ground)

1 O-32 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

AlODigitalIF
‘Ib observe the A10 analog bus nodes, perform step AlO, below. Then follow the
node-specific instructions
Step AlO.
Press:

Node9 +0.37 V(+O.37 V reference)

.~,,‘....:..~:...:.:.:....~I.~:~:.:.’ .....::.::.:.:::.: ;..: i~.~.~.~.~.~.~ ~:::::

Perform
; step AlO, above, and then press IMeas) ~~~~~~~~~:

Check for a flat line at approximately + 0.37 V. This is used as the voltage
reference in the “Analog Bus Correction Constants” adjustment procedure. The
voltage level should be the same in high and low resolution; the absolute level is
not critical.
Node10 +2.50 V(+2.50 V reference)

Service Key Menus and Error Messages lo-33

Node 11 Aux Input (rear panel input)
....
Perform step A10 and then press (Meas) -#JAI,Zi$.@# (iJ (TJ (ZJ.
This selects the rear panel AUX INPUT to drive the analog bus for voltage
and frequency measurements It can be used to look at test points within the
instrument, using the analyzer’s display as an oscilloscope. Connect the test
point of interest to the rear panel AUX INPUT BNC connector.
This feature can be useful if an oscilloscope is not available. Also, it can be used
for testing voltage-controlled devices by connecting the driving voltage of the
device under test to the AUX IN connector. Look at the driving voltage on one
display channel, while displaying the S-parameter response of the test device on
the other display channel.
_ _. . . . _ . .
With -.JKK&&%EY
, .:.: :. * -. : : . . . . . %. , . .. . . switched ON, you can examine the analyzer’s analog bus nodes
with eaem& equipment (see ~~~~~‘~~~
- . -._...-._........i. 1.. . . . . _. . . >..A.: .&f$~;
..<.. s”:‘<.x<<< under the “An&g Bus Menu”
heading). For HP-IB considerations, see “HP-1B Service Mnemonic Definitions,”
located later in this chapter.
Node 12 A10 Gnd (ground reference)
This node is used in the “Analog Bus Correction Constants” adjustment as a
reference for calibrating the anaIog bus low and high resolution circuitry.

All Phase Lock

To observe the All analog bus nodes, perform step All, below. Then follow the
node-specific instructions.
Step All.
Press:

Node 13 VCO Tune 2 (not used)

1 O-34 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 14 Mb Ref (ECL reference voltage level)
.. .. ...,.:...:::: :.:.:.:.::.. . . . .._ : / .s.:..

Perform step Al 1 and then press IMeas) $&$$X&$ rmr” (141 a w @ Ixl]
. . ;:c,: ...<p;. :,; : ./:.:.. . .
~~~~~~ @g @.
The trace should be a flat line across the entire operation frequency range
within 0.3 V (one division) of the reference value. Vbb Ref is used to
compensate for ECL voltage drift.

sg6266d

Figure 10-10. Analog Bus Node 14

Servics Ksy Menus and Error Messages lo-35

Node 15 Pretune (open-loop source pretune voltage)

This node displays the source pretune signal and should look like a stair-stepped
ramp. Each step corresponds to the start of a band.

Figure 10-11. Analog Bus Node 15

1046 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 16 lV/GHz (source oscillator tuning voltage)
. . . . . . . i . . . . . . :. :. . .
Perform step A11 and then pressm .‘$@&$%:Z#. . Li. i::::.:._;;~ . . . ~. C.Z .. . . . . (161 @J (Z&TZ]
.iimo@m.
. . . . . Li i . . . . . . . . . . . ;2
This node displays the tuning voltage ramp used to tune the source oscillator.
You should see a voltage ramp like the one shown in Figure 10-12. If this
waveform is correct, you can be confident that the All phase lock assembly,
the A3 source assembly, the A13/A14 fractional-N assemblies, and the A7 pulse
generator are working correctly and the instrument is phase locked. If you see
anything else, refer to the “Source Troubleshooting” chapter.

sg6270d
Figure 16-12. Analog Bus Node 16

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1037

Node 17 1st IF (IF used for phase lock)

Vary the frequency and compare the results to the table below.

Entered Frequency ICounter Reading

0.2 to 15.999 MHz same as entered

16MHzto6GHz 1MI-h

This node displays the IF frequency (see node17) as it enters the All phase lock
assembly via the A4 R sampler assembly. This signal comes from the R sampler
output and is used to phase lock the source.

sg6271 d
Figure 10-13. Counter Readout Location

1 O-38 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 18 IF Det 2N (IF on All phase lock after 3 MHz filter)
Perform step A11 and then pressB ~~~~~:~~~ L18) (xl) m L20) m
(j-Ref_J ~~~~~~~
. _. . . . . . . . . . i < : .
This node detects the IF within the low pass IIIter/iimiter. The IiIter is used
during the track and sweep sequences but never in band l(3.3 to 16 MHz). The
low level (about -1.7 V) means IF is in the passband of the 6Iter. This node can
be used with the FRAC N TUNE and SRC TUNE service modes.

sg6272d
Figure 19-14. Analog Bus Node 18

Node 19 IF Det 2W (IF after 16 MHz IUter)

This node detects IF after the 16 MHz fiIter/iimiter. The 6Iter is used during
pretune and acquire, but not in band 1. Normal state is a flat Iine at about
-1.7 v.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-38

Node 20 IF Det 1 (IF after 30 MHz filter)
. _ _ _ ,.
. . . . . . . . :. i . . . . ._
perfvrm step A11 and then press(Meas) -,~~~~~~~~~~~ . _ - .____..__.. . . . . . . (YZJ @ I&ZTG) @ Ixl)
::~~~~~~~~ m a).
- . _.:. :. .: . . . . . . . . ~.:.:<. .:.:~ ;;;;~~..‘““..:. . . .
The trace should be a flat Iine across the entire frequency band at least 0.5 V
greater than Vbb (node 14). The correct trace indicates the presence of IF after
the lirst 30 MHz filter/limiter.

sg631 s
Figure 10-15. Analog Bus Node 20
Al2 Reference
‘Ib observe the Al2 analog bus nodes perform step A12, below. Then follow the
node-specific instructions.
Step A12.
Press:

1040 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 21 100 kH2 (100 kH2 reference frequency)
Perform step Al2 and then press (EJJ .._.............._.................. ~~~~~~~:~~~.~~.: . _ L21) Lxl)
-~~~~~.~~~~~~
. _. . . _. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I i:. . i. . . .:. . .<<:<~~.uIRE%.
;.:. This node counts the Al2 100 kHz reference
signal that is used on Al3 (the fractional-N analog assembly) as a reference
frequency for the phase detector.
Node 22 Al2 Gnd 1 (ground)

Node 23 VCO Tune (Al2 VC0 tuning voltage)

The trace should show a voltage step as shown in Figure 10-16. At normal
operation, the left half trace should be 0 flOO0 mV and the right half trace
should be 100 to 200 mV higher (that is, one to two divisions). If the trace does
not appear as shown in Figure 10-16, refer to the “High/Low Band Transition
Adjustment” in the “Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1041

Node 24 2nd LO
perform step A12 ad then press m ~~~~~~~~~~ (241@
..............................i,,_......___....,._:.~:.:.:.~

This node counts the 2nd LO used by the sampler/mixer assemblies to produce
the 2nd IF of 4 kHz. As you vary the frequency, the counter reading should
change to values very close to those indicated below:

1 F’reqnency Entered 1 CounterReading )

Node 25 PL Ref (phase lock reference)

perform step A12 ad then press m ~~~~~~~~ 125) Lxl]
.._;_

~~~~~,~~~~~~~: LMenu) ~~~~~~~~,.

L .._............ ii....::::.:.....:.._s.

This node counts the reference signal used by the phase comparator circuit on
the All phase lock assembly. As you vary the frequency, the counter reading
should change as indicated below:

1042 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 26 Ext l&f (rear panel external reference input)
Perform step Al2 and then press B &@@~ :Ihl 126) Lxl).
The voltage level of this node indicates whether an external reference timebase
is being used:
n No external reference: about -0.9 V
n With external reference: about -0.6 V.
Node 27 VCXO Tune (40 MHz VCXO tuning voltage)
Perform step Al2 and then press IMeas) _..:;~~~~~..~~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~. i i L27) @ cj)
. . . . ;. * .% /. . . . . . . . _., .,__
&&&& ” - “#g&f&? %
: : . . . . . . . . .:.:. >+% . __ 2 ./._._ .;. .:. T.. ;.-s i. . I-s:
i ./ . Y. . :.
This node displays the voltage used to fine tune the Al2 reference VCXO to
40 MHz. You should see a flat line at some voltage level (the actual voltage level
varies from instrument to instrument). Anything other than a flat line indicates
that the VCXO is tuning to different frequencies. Refer to the “Frequency
Accuracy” adjustment procedure.
Node 28 Al2 Gnd 2 (Ground reference)

Al4 Fractional-N (Digital)

lb observe the Al4 analog bus nodes perform step A14, below. Then follow the
node-specific instructions.
Step A14.
Press:

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1043

Node 29 FN VU3 Tun (Al4 FN VCO tuning voltage)
_ _ _ / . . . . . . .: .
Perform step Al4 and then press LMeas) ~~~~~~~‘;;~# (29) @J c-1
~~~~~~~
Observe the Al4 F’N VCO tuning voltage. If the Al3 and Al4 assemblies are
functioning correctly and the VCO is phase locked, the trace should look Iike
Figure 10-17. Any other waveform indicates that the FN VCO is not phase
locked. The vertical lines in the trace indicate the band crossings. (The counter
can also be enabled to count the VCO frequency in CW mode.)

sg6274d
Figure 10-17. Analog Bus Node 29

1044 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 30 FN VC0 Det (Al4 VC0 detector)

See whether the F’N VCO is oscillating. The trace should resemble Figure 10-18.

sg6275d
Figure 10-18. Analog Bus Node 30

Node 31 Count Gate (analog bus counter gate)

You should see a flat line at + 5 V across the operating frequency range. The
counter gate activity occurs during bandswitches, and therefore is not visible
on the analog bus. To view . .the . . . . . . . . . bandswitch activity, @ok at..$is node on an
oscilloscope, using ~~~~~~~~. Refer to ~~~~~~~~~.-~~~~~~ mder the Analog
. . L. . . . . . . . L. ..A.A? . .w. . . . . . .,., . A.A. :. :,.;: , . i., ., ., ~., ., ., ~., i,., .~. . . i . .n. . ._. ___,,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,., /._i
Bus Menu heading.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1045

PEEK/POKE Menu
m acceSS tl& menu, press Csystem_l ~~~:~~~~~~r, ~p.&@~~
. . ; . . ~.~~~.. ~~.~. ;.; ~. .: ,. .‘.. .z . .?/Z<. < . . ..:/<.~_.. . . .;. ... .A: . . . . _.::
:. . . : 2.: .:i::::::: .....
:Pmi~9@<, allows you to edit the content of one or more
memory addresses The keys are described below.

Caution The PEEK/POKE capability is intended for service use only.

accesses any memory address and shows it in the

active entry area of the display. Use the front panel
knob, entry keys, or step keys to enter the memory
address of interest.
displays the data at the accessed memory address.
allows you to change the data at
. . . . . C__.the
. _./ ., _memory
._. . . . c=.. .z i ‘.’
ad&ess accessed the :~~~p~~,~.;~~~~~~::
by

softkey. Use the front panel knob, entry keys, or

step keys to change the data. The ASCC switch
must be in the “AIXER” position in order to poke.
resets or clears the memory where
y. . instrument states
~~~.~O~~
.._...._.....-........~.-.~...:.;.. -.._./.
, <..; /.A... . . ..:
are stored. To do this, press~~~~~~~~:.: (Preset.

1046 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Firmware Revision Softkey
Ress
_.., . ,
~'~~~~~~~,~~~ ~~~~~,~~~~,~~~~to &play the current
./ /.I..i./........ ;.............................~..ii..~~..~~~...~
..A. .:... ._._..........................-...................-..........-..-..............

flrmware revision information. The number and implementation date appear

in the active entry area of the display as shown in Figure lo-19 below. The
analyzer’s serial number and installed options are also displayed. Another way
to display the Grmware revision information is to cycle the line power.

I REFO dB

START .030 000 MHz STOP 6 000.000 000 MHz

dg632e

Figure 10-19. Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1047

HP-IB Service Mnemonic Definitions
Ah service routine keystrokes can be made through HP-IB in one of the
following approaches:
w sending equivalent remote HP-IB commands. (Mnemonics have been
documented previously with the corresponding keystroke.)
n invoking the System Menu (MENUSYST) and using the analyzer mnemonic
(SCFTn), where “nn represents the softkey number. (Softkeys are
numbered 1 to 8 from top to bottom.)
An HP-IB overview is provided in the “Compatible Peripherals” chapter in
the User’s ouide. HP-IB programming information is also provided in the
Programming Guide.

Invoking Tests Remotely

Many tests require a response to the displayed prompts. Since bit 1 of the Event
Status Register B is set (bit 1 = service routine waiting) any time a service
routine prompts the user for an expected response, you can send an appropriate
response using one of the following techniques:
n Read event status register B to reset the bit.
n Enable bit 1 to interrupt (ESNB[D]). See “Status Reporting” in the
Programming Guide.
w Respond to the prompt with a TESRn command (see Tests Menu, at the
beginning of this chapter).
Symbol Conventions
[I An optional operand
D A numericaI operand
<> A necessary appendage
I An either/or choice in appendages

1048 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Analog Bus Codes
Measures and displays the analog input. The preset state
input to the analog bus is the rear panel AUX IN. The other
30 nodes may be selected with ip., only if the AEKJS is
enabled (ANABon).
OUTPCNTR Outputs the counter’s frequency data.
OUTPERRO Reads any prompt message sent to the error queue by a
service routine.
OUTPTESS Outputs the integer status of the test most recently
executed. Status codes are those listed under “TST?“.
TST? Executes the power-on self test (internal test 1) and
outputs an integer test status. Status codes are as follows:
0 =pass
1 =fail
2 =in progress
3 =not available
4 =not done
5 =done

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1049

Error Messages
This section contains an alphabetical list of the error messages that pertain to
servicing the analyzer. The information in the list includes explanations of the
displayed messages and suggestion to help solve the problem.

Note The error messages that pertain to measurement applications

are included in the HP 8753E Network Anulgzer User’s Guide.

BATTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY CLEARED

Error Number The battery protection of the non-volatile SRAM memory has
183 failed. The SRAM memory has been cleared. Refer to the
“Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures” chapter
for battery replacement instructions See the “Preset State and
Memory Allocation, n chapter in the HP 87533 Network Anulgm
User’s Guide for more information about the SRAM memory.

BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK

Error Number The battery protection of the non-volatile SRAM memory is in
184 danger of failing. If this occurs, all of the instrument state
registers stored in SRAM memory will be lost. Save these states
to a disk and refer to the “Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures” chapter for battery replacement
instructions. See the “Preset State and Memory Allocation,”
chapter in the HP 8753E Network Anulgzer User’s Guide for
more information about the SRAM memory.

CALIBRATION ABORTED
Error Number You have changed the active channel during a calibration so the
74 calibration in progress was terminated. Make sure the
appropriate channel is active and restart the calibration.

1 O-50 Service Ksy Menus and Error Messages

CALIBRATION REQUIRED

Error Number A calibration set could not be found that matched the current
63 stimulus state or measurement parameter. You will have to
perform a new calibration.

CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED

Error Number A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful. You must
3 change the position of the jumper on the A9 CPU assembly.
Refer to the “A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure” in the
“Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter.

CORRECTION TURNED OFF

Error Number Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not
66 match the parameters for the calibration set, therefore
correction has been turned off. The critical instrument state
parameters are sweep type, start frequency, frequency span,
and number of points

CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET

Error Number Correction is not valid for your selected measurement
64 parameter. Either change the measurement parameters or
perform a new calibration.

DEADLOCK
Error Number A fatal hrmware error occurred before instrument preset
111 completed.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-51

DEVICE:noton,notconnect, wrong addrs

Error Number The device at the selected address cannot be accessedbythe

119 analyzer. Verify that the device is switched on, and check the
HP-IB connection between the analyzer and the device. Ensure
that the device address recognized by the analyzer matches the
HP-IB address set on the device itself.

DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM

Error Number The disk drive is not responding correctly. Refer to the disk
39 drive operating manual.

DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR

Error Number The analyzer and the external disk drive aren’t communicating
190 properly. Check the HP43 connection and then try substituting
another disk drive to isolate the problem instrument.

DISK:noton,not connected, wrong addrs

Error Number The disk cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify power to
38 the disk drive, and check the HP-B3 connection between the
analyzer and the disk drive. Ensure that the disk drive address
recognized by the analyzer matches the HP-IB address set on
the disk drive itself.

1 O-52 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

DISK READ/WRITE ERROR
Error Number There may be a problem with your disk. Try a new floppy disk.
189 If a new floppy disk does not eliminate the error, suspect
hardware problems.

INITIALIZATION FAILED
Error Number The disk initialization failed, probably because the disk is
47 damaged.

INSUFFICIENTMEMORY,PURMTRCAL OFF

Error Number There is not enough memory space for the power meter
154 calibration array. Increase the available memory by clearing one
or more save/recall registers, or by reducing the number of
points

NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY I N PROGRESS

Error Number The ~~~~~~~~~~~; softkey is not valid unless a
___i ., ., ., ., . ,. . . ,. ,. ,. ,. ,. _ _ _ _ i.,i . . . . . . . .i . . . . . . ._
69 calibration is already in progress. Start a new calibration.

NOTENOUGHSPACEONDISKFORSTORE
Error Number The store operation will overflow the available disk space.
44 Insert a new disk or purge files to create free disk space.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-53

NO FILE(S) FOUND ONDISK
Error Number No files of the type created by an analyzer store operation were
45 found on the disk. If you requested a specific hle title, that hle
was not found on the disk.

NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL

Error Number The first IF signal was not detected during pretune. Check the
5 front panel R channel jumper. If there is no visible problem
with the jumper, refer to the “Source Troubleshooting” chapter.

NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL

Error Number The tist IF signal was detected at pretune, but phase lock could
7 not be acquired. Refer to the “Source Troubleshooting” chapter.

NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR REGISTERS

Error Number You cannot store a calibration set due to insufficient memory.
70 You can free more memory by clearing a saved instrument state
from an internal register (which may also delete an associated
calibration set, if all the instrument states using the calibration
kit have been deleted.) You can store the saved instrument state
and calibration set to a disk before clearing them. After deleting
the instrument states, press w to run the memory packer.

1O-54 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL
Error Number When the analyzer is performing a power meter calibration, the
198 HP-IB bus is unavailable for other functions such as printing or
plotting.

OVER LOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED

Error Number See error number 57.

58

OVER LOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED

Error Number See error number 57.

59

OVER LOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED

Error Number You have exceeded approximately + 14 dBm at one of the test
57 ports, The RF output power is automatically reduced to
-85 dBm. The annotation PJL appears in the left margin of the
display to indicate that the power trip function has been
activated. When this occurs, reset the power to a lower level,
aen toggle the ~~~-~~~~~:~~~~~~ softkey to sMtch on Q,e
_ . . . i . _. . ..._., ..~_,_L,, >>>B ,. :., .__i_z.:.z.:.:.u.
power again.

PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO

Error Number You have dellned the parallel port as COPY for sequencing in
165 the HP-IB menu. ‘lb access the parallel port for general purpose
I/O (GPIO), set the selection to [GPIO].

Service Key Menus and Error Messages lo-55

PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY
Error Number You have dellned the parallel port as general purpose I/O (GPIO)
167 for sequencing. The definition was made under the (Local key
menus. To access the pamIle port for copy, set the selection to
~~~~:~~:.~~
. . . . . . . . . i I:: ,., , .~~.~~~~,;~;. .” -

PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED

Error Number An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically
4 executed at power-on, preset, and any time a loss of phase lock
is detected. This message indicates that phase lock calibration
was initiated and the first IF detected, but a problem prevented
the calibration from completing successfully. Refer to Chapter
3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants” and execute pretune
correction (test 48).
This message may appear if you connect a mixer between the
RF’ output and R input before turning on frequency offset mode.
Ignore it: it will go away when you turn on frequency offset.
This message may also appear if you turn on frequency offset
mode before you define the offset.

PHASE LOCK LOST

Error Number Phase lock was acquired but then lost. Refer to the “Source
8 Troubleshooting” chapter.

1 O-56 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK
Error Number Phase lock has been achieved, but the source may be phase
6 locked to the wrong harmonic of the synthesizer. Perform the
source pretune correction routine documented in the
“Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter.

POWER METER INVALID

Error Number The power meter indicates an out-of-range condition. Check the
116 test setup.

POWER METER NOT SETTLED

Error Number Sequential power meter readings are not consistent. Verify that
118 the equipment is set up correctly. If so, preset the instrument
and restart the operation.

POWER SUPPLY HOT!

Error Number The temperature sensors on the A8 post-regulator assembly
21 have detected an over-temperature condition. The power
supplies regulated on the post-regulator have been shut down.
Refer to the “Power Supply Troubleshooting” chapter.

POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!

Error Number One or more supplies on the A8 post-regulator assembly have
22 been shut down due to an over-current, over-voltage, or
under-voltage condition. Refer to the “Power Supply
Troubleshooting” chapter.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-57

POWER UNLEVELED
Error Number There is either a hardware failure in the source or you have
179 attempted to set the power level too high. Check to see if the
power level you set is within specillcations. If it is, refer to the
“Source Troubleshooting” chapter. You will only receive this
message over the HP-IB. On the analyzer, P? is displayed.

PRINTER: error
Error Number The parallel port printer is malfunctioning. The analyzer cannot
175 complete the copy function.

PRINTER: not handshaking

Error Number The printer at the parallel port is not responding.
177

PRINTER: noton, not connected, wrongaddrs

Error Number The printer does not respond to control. Verify power to the
24 printer, and check the HP-IB connection between the analyzer
and the printer. Ensure that the printer address recognized by
the analyzer matches the HP-B3 address set on the printer itself.

PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!

Error Number The analyzer biasing supplies to the HP 85024A external probe
23 are shut down due to excessive current. Troubleshoot the
probe, and refer to the “Power Supply Troubleshooting” chapter.

1 O-56 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

PWR MTR: NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDRS
Error Number The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify
117 that the power meter address and model number set in the
analyzer match the address and model number of the actual
power meter.

SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT MEMORY

Error Number You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due
151 to insufficient memory. Increase the available memory by
clearing one or more save/recall registers and pressing m, or
by storing files to a disk.

SELFTFST #n FAILED
Service Error Internal test #n has failed. Several internal test routines are
Number 112 executed at instrument preset. The analyzer reports the first
failme detected. Refer to the internal tests and the
self-diagnose feature descriptions earlier in this chapter.

SOURCEPOWERTLJRNElDOFF, RESET
UNDER
POWERMENU

Information You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the
Message inputs and power has been automatically reduced. The
annotation P+ indicates that power trip has been activated.
When this occurs, reset the power and then press LMenu) &J@
. . . . . .~~~~~:.~~~~~~~~~~.
. . .;. ,. ,. ; . . . .: . . . . . . . . . . .:. :. . . . . ., . . . .;. . to sdtc., on the power. This message
t
follows error numbers 57, 58, and 59.

Service Key Menus and Error Messages lo-59

SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP
Error Number If you select external source auto or manuai instrument mode
187 and you do not also select CW mode, the anaIyzer is
automatically switched to CW.

TEST ABORTED
Error Number You have prematurely stopped a service test.
113

TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND START OVER

Service Error Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress
Number 115 is not correct. Check the setup diagram and instructions in the
“Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter. Start the
procedure again.

WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE DISK

Error Number You have attempted to store, load, or read hle titles, but your
77 disk format does not conform to the Logical Interchange Format
(LIF). You must initialize the disk before reading or writing to it.

lo-60 Service Key Menus and Error Massages

 11
Error lkrms
The analyzer generates and stores factors in internal arrays when a
measurement error-correction (measurement calibration) is performed. These
factors are known by the following terms:
n error terms
n E-terms
n measurement calibration coefficients
The analyzer creates error terms by measuring well-deflned calibration devices
over the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the
ideal model for the devices The differences represent systematic (repeatable)
errors of the analyzer system. The resulting calibration coefficients are good
representations of the systematic error sources. For details on the various levels
of error-correction, refer to the “Optimizmg Measurement Results” chapter of
the HP 8753E Network Anulger User’s Guide. For details on the theory of
error-correction, refer to the “Application and Operation Concepts” chapter of
the HP 8753E Network Anulgm User’s Guide.

Error YLlxms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose

Specific parts of the analyzer and its accessories directly contribute to the
magnitude and shape of the error terms Since we know this correlation and we
know what typical error terms look like, we can examine error terms to monitor
system performance (preventive maintenance) or to identify faulty components
in the system (troubleshooting).
n Preventive Maintenance: A stable, repeatable system should generate
repeatable error terms over long time interval% for example, six months
If you make a hardcopy record (print or plot) of the error terms, you can
periodically compare current error terms with the record. A sudden shift in
error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic errors, and may indicate
the need for further troubleshooting. A long-term trend often reflects drift,

Error Terms 11-l

 connector and cable wear, or gradual degradation, indicating the need for
further investigation and preventive maintenance. Yet, the system may still
conform to specifications. The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging
connectors or inspecting cables.
n Troubleshooting: If a subtle failme or mild performance problem is
suspected, the magnitude of the error terms should be compared against
values generated previously with the same instrument and calibration kit.
This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem.
However, if previously generated values are not available, compare the
current values to the typical values listed in Table 11-2, and shown graphically
on the plots in this chapter. If the magnitude exceeds its limit, inspect the
corresponding system component. If the condition causes system verification
to fail, replace the component.
Consider the following while troubleshooting:
q All parts of the system, including cables and calibration devices, can
contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms.
q Connectors must be clean, gaged, and within specification for error term
analysis to be meaningful.
q Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement
calibration, minimizing cable instability errors.
q Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration.
The connector interface must be repeatable. Refer to the “Principles
of Microwave Connector Care” section in the “Service Equipment and
Analyzer Options” chapter for information on connection techniques and on
cleaning and gaging connectors.
q Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor, subtle performance problems.
Refer to the “Start Troubleshooting Here” chapter if a blatant failme or
gross measurement error is evident.
q It is often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice (using two distinct
measurement calibrations) to establish the degree of repeatability. If the
results do not seem repeatable, check all connectors and cables.

1 l-2 Error Terms

FuU Two-Port Error-Correction Procedure
Note This is the most accurate error-correction procedure. Since the
analyzer takes both forward and reverse sweeps, this procedure
takes more time than the other correction procedures.

1. Set any measurement parameters that you want for the device
measurement: power, format, number of points, IF bandwidth.
2. To access the measurement correction menus, press:

3. If‘T . ,.your
,: . :<: ;: :, :. +<<<<.<calibration
;<. ” ., ,*, .;<<:’ .: kit is different than the kit specified under the
~~~~~~ ~~~~~.:: s&key, press:
.A.........._ :.......i............ ::..s .... A .:::... A ii::::.-.:. .......T :....a

(s&d you type of kit)

4 To select the correction type, press:

5. Connect a shielded open circuit to PORT 1.

ErrorTerms 11-3
 FOR I SOLAT ION FOR TRANSMISSION FOR REFLECT I ON
HP 8753E HP 8753E HP 8753E
NETWORK ANALYZER NETWORK ANALYZER NETWORK ANALYZER

ag,
LOAD LOAD

* DIRECT CONNECTrON
APC-7
24 INCH

TEST
PORT 2

Figure 11-l. Standard Connections for Full Two-Port Error-Correction

114 Error Terms

 6 . To measure the standard, when the displayed trace has settled, press:

The analyzer underlines the Bi&$i.

.- . _. . . . . . . . softkey after it measures the standard.
7 . Disconnect the open, and connect a short circuit to PORT 1.
8. To measure the device, when the displayed trace has settled, press:

: s.. ::::::z.:. . .. . ....i.::::...::.r

The analyzer underlines the ~~~~~~ softkey after it measures the standard.
9. Disconnect the short, and connect an impedance-matched load to PORT 1.
10. lb measure the standard, when the displayed trace has settled, press:

y ::. . . p .vy<
The analyzer tmderlines the :&&I& softkey after it measures the standard.
11. Repeat the open-short-load measurement descried above,. . but . . . .:. . : .:. . :connect
. : .i i. i : .: . the
:,. .
devices h turn to PORT 2, md use the ~~~~~~~ jj&#&$$ t .) &&!j$
:.-. . :Ai_. . . . . . :. ...~.. . .- . . ~. . ~. . . . ~ . . . . 9 ;,.,..,,......;;;._,.~.~~~., ___ ?
md ~~~~~2. ““““““. . . “‘. .’
:#$s’ softkeys

12. lb compute the reflection correction coefficients, press:

13. ‘lb start the transmis f&n portion of the come&ion, press: ~~~~~~~~~~~~,

14. Make a “through” connection between the points where you will connect
your device under test as shown in F’igure 11-l.

Note Include any adapters or cables that you will have in the device
measurement. That is, connect the standard device where you
will connect your device under test.

ErrorTerms 1 1 - 5
 The analyzer displays the corrected measurement trace. The analyzer
also shows the notation Cor at the left of the screen, indicating that
error-correction is on.
Note You can save or store the measurement correction to use for
later measurements Use the menus under @JEGi$ or refer
to “Printing, Plotting, and Saving Measurement Results” located
in the HP 87533 Network Anulgger User’s cui&e for procedures.

18. This completes the full two-port correction procedure. You can connect and
measure your device under test.

‘lhble 11-l. Calibration CoefKcient ‘lkrms and lksts

calibration calibratioll lhbE xkst
Coellleient NUDlbC?r
-PO- l-pert 2-pod
and Isolation*

1 &i or% Ex (ED) ED EDF 32

2 ET (Ed ES ESF 33
3 ER ERF 34
4 EXF 36
6 ELF 36
6 ETF 37
7 JbR 33
3 ‘%R 30
0 ERR 40
10 EXR 41
11 ELR 42
12 &l?R 43

WYrEsi
Kenning oflirst subscript: D-directivity; S-source match, R-reflection tracking; X-crosstalk;
L-load match; T-transmission tracking.
bleaning of second mhcripk F-forward; R-reverse.

t Response and Isolation cal yields: EX or & if a transmiwion parameter (621, 612) or ED or ER if a
Hlection parameter (%I, 622).
1 One-path, 2-port cal duplicates array8 1 to 6 in 8lT8yB 7 to 12.

Error Terms 1 l-7

Error Term Inspection
i , i p”. . :.,: . : 1 . . . . . . . .
Note If the correction is not active, press [call ‘$EJWZ$@# tixU .

The analyzer copies the first calibration measurement trace for the selected
error term into memory and then displays it. Table 11-l lists the test
numbers
2. Press @GiXZj and adjust the scale and reference to study the error term
trace.
3. Press (TFctn) and use the marker functions to determine the error term
magnitude.
4. Compare the displayed measurement trace to the trace shown in the
following “Error Term descriptions” section, and to previously measured
data. If data is not available from previous measurements, refer to the
typical uncorrected performance specifications listed in lhble 11-2.
5. Make a hardcopy of the measurement results:
a. Connect a printing or plotting peripheral to the analyzer.
b. press LLocal) ~~~~~~~~~~~~,; ~~~~~~~~~~~~ and seIect the
i. *;..A. . i . . . . . 1.. . . . ./
appropriate peripheral to verify that the HP-IR address is set correctly on
the analyzer.
., . . .../
C. Press (-1 a,& aen &00x either !p&$& . -.-..;. . . . . .;;. . . . . n. . or ~~~~~.
. __.. . . . . . . .
.-._ ~,. _ . . . . :<,.;,: ., :. . .- -. . . . . .... . . . . . .
d. Press (E&&J #@@I$ fxgmi; and title each data trace so that you can
identify it later.
For detailed information on creating hardcopies, refer to “Printing,
Plotting, and Saving Measurement Results” in the HP 8753ENetwork
Analyzer User’s Guide.

1 l-8 Error Terms

If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values
1. Perform a system verification to verify that the system still conforms to
specifications.
2. If system verification fails, refer to “Start Troubleshooting Here. n

Uncorrected Performance
The following table shows typical performance without error-correction. RF
cables are not used except as noted. Related error terms should be within these
values.

able 11-2. Uncorrected System Performance

Frequency Jlange (GE@

o.ooo3 to 3.0 3.0 to 6.0

DilWtiVi~ SodB 26 dB
Source Match 16 dB 14 dB

had Match 16dB 14 dB

Reflection Tracking* fl.6 dB +0.6 dl3, -2.6 dB

Tranamisaion Tracking* f1.6 dB +0.6 dB, -2.6 dB

Croestallr OodB SodB

*Deviation from nominal trace wxo8s the frequency range.

ErrorTerms 114
Error ‘I&m Descriptions
The error term descriptions in this section include the following information:
n significance of each error term
n typical results following a full 2-port error-correction
n guidelines to interpret each error term
The same description applies to both the forward (F’) and reverse (R) terms.

1 1 - 1 0 ErrorTerms
Directivity (EDF and EDR)

Description
Directivity is a measure of any detected power that is reflected when a load
is attached to the test port. These are the uncorrected forward and reverse
directivity error terms of the system. The directivity error of the test port
is determined by measuring the reflection (Sll, S22) of the load during the
error-correction procedure.

S-cant System Components

w load used in the error-correction (calibration)
n test port connectors
n test port cables

Affected Measurements
Low reflection device measurements are most affected by directivity errors.

HI d

i i i i i i i i i I

(4 04 sg632s

Figure 11-2. Typical EDF/EDR without and with Cables

Error Terms 1 l-1 1

Source Match (ESF and ESR)
Description
Source match is a measure of test port connector match, as well as the match
between all components from the source to the test port. These are the forward
and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port.

Signifkant System Components

w load calibration kit device
w open calibration kit device
n short calibration kit device
n bridge
n test port connectors
n bias tees
w step attenuator
n transfer switch
n test port cables

Affected Measurements
Reflection and transmission measurements of highly reflective devices are most
affected by source match errors.

sg633s

Figure 11-3. Typical ESF/ESB without and with Cables

1 1 - 1 2 ErrorTerms
Reflection Tracking (ERF and ERR)
Description
Reflection tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the
reference path (R path) and the frequency response of the reflection test path
(A or B input path).

Significant System Components

n open calibration kit device
n short calibration kit device
n R signal path if large variation in both F,RF’ and ERR
n A or B input paths if only one term is affected

Affected Measurements
All reflection measurements (high or low return loss) are affected by the
reflection tracking errors.

Figure 11-4. Typical EIWERR without and with Cables

Error Terms 11-13

Isolation (Crosstalk, EXF and EXE)
Description
Isolation is a measure of the leakage between the test ports and the signal
paths The isolation error terms are characterized by measuring transmission
(S21, S12) with loads attached to both ports during the error-correction
procedure. Since these terms are low in magnitude, they are usually noisy
(not very repeatable). The error term magnitude changes dramatically with
IF bandwidth: a 10 Hz IF bandwidth must be used in order to lower the noise
floor beyond the crosstalk specification. Using averaging will also reduce the
peak-to-peak noise in this error term.

Significant System Components

w sampler crosstalk

Affected Measurements
Transmission measurements, (primarily where the measured signal level is very
low), are affected by isolation errors. For example, transmission measurements
where the insertion loss of the device under test is large.

sg638s

Figure 11-5.
Typical EXF/EXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 Id& Bandwidth

11.14 Error Terms

Load Match (ELF and ELR)
Description
Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that
terminates the output of a 2-port device. Load match error terms are
characterized by measuring the reflection (Sll, S22) responses of a “through”
configuration during the calibration procedure.

SignWant System Components

n “through” cable
n cable connectors
n test port connectors

Affected Measurements
All transmission and reflection measurements of a low insertion loss two-port
devices are most affected by load match errors. Transmission measurements of
lossy devices are also affected.

BTRRT

sg6277d

Figure 11-6. Typical ELF/ELE

Error Terms 11-15

Transmission Tracking (ETF and ETE)
Description
Transmission tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the
reference path (including R input) and the transmission test path (including
A or B input) while measuring transmission. The response of the test port cables
is included. These terms are characterized by measuring the transmission (S21,
S12) of the “through” configuration during the error-correction procedure.

Significant System Components

n R signal path (if both ETF and ETR are bad)
n A or B input paths
n “through” cable

Affected Measurements
All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors.

sg6278d
Figure 11-7. Typical ETF/ETR

11-16 Error Terms

 12
Theory of Operation
This chapter is divided into two major sections:
n “How the HP 8753E Works” gives a general description of the HP 8753E
network analyzer operation.
n “A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups” provides more detailed
operating theory for each of the analyzer’s functional groups.

How the HP 8753E Works

Network analyzers measure the reflection and transmission characteristics of
devices and networks. A network analyzer test system consists of the following:
n source
n signal-separation devices
n receiver
n display
The analyzer applies a signal that is either transmitted through the device under
test, or reflected from its input, and then compares it with the incident signal
generated by the swept RF source. The signals are then applied to a receiver for
measurement, signal processing, and display.
The HP 8753E vector network analyzer integrates a high resolution synthesized
RF source, test set, and a dual channel three-input receiver to measure and
display magnitude, phase, and group delay of transmitted and reflected power.
The HP 8753E Option 010 has the additional capability of transforming
measured data from the frequency domain to the time domain. Figure 12-1
is a simplified block diagram of the network analyzer system. A detailed
block diagram of the analyzer is located at the end of Chapter 4, “Start
Troubleshooting Here. n

Theory of Operation 12-l

 \
I
30kHz to 3 or 66HL 30kHr to 3 or MHZ R
- ---a -
c

SYNTHESIZED TEST RECE I VER DISPLAY

SOURCE AC
SET
piiq El-

sg623Bd

Figure 12-1. Simplirred Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System

The Built-In Synthesized Source

The analyzer’s built-in synthesized source produces a swept RF signal in the
range of 30 kHz to 3.0 GHz. The HP 8753E Option 006 is able to generate
signals up to 6 GHz. The source output power is leveled by an internal ALC
(automatic leveling control) circuit. lb achieve frequency accuracy and phase
measuring capability, the analyzer is phase locked to a highly stable crystal
oscillator.
For this purpose, a portion of the transmitted signal is routed to the R channel
input of the receiver, where it is sampled by the phase detection loop and fed
back to the source.

The Source Step Attenuator

The 70 dB, electro-mechanical, step attenuator contained in the source has very
low loss. It is used to adjust the power level to the device under test without
changing the level of the incident power in the reference path. The user sets
the attenuation levels via the front panel softkeys.

12-2 Theory of Operation

The Built-In lkst Set
The HP 8753E features a built-in test set that provides the signal separation
capability for the device under test, as well as to the signal-separation devices.
The signal separation devices are needed to separate the incident signal from
the transmitted and reflected signals. The incident signal is applied to the R
channel input via an external jumper cable on the front panel. Meanwhile,
the transmitted and reflected signals are internally routed from the test port
couplers to the inputs of the A and B sampler/mixers in the receiver. Port 1 is
connected to the A input and port 2 is connected to the B input.
The test set contains the hardware required to make simultaneous transmission
and reflection measurements in both the forward and reverse directions. A
solid-state transfer switch in the built-in test set allows reverse measurements to
be made without changing the connections to the device under test.

The Receiver Block

The receiver block contains three sampler/mixers for the R, A and B inputs. The
signals are sampled, and down-converted to produce a 4 kHz IF’ (intermediate
frequency). A multiplexer sequentially directs each of the three IF signals to
the ADC (analog to digital converter) where it is converted from an analog to
a digital signal to be measured and processed for viewing on the display. Both
amplitude and phase information are measured simultaneously, regardless of
what is displayed on the analyzer.

The Microprocessor
A microprocessor takes the raw data and performs all the required error
correction, trace math, formatting, scaling, averaging, and marker operations,
according to the instructions from the front panel or over HP-IB. The formatted
data is then displayed.

Required Peripheral Equipment

In addition to the analyzer, a system requires calibration standards for vector
accuracy enhancement, and cables for interconnections.

Theory of Operation 123

A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups
The operation of the analyzer is most logically described in five functional
groups. Each group consists of several major assemblies, and performs a distinct
function in the instrument. Some assemblies are related to more than one
group, and in fact all the groups are to some extent interrelated and affect each
other’s performance.
Power Supply. The power supply functional group consists of the A8 post
regulator and the Al5 preregulator. It supplies power to the other assemblies
in the instrument.
Digital Control. The digital control group consists of the Al front panel and
A2 front panel processor, the A9 CPU, the Al6 rear panel, the Al8 display
and the A19 graphics system processor (GSP). The A10 digital IF assembly is
also related to this group. These assemblies combine to provide digital control
for the analyzer.
Source. The source group consists of the A3 source, A7 pulse generator, All
phase lock, Al2 reference, Al3 fractional-N (analog), and Al4 fractional-N
(digital) assemblies. The A4 sampler is also related since it is part of the
source phase lock loop. The source supplies a phase-locked RF signal to the
device under test.
Signal Separation. The signal separation group performs the function of an
S-parameter test set, dividing the source signal into a reference path and a
test path, and providing connections to the device under test. It consists of
the A24 transfer switch, the A21 test port 1 coupler, and the A22 test port 2
coupler.
Receiver. The receiver group consists of the A4/A5/A6 sampler/mixers and
the A10 digital IF. The Al2 reference assembly and the A9 CPU are also
related. The receiver measures and processes input signals for display.
The following pages describe the operation of each of the functional groups.

124 Theory of Operation

Power Supply Theory
The power supply functional group consists of the Al5 preregulator and the
A8 post regulator. These two assemblies comprise a switching power supply
that provides regulated DC voltages to power all assemblies in the analyzer. The
Al5 preregulator is enclosed in a casting at the rear of the instrument behind
the display. It is connected to the A8 post regulator by a wire bus A15Wl.
Figure 12-2 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group.

2’\
O F F

N O R M A L
D U R I N G

O P E R A T I O N
L A L L O N

N O R M A L
D U R I N G

OPERAlION

;ON D U R I N G

N O R M A L O P E R A T I O N

sg6105e

Figure 12-2. Power Supply Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram

Al5 Preregulator
The Al5 preregulator steps down and recti6es the line voltage. It provides a
fully regulated +5 V digital supply, and several preregulated voltages that go to
the A8 post regulator assembly for additional regulation.
The Al5 preregulator assembly includes the line power module, a 60 kHz
switching preregulator, and overvoltage protection for the +5 V digital supply.
It provides LEDs, visible from the rear of the instrument, to indicate either
normal or shutdown status.

Theory of Operation 12-5

Line Power Module
The line power module includes the line power switch, voltage selector switch,
and main fuse. The line power switch is activated from the front panel. The
voltage selector switch, accessible at the rear panel, adapts the analyzer to local
line voltages of approximately 115 V or 230 V (with 350 VA maximum). The
main fuse, which protects the input side of the preregulator against drawing too
much line current, is also accessible at the rear panel. Refer to the
HP 8753E Network Anulgzer lhstalhttin and Quick Start Guide for line voltage
tolerances and other power considerations.

Preregulated Voltages
The switching preregulator converts the line voltage to several DC voltages. The
regulated +5 V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard. The following
parGaIly regulated voltages are routed through A15Wl to the A8 post regulator
for llnal regulation:
+7OV +25V +18V -18V +8V -8V

Regulated + 6 V Digital Supply

The + 5 VD supply is regulated by the control circuitry in the Al5 preregulator.
It goes directly to the motherboard, and from there to all assemblies requiring
a low noise digital supply. A + 5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to
the Al5 preregulator. The +5 V CPU is derived from the +5 VD in the A8 post
regulator and goes directly to the A19 graphics system processor.
In order for the preregulator to function, the +5 V digital supply must be
loaded by one or more assemblies, and the + 5 V sense line must be working. If
not, the other preregulated voltages will not be correct.

Shutdown Indications: the Green LED and Red LED

The green LED is on in normal operation. It is off when line power is not
connected, not switched on, or set too low, or if the line fuse has blown.
The red LED, which is off in normal operation, lights to indicate a fault in
the +5 V supply. This may be an over/under line voltage, over line current,
or overtemperature condition. Refer to the troubleshooting chapters for more
information.

12-6 Theory of Operation

A8 Post Regulator
The A8 post regulator lllters and regulates the DC voltages received from the
Al5 preregulator. It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual
voltage supplies. It distributes regulated constant voltages to individual
assemblies throughout the instnunent. It includes the overtemperature
shutdown circuit, the variable fan speed circuit, and the air flow detector. Nine
green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies
Refer to the Power Supply Block Diagram located at the end of Chapter 5,
“Power Supply Troubleshooting”, to see the voltages provided by the A8 post
regulator.

Voltage Indications: the Green LEDs

The nine green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 assembly are on in normal
operation, to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply. If they are
off or flashing, a problem is indicated. The troubleshooting procedures later in
this chapter detail the steps to trace the cause of the problem.

Shutdown Circuit
The shutdown circuit is triggered by overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, or
overtemperature. It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage
supplies to be shut down. It also sends status messages to the A9 CPU to trigger
warning messages on the analyzer display. The voltages that are not shut down
are the +5 VD and +5 VCPU digital supplies from the preregulator, the fan
supplies, the probe power supplies, and the display supplies. The shutdown
circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes by using a
jumper to connect the SDIS line (A8TP4) to ground.

Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector

The fan power is derived directly from the + 18 V and -18 V supplies from
the Al5 preregulator. The fan is not fused, so that it will continue to provide
airflow and cooling when the instrument is otherwise disabled. If overheating
occurs, the main instrument supplies are shut down and the fan runs at full
speed. An overtemperature status message is sent to the A9 CPU to initiate a
warning message on the analyzer display. The fan also nms at full speed if the
air flow detector senses a low output of air from the fan. (Pull speed is normal
at initial power on.)

Theory of Operation 12-7

Display Power
The A8 assembly supplies +5 VCPU to the A19 GSP through the motherboard.
The GSP converts a portion of the +5 VCPU to 3.3 V to drive the display and
LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) logic The A19 GSP also controls and
supplies power to the A27 backlight inverter. The voltages generated by the
inverter are then routed to the display. Display power is not connected to the
protective shutdown circuitry so that the Al8 display assemblies can operate
during troubleshooting when other supplies do not work.

Note If blanking pulses from the A19 GSP are not present, then
+3.3 V will not be sent to the display.

Probe Power
The + 18 V and -18 V supplies are post regulated to + 15 V and -12.6 V
to provide a power source at the front panel for an external RF probe or
millimeter modules.

Digital Control Theory

The digital control functional group consists of the following assemblies:
H Al front panel
n A2 front panel processor
n A9 CPU
n A10 digital IF
n Al6 rear panel
n Al8 display
n A19 GSP
w A27 Inverter
These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the entire analyzer.
They provide math processing functions, as well as communications between
the analyzer and an external controller and/or peripherals Figure 12-3 is a
simplified block diagram of the digital control functional group.

124 Theory of Operation

 IT
-J

--_
7
(

L-_--I

sg6107e

Pie 12-3. Digital Control Group, Simplified Block Diagram

Theory of Operation 12-9

Al Front Panel
The A1 front panel assembly provides user interface with the analyzer. It
includes the keyboard for local user inputs, and the front panel LEDs that
indicate instrument status The RPG (rotary pulse generator) is not electrically
connected to the front panel, but provides user inputs directly to the front
panel processor.

A2 Front Panel Processor

The A2 front panel processor detects and decodes user inputs from the front
panel and the RPG, and transmits them to the CPU. It has the capability to
interrupt the CPU to provide information updates. It controls the front panel
LEDs that provide status information to the user.
The A2 also contains the LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) receivers
which connect to the graphics processor. The received video signals are routed
to the Al8 display.

A9 CPU/A10 Digital IF
The A9 CPU assembly contains the main CPU (central processing unit), the
digital signal processor, memory storage, and interconnect port interfaces
The main CPU is the master controller for the analyzer, including the other
dedicated microprocessors The memory includes EEPROM, DRAM, flash ROM,
SRAM and boot ROM.
Data from the receiver is serially clocked into the A9 CPU assembly from
the A10 digital IF’. The data taking sequence is triggered either from the
Al4 fractional-N assembly, externally from the rear panel, or by software on the
A9 assembly.

MdlCPU
The main CPU is a 32-bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the
entire instrument through the instrument bus The main CPU receives external
control information from the front panel or HP-IB, and performs processing
and formatting operations on the raw data in the main RAM. It controls the
digital signaI processor, the front panel processor, the display processor, and
the interconnect port interfaces. In addition, when the analyzer is in the
system controller mode, the main CPU controls peripheral devices through the
peripheral port interfaces

12-10 Thsoryof Operation

The main CPU has a dedicated flash ROM that contains the operating system for
instrument control. Front panel settings are stored in SRAM, with a battery
providing at least 5 years of backup storage when external power is off.

Main RAM
The main RAM (random access memory) is shared memory for the CPU and the
digital signal processor. It stores the raw data received from the digital signal
processor, while additional calculations are performed on it by the CPU. The
CPU reads the resulting formatted data from the main RAM and converts it to
GSP commands. It writes these commands to the GSP for output to the analyzer
display.

EEPROM
EEPROM (electrically-erasable programmable read only memory) contains
factory set correction constants unique to each instrument. These constants
correct for hardware variations to maintain the highest measurement accuracy.
The correction constants can be updated by executing the routines in Chapter 3,
“Adjustments and Correction Constants. n

Digital Signal Processor

The digital signal processor receives the digitized data from the A10 digital
IF. It computes discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and
magnitude data from the 4 kHz IF signal. The resulting raw data is written into
the main RAM.

Al8 Display
The Al8 display is an 8.4 inch LCD with associated drive circuitry. It receives a
+3.3 V power supply from the A19 GSP, along with the voltage generated from
the A27 backlight inverter. It receives the following signals from the A19 GSP:
n digital TTL horizontal sync
w digital TTL vertical sync
n blanking
w data clock
n digital ‘ITL red video
n digitalTI’Lgreen video
n digital ‘ITL blue video

Theory of Operation 12-11

A19 GSP
The A19 graphics system processor is the main interface between the A9 CPU
and the Al8 display. The CPU (A9) converts the formatted data to GSP
commands and writes it to the GSP. The GSP processes the data to obtain the
necessary video signals, which are then used for the following purposes:
n The video signals are used to produce VGA compatible RGB output signals,
which are routed to the Al6 rear panel.
w The video signals are converted by an LVDS (low voltage differential signaling)
driver which translates the signals to low level differential signals to help
eliminate radiated emissions The converted video signals are then routed to
the A2 assembly, where they are received and sent to the Al8 display.
The A19 assembly receives the +5 VCPU which is used for processing and
supplying power to the A27 backlight inverter (+ 5 VCPU) and the Al8 display
(3.3 v).

A27 Inverter
The AZ7 backlight inverter assembly supplies the ac voltage for the backlight
tube in the Al8 display assembly. This assembly takes the + 5 VCPU and
converts it to approximately 380 Vat with 5 ma of current at 40 kHz. There are
two control lines:
n Digital ON/OFF
n Analog Brightness
0 100% intensity is 0 V
0 50% intensity is 4.5 V

Al6 Bear Panel

The Al6 rear panel includes the following interfaces:
TEST SET I./O INTERCONNECT. This provides control signals and power to
operate duplexer test adapters
EXT RET’. This allows for a frequency reference signal input that can phase
lock the analyzer to an external frequency standard for increased frequency
accuracy.
The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature
when a signal is connected to this input. When the signal is removed, the
analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference.

12-12 Theoryof Operation

10 MHZ PRECISION REFERENCE. (Option lD5) This output is connected
to the EXT REF (described above) to improve the frequency accuracy of the
analyzer.
AUX INPUT. This allows for a dc or ac voltage input from an external signal
source, such as a detector or function generator, which you can then measure,
using the S-parameter menu. (You can also use this connector as an analog
output in service routines.)
EXT AM. This allows for an external analog signal input that is applied to the
ALC circuitry of the analyzer’s source. This input analog signal amplitude
modulates the RF output signal.
EXT TRIG. This allows connection of an external negative TI’L-compatible
signal that will trigger a measurement sweep. The trigger can be set to
external through softkey functions.
TEST SEQ. This outputs a TI’L signal that can be programmed in a test
sequence to be high or low, or pulse (10 pseconds) high or low at the end of a
sweep for a robotic part handler interface.
LIMIT TEST. This outputs a TI’L signal of the limit test results as follows:
Pass: TrLhigh
Fail: TrLlow
VGA OUTPUT. This provides a video output of the analyzer display that is
capable of running a PC VGA monitor.

Theory of Operation 12-13

Source Theory Overview
The source produces a highly stable and accurate RF output signal by phase
locking a YIG oscillator to a harmonic of the synthesized VCO (voltage controlled
oscillator). The source output produces a CW or swept signal between 300 kHz
and 3 GHz (or 300 kHz and 6 GHz for Option 006) with a maximum leveled
power of + 10 dBm. The source’s built-in 70 dR step attenuator allows the
power to go as low as -85 deem.
The full frequency range of the source is produced in 14 subsweeps, one in
super low band, two in low band, and eleven in high band. The high band
frequencies (16 MHz to 3 GHz) or (16 MHz to 6 GHz for Option 006) are achieved
by harmonic mixing, with a different harmonic number for each subsweep. The
low band frequencies (300 kHz to 16 MHz) are down-converted by fundamental
mixing. The super low band frequencies (10 kHz to 300 kHz) are sent directly
from the Al2 reference board to the output of the A3 source assembly. This
band is not phased locked nor does it use the ALC. It is the basic amplified
output of the fractional-N synthesizer.
The source functional group consists of the individual assemblies described
below.

A14/A13 Fractional-N
These two assemblies comprise the synthesizer. The 30 to 60 MHz VCO in
the Al4 assembly generates the stable LO frequencies for fundamental and
harmonic mixing.

Al2 Reference
This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the
instrument by dividing down the output of a 40 MHz crystal oscillator. In low
band operation, the output of the fractional-N synthesizer is mixed down in the
Al2 reference assembly. (The 2nd LO signal from the Al2 assembly is explained
in Receiver Theory.) The Al2 is also the origin of the super low band portion of
the 87533 source.

12-14 Theory of Operation

A7 Pulse Generator
A step recovery diode in the pulse generator produces a comb of harmonic
multiples of the VCO output. These harmonics provide the high band LO (local
oscillator) input to the samplers. In low band and super low band the operation
the pulse generator is turned off.

All Phase Lock

This assembly compares the f&t IF (derived from the source output in the
A4 sampler) to a stable reference, and generates an error voltage that is
integrated into the drive for the A3 source assembly.

A3 Source
This assembly includes a 3.0 to 6.8 GHz YIG oscillator and a 3.8 GHz cavity
oscillator. The outputs of these oscillators are mixed to produce the RF output
signal. In Option 006 (30 kHz to 6 GHz) the frequencies 3.0 to 6.0 GHz are no
longer a mixed product, but are the direct output of the YIG Oscillator. The
signal tracks the stable output of the synthesizer. The ALC (automatic leveling
control) circuitry is also in the A3 assembly.

Source Super Low Band Operation

The Super Low Band Frequency Range is 10 kHz to 300 kHz. These frequencies
are generated by the Al2 Reference Board. They are the amplified output of
the fractional-N synthesizer. This output is not phase locked and is not subject
to ALC control. Refer to ‘lhble 12-1.

‘able 12-1. Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies

I 4o.oto43.3 ~0.010to 0.300 ~0.010to 0.300 I

Theory of Operation 12-15

Source Low Band Operation
The low band frequency range is 300 kHz to 16 MHz. These frequencies are
generated by locking the A3 source to a reference signal. The reference signal
is synthesized by mixing down the fundamental output of the fractional-N VCO
with a 40 MHz crystal reference signal. Low band operation differs from high
band in these respects: The reference frequency for the All phase lock is not
a 6xed 1 MHz signal, but varies with the frequency of the fractional-N VCO
signal. The sampler diodes are biased on to pass the signal through to the mixer.
The 1st IF signal from the A4 sampler is not fixed but is identical to the source
output signal and sweeps with it. The following steps outline the low band
sweep sequence, illustrated in Figure 12-4.
1. A signal (FN LO) is generated by the fractional-N VCO. The VCO in the
Al4 Fractional-N assembly generates a CW or swept signal that is 40 MHz
greater than the start frequency. The signal is divided down to 100 kHz and
phase locked in the Al3 assembly, as in high band operation.
2. The fractional-N VCO signal is mixed with 40 MHZ to produce a
reference signal. The signal (F’N LO) from the Fractional-N VCO goes to the
Al2 reference assembly, where it is mixed with the 40 MHz VCXO (voltage
controlled crystal oscillator). The resulting signal is the reference to the
phase comparator in the All assembly.
3. The A3 source is pretuned. The source output is fed to the A4 sampler.
The pretuned DAC in the All phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a
frequency 1 to 6 MHz above the start frequency. This signal (source output)
goes to the A4 R input sampler/mixer assembly.
4. The signal from the source is fed back (1st IF’) to the phase comparator.
The source output signal passes directly through the sampler in the A4
assembly, because the sampler is biased on. The signal (1st IF+) is fed back
unaltered to the phase comparator in the All phase lock assembly. The other
input to the phase comparator is the heterodyned reference signal from the
Al2 assembly. Any frequency difference between these two signals produces
a proportional error voltage.
5. A tuning signal (YO DRIVE) tunes the source and phase lock is achieved.
The error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator to bring the
YIG closer to the reference frequency. The loop process continues until the
source frequency and the reference frequency are the same, and phase lock
is achieved.

12-16 Theory of Operation

6. A synthesized sub sweep is generated. The source tracks the
synthesizer. When lock is achieved at the start frequency, the synthesizer
starts to sweep. This changes the phase lock reference frequency, and causes
the source to track at a difference frequency 40 MHz below the synthesizer.

Pigure 12-4. Low Band Operation of the Source

Theory of Operation 12-17

The full low band is produced in two sub sweeps, to allow addition IF sltering
below 3 MHz. At the transition between subsweeps, the source is pretuned
and then relocks. ‘Ihble 12-2 lists the low band subsweep frequencies at the
fractional-N VCO and the RF output.

‘able 12-Z. Low Band Subsweep Frequencies

12-18 TheoryofOperation
Source High Band Operation
The high band frequency range is 16 MHz to 3.0 GHz or 16 MHz to 6.0 GHz with
Option 006. These frequencies are generated in subsweeps by phase-locking the
A3 source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional-N VCO. The high band
subsweep sequence, ilhrstrated in F’igure 12-5, follows these steps:
1. A signal (HI OUT) is generated by the fractional-N VCQ. The VCO in
the Al4 fractional-N assembly generates a CW or swept signal in the range
of 30 to 60 MHz. This signal is synthesized and phase locked to a 100 kHz
reference signal from the Al2 reference assembly. The signal from the
fractional-N VCO is divided by 1 or 2, and goes to the pulse generator.
2. A comb of harmonics (1st LO) is produced iu the A7 pulse generator.
The divided down signal from the fractional-N VCO drives a step recovery
diode (SRD) in the A7 pulse generator assembly. The SRD multiplies
the fundamental signal from the fractional-N into a comb of harmonic
frequencies The harmonics are used as the 1st LO (local oscillator) signal to
the samplers One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start signal set
from the front panel.
3. The A3 source is pretuued. The source output is fed to the A4 sampler.
The pretune DAC in the All phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a first
approximation frequency (1 to 6 MHz higher than the start frequency). This
signal (RF OUT) goes to the A4 R input sampler/mixer assembly.
4. The synthesizer sigual and the source signal are combined by the
sampler. A difference frequency is generated. In the A4 sampler, the 1st
LO signal from the pulse generator is combined with the source output signal.
The IF (intermediate frequency) produced is a first approximation of 1 MHz.
This signal (1st IF’) is routed back to the A11 phase lock assembly.
5. The difference frequency (1st IF’) from the A4 sampler is compared to a
reference. The 1st IF feedback signal from the A4 is filtered and applied to
a phase comparator circuit in the A11 phase lock assembly. The other input
to the phase comparator is a crystal controlled 1 MHz signal from the Al2
reference assembly. Any frequency difference between these two signals
produces a proportional error voltage.
6. A tuuiug signal (PO DRIVE) tunes the source and phase lock is achieved.
The error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator, in order to
bring it closer to the required frequency. The loop process continues until
the 1st IF feedback signal to the phase comparator is equal to the 1 MHz
reference signal, and phase lock is achieved.

Theory of Operation 12-18

7. A synthesized subsweep is generated by A13/A14. The A3 source tracks
the synthesizer. When the source is phase locked to the synthesizer at the
start frequency, the synthesizer starts to sweep. The phase locked loop forces
the source to track the synthesizer, maintaining a constant 1 MHz 1st IF
signal.
The full high band sweep is generated in a series of subsweeps, by phase
locking the A3 source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional-N VCO.
The 16 to 31 MHz subsweep is produced by a one half harmonic, using
the divide-by-2 circuit on the Al4 assembly. At the transitions between
subsweeps, the source is prettmed and then relocks lkble 12-3 lists the high
band subsweep frequencies from the fractional-N VCO and the source output.

A13/14
FRACTIONAL-N

- -

T O 3GHz

ag6231d

Figure 12-5. High Band Operation of the Source

12-20 Theoryof Operation

lhble 12-3. High Band Subsweep Frequencies
1
F’ractional-N (BlJ3z) Jhrmonic source output (bfEz)
3ot.060 l/2 16to31
3Oto60 1 31to 61
3Oto60 2 61to 121
4Oto60 3 121t.o 178
35.4to 59.2 6 178t.0206
32.8to 59.4 0 206to536
36.7t.o 59.5 15 536to 893
33.0 to 60.6 27 803t.o 1607
31.5 to 58.8 51 1607to3ooo
option 666
37.Ot.o 59.5 83 3ooot.o4060
4o.oto 59.4 101 4060to6ooo

Theoryof Operation 12-21

Source Operation in other Modes/Features
Resides the normal network analyzer mode, the HP 87533 has extra modes and
features to make additional types of measurements The following describes
the key differences in how the analyzer operates to achieve these new
measurements

Frequency Offset
The analyzer can measure frequency-translating devices with the frequency
offset feature.
The receiver operates normally. However, the source is pretuned to a different
frequency by an offset entered by the user. The device under test will translate
this frequency back to the frequency the receiver expects. Otherwise, phase
locking and source operation occur as usual.

HarmonicAnalysis(Option002)
The analyzer can measure the 2nd or 3rd harmonic of the fundamental
source frequency, on a swept or CW basis, with the harmonic analysis feature
(optional).
To make this measurement, the reference frequency (normally 1 MHz) from the
Al2 reference assembly to the All phase lock assembly is divided by 1, 2, or 3.
See F’igure 12-6.
The fractional-N assemblies are also tuned so that the correct harmonic (comb
tooth) of the 1st LO is 0.500 or 0.333 MHz below the source frequency instead
of the usual 1.000 MHz. ‘l’he analyzer pretunes the A3 source normally,
then phase locks the 1st IF to the new reference frequency to sweep the
fundamental source frequency in the usual way. The key difference is that the
1st IF (output from the R sampler) due to the fundamental and used for phase
locking is now 0.500 or 0.333 MHz instead of 1.000 MHz.
Since the chosen VCO harmonic and the source differ by 0.500 or 0.333 MHz,
then another VCO harmonic, 2 or 3 times higher in frequency, will be exactly
1.000 MHz away from the 2nd or 3rd harmonic of the source frequency. The
samplers, then, will also down-convert these harmonics to yield the desired
components in the 1st IF at 1.000 MHz. Narrow bandpass flters in the receiver
eliminate all but the 1.000 MHz signals; these pass through to be processed and
displayed.

12-22 Theoryof Operation

 A13/14
FRACTIONAL-N

1ST L O

1 1ST IF

-=

A12
REFERENCE
Ad
SOURCE 3GHz T O

@-
vcxo
40MHz
3.0 to
6.8GHz
YIG O S C

$ REFERENCE
HARMONIC FREQ ( M H z )
1 1.000
0.500
: 0.333

sg6232d

Figure 12-6. Harmonic Analysis

External Source Mode

In external source mode, the analyzer phase locks its receiver to an external
signal source. This source must be CW (not swept), but it does not need to be
synthesized. The user must enter the source frequency into the analyzer. (The
analyzer’s internal source output is not used.)
To accomplish this, the phase lock loop is reconnected so that the tuning voltage
from the A11 phase lock assembly controls the VCO of theAl4 fractional-N
assembly and not the A3 source. See Figure 12-7. The VCO’s output still drives
the 1st LO of the samplers and down-converts the RF signal supplied by the
external source. The resulting 1st IF is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly,

Theory of Operation 12-23

compared to the 1.000 MHz reference, and used to generate a tuning voltage as
usual. However, the tuning voltage controls the VCO to lock on to the external
source, keeping the 1st IF at exactly 1.000 MHz.
The analyzer normally goes through a pretune-acquire-track sequence to achieve
phase lock. In external source mode, the fractional-N VCO prettmes as a
closed-loop synthesizer referenced to the 100 kHz signal from the Al2 reference
assembly. Then, to acquire or track, a switch causes the VCO to be tuned by the
All phase lock assembly instead. (Refer to the Overall Block Diagram at the
end of Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.“)

1
A13/14
FRACTIONAL-N

30 to 60 MHz

IST IF

- -

sg6235d

Figure 12-7. External Source Mode

12-24 Theory of Operation

Tuned Receiver Mode
In tuned receiver mode, the analyzer is a synthesized, swept, narrow-band
receiver only. The external signal source must be synthesized and
reference-locked to the analyzer.
To achieve this, the analyzer’s source and phase lock circuits are completely
unused. See Figure 12-8. The fractional-N synthesizer is tuned so that one of its
harmonics (1st LO) down-converts the RF input to the samplers (In contrast to
external source mode, the analyzer does not phase lock at all. However, the 1st
Lo is synthesized.)
The analyzer can function as a swept tuned receiver, similar to a spectrum
analyzer, but the samplers create spurious signals at certain frequencies, which
limit the accuracy of such measurements

A13/14
FRACTIONAL-N

1ST L O

A4 (RI
SAMPLER
I -5

I. MIXER

I-! 1ST I F

sg6234d

Figure 12-8. Tuned Receiver Mode

Theory of Operation 12-26

Signal Separation

The Built-In I’kst Set

F’igure 12-9 shows a simplified block diagram of the analyzer’s built-in test set.

A21 and A22 Test Port Cmplers

The analyzer’s test port couplers are used to separate signals incident to,
reflected from, and transmitted from the device under test. Each test port
coupler has a coupling coefficient factor of 16 dD.

A23 LED kont Panel

The LED front panel board indicates whether the source power is incident on
the analyzer’s test port 1 or test port 2. The analyzer’s source power is directed
to test port 1 when making a forward transmission/reflection measurement.
Similarly, source power is incident at test port 2 when making a reverse
transmission/reflection measurement.

A24 Transfer Switch

The A3 source output power is directed to either the analyzer’s test port 1 or
test port 2 via a low loss solid state transfer switch. With this switch, all four
S-parameters can be updated continuously (for example: the data obtained from
a full 2-port calibration). In addition, the transfer switch provides termination
for the inactive test port in order to minimize the crosstalk between the source
and receiver sampler.

A26 ‘l&t Set Interface

The test set interface board provides biasing for active devices under test with
an external dc voltage. This dc voltage is applied directly to the test port center
pm. In addition, the test set interface board provides the drive signal for the
A24 forward/reverse transfer switch.

12-26 Theoryof Operation

 rA21 T E S T P O R T
COUPLER

A24
TRANSFER
SW I TCH

B!As CONNECT
FROM A3 PORT 1

BiAS CONNECT
PORT 2

FRONT PANEL

5962364

Figure 12-9. SimplifM Block Diagram of the Built-in ‘Ilest Set

Theory of Operation 12-27

-

Receiver Theory
The receiver functional group consists of the following assemblies:
A4 sampler/mixer
A5 sampler/mixer
A6 sampler/mixer
A10 digital IF
These assemblies combine with the A9 CPU (described in Digital Control Theory)
to measure and process input signals into digital information for display on the
analyzer. Figure 12-10 is a simplijied block diagram of the receiver functional
group. The A12 reference assembly is also included in the illustration to show
how the 2nd LO signal is derived.

Figure 12-10. Receiver Functional Group, Siiplilled Block Diagram

12-28 Theory of Operation

A4/AS/A6 Sampler/Mixer
The A4, A5, and A6 sampler/mixers all down-convert the RF input signals
to fixed 4 kHz 2nd IF signals with amplitude and phase corresponding to the
RF’ input. The A5 and A6 sampler/mixer assemblies both include an 8 dB gain
preamplifier in front of the sampler. This improves the noise figure performance
of the analyzer’s receiver channels A and B.

The Sampler Circuit in High Band

In high band operation, the sampling rate of the samplers is controlled by
the 1st LO from the A7 pulse generator assembly. The 1st LO is a comb of
harmonics produced by a step recovery diode driven by the fractional-N VCO
fundamental signal. One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start
frequency set at the front panel. The 1st LO is combined in the samplers
with the RF input signal from the source. In the Option 006, samplers are
additionally capable of recognizing RF input signals from 3 to 6 GHz. The mixing
products are flltered, so that the only remaining response is the difference
between the source frequency and the harmonic 1 MHz below it. This fixed
1MHzsignalisthelstIF.RartofthelstIFsignalfromtheRsamplerisfed
back to the All phase lock assembly.

The hnpler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band

In low band or super low band the sampler diodes are biased continuously on,
so that the RF input signal passes through them unchanged. Thus the 1st IF
is identical to the RF output signal from the source (300 kHz to 16 MHz for
lowband; 10 to 300 kHz for super lowband), and sweeps with it. Part of the 1st
IF signal from the R sampler is fed back to the All phase lock assembly.
(Refer to “Source Theory Overview” for information on high band and low band
operation of the source.)

The 2nd LO Signal

The 2nd LO is obtained from the Al2 reference assembly. In high band, the 2nd
LO is llxed at 996 kHz. This is produced by feeding the 39.34 MHz output of a
phase-locked oscillator in the Al2 assembly through a divide-by-40 circuit.
In low band, the 2nd Lo is a variable frequency produced by mixing the output
of the fractional-N VCG with a fixed 39.996 MHz signal in the Al2 assembly.
The 2nd Lo covers the range of 0.014 to 16.004 MHz in two subsweeps that
correspond with the source subsweeps These subsweeps are 0.304 to 3.304 MHz
and 3.304 to 16.004 MHz.

Theory of Operation 12-29

The Mixer Circuit
The 1st IF and the 2nd Lo are combined in the mixer circuit. The resulting
difference frequency (the 2nd IF) is a constant 4 kHz in both bands, as
lhble 12-4 shows

‘able 12-4. Mixer Frequencies

Band 1st IF 2nd L43 2nd IF

Super Low 0.010 to 0.300 MHZ 0.014 to 0.304 MHZ 4.0 HI!4
LOW 0.300tAJ 16.0 MHZ 0.304 to 16.004 MI-h 4.0 HI2
High 1.ooo MHZ 0.996 MHz 4.0 kHz

A10 Digital IF
The three 4 kHz 2nd IF signaIs from the sampler/mixer assemblies are input
to the A10 digital IF assembly. These signals are sampled at a 16 kHz rate. A
fourth input is the analog bus, which can monitor either an external input at
the rear panel AUX IN connector, or one of 31 internal nodes. A multiplexer
sequentially directs each of the signals to the ADC (analog-to-digital converter).
Here they are converted to digital form and sent to the A9 CPU assembly for
processing. Refer to “Digital Control Theory” for more information on signal
processing.

12-30 Theoryof Operation

 13

Replaceable Parts
This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the
HP 8753E network analyzer. Replaceable parts include the following:
n major assemblies
fl cables
n chassis hardware
In general, parts of major assemblies are not listed. Refer to lhble 13-1 at the
back of this chapter to help interpret part descriptions in the replaceable parts
lists that follow.

Replaceable Parts 13-l

Replacing an Assembly
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the
faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants n
5. Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2, “System
VeriGcation and Performance Tests. n

13-2 Replaceable Parts

Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies
Under the rebuilt-exchange assembly program, certain factory-repaired
and tested modules (assemblies) are available on a trade-in basis These
assemblies are offered for lower cost than a new assembly, but meet all factory
specifications required of a new assembly.
The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the
rebuilt-exchange assembly program. Any spare assembly stock desired should be
ordered using the new assembly part number. F’igure 13-1 illustrates the module
exchange procedure. “Major Assemblies, Top” and “Major Assemblies, Bottom”
list all major assemblies, including those that can be replaced on an exchange
basis

Ordering Information
To order a part listed in the replaceable parts lists, quote the Hewlett-Packard
part number, indicate the quantity required, and address the order to the
nearest Hewlett-Packard office.
To order a part that is not listedin the replaceable parts lists, include the
instrument model number, complete instrument serial number, the description
and function of the part, and the number of parts required. Address the order
to the nearest Hewlett-Packard office.

Replaceable Parts 133

 The module exchange program described here is a fast, efficient, economical
method of keeping your Hewlett-Packard instrument r service.

Locate defective module

using troubleshooting
procedures in this
manual.

1 Install t h e r e p l a c e m e n t
Restored-exchange modules are
s h i p p e d mdividually i n b o x e s l i k e
this. In addition to the circuit
Is Q replacement m o d u l e . K e e p t h e defec-
module on hand? tfve m o d u l e f o r r e t u r n module, the box contains:
to HP. E x c h a n g e a s s e m b l y f a i l u r e repor
Return address label

1 NO

Order restored-exchange
B

module from HP. Refer module from HP. Refer

to the replaceable parts to the replaceable ports
section for port numbers. section for part numbers.

Open box carefully-it will be

used to return defective module
to HP. Complete failure report.
Place it and defective module
in box. Be sure to remove
enclosed return address label.

Seal box with tape. Inside

U.S.A.*, stick preprinted return
a d d r e s s l a b e l over l a b e l a l r e a d y
on box, and return box to HP.
O u t s i d e U . S . A . , d o n o t u s e od-
dress label; instead address box
to the nearest HP office.

sg613d

Figure 13-1. Module Exchange Procedure

134 Replaceable Parts

Replaceable Part Listings
The following pages list the replacement part numbers and descriptions for
the HP 8753E Network Analyzer. Illustrations with reference designators
are provided to help identify and locate the part needed. The parts lists are
organized into the following categories:
n Major Assemblies, Top
w Major Assemblies, Bottom
n Cables, Top
n Cables, Bottom
n Cables, Front
n Cables, Rear
n Cables, Source
n Front Panel, Outside
n Front Panel, Inside
n Rear Panel
n Rear Panel, Option lD5
n Hardware, Top
n Hardware, Bottom
n Hardware, kont
n Hardware, Test Set Deck
n Hardware, Disk Drive Support
n Hardware, Memory Deck
n Hardware, Preregulator
n Chassis Parts, Outside
n Chassis Parts, Inside
n Miscellaneous

Replawable Parts 13-5

M@or Assemblies, Top

Ref. option HPPart Qty Description

-i3. NUdM?r
Al NOT SHOWN (see -Front Psnel Assembly, Inside”)
A2 NOT SHOWN (see ‘Front Panel Aeanbly, Inside”)
All 0876s-60231 1 ASSY-SCWRCE 3 OH2
A3 087~6Q2sl 1 ASSY-SOURCB 3 ffirz (RRBUIIX-EXCRANGE)
A3 006 08763-60146 1 ASSY-SCURCE 6 GHz
A3 006 087~69146 1 ASSY-SOURCE 6 GIiz (REBUIIT-RXCBANGE)
The following parts apply to instruments with serial numbem gnster than US37S9xxxx or W,
and to instruments having all three samplers replaced.
A4 087~6oalY7 1 ASSY-SAMPLER R (REBUIIZEXCBANGE: 08753-69007)
A6 087~&woS 1 ASSY-SABWLER A (RBBUIIZ-KKCBANGE 0876%3@008)
A6 087~6oBoS 1 ASY-SAMPLER B (RRBUIWEXCRANGIk 0876MOQOS)
The following parta apply to instruments with serial numbers in the form of US37SOxxxx or Jp3802mmr.
If all three samplera are being replaced, we the part numbers listed above.
A4 087~6ooo4 1 ASSY-SAMPLER R (RRBLJILr-ExCIiANffE 0876M3ooo4)
A6 08753-60169 1 ASSY-SAbfPLER A (REBUIUI-EXCHANGFk 08763-60169)
A6 08763-60160 1 ASSY-SAbXPLER B (RRBUJIT-RXCIiANGEz 0876%60160)
A7 08763-60164 1 RD AWY-PLJISE QENERAlOB
A7 0876%69164 1 BDASSY-PUISE GRNERAlO R (RERuR3-EKCHANGE)
A8* 087~6osM 1 BD ASSY-m RBGIJMlOR
A10 087~6ooo6 1 BD ASSY-DIMIXL IF
All 0876%60162 1 BDASSY-PHASEILXK
Al2 08763-00367 1 BDASSY-RBFERKNCE
AlS 0876s-60013 1 BD ASSY-FRAC N ANAILX
Al4 08763-60068 1 BD ASSY-F’RAC N DIWl!A.L
Al6 087~60008 1 ASaY-PRERRQ ULAlVB
Al6 08763-6Qoo8 1 ASSY-PRERBGULATOB (REBUIIZFXCBAN~B)
Al6 NOT SHOWN (me “Bear Panel Awembly”)
Al7 NOT SHOWN (see 7%866i6 parts, Imiide”)
A18 1 NOT SBOWN (see ‘Wont Panel Assembly, Inside”)
AlQ 0876%30271 1 BDASBY-QRAPBI~ PROOBWOR (under lrheet metal cover)
As0 08720-60190 1 ASSY-DISKDRIVB
A27 1 NOT SBOWN (see “Front fine1 Aaembly, Inaide”)
A26 lD6 NCT SHOWN (see ‘Rear Panel Assembly, Option IDS”)
Bl NIX SHOWN (see “Rear Panel Assembly”)
EtPQ NOT SHOWN (ee “Front Panel Assembly, tide”)
l For fuse part numbela on the AS pbst Regulator, refer to ‘Miscellaneous” in ulis chapter.

134 Replaceable Parts

 Major Assemblies, ‘hp

A10 A8 All A12

Al3

A15\ / Al4

A20 -

A4'

sg654e

Replaceable Parts 13-7

Major Assemblies, Bottom

Bt?f. OptlOll lwA3I-t. Qw Description

big. NlUllbOr
A9 087~6os16 1 cmJREPAlBKlT
A0 os76343os16 1 CPU REPAIR KlT (REBUIfX-EXCBANGE)
CPU FAN 606S8776 1 &-+CPUFANl
AoBTl 14204SS8 1 BAmERY-LITBIUM 3V 12AI-I
A21 6087-7007 1 AmY-TE8TFQBTccuPLER
A21 6@8743007 1 ASBY-TEST PCBT COUPLER (BEBrn-EXCBANGE)
A21 076 5087-7008 1 ASBY-TEsTPcBTcouPLER
A21 076 60874008 1 ASSY-TWT PCBT COUPLER (BFiBUIl2=EXCBANffE)
A!22 6087-7007 1 ASSY-TEST FCRT COUFLEE
A22 60874007 1 AMY-TEST Par COUPLER (BEBlJIUr-EXCHANGE)
A22 076 6087-7008 1 AWY-TEwFQKrcaJPLEu
A22 076 60874008 1 ASSY-TEST PCBT COUFLEFl (BEBtllIMXCHANGE)
Ass 087~60146 1 BDASY-LED FRONTPANEL
As4 50867630 1 AWY-TRAN8FEB8wlTcFl
A24 608m36sQ 1 AMY-TRANSFEB SWllXX @EBUII.SEXCBANGE)
A26 0876%60280 1 BD AESY-m m INTEFtFACE

1 Remove the backing from the heat transfer area before re-assembly.

134 Replaceable Parts

 Major Assemblies, Bottom

CPU

Fan\

, A9BTl

A24,

Ai A23 A21

sg6126e

Replaceable Parts 13-8

 Cables, Tlbp
-r -
Ref. mart QQ Description
De&. Number -
1 1400-0249 1 CABLE TIE (16Wl to CHAWIS)
A16Wl 18W (part of A16) 1 PREI.EQULATOR (A16) to POKl’ RJtGULA’lOiZ (A8J2) and
bfOTHERBOARD (A17JS)
Wl SR 08763-20286 1 SOUECE A88Y (ASW4) to TBANSFER SWI’RX (A24)
w2 8R 08753-20201 1 Fp (It CBANNEL IN) to SAMPLEB-B (A4)
ws 8R 08753-20286 1 TMT FORT 1 COUPLER (A21) to SAI@LEIt-A (AS)
w4 SB 08753-20336 1 TEST PORT 2 COUPLER (A22) to SAMPLEBB (A6)
W6 F 087~60027 1 MMFLER-R (A4) to PUISE GJZNEMlUB (A7)
W6 F 0876%30027 1 SAMPLE%A (A5) to PUME GENERATUE (A7)
w7 F 087~60027 1 SAMPLER-B (A6) to PUISE QENERATOR (A7)
W8 F 087~6oL320 1 PHASE ILICK (AlLIl) to SAMPLEEM (A4)
WO F 8l21MO21 1 FlZAGN D1GlTA.L (A14Jl) to PUUE GENERAlOR (A7)
WlO F 087~6oo20 1 F&W-N DIQITAL (A14J2) to REFERENCE (Awl)
Wll F 08763-60029 1 FZAC-N DIGlTAL (A14JS) to FFtAGN ANAMG (AlSJl)
Wl.2 F 087~6oo2o 1 FBAGN ANAIBG (AlSJ2) to REFERENCE (Al2J2)
WlS F 0876%60026 1 RFZEEENCFi(Al2JS)toRP(EXTEEF)
W24 SR 087~20291 1 60uRcEAs8Y(As)toFp(RcHANNEL0uT)
W26 F 8l20-6026 1 6ouRcE ASSY (A3) to BEFERENCE (Al2J4)
w21 148 SEC6876 1 MOTHEREOAFtD (A17J12) to EEAB PANEL VGA OUT
w20 348 8l24MSSO - 1 MOTHERBOARD (A17Jll) to CPU (AOJS)
* nW Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR Bibon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
F Flexible C!eax Cable
SE Semi-Blgld Coax Cable

13-10 ReplaceableParts
 Cables, lbp

W26

, WI2

/ WI1

. WI0

w4 ’
w3 ’
' w9
w2 ’

w5 ’ ' W8

W6 ’

w7 ’

sg656e

Replaceable Parts 13.11

 Cables, Bottom

pd. lIPPart G De43cription

D-k!. Number -
1 140&0611 1 CABLE CLAMP

A21Wl 1w 8120-6483 1 QRAYWIUSTESFPCET~CCUP~(A~~)~~TE~TSET

INTERFACE (A26TPl)
A22Wl 1w 8l2@648S 1 GRAYWIRE~FTX~T~C~UF’LER(A~~)~~T~BT~ET
INTEWACE (A26TP2)
A24Wl SW 86047~MOM 1 TBAN8FER mvrmH (A24) to TEST SF2 INTElPAcE (A26JS)
Wl SR 08763-20286 1 SOURCE AWY (ASW4) to TRANSFER 8WI’DX (k&i)
w20 s4Ft 8l20-6890 1 CFVPIG (AOJ7) to MCTHEKBC ARD (A17Jll)
WSl SR 08762-20102 1 TlmFmT1CCupLw(A21)toTRANsFEB~(A24)
ws2 8Il 08766-20101 1 TmT POET 2 CouPm (A22) to TRANSFER SwrIcH (A24)
W33 4w 08766-60221 1 LED (A23Jl) to TmT SFX IIwElzFACE (A26J2)
ws7 26R 812~8670 1 DI8K DRIVE (A20) to CPU/PIG (ASJS)
W38 4oIl 8120-6882 - 1 TEST SJZT INTEIBACE (A26Jl) to MCTHKIBCARD (A17J2)
l
nW Wire Bundle (m b the number of wires in the bundle)
aI Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
SR Semi-Rigid Coax Cable

13-12 Replawabls Partr

 Cables, Bottom

W38

,wzo
/,

\ I I
.\A137

w32,

w33'

A22kl ill AilWl

Replaceable Parts 13-13

 Cables, Front

Bof. Type* opt HPart etJr Demription

wig. Number
AlWl SOB 8ECM429 1 FP KEYBOARD (AlJl) to FP INTERFACE (A2~2)
BPGlWl 6B (part. of BPGl) 1 BF’Q to FE’ JNTFXFACE (A2J6)
Wl SE 08762-20286 1 EOUBCE ASSY (ASW4) to !l’BANSF’EB SWllKH (A24)
w2 SE 08753-20201 1 FP (B CHANNEL IN) to SAMPLE&B (A4)
ws SE 08762-20286 1 TEST PORT 1 COUPLEB (A21) to SAMPLBB-A (AS)
w4 SE 08763-20287 1 TEST FORT 2 CXWF’LEB (A22) to SAMPLE&B (A6)
w17 SOB 8l20-84.31 1 FP INTEBFACE (A2Jl) to MUMEBB ABD (A17Jl)
Wl8 SW 08711-6ooS7 1 FTINTEBFACFi(A2J4)toFP(PBOBEPOWEB)
WlO SW 08711-6ooS7 1 F’P INTERFACE (A2JS) to FP (PROBE POWFiB)
W22 6B 8120-8408 1 FP INTBBFACB (A2J7) to JNmBTEB (A27)
W2S SlB 8l2M4OO 1 FP INTEBFACX (A2J6) to DISPLAY (A18)
W24 SE 08763-20220 1 SOuBcxASsY(AS)toFP(BcxANNFLOUT)
W26 SE 087zG20008 1 FF(BCHANNELOUT)toFP(BCHANNFLIN)
* nW Wire Bundle (n b the number of wire8 in the bundle)
nB Bibbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
SE Semi-Bigid Cvax Cable

13-14 Replaceable Parts

 hbles, Front

w22 / I
W23 \
AIWI
RPGIWI
sg658e

ReplaceableParts 13-15
 Cables, Rear

Bof. HPFart G Deucription

-&f. Nnmbor -
BlWl (part of Bl) 1 FAN (Bl) to MOTHERBO ARD (A17J6)
WlS 0876%60026 1 BFTEBENCE (Al2JS) to BP @XT BEF’)
w21 8X20-6876 1 MOTBEBBOARD (A17Jl2) to Rp (VGA OUT)
W27 8l2CM407 1 BF’ INTERFACE (AMJ4) to MOTHERBO ARD (A17J6)
W28 86047-6ooo5 1 RF’ INTERFXCE (AMJlO) to BP (POBT 1 FUSE)
Wm 86047-6ooo6 1 RP JNTERFACE (A16Jll) to RP (POBT 2 FUSB)
W3O 8l2M468 1 EtF INTERFACE (AMJS) to HIQH~lLlTY FBBQ BBF (A26Jl)
WS6 8l2IMS79 1 CFWFIG (AQJl) to MOTHEF@O ABD (A17J7)
WS6 8l2N3S82 -1 CFTJ/PIQ (AQJ2) to MOTHEEBO ABD (A17J8)
* nW Wire Bundle (A in the number of wires in the bundle)
nB Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wirea in the ribbon)
F Flexible Coax Cable

13-l 6 Replaceable Parts

 Cables, Rear

\ ’
w21
W36

\
i w35
w30

sg6113e

ReplaceableParts 13-17
 Cables, Source

Ref. Type* opt lxPP8l-t QQ Description

-ig. Number
AsA2Wl 1OR os76s-6oos4 1 EYC (ASAS) to AIL (A3AZJ.3)
A3A4Wl 4W os76s-6oos6 1 CAm CSC (ASA4) to AU (ASA2J2)
AsWl SR 08753-20107 1 Fxo (AsA3) to SCURCE ASSY (A3)
Asw2 SR 0876%200% 1 CAm CSC (ASA4) to SCURCE ASSY (A3)
ASWS SR 0876.520106 1 SCURCE ASSY (A3) to AlTENUA’ItIR (ASA6)
A3w4 SR 0876%20111 1 ATIENUAl0R (ASA6) to Wl
ASWS 1OR 6002-0701 1 AIL (ASA2Jl) to AlTBNUA’ltIR (ASA6)
s nW Wire Bundle (n ia the number of wirea in the bundle)
nR Rttbon Cable (n is the number of wirea in the ribbon)
SR Semi-R&id Coax Cable

13-18 Replaceable Parts

 Cables, Source

A3A4Wl
A3W4
I A3W3 \

BACK FRONT
sg662e

Replaceable Parts 13-l 9

Front Panel Assembly, Outside

Ref.
1
-ig.
OptlOll EmPart
Number
03763-30163
Qw

1
Description

ovERlAY, ILnvER PRONT PANEL

-k
1 076 03763-30170 1 ovERLAY, LOWE61 PRONT PANEL
2 03763aon24 1 FPREPAlRKlTsTDl
2 076 037~go926 1 F’PREPADZKIT#0761
1610-0033 1 GRouND Porn
206o-ooo6 1 NtJTHExlAa2
2190-0067 1 wA3HERLK.266ID
0376340016 1 LINEBUTION
03763-30211 1 OVERLAY, UPPER FRONT PANEL

1 Comes with gasket, upper and lower overlays.

13-20 Rsplawable Parts

Front Panel Assembly, Outside

sg663e

ReplaceablsParts 13-21
 Front Panel Assembly, Inside
-
Ref. HP&l-t cm
mk!. NWllblEr -
1 o872lMool2 1 DISPLAY HOLD DOWN
2 2oao-0686 1 DISPLAY LAMP
A18 08763-60326 1 I4mREPLAcmfENTAssY
3 lOOO-0006 1 DISPLAY GLASS
4 0872luNxlo4 4 GROUNDlNG C&IF’S
lDT 08768-00136 1 FILLEBPLATEl
6 08763-20300 1 FRCNT PANEL

7 lo&w1864 1 RR3 (INCLUDES CABLE AND HARDWARE)

5 JM4oe4ooo3 1 RPG KNOB
0 0872o-4oo10 1 FLUBBEB KFXPAD
LO 0616-0430 8 SCBBW SM 3.0 6CWPNTX
11 0515-0306 4 SCREW SMM 3.0 14cWPNTx
I2 140&1430 2 CABLE CLG
13 0616-0372 3 SCREW SrdM 3.0 8cwPNTx
14 087l2-60036 2 CABLE ASSY, PBOBE POWEFt
14 206OG144 2 NUT, HEX 3/E32
16 08763-00112 1 PLATE, PBOBE POWEB
16 0624-0828 2 SCREW, TAFTING
hl 08720-60127 1 BD ASSY-F’RONT PANEL
!I2 08753-60311 1 BD ABSY-FXONT PANEL INTEBF’ACE
LlWl 2tm 812~8430 1 All’OA2
427 onw3068 1 ASSY-WVERlER
w17 Km 8-1 1 A2TOA17
W22 5B 8l2&8408 1 CABLE-m lNTF (AzJ7) to IrwEmER (A27)
W2S 3lB 812&8409 1
- CABLE-FT lNTF (AZJS) to DISPLAY (Al8)

1 Not shown. F&places A18 and display glass for Option 1DT. Order new grounding clips when replacing
filler plate.
! Order with A2 and LCD hold down.

13-22 Replaceable Parts

 Front Panel Assembly, Inside

(4 P l a c e s )

(4 P l a c e s ) (2 P l a c e s ) WI7 sg6122e

Replaceable Partr 13-23

 Rear Panel Assembly
-
Ref. EPFart QQ Ikx3cripison
Ddg. Number -
1 34R 8l2&6407 1 BP INTEBFACE (A16J4) TO MB (A17J6) (W27)
2 86047~0ooo5 2 FUSEIFARNESGASSEMBIX
3 (AM) 0872CM30138 1 BD ASSY-BEAB PANEL INTEBFACE (A16)
4 08763-60026 1 AWY-EXTERNAL IimJmENcE CABLE (W13)
6 08416-60036 1 ASSY-FAN
6 1261-2942 4 FASIENEBCONNBPLOCK
7 2loo-oo84 2 WASHER LK .l&MlDlO
7 2 NUT STDF .327L 632
s 1251-7812 4 F~CONNBPLOCK
0 0516-0370 4 SCREW SbfM35Xl6 CWFWTX
0 306@1192 4 FLATWASHER
10 0516-0372 10 scREwsMM3.ox8 CWFNTX
11 08-1 1 REABPANELSHEETMFXAL
l2 3160-0281 1 FAN GUABD
18 6960-0410 1 HOLE PLUG
14 1 EIOLF, PLUG
16 21oo-o102 8 WASHER LK .472ID
16 206o-oo36 8 NUT BEX 15/32-32
16 o4oo-0271 1 ERObfMlW SN.6-616ID
17 2110-0047 2 FUSE
17 140&0112 2 FUSE CAP
18 0o@oo27 2 HOLE PLUGS
LO lD6 - [we “Rear Panel Assembly, Option IDS”)

13-24 ReplaceableParts
 Rear Panel Assembly

(8 P l a c e s )
15 13
9 0

es)

PART OF FAN
sg665e

ReplaceableParts 13-25
Rear Panel Assembly, Option lD6

Ref. OptlOll HPRut Description

wig. Number
1 lD6 126&1860 1 ADAFTER-CQAX
2 ID6 0516-0374 1 ScBFm-MAcHINEM3.ox1ocW-PN-TX
3 IDS 3OW1646 1 WASHEEF’LAT.606IDNY
4 lD6 2l@O-OO6S 1 WA8HERMCK.606ID
6 lD6 206&0064 1 NUT-SPEc~1/228
6 lD6 0516-0430 1 SCBEW-MACHINEM~.OX~CW-PN-TX
7 lD6 08763-00078 1 BRACKET-OSCBD
8 6otw0027 2 HOIXPLUGS
A26 ID6 08763-60168 1 BDASSY-EIGHtYFABILlTYF’BJCQREiF
W30 lD6 81206468 1 EPINTEBFACE(AlBJS)to~GE~~FBEQREF(A26Jl)

13.26 ReplaceableParts
Rear Panel Assembly, Option lD5

sg666e

Replawable Parts 13-27

Hardware, lbp

Ref. OptlOll HFPart cm Descriptiox~

D&g. Nnmber
1 061C27OQ 2 SCBEW-~M3.OxlOCW-FLTX
2 08753-40014 1 STABlLrzER-PCBOARD
3 08763-20062 1 STABlLlzER CAP
4 0516-2035 1 SCBEW-bfACHNEM3.Ox16PGF‘LTX
5 0516-0468 2 SCBEW-MACBJNE?d3.5x8CW-PN-TX
6 08753-00107 1 AIRFIDWCOVER
7 05X-0374 2 3CBEW-MACHINEIK3.ox1oCW-PN-TX
8 0616-0377 2 SCREW-MACHINEM3.6xlOCW-PN-TX
0 0516-0374 2 SCREW-MACBINEM~.OXI~CW-PN-TX
10 08753-00129 1 GSF' COVER
11 08753-00113 1 BBACKFXdOUFtCE(SCUBCESl'BAP)
12 0515-0374 6 SCREW-- bs3.ox1oCW-m-TX
13 06X-0374 16 SCIGW-b%MBlNE Bi3.OxlOCW-PN-TX
14 08763mO40 1 CLlPPlJWER GROUND
15 0516-1400 3 3CBEWXACHINEM3.5x8pOF‘LTX

13-28 Replaceable Parts

 Hardware, lbp

(2 P l a c e s )

(2 P l a c e s )

12 Places)

\1

(4 P l a c e s )

(6 P l a c e s ) \ /

(15 P l a c e s )

sg6111e

Replaceable Parts 13-29

Hardware, Bottom

lIPRut etJr Dwcription

Number
0516-0468 4 3CREw-IUCHINEM3.6x8CW-PN-Tx
0616-0430 8 SCRFM-MACHINE M3.0~6 CW-F'N-TX
05150667 2 3CRJSW-MACHINEIK~.OXZ~CW-PN-TX
0516-0430 5 SCREW-MACHINEM~.OX~CW-PN-TX
0515-1400 3 SCREW-MACHINE~ M3.6x8PcwLTx
0516-0375 8 3CREW-MACHINEM3.Ox16CW-PN-TX
05X-0468 4 8CREW-MACHINEM3.Oxl6CW-PN-TX

1330 Replawable Parts

 (L P l a c e s ) (3 Places)

6
(2 PLacesI 5
x
(3 Places)
(3 P l a c e s )

sgbb0e

Replaceable Parts 13-3 1

Hardware, Front

Ref. option HP- Qw Desdptioll

Ddg. Nnmber
1 06180665 1 SMM 3.0x14 CWFNTX
2 03763-00137 1 BRACKEl’-CABLERJPPCRl
3 1260-1251 2 ADAFTERFEMALE-SMA
4 0616-1946 1 SCRJ!X’-MAcEIINEM3.Ox6F’GFLTx

1332 Replaceable Parts

 Hardware, Front

I2 P l a c e s )
sg669e

Replaceable Parts 1333

Hardware, Test Set Deck

OptlOll HPPart G Description

Nnmber -
08753-20206 8 SHOULDER SCREW
08753-40013 8 GUIDE WASHER
08763-20293 8 FXESURESFRING
08763-00127 1 CHAsslEmsET
0516-1046 1 S C R E W - ~ M3.Ox 6 FGFTrTX
0516-0376 2 SCREW-MACHlNE I&3.0x 16 CW-F'N-TX
0616-0430 1 SCREW-- M3.0~ 6 CW-FN-TX
0616-0667 2 SCREW-MACHINE &43.0x26 CW-PN-TX
0616-0430 5
- SCXEW-MACHINE M3.Ox 6 CW-FN-TX

13-34 Replaceable Parts

 Hardware, ‘l&t Set Deck

(8 P l a c e s )
(5 P l a c e s ) I A \

(2 P l a c e s )

sg670e

Replaceable Partr 13-35

Hardware, Disk Drive Support

Bof. OptiOll EPFart etJr Demription

D&it. Nnmbor
1 0616-1048 4 SCBEW-M 2.6X4 sCXXJST BEAD, BBX.
2 08720-00021 1 DISXDFtIVEiBRACXFd
2 08763-00162 1 DISKDlUVEBRACICd
3 0616-0274 4 SCREWS -- M 3.0x10 CWPNTX

1 Your analyzer may use either pin 08720-00021 or p/n 08753-00152. Analyzers manufactured
prior to February 1999 use p/n 0872040021. kuxlyzers manufactured after February 1900, or
that have been repaired or upgraded with Service Kit p/n 08720-40190, use p/n 08753-40152.
Contact Hewlett-Packard if you need help identifying replacement parts for your analyzer.

13-36 Replaceable Parts

 Hardware, Disk Drive Support

(4 P l a c e s ) Q

G--,, (4 P l a c e s )

Replaceable Parts 13-37

Hardware, Memory Deck

llef. OptlOll lIPF8l-t Qm De8criptlom

Dd3. Number
1 0515-0468 4 3cBEw-MACHINE M2.6xSCW-PIGTX
2 0616-0433 2 GCREW-MACHINE WLOX 6 cw-PN-TX
8 0616-0676 1 Ecmzw-m bB.ox14cw-PN-TX
4 08763-00128 1 DECJGMEtdORY

‘0
Places)

1338 Replaceable Parts

Replaceable Partr 1339
Hardware, Preregulator

Ref. Option lwF&rt QQ Description

D-&f. Number
1 2110-0730 1 FUSE 3A 260V NON-TIblF, DELAY (CSAAJL)
1 21104666 1 FUSE 3.16A 260V NON-TIME DELAY (IEC)
2 08i’63-00066 1 BRACKFFF-PBEBEGULATOR
3 0515-1400 2 SCREW-MACHINEM&6x8 CW-FLTX
Al6 0876s-6ooo8 1 PBEBEGULAlXIR-ASSY
Al6 037~6ooo3 1 PlumEGuLAToR-AWY (imBLJm-EXCHANQE)

1340 ReplaceableParts
 Hardware, Preregulator

Al5
IL-

sg673e

ReplaceableParts 1341
Chassis parts, Outside

Ref. Option EPmrt etJr Description

D-k!. Numbez
1 6041-0176 1 TIUMSTRIP
2 08720-00078 1 COvEI-mP
3 6041-0188 4 BEABsrAmxmF
4 0515-1402 4 SCBEWS?dM3.68PCPNTX
6 6041-0187 2 BBABCAP-SIDESTBAP
6 06181384 4 SCREW SMM 5.0 10 PCFIZ'X
7 0872O-OOOS1 2 SIDEGTRAP
8 0872~OOOSO 2 COVEIMIDE
0 6041-0186 2 FBONTCAP-SIDESTBAP
10 08720-00070 2 COVEE-B(yIToM
11 1460-1345 2 FaoTELEvAmR
12 6041-0167 4 FQOT
13 087~80066 1 LABELzCAUTIONWABNINQ
14 OS76HO174 1 LABELzUXA!lTONDIAGBA?d
16 0876S-40016 1 LINEBUTlDN
16 6180-8600 1 MYLARlJwuLAmR

1342 ReplaceableParts
 Chassis parts, Outside

(4 Places) (4 Places) (Underside)

14
0 @ P

5
/”
(2 Places)

6
2
(4 Places)

A
(2 Places)

--CT
A

(2 Plac ES)

-@
Places)

(4 Places)
sQ57Le

Replaceable Parts 1343

Chassis Parts, Inside
-
OptiOll HPPart. etJr Demxiption
Number
6022-llQ0 1 FRONTPANELFRAME
6021-6808 1 REARFRAME
03753-60614 1 AssY-cARDcAQ~oTHER
0616-2036 16 scREwaMM4.ox7PcFIxx
0616-04SO 1 BCREWMS.Ox6CWPNTX*
08720-ooow 1 lNslJLAmR smli*
1460-1673 1 SPRINGEXl'ENSION.13SOD
0872o-ooo77 1 SWllVHEOD*
0515-1400 1 3MMS.6x8PCFIXX
0876%60270 -1 BDM-MOTHERBOARD
1. Part of CABDCAGJVMOTEDZRasaembly (item S).
1

1344 ReplaceableParts
Chassis Parts, Inside

(16 Places)
sg675e

ReplaceableParts 1345
Miscellaneous

Demxiption

service ‘Ibols
HP8753TOOLKrrindudesthefdlow2ng: 087~6002S
RFCARLEINPUTR OS76%2002S
ExTENDERBoARDAwEMBLY-BECEIVEB aS76S-60010
ExTENDERBoARDAwEMBIx-SOURCE oS76S-6oo20
EXTENDERRQARDASSEMBIX-CARDCAGE 087~60166
ADAPTER3dALEsMBlDMALEsb5 l26o-0660
ADAPTER-bfALETYPENTOFEMALF,SMA l2wl260
CABLE ASSEMBIX 6061-1022
BAQ-ANTBLUTC 18x16 8222-1132
Documentation
HPS76SEEKAMPLEPROGRAMDISKtl oS76S-1oL32S
HPS76SEEKAMPLEPROGRAMDlSK#2 oS76%loo2o
WS76SESKRVICECXJlDE oS76iwoS74
HPS76SEOPTIONO11SERVICEMJIDE oS76S-oo404
HPS76SEMANUALSETindvdeeulsfdlosoing: OS76MOS66
EPS76SEIWIBPROGRA?dMINQANDrnMMAND REFERKNCEGUIDE 087~SoSed
HPS76SEHPRASICPROGRAMMINC3RXAMPLMtXlIDE oS76mo413
HpS763EUsEB'S~~E(~ndudes~~~erena$~~~~ 087~SOS67
HPS76SEINSTALhWO N/QUICKSlARTWJIDE oS76HoS6o
HPS76SESY6I‘EM VERlFICATIONANDPERFORMANCRTEGIs oS76moSe4
BpS753EO~ONO11~~8ETi~~tkef~~~ oS76S-90370
EPS76SEEF-lBPlW3 RAMMINQANDmMMAND REFERRNCRCXJIDE 0876%eoS66
HPS76SEEPRASICPROGRAMMIN~EXAWLE5WIDE 08753-90418
IIpS763EOpTIONO11U~SQuIDE(Cndudas~~~~llBT6s~rs) 087~SOS71
HPS76SEOPTIONOlllN~ ON/QUICKS'HRTMJIDE oS76SaS72
BpS753EOpTIONO11~~vEBIFlcATONANDpEBFoBMANcETFsTB OS76WOSO6
upgrwk Kite
HARMONR3MEA8uBEMENTUPGRADEKlT s76SEUoPToo2
6OHzUPGRADEKlTFoRHPS76SE 8753RU0PT006
6GHzUPGRADEKlTFVRHPS76SEOPTIONOll 876SELJOPT611
TlMEDOMAlNUPGRADEKlT 876SEUOPTOlO
FlRMB?AREUPGRADEKlT s76SEUoPTooo
l3IQH-sTABlLlTY FBEQuENcY REPERENcERETRoFlTKlT 876SRUOFTlD6

1346 Replaceable Parts

 Description

Protective Cape for Conneetor~

FXMALEIiHBCONNFXXUR
PEMALETBTSETI/O l262-46W
FEbfALEPARALLELPORT l262-46OO
RHS2CONNEC'NIR 1262-4607
7-mmTESTPORlB 1401-0240
PEMALETYPBNTESTPORTS(OPTIONS011AND076)
F~esnsedontheA8PbstRegdator
FUSEO.6A l26VNON-TJbfEDELAYO.26xO.27 211O-OLM6
FUSEO.76A l26VNON-TIMEDELAYO.26xO.27 2110-0424
FUSE lA l26VNON-TIMRDELAYO.26xO.27 211@0047
FUSE 2A l26VNON-TIME DRLAYO.26xO.27 2110-0426
FUSE4A E?SVNON-TMEDELAYO.26xO.27
HP-IBcablea
HF-lB CABLE, lM (3.3 Fr) BPlOS33A
IIp-ISCABLE,2BI(6.6FT) HPlOS2SB
Hf-IB CABLE,4M(13.2 FlyI WlW33C
HP-E? CABLE, 0.6M(l.6FI9
ESDsllpplies
ADJUSTABLE ANTWSTICWRISFBTRAP 0300-1367
6FTGROUNDlNGCORDfawrktsh-ap OSOO-OOSO
2x4Fl'ANTMiWICTABLEMATWlTH16FTGROUNDWlRE o200-0707
ANTlsTATIc HEEL STRAP for we cm am4iuotivf3jioors

HPS76SEKEYBOARDOVERLAYfurtx&rnuZ k4?gmwd
RAcKM0uNTKlTwlTH0uTIiANDLEs
RACKMOUNTKlTWlTHlLUUDLES
FRoNTHANDLE
FUX'PYDISKS,3.6INCHDOUBIJMIDEZD(boxof10)

Replaceable Parts 1347

 able 13-1.
Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Options
REFEBENCE DESIGNATIONS M ......................................... ..mete m
A ....................................... ..as#embl y M ................................. metricha&vare
B ..................................... ..fan;moto r ..................................... megahertz
J ....... electrical connector (stationary portion); jack mm ................................... ..millimete m
.......................... rotary puke generator MON ..................................... ..monito r
W ..................... cable; transmkion path; wire NOM ...................................... nominal
NY ......................................... ..nylon
ABBREVIATIONS OD ................................ outside diameter
A ........................................ ..ampere opt ....................................... ..optaon
......................... automatic level control ...................................... wcillator
ASSY .................................... ..assemb ly PN ...................................... ..panhead
AUX .................................... ..a uxilhuy PC .............................. patchlock(acrews)
BD ........................................... board PC .................................. printedciEuit
COAX ...................................... coaxial PIff ...................... peripheral interface group
CPU ......................... central processing unit PN ................................ panhead(Bcrewa)
CW .......................... conical washer (screws) ...................................... reference
D ......................................... diameter REPL .................................. replacement
.......................... electro6t8tic diecharge RP ...................................... rear panel
....................................... external SH ....................... ..mAce t head cap (mcmws)
EYO .................................. YIQwcillatm ............................ lmxn?cear(-#)
FL ................................ ilathead (screws) ic ...................................... ..quant~ty
Fp ..................................... front panel V ............................................. volt
FBAGN ............................... .fractional N .................................. wire formed
FREQ ................................... frequency WI0 ...................................... ..withou t
QHZ ...................................... glgaheriz YIQ ............................. yttrium-iron garnet
.................................... hexagonal OPI’IONS
HP ................................ HewlettZaclcard
HP-IB ................ Hewlett-Packard interface bun DO!?, ......................... harmonica measurement
Hx .............................. hexrecess(mcrews) 006.. .......................... ..6QHzperformanc e
ID .................................. inside diameter 010 .................................... time domain
IF ........................... intermediate frequency 011 ..................................... w/o test set
I/o .................................... input/output 076 ................................ ..76ohmteat= t
............................ llghbemitting diode ID6 ........................... 10 Mfizpreci8ion ref

1348 ReplaceableParts
 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair
Procedures
This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major
assemblies of the HP 8753E network analyzer. A table showing the
corresponding post-repair procedures for each replaced assembly is located at
the end of this chapter.

Assembly Replasemeat and Post-Repair Procedures 14-l

Replacing an Assembly
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E
Network Analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the
faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and
Correction Constants n
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, “System
Verification and Performance Tests m
Warning These servicing instructions are for use by qualmed
personnel only. lb avoid electrical shock, do not perform
any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.

Warning The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to

expose dangerous voltages. D~SCOMCC~ the instrument from
all voltage sources while it is being opened.

Warning The power cord is co~ected to internal capacitors that may

remain live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from
its power supply.

Caution Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible

to damage from ESD (electrostatic discharge). Perform the
following procedures only at a static-safe workstation and wear
a grounding strap.

14-2 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Procedures described in this chapter
The following pages describe assembly replacement procedures for the
HP 8753E assemblies listed below:
w LineFuse
n Covers
w Front Panel Assembly
w Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies (Al, A2)
n Display, Display Lamp, and Inverter Assemblies (Al& A27)
n Rear Panel Assembly
w Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (Al6 )
N A3 Source Assembly
n A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator
n AS, AlO, All, A12, A13, Al4 Card Cage Boards
n A9 CPU/PIG Board
n A9BTl Battery
w Al5 Preregulator
n Al7 Motherboard Assembly
n A19 Graphics Processor
n A20 Disk Drive
w A21, A22 Test Port Couplers
n A23 LED Board
w A24 Transfer Switch
n A25 Test Set Interface
n A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option lD5)
n BlFhn

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-3

Line Fuse

Tools Required
n small slot screwdriver

Removal

Warning For continued protection against fire hazard, replace fuse

only with same type and rating (3 A 250 VAC). The use of
other fuses or materials is prohibited.

1. Disconnect the power cord.

2. Use a small slot screwdriver to pry open the fuse holder.
3. Replace the failed fuse with a 3 AF 250 V F fuse. See “Hardware,
Preregulator” in Chapter 13 to find the part number.

Replacement
1. Simply replace the fuse holder.

144 Assembly Replaoement and Post-Repair Procedures

 Line Fuse

FUSE IN USE

‘INSERT SCREWDRIVER,
PRY OPEN

qg652d

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-6

Covers

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n T-20 TORX screwdriver
n T-25 TORX screwdriver

Removing the top cover

1. Remove both upper rear feet (item 1) by loosening the attaching screws
(item 2).
2. Loosen the top cover screw (item 3).
3. Slide cover off.

Removing the side covers

1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the lower rear foot (item 4) that corresponds to the side cover you
want to remove by loosening the attaching screw (item 5).
3. Remove the handle assembly (item 6) by loosening the attaching screws
(item 7).
4. Slide cover off.

Removing the bottom cover

1. Remove both lower rear feet (item 4) by loosening the attaching screws
(item 5).
2. Loosen the bottom cover screw (item 8).
3. Slide cover off.

14-6 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 Covers

sg677e

Assambly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-7

Front Panel Assembly

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n small slot screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
n 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the front bottom feet (item 1).
3. Remove all of the RF cables that are attached to the front panel (item 2).
4. Remove the line button (item 6).
5. Remove the trim strip (item 3) from the top edge of the front frame by
prying under the strip with a small slot screwdriver.
6. Remove the six screws (item 4) from the top and bottom edges of the frame.
7. Slide the front panel over the test port connectors
8. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 5). The front panel is now free from the
.
mstrument.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Note When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the

connections be torqued to 10 in-lb.

14-8 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 Front Pctnel Assembly

Asssmbly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-9

Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies
(Al, A21

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n small slot screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
H 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)

Removal
1. Remove the front panel assembly from the analyzer (refer to “Front Panel
Assembly” in this chapter).
2. DiSCOMeCt all cables from the front panel interface board (items 1, 2, 3, 4, 6,
and 7).
n Disconnect item 4 by pulling up on the comers of the connector base.
This will release the cable for easy removal. Damage may occxr to the
w-n-r (f this step is not followed.
H Disconnect item 7 by sliding the ribbon cable away from its cable clamp.
3. Remove the four screws (item 5), attaching the interface board (A2).
4. Remove the nine screws from the Al front panel board to access and remove
the rubber keypad.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Caution Damage may result if the following step is not followed.

2. To reconnect item 7, ensure that the ribbon cable is placed squarely into both
of its cable clamps

14-l 0 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies

sg680e

14-l 1
Assambly Replasement and Post-Repair Procedures
Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies
(AH, A27)

Tools Required
n T-8 TORX screwdriver
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n small slot screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
n 5116~inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)

Removal
1. Remove the front panel assembly (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” in this
chapter).
2. Disconnect the cables (items 2, 3 and 4) from the Al assembly.
3. Remove two screws (item 8) from the mounting plate (7) to remove the
inverter (A27).
4. Remove the three screws (item 1) that attach the mounting plate and display
to the front panel.
5. Remove the mounting plate and the display (A18) from the front panel.

Note The bottom half of the following ffgure depicts the rear view of
the Al8 assembly with the mounting plate removed. Use the
location of the display lamp cable (item 4) to aid in orientation.

6. Remove the three screws (item 5) from the outside of the display.
7. Pull the lamp (item 6) out with a curving side motion, as shown.

14-12 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
2. Be sure to route ribbon cable 2 through the cable clamp on the A2 assembly
and the LCD mounting plate (item 7).

Caution Be sure that cables are plugged in square and correct. Failure to
do so will result in serious component damage.

Caution Do not exceed 3 in-lb when replacing the self-tapping screws

(item 8).

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-13

Display Iamp and hverter Assemblies

(3 Places)

shg6113e

14-14 mmbly Replacement and Post-RepairProcedures

Rear Panel Assembly

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top (item 1) and bottom covers
(refer to “Covers” in this chapter).
2. Remove the four rear standoffs (item 2).
3. If the anaiyzer has option lD5, remove the BNC jumper from the high
stability frequency reference (item 3).
4. Remove the four screws (item 5) that attach the interface bracket to the
rear panel.
5. Remove the six screws (item 6) and (item 7), that attach the preregulator to
the rear panel.
6. Remove the six screws (item 8) from the rear frame: two from the top edge
and four from the bottom edge.
7. Remove the screw from the pc (item 9) board stabiiizer and remove the
stabilizer.
8. Lift the reference board (A12) from its motherboard connector and
disconnect the flexible RF cable from its connector on Al2 (item 10)
9. Identify the wiring harness leading to the VGA connector (item 4). Follow
this harness back to its connection on the motherboard. The air flow cover,
attached by two screws, wiII have to be removed to get to this connection.
Disconnect the VGA wire harness at this point.

14-l 6 Assembly Replawment and Post-Repair Procedures

 Bear Panel Assembly
10. Pull the rear panel away from the frame. Disconnect the ribbon cable
(item 11) from the motherboard connector, pressing down and out on
the connector locks. Disconnect the wiring harness (item 12) from the
motherboard.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

(3 P l a c e s )

I4 P l a c e s )

(4 P l a c e s )

I (2 P l a c e s )

\
@I
12 on Top)
I4 o n B o t t o m )
sg682e

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-17

 Rear Panel Assembly

14-18 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16)

Tools Required
n 9/16 hex nut driver
n 3/16 hex nut driver
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top and bottom covers (refer to
“Covers” in this chapter).
2. If the analyzer has option lD5, remove the high-stabiiity frequency reference
jumper (item 1).
3. Remove the hardware that attaches the seven BNC connectors to the rear
panel (item 2).
4. Remove the hardware that attaches the interface connector to the rear panel
(item 3).
5. Remove the rear panel from the analyzer (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” in
this chapter).
6. If the analyzer has option lD5, disconnect the cable (item 4) from the rear
panel interface board.
7. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 5) from the rear panel interface board.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

14-20 Assambly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly

(Opt ID5 only)

(7

(2

only)

sg604e

Asssmbly Replasement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-21

A3 Source Assembly

‘Ibols Required
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” in
this chapter).
2. Remove the source bracket (item 1) by removing four screws (It might be
necessary to disconnect a flexible cable from the B sampler.)
3. Disconnect the flexible cable W26.
4. Disconnect the semirigid cable Wl.
5. Lift the two retention clips (item 2) at the front and rear of the source
assembly to an upright position.
6. Move Wl to the side while lifting the source high enough to provide wrench
clearance for W24. ‘lb lift the A3 source assembly, use the source bracket
handle (item 3).
7. Disconnect the semirigid cable W24.
8. Remove the source assembly from the instrument.

14-22 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 A3 Source Assembly

W26

. A3
w1 -

,
W2L

AwnMy Replacclment sad Post-Repair Procedures

14-23
A3 Source Assembly

Replacement
1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstallation.
2. Slide the edges of the sheet metal partition (item 4) into the guides at the
sides of the source compartment. Press down on the module to ensure that it
is well seated in the motherboard connector.
3. Push down the retention clips Reconnect the two semirigid cables (Wl and
W24) and one flexible cable (W26) to the source assembly.

Note When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the

connections be torqued to 10 in-lb.

4. Reinstall the source bracket.

5. Reconnect the flexible cable to the B sampler.

14-24 Assembty Replacement and PostRepair Procedures

A4, AS, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator

!lbols Required
n Needle-nose pliers
w T-10 TORX screwdriver
n 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” in
this chapter).
2. To remove the B sampler (A6), you must remove the source bracket (item 1).
3. Disconnect all cables from the top of the sampler (A4/A5/A6) or pulse
generator (A7).
4. Remove the screws from the top of each sampler assembly. Extract the
assembly from the slot.

Note ‘lb remove the A (A5) or R (A4) sampler, lhst remove the cable
on the B (A6) sampler.

Note If you are removing the pulse generator (A7), the grounding
clip, which rests on top of the assembly, will become loose once
the four screws are removed. Be sure to replace the grounding
clip when reinsMhng the pulse generator assembly.

14-26 Assembly Replacement and Past-Repair Procedures

 A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator

All

/*I4

1
\

:I
;1
1 W8
(AIIJI t o AL)
w5 ’
(A4 t o A7)
1 w9
(AIIJI t o A7)
W6 ’
IA5 t o A7)

w7’
(A6 to A7) \
\

A7

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-27

A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator

Replacement
1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstallation.
2. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Note n When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that

the connections be torqued to 10 in-lb.
n Be sure to route W8 and W9 as shown. No excess wire should
be hanging in the All and Al4 board slots. Routing the wires
in this manner will reduce noise and crosstalk.

14-26 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

A8, AlO, A11,A12, A13, Al4 Card Cage Boards

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. DiscOMect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” in
this chapter).
2. Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer and remove the stabilizer.
3. Lift the two extractors located at each end of the board. Lift the board from
the card cage slot, just enough to disconnect any flexible cables that may be
connected to it.
4. Remove the board from the card cage slot.

Replacement
1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstallation.
2. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Note De sure to route W8 and W9 as shown. No excess wire should

be hanging in the All and Al4 board slots Routing the wires in
this manner will reduce noise and crosstalk in the instrument.

14-30 Assembly Replawmeat and Past-Repair Procedures

 AS, AlO, All, A12, A13, Al4 Caxd Cage Boards

W26 F r o m Al2 A15Wl A10 A8 All A12 Al3

WI3
(AlZJ3 T O
REAR PANEL
E X T REFi
/
Al4

W2b
, (AIZJL T O A31

WI2
, (A13J2 T O A12J-B

WI1
, tA14J3 T O A13Jl)

’ WI0
(A14J2 T O A12Jl)

----..
%4J, T O A71

1 W8
fAllJ1 T O AL)

sg609e

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-31

A9 CPU Board

Ibols Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
w T-15 TORX screwdriver
w ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the top and bottom covers (refer to “Covers” in this chapter).
3. Remove the rear panel assembly, following steps 4 through 6 of “Rear Panel
Assembly. n
4. Turn the analyzer upside down.
5. Pull the rear panel away from the frame as shown in the following 6gure.
6. Disconnect the four ribbon cables (W20, W35, W36, and W37) from the CPU
board (AS).
7. Remove the three screws (item 2) that secure the CPU board (A9) to
the deck. Slide the board towards the front of the instrument so that it
disconnects from the three standoffs (item 3).
8. Lift the board off of the standoffs

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
2. Leave the bottom cover off in order to perform the post repair procedures
located at the end of this chapter.

14-32 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Prosedures

 A9 CPU Board

w37
w20 \

sg6112e

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-33

A9 CPU Board

I,” VII - c -

-A9

sg690e

14-34 Assembly Replasemeat and Post-Repair Procedures

A9BTl Battery

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
n soldering iron with associated soldering tools

Removal
1. Remove the A9 CPU/PIG board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” in this chapter).
2. Unsolder and remove AOBTl from the A9 CPU/PIG board.
warning Battery A9BTl contains lithium. Do not incinerate or
puncture this battery. Dispose of the discharged battery in
a safe manner.

DO NOT THROW BAlTERIES AWAY BUT

COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE.

Replacement
1. Make sure the new battery is inserted into the A9 board with the correct
polarity.

Warning Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended.

2. Solder the battery into place.

3. Replace the A9 CPU/PIG board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” in this chapter).

14-36 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 A9BTl Battery

,A9

,A9BTl

IIII d #I

sg691e

Asssmbly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-37

A15 Preregulator

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” in this chapter).
2. Remove the two remaining screws from the top of the rear frame.
3. Disconnect the wire bundle (A15Wl) from A&J2 and A17J3.
4. Remove the preregulator (A15) from the frame.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Note n When reinsMing the preregulator (A15), make sure the three
grommets (item 1) on A15Wl are seated in the two slots (item
2) on the back side of the preregulator and the slot (item 3) in
the card cage wall.
n After reinsMing the preregulator (A15), be sure to set the
line voltage selector to the appropriate setting, 115 V or
230 V.

14-36 Asssmbly Replacameat and Past-Repair Procedures

 Al5 Preregulator

A8J2

I \
Al5 b2
(3 Places)
A17J3
(2 P l a c e d
sg692e

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 1448

Al7 Motherboard Assembly

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n T-20 TORX screwdriver
n smaII slot screwdriver
n 2.5-mm hex-key driver
n 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
lb remove the Al7 motherboard assembly only, perform the following steps to
remove all assemblies and cables that connect to the motherboard.
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top, bottom, and side covers
(refer to “Covers” in this chapter).
2. Remove the front panel assembly (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” in this
chapter).
3. Remove the rear panel assembly (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” in this
chapter).
4. Remove the preregulator (refer to “A15 Preregulator” in this chapter).
5. Remove the graphics processor (refer to “A19 Graphics Processor” in this
chapter).
6. Remove the test set deck (item 3) by removing the three screws (item 4)
from the bottom and four screws (item 5) from the side frames. For clarity,
the Sgure on the next page does not show the assemblies attached to the
test set deck.
7. Remove the CPU board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” in this chapter).
8. Remove the memory deck (item 1) by removing three screws (item 2) from
the bottom and four screws (item 6) from the side frames

1440 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 Al7 Motherboard Assembly
9. Remove the source assembly (refer to “A3 Source Assembly” in this
chapter).
10. Remove the samplers and pulse generator (refer to “A4, A5, A6 Samplers
and A7 Pulse Generator” in this chapter).
11. Remove the card cage boards (refer to “A& AlO, All, A12, A13, Al4
Card Cage Boards” in this chapter). Continue with step 12 to remove the
motherboard, or step 13 to remove the motherboard/card cage assembly.
12. To disconnect the motherboard (item 7), remove the 34 riv screws (item 8).
Important: Do not misplace ang of these screws.

v sg693e

Assembly Replawmeat and Post-Repair Procedures 14-41

A 17 Motherboard Assembly

lb remove the Al7 motherboard assembly along with the card cage, continue
with the following step:
13. Referring to the figure on the following page, remove the front frame (item
1) and rear frame (item 6) by removing the attaching screws (item 7). At
this point, only the motherboard/card cage assembly should remain. This
whole assembly is replaceable.

1442 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 A 17 Motherboard Assembly

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Aswmbly Replacement and Past-Repair Procedures 1443

A19 Graphics Processor

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” in this chapter) and front panel
(refer to “Front Panel Assembly” in this chapter.)
3. Remove the six screws (item 1) from the GSP cover (item 2) and lift off.
4. Swing out the handles (item 3) and pull the GSP board (item 4) out of the
analyzer.

Replacement
1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstaktion.
2. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

1444 Assembly Replacement and Psi-Repair Procedures

 A19 Graphics Processor

Cc
(6 Plocesl

” P

sg695e

Awembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 1446

A20 Disk Drive Assembly

Tools Required
w #2 ball-end hexdriver with long shaft
n T-8 TORX screwdriver
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n T-20 TCRX screwdriver
n small slot screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Required Diskette
n 3.5” diskette, 1.44 MEl, formatted (DOS)

Prelimiuary Instructions
Prepare the new disk drive assembly for installation in the analyzer. The
Installation Note included in the service kit provides details for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top, bottom, and left side-covers
(refer to “Covers” in this chapter).
2. Turn the analyzer over, so that the bottom faces up.
3. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 1) that connects to the disk drive from its
connector on the CPU board.
4. Remove the four screws (item 2) that secure the disk-drive bracket to the
side of the analyzer, and remove the complete disk drive assembly.

Note Save the screws removed in this step for use later when
installing the new disk drive bracket.

5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from its connection on the disk drive.

1446 Assembly Replacemeat and Post-Repair Procedures

 A20 Disk Drive Assembly

sg696e

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 1447

A20 Disk Drive Assembly

Install the replacement disk drive.

1. Connect the existing ribbon cable to the replacement disk drive.

Note Make sure that the disk drive connector-contacts touch the
ribbon cable contact areas (the ribbon-cable contact areas must
face the contacts in the disk drive connector). Also assure that
the connector is properly locked.

2. Slide the disk drive and bracket assembly into the analyzer.
3. Route the ribbon cable through the side access hole. Avoid twisting the
cable-duplicate the original folds made to the cable.
4. Fasten the disk-drive bracket to the side of the analyzer frame, using the four
screws saved in step 4 (immediately above).
5. Remove the trim strip from the top of the front panel.
6. Remove the screw from the top left comer of the front panel. This will allow
access to one of the #2 hex screws of the disk-drive assembly.
7. Aligu the disk drive with the front panel, and tighten the three screws that
fasten the disk drive to the disk-drive bracket. Do not over-tighten.
8. ReCOMeCt the ribbon cable to the CPU board.
Note Make sure that the CPU connector-contacts touch the ribbon
cable contact areas (the ribbon-cable contact areas must face
the contacts in the CPU connector). Also assure that the
connector is properly locked.

Test the disk-eject function, and adjust if required.

1. Insert a diskette into the drive.
2. Eject the diskette from the drive.
3. If the diskette does not eject properly, loosen and re-tighten the three screws
that hold the disk drive to the disk-drive bracket:
a. Loosen the two screws that are readily accessible.
b. Loosen the upper-most front screw through the access hole in the top-left
area of the front frame.

14-46 Assambly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 A20 Disk Drive Assembly

c. Center the disk drive in the opening.

d. Re-tighten all three screws.

Reinstall the covers.

1. Reinstall the remaining top front-panel screw in the left corner.
2. Reinstall the trim strip.
3. Reinstall the covers. If needed, refer to “Covers” in this chapter for help in
performing this task.

Assembly Replacement and Past-Repair Prowdures 1449

A21, A22 Test Port Couplers

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n small slot screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
n 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)

Removal
1. DiscOMeCt the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers”
in this chapter).
2. Disconnect the small bias wire from the test set interface board (A25).
For coupler A2 1 disconnect the gray wire (A2 1 W 1).
For coupler A22 disconnect the gray wire (A22Wl).
3. Disconnect the two semirigid cables from the coupler assembly.
For coupler A21 disconnect W3 and W31.
For coupler A22 disconnect W4 and W32.
4. Remove the four screws, washers, and pressure springs that secure the
coupler to the test set deck. Remove the coupler.
5. Remove the pressure springs

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Note n If you’re instalhng a new coupler, the gold lead on the

feedthru capacitor (item 1) must be curt@&@ bent at
90 degrees to prevent it from shorting to the bottom cover.
n When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that
the connections be torqued to 10 in-lb.

14-50 Assembly Replacement and Past-Repair Procedures

 A21, A22 ‘I&t Port Couplers

w32 A22Wl w31 w21 AZIWI

I3 L-
\w3 u:l 1

sg697e

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-51

A23 LED Board

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n small slot screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
n 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers”
in this chapter).
2. Remove the front panel (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” in this chapter).
3. Remove the A22 test port coupler (refer to “A21, A22 Test Port Couplers” in
this chapter).
4. Disconnect W33 from the LED board (A23).
5. Remove the screw (item 1) from the front of the test set deck.
6. Remove the LED board (A23).

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

1452 Assembly Replacement and Pest-Repair Procedures

 A23 LED Board

I II II II ’ +~Z I II

A>3

sg698e

Assambly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-53

A24 Transfer Switch

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers”
in this chapter).
2. Disconnect A24Wl from 53 on the test set interface board (A25).
3. Disconnect the three semirigid cables (Wl, W31, and W32) from the transfer
switch (Az4).
4. Remove the two screws (item 1) that secure the transfer switch.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Note When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the

connections be torqued to 10 in-lb.

14-64 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 A24 Transfer Switch

w32 w31 J3 A2LWl

(2 Places) sg699e

Assembly Replasement and Post-Repair Prosedures 14-55

A25 Test Set Interface

Tools Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
m T-15 TORX screwdriver
n 5/164nch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. DiscOMeCt the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers”
in this chapter).
2. Disconnect all cables and wires (A21W1, A22W1, W33, and W34) from the
test set interface board (A25).
3. Remove the five screws (item 1) that secure the test set interface board.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

14-56 Assembly Rsplasement and Post-Repair Procadures

 A25 lkst Set Interface

(5 Places)
w34 A24Wl

lb A25 0 IIIIIIlI

I - I IIA ,411 I

A22Wl w33 AZIWI

sg6100e

Assambly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-57

A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option lD5)
Assembly

!bols Required
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n Q/16-inch hex-nut driver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” in this chapter).
2. Disconnect W30 from the high stability frequency reference board (A26).
3. Remove the BNC connector nut and washer from the u 10 MI-Ix PRECISION
REFERENCE” connector (item 1) on the rear panel.
4. Remove the screw (item 4) that attaches the lD5 assembly to the rear panel.
5. Remove the screw (item 2) that secures the high stability frequency
reference board (A26) to the bracket.
6. Slide the board out of the bracket. Be careful not to lose the plastic spacer
washer (item 3) that is on the BNC connector as the board is being removed.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Note Before reinserting the high stability frequency reference board

(A26) into the bracket, be sure the plastic spacer washer
(item 3) is on the BNC connector.

M-58 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option lD5) Assembly

OUTSIDE

- w30

INSIDE
sg6101e

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-59

Bl Fan Assembly

Tools Required
n 2.5-mm hex-key driver
n T-10 TORX screwdriver
n T-15 TORX screwdriver
n ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap

Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” in this chapter).
2. Remove the four screws (item 1) that secure the fan and fan cover to the
rear panel.

Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Note The fan should be installed so that the direction of the air Bow
is away from the instrument. There is an arrow on the fan
chassis indicating the air flow direction.

14-60 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 Bl Fhn Assembly

(4 PLACES)

hg628d

Assembly Replacement and Pest-Repair Procedures 14-61

 Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753E
The following table lists the additional service procedures which you must
perform to ensure that the instrument is working correctly, following the
replacement of an assembly. These procedures can be located in either
Chapter 2 or Chapter 3.
l3yfbrm the procedures in the order that th,eg are listed in the table

‘Jhble 14 1. Belated Service Procedures

Replaced Alyjlwtallentd W?l%C&iOll
-1Y clbrection constants (ch.3) (a. 2)
Al Front Panel None SWViCK?lbStO
Keyboard service lbt 23
A2 Pront Panel None SeIViWWO
hterf~ service lbt 23
s e r v i c e l&t 12
lbtS66-80

A3 source A9 Switch Positions lbst Port Output Frequency Range

sourceDefcc(%st44) &Accuracy
Pretune Default CC (l&t 46) lkst Port Output Power Accumcy
Anal~BuscC(‘Ibst46) lbst Port Output Power Range aud
Source Pretune CC (l&t 48) b-m
RF Output Power CC (l&t 47) lbst Port Output/Input Hanuonics
Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (lb& 53) (Option 002 only)
Cavity OBciUstor Frequency CC (J&t 54)
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
EEPROM Backup Disk
MIAS/A6 Samplers A9 Switch Positions Miuimu~~ R Channel Level
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (‘l&t 53) (if R sampler replaced)
IF Amplifier CC (Test 51) lbtPorLcrosetallr
EEPROM Backup Disk 7&t Port Input Prequency Response

A7 Pulse Generator A9 Switch Positions l&t Port Input Frequency Response

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (‘l&t 63) l&t Port Frequency Range and
EEPROM Backup Disk

A8 Post Regulator A9 Switch Positions SenriCeMO

Cavity oscibtor Frequency CC (lbt 54) Check A8 test point voltagea
Source 8purAvoidance Tracking
EEPROM Backup Disk
 ‘able 14-l. Related Service Procedures (2 of 3)
R@M%3d A4snstments/ V&cation
AS&Xllbl~ Correction cons~ts (oh. 8) P- 2)
49 CPU A9 Switch Positions Operator’s Check
FXPROM Backup Load Pirmware service T&t, 21
)isk Available) CC Retrieval servi~W22
Serial Number CC (Test 55)
Option Number CC (!Ibst 66)
49 CPU A9 Switch Positions l&t Port Output Frequency Range
EEPROM Backup Load Fhmware and Accuracy
)isk Not Available) Serial Number CC (Test 66) l&t Port Output Power Accuracy
Option Number CC (‘Rx& 60) ‘l&t Port Output Power Range and
SourceDefCC(Jbt44) Linearity
Pretune Default CC (lbt 46) !kst Port Receiver Dynamic Accuracy
AnabgBusCC(‘Ibt40) l&t Port Input Frequency Response
Cal Kit Default (Test 57)
Source Pretune CC (!Ibst 48)
RF Output Power Cc (Tbst 47)
Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (lbt 53)
ADCLinearityCC(Test62)
lF Amplifier Cc (lbt 51)
Cavity O&llator Frequency CC (lb& 54)
EEF’ROM Backup Disk
LlO Digital IF A9 Switch Positions l&t Port Input Noise Ploor Level
AnalogBwccW46) Test Port CTc&alk
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (‘lbt 53) System Trace Noise
AM: Linearity CC (!kst 52)
IF AmpWer CC (Ylbst 51)
EEPROM Backup Disk

Lll Phase Lock A9 Switch Positions Minimum R channel Level

Anal~BusCC(‘Ibst46) lkst Port Output Prequency Range
Pretune Default CC (lbst 46) ad-
Source Pretune CC (l&t 48)
EXPROM Backup Disk
L12 Reference A9 Switch Positions 7&t Port Output Prequency Range
HighLowBand%3nsition ad-
Fresuency Accuracy
EEPROM Backup Disk

Assembly Replacsment and Post-Repair Procedures 14-63

 ‘able 14-1. Related Service Procedures (3 of 3)
gepLacea A@wtments/ Verilicatlon
As!3embly correction Constants (ch. 2) (Q. 2)
Al3 Fractional-N A9 Switch Positions l&t Port Output Frequency Range
(Analog) Fractional-N Spur and andAccuracy
FM Sideband
EEFROM Backup Disk
A14 Fractional-N A9 Switch Positions !I& Port Output Frequency Range
(Digital) Fractional-N Frequency Range and-
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance
andFMSideband
EEPROM Backup Disk
Al6 Preregulator None Self-l&t
Al6 Rear Panel None Internal l&t 13,
Interface Rear Panel
A17 Motherboard None Observation of Display
lksk306-80
A18 Display None Ob6ervation of Display
lkSW66-SO
A19 Graphics System None Observation of Display
Processor lkStS69-SO

A20 Disk Drive none none

A21 l&t Port Coupler RF Output Power CC (‘lbst 47) lbtPortcn#ratallr
Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (‘l&t 53) ‘l&t Port Frequency Response
A2!2 ‘Test Port Coupler Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Bst Port crosstalk
l
lkst Port Frequency Response

A23BdAssyLED none Self-lbt (Chapter 4)

A24 Transfer Switch none Test Port croestalk

A26 l&t Set Interface none Self-l&t (Chapter 4)
A26Highstabilit.y Frequency Acauacy ment Tkst Port Frequency Range
Frequency Reference (Option lD5) =dAccuracg
* Hewlett-Packard verifies source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 source output
performance is typical.

M-64 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

 15
Safety and Licensing
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material,
including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors
contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with
the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

Certillcation
Hewlett-Packard Company certihes that this product met its published
specifications at the time of shipment from the factory. Hewlett-Packard further
certihes that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States
National Institute of Standards and ‘Rxhnology, to the extent allowed by
the Institute’s calibration facility, and to the calibration facilities of other
International Standards Organization members

Safety and licensing 16-l

Warranty
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in
material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment.
During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company will, at its option, either
repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service
facility designated by Hewlett-Packard. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to
Hewlett-Packard and Hewlett-Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the
product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and
taxes for products returned to Hewlett-Packard from another country.
Hewlett-Packard warrants that its software and Rrmware designated by
Hewlett-Packard for use with an instrument will execute its programming
instructions when properly installed on that instrrmtent. Hewlett-Packard does
not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will
be uninterrupted or error-free.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or
inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing,
unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental
specihcations for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.
NOOTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HEWLETT-
PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCMIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDIES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY

Assistance
Product muiwnce agreements and other customer assistance agremuMs are
available for Hewlett-ltcckard products.
Fbr any assistance, contact gour nearest Hewlett-Rzckurd Sales and semrice
O?

15-2 Safety and Licensing

 Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Oifices
UNITEDsrATEs

Instrument Support Center

HewlettPnckard Company
Kw 4o3-0301

BUllOmAN HELD OPBE4!l’IONS

Hcodqnsrtere Prsnce Q--W

Hewlettpackard S.A. Hewlett-Packard France Hewlett-Packard GmbH
160, Route du NanM’Avril 1 Avenue Du Canada Hewlett-Packard Straae
1217 Meyrin 2Meneva Zone D’Activite De Courtaboeuf 61362 F&d Hombug v.d.H
swi~rlnnd F-91947 Lea Ulia Cedex Qe-Y
(4122) 7S9.8111 France (49 6172) 16-o
(331)t5@826069

Great Britain
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
E&dale Rand, Winnersh Triangle
wokinghm, Berkrhlre RQ416D2

INTElEON FIELD OPBBATIONB

Headqnarters Alwtnliilb
HewlettZackard Company Hewlett-Packard Aust&ia Ltd. HewlettPackard (Canada) Ltd.
3496DeerCreekRoad 31-41 Joseph Street 17690 South Service Bond
plrlo Alto, California, USA Blackbum, Victoria 3130 Tram-CanadaHlghway
94304-1316 (613) 896-2896 Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2x8 Dian
(416) 867-6927
KS-4232

JIlppn singppore lhdWOJl

HewlettGnckard Japan, Ltd. Hewlettpackard Singapore (Pte.) Ltd. Hewlett-Packard lkiwan
91 --alo, Hachioji 169 Beach Road 8th Floor, H-P Building
lbkyo 192, Japan #2soo Gateway west 327Fl1IIsingNorthEoad
(81426) a2111 slnJ@pore 0718 Tkipei, lkiwan
(ss) 291~9088 (336 2) 7l2-0404

Ohlna HewlettPackard Company

3SEfeiSanHuanXlRoad
shumg Yu ml
Hai Dian District
Beijing, china
(36 1) 2566333

Safety and Licensing 15-3

Shipment for Service
If you are sending the instrument to Hewlett-Packard for service, ship the
analyzer to the nearest HP service center for repair, including a description of
any failed test and any error message. Ship the analyzer using the original or
comparable antistatic packaging materials.

154 Safety and licensing

Safety Symbols
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual. Familiarize
yourself
. with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this
mstrument.
Caution Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure
that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, would result in
damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed
beyond a caution note until the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.

Warning Rbrning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure

which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could
result in injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond
a warning note until the indicated conditions are fkdly
understood and met.

Instrument Markings
A ! The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked with
this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the
documentation.
“CE” The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. (If
accompanied by a year, it is when the design was proven.)
“ISMl-A” This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class
A product.
“CSA” The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards
Association.

Safety and Licensing 15-5

Safety Considerations
Note This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance
with IEC Publication 1010, Safety Requirements for Electronics
Measuring Apparatus, and has been supplied in a safe condition.
This instruction documentation contains information and
warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe
operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition.

Safety Earth Ground

Warning This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective
txwtbhg ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains
plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided
with a protective earth contact. Any interruption of the
protective conductor, inside or outside the instrument,
is likely to make the instrument dangerous. Intentional
interruption is prohibited.

Warning Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with

this product. Failure to ensure adequate earth groundiug by
not using this cord may cause product damage.

Before Applying Power

Caution Before switching on this instrument, make sure that the
analyzer line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the
power supply and the correct fuse is installed.

Caution If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make

sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral (grounded
side of the mains supply).

16-6 Safety and licensing

Servicing

w-tit No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to

qualified personnel. ‘Ib prevent electrical shock, do not
remove covers.

warning These servicing instructions are for use by qualified

personnel only. ‘Ib avoid electrical shock, do not perform
any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.

Warning The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to

expose dangerous voltages. Disconnect the instrument from
all voltage sources while it is being opened.

w-g Adjustments described in this document may be performed

with power supplied to the product while protective covers
are removed. Energy available at many points may, if
contacted, result in personal injury.

Warning The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may

remain live for 10 seconds after disco~ecting the plug from
its power supply.

Warning For continued protection against fire hazard replace line

fuse only with same type and rating (F 3AI25OV). The use of
other fuses or material is prohibited.

Safety and licensing 15-7

General
Warning ‘Ib prevent electrical shock, disconnect theHP 8753E from
mains before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly
dampened with water to clean the external case parts. Do
not attempt to clean internally.

Warning If this product is not used as specified, the protection

provided by the equipment could be impaired. This product
must be used in a normal condition (in which all means for
protection are intact) only.

Caution This product is designed for use in InsMlation Category II and

Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively.

Caution VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS: When inskUng the product in

a cabinet, the convection into and out of the product must not
be restricted. The ambient temperature (outside the cabinet)
must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the
product by 4O C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet.
If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater that 800
watts, then forced convection must be used.

warning Install the instrument according to the enclosure protection

provided. This instrument does not protect against the
ingress of water. This instrument protects agains finger
access to hazardous parts within the enclosure.

16-8 Safety and licensing

Compliance with German FFZ Emissions Requirements
This network analyzer complies with German FIZ 526/527 Radiated Emissions
and Conducted Emission requirements.

Compliance with German Noise Requirements

This is to declare that this instrument is in conformance with the German
Regulation on Noise Declaration for Machines (Laermangabe nach der
Maschinenlaernuerordung -3. GSGV Deutschland).

Acoustic Noise EmissionlGeraeuschemission

Lpa<70 dB
Operator Position am Arbeitsplatz
Normal Operation normaler Betrieb
nach DIN 45635 t. 19

Safety and licensing 16-9

Index
1 A
100 kHz pulses, 7-16 A10 assembly signals required, 8-8
10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A10 check by substitution or signal
A14J1, 7-26 examination, 8-8
10 MHz precision reference A10 digital IF, 12-30
assembly replacement, 14-58 digital control, 12-10
part numbers, 13-26 A10 Digital IF, lo-33
1st Lo signal at sampler/mixer, 8-14 All input signals, 7-36
All Input S&n&, 7-36
2 All phase lock, 10-34
25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from source, 12-15
A14J1, 7-27 All phase lock and A3 source check,
2nd IF (4 kHz) signal locations, 8-11 7-8
2nd LO locations, 8-14 All phase lock check, 7-35
2ND LO waveforms, 7-21 Al2 digital control signals check,
7-23
4 Al2 reference, 10-40
4 kHz signal check, 8-11 source, 12-14
4 MHz reference signal, 7-20 Al2 reference check, 7-13
4 MHZ REF’ signal check, 8-7 A13/A14 Fractional-N Check, 7-24
Al3 frac-N analog
6 source, 12-14
+5 v digital supply Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check, 7-29
theory of operation, 12-6 Al4 frac-N digital
source, 12-14
6 Al4 fractional-N (digital), 10-43
60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from Al4 generated digital control signals,
A14J1, 7-27 7-31
A14to-A13 digital control signals
8 check, 7-29
8753E Al4 VCO exercise, 7-27
theory of operation, 12-1 Al5 preregulator

Index-l
 theory of operation, 12-5 source, 12-15
Al5 preregulator check, 5-9 A7 pulse generator check, 7-32
A15Wl plug detail, 5-10 A8 fuses and voltages, 5-14
Al6 rear panel A8 post regulator
digital control, 12-12 air flow detector, 12-7
Al8 display display power, 12-8
digital control, 12-11 green LEDs, 12-7
power, 12-8 probe power, 12-8
A19 GSP shutdown circuit, 12-7
digital control, 12-12 theory of operation, 12-7
Al/A2 front panel troubleshooting, variable fan circuit, 12-7
6-13 A8 post regulator test points, 5-5
Al front panel A9 CPU
digital control, 12-10 dig&ii control, 12-10
A21 test port coupler, 12-26 A9 CPU operation check, 6-4
A22 test port coupler, 12-26 A and B inputs check, 8-4
A23 LED front panel, 12-26 A and B input traces check, 416
A24 transfer switch, 12-26 ABUS Cot, 10-13
A25 test set interface, 12-26 ABUS node 16 for power check, 415
A27 inverter ABUS Test., lo-10
digital control, 12-12 accessories error messages check,
A2 front panel processor 4-18
digital control, 12-10 accessories inspection, 9-3
A3 source accessories troubleshooting, 418
external source mode, 12-23 accessories troubleshooting chapter,
frequency offset, 12-22 9-l
harmonic analysis, 12-22 accuracy and range of frequency,
high band theory, 12-19 2-18
low band theory, 12-16 accuracy of frequency adjustment,
operation in other modes, 12-22 3-48
source, 12-15 accuracy of power test, 2-24
super low band theory, 12-15 adapters, l-4
theory of operation, 12-2, 12-14 ADC Hist., lo-11
tuned receiver mode, 12-25 ADC Lin., lo-10
A3 source and All phase lock check, ADC main, lo-23
7-8 ADC offset correction constants
A4 sampler/mixer, 12-29 adjustment, 3-17
A4 sampler/mixer check, 7-6 ADC of%, lo-10
A5 sampler/mixer, 12-29 ADC Ofs Cot, 10-13
A6 sampler/mixer, 12-29 ADD, 10-6
A7 pulse generator addresses for HP-IB systems, 46
adjustment ALL INT, 10-7
A9 Switch Positions, 3-5 Alter and Normal switch position
ADC offset correction constants adjustment, 3-5
(test 52), 3-17 amplifier (IF’) adjustment, 3-16
analog bus correction constants analog bus, lo-22
(test 46), 3-9 ANALOG BUS, lo-25
cavity oscillator frequency analog bus check of reference
correction constants (test 54), frequencies, 7-13
3-28 analog bus checks YO coil drive, 7-11
fractional-N frequency range, 3-45 analog bus codes, 10-49
fractional-N spur avoidance and analog bus correction constants
FM sideband, 3-54 adjustment, 3-9
frequency accuracy, 3-48 analog bus node 1, 10-27
high/low band transition, 3-52 analog bus node 11, 10-34
IF amplifier correction constants analog bus node 12, 10-34
(test 51), 3-16 analog bus node 13,14, 10-35
initialize EEPROMs (test 58), 3-37 analog bus node 15, 10-36
option numbers correction constants analog bus node 16, 10-37
(test 56), 3-36 analog bus node 17, 10-38
RF output power correction analog bus node 18, 10-39
constants (test 47), 3-11 analog bus node 19, 10-39
sampler magnitude correction analog bus node 2, 10-28
constants (test 53), 3-18 analog bus node 20, 10-40
sequences for mechanical analog bus node 21, lo-41
adjustments, 3-62 analog bus node 23, 10-41
serial number correction constants analog bus node 24, 10-42
(test 55), 3-34 analog bus node 27, 10-43
source default correction constants analog bus node 29, 10-44
(test 44), 3-7 analog bus node 3, 10-29
source pretune correction constants analog bus node 30, 10-45
(test 48), 3-10 analog bus node 4, 10-30
source pretune default correction analog bus node 5, 10-31
constants (test 45), 3-8 analog bus node 6, 10-31
source spur avoidance tracking, analog bus node 7, 10-32
3-58 analog bus node 8, 10-32
ad@&ments analyzer, 3-l analog bus node 9, 10-33
adjustment tests, 10-3 analog bus nodes, 10-26
Adjustment Tests, 1913 A3, lo-26
ADJUSTklENT TESTS, 10-5 ANALOG BUS ON OFF, lo-22
air flow detector, 12-7 analog in menu, 10-24
ALC ON OFF, lo-19 analog node 10, 10-33

Index-3
analyzer A9BTl battery, 14-36
theory of operations, 12-1 A9 CPU, 14-32
analyzer adjustments, 3-l Bl fan, 14-60
analyzer block diagram, 419 covers, 146
analyzer HP-H3 address, 46 display, 14-12
analyzer options available, l-7 display lamp, 1412
analyzer (spectrum), l-3 front panel, 148
analyzer verification, 2- 1 front panel interface, 14-10
antistatic wrist strap, l-4 keypad, 1410
antistatic wrist strap and cord, l-4 line fuse, 144
antistatic wrist strap cord, l-4 rear panel, 1416
appendix for source group rear panel interface, 14-20
troubleshooting, 7-38 attenuator
assemblies theory of operation, 12-2
bottom view, 13-8 attenuators (fixed), l-4
part numbers, 13-6-8 attenuator (step), l-3
rebuilt-exchange, 13-3 AUX OUT ON OFF, lo-24
top view, 13-6 available options, l-7
assembly replacement, 14-1
A10 digital IF, 1430 B
All phase lock, 1430 background intensity check for
Al2 reference, 14-30 display, 6-7
Al3 frac-N analog, 1430 backup EEPROM disk, 3-38
Al4 frac-N digital, 1430 bad cables, 9-l
Al5 preregulator, 14-38 B and A inputs check, 8-4
Al7 motherboard, 14-40 band (high/low) transition adjustment,
A19 graphics processor, 1444 3-52
A20 disk drive, 1446 BAlTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY
A21 test port-l coupler, 1450 CLEARED, lo-50
A22 test port-2 coupler, 1450 BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS
A23 LED board, 1452 TO DISK, lo-50
A24 transfer switch, 1454 block diagram, 419
A25 test set interface, 14-56 digital control group, 6-3
A26 high stability frequency power supply, 5-25
reference, 1458 power supply functional group,
A3 source, 1422 5-3
A4 R-sampler, 1426 broadband power problems, 7-39
A5 A-sampler, 14-26 built-in test set, 12-26
A6 B-sampler, 1426 LED front panel, 12-26
A7 pulse generator, 1426 test port couplers, 12-26
A8 post regulator, 1430 test set interface, 12-26

Index4
 transfer switch, 12-26 ADC offset (test 52), 3-17
bus analog bus (test 46), 3-9
analog, lo-22 cavity oscillator frequency (test
bus nodes, 19-26 54), 3-28
IF amplifier (test 51), 3-16
c initialize EEPROMs (test 58), 3-37
cable inspection, 6-16 option numbers (test 56), 3-36
cables, l-4 retrieve correction constant data
bottom view, 13-12 from EEPROM backup disk,
front view, 13-14 3-40
part numbers, 13-19-18 RF output power (test 47), 3-11
rear view, 13-16 sampler magnitude (test 53), 3-18
source, 13-18 serial number (test 55), 3-34
top view, 13-10 source default (test 44), 3-7
cable test, 9-5 source pretune default (test 45),
Cal Coef l-12., 10-12 3-8
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A, 16-6 source prettme (test 48), 3-10
CAL FACTOR SENSOR B, 19-6 Unprotected Hardware Option
CALJBRATION ABORTED, lo-50 Numbers, 3-60
calibration coefficients, 11-l center conductor damage, 9-3
calibration device inspection, 9-3 certification of kit, 2-7
calibration kit 7 mm, 569, l-3 chassis
calibration kit device verification, part numbers, 13-42-44
9-4 check
calibration kit Type-N, 758, l-3 1st LO signal at sampler/mixer,
calibration procedure, 1 l-3 8-14
CALIBRATION REQUIRED, lo-51 4 MHz REF signal, 8-7
care of connectors, l-5 A10 by substitution or signal
CAUTION examination, 8-8
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER All phase lock, 7-35
REDUCED, 8-3 Al2 digital control signals, 7-23
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER Al2 reference, 7-13
REDUCED, 8-3 A13/A14 Fractional-N, 7-24
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check,
REDUCED, 8-3 7-29
cavity oscillator frequency A14-to-Al3 digital control signals,
adjustment, 3-28 7-29
cavity oscillator frequency correction Al5 Preregulator, 5-9
constants adjustment, 3-28 Al/A2 front panel, 6-13
Cav osc Cor., 19-13 A3 source and All phase lock, 7-8
CC procedures A4 sampler/mixer, 7-6
 A7 pulse generator, 7-32 components related to specific error
A8 fuses and voltages, 5-14 terms, 9-3
A9 CPU control, 6-4 connection techniques, l-5
A and B inputs, 8-4 connector
A and B input traces, 4-16 care of, l-5
accessories error messages, 4-18 CONTINUE TEST, 10-5
CPU control, 6-4 controller HP-II3 address, 4-6
digital control, 4-11 controller troubleshooting, 4-8
disk drive, 4-7 conventions for symbols, 19-48
fan voltages, 5-22 correction constants
FN LO at A12, 7-19 ADC offset (test 52), 3-17
for a faulty assembly, 5-11 analog bus (test 46), 3-9
HP-B3 systems, 46 cavity oscillator frequency(test 54),
line voltage, selector switch, fuse, 3-28
5-7 display intensity (test 45), 6-7
motherboard, 5-13 IF amplifier (test 51), 3-16
operating temperature, 5-13 initiaiize EEPROMs (test 58), 3-37
operation of A9 CPU, 6-4 option numbers (test 56), 3-36
phase lock error message, 7-4 retrieval from EEPROM backup
phase lock error messages, 413 disk, 340
plotter or printer, 4-7 RF output power (test 47), 3-11
post regulator voltages, 5-5 sampler magnitude (test 53), 3-18
power supply, 4-10 serial number (test 55), 3-34
power up sequence, 411 source default (test 44), 3-7
preregulator LEDs, 410 source pretune default (test 45),
rear panel LEDs, 410 3-8
receiver, 416 source pretune (test 48), 3-10
receiver error messages, 4-17 Unprotected Hardware Option
source, 413 Numbers, 3-60
the 4 kHz signal, 8-11 CORRECTION CONSTANT8 NOT
trace with sampler correction off, STORED, lo-51
8-12 CORRECTION TURNED OFF, lo-51
YO coil drive with analog bus, 7-11 counter, 19-23
check front panel cables, 6-16 COUNTER
cleaning of connectors, l-5 OFF, lo-24
CLEAR LIST, 10-6 counter (frequency), l-3
coax cable, 14 counter readout location, 19-38
codes for analog bus, 19-49 CPU
coefficients, 11-l digital control, 12-10
comb tooth at 3 GHz, 7-33 CPU operation check, 6-4

Index-6
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL Al front panel, 12-10
SET, lo-51 A27 inverter, 12-12
A2 front panel processor, 12-10
D A9 CPU, 12-10
damage to center conductors, 9-3 digital signal processor, 12-11
data that is faulty, 417 EEPROM, 12-11
DEADLOCK, lo-51 main CPU, 12-10
default correction constants main RAM, 12-11
adjustment for source, 3-7 theory of operation, 12-8
default correction constants digital control block diagram, 6-3
adjustment for source prettme, digital control check, 4-11
3-8 digital control lines observed using
DELETE, 10-6 L INTCOP as trigger, 8-10
delete display option, l-8 digitai control signals A14to-A13
description of tests, 10-7 check, 7-29
DEVICE digital control sign& check, 7-23
not on, not connect, wrong addrs, digitai control signals generated from
lo-52 A14, 7-31
diagnose softkey, 10-7 digitai control troubleshooting
diagnostic chapter, 6-l
error terms, 11-l digital data lines observed using L
diagnostic LEDs for A15, 5-4 INTCOP as trigger, 8-10
diagnostic routines for phase lock, digital IF, 10-33, 12-30
7-39 digital control, 12-10
diL3gIlOStiCS digital voltmeter, l-3
internal, 10-2 directivity (EDF and EDR), 11-11
diagnostics of analyzer, 4-3 disable shutdown circuitry, 5-16
diagnostic tests, 6-17 DISK
diagram not on, not connected, wrong addrs,
A4 sampler/mixer to phase lock lo-52
cable, 7-7 disk drive check, 4-7
digital control group, 6-3 disk drive (externai) HP-ID address,
diagram of HP 87533, 419 46
diagram of power supply, 5-25 disk drive replacement, 14-46
DIF Control, 10-9 disk (fIoppy), l-3
DIF Counter, 10-9 DISK HARDWmE PROBLEM, lo-52
digital control DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR,
A10 dig&ii IF, 12-10 lo-52
Al6 rear panel, 12-12 DISK READ/WRITE ERROR, lo-53
Al8 display, 12-11 Disp 2 Ex., lo-13
A19 GSP, 12-12 Dispkpu corn., 10-15
display IF ampiifier correction constants
digitai control, 12-11 adjustment, 3-16
power, 12-8 minimum R channel level, 2-31
displayed spurs with a biter, 3-30 RF output power correction
display intensity, 6-7 constants adjustment, 3-11
display tests, 10-3, 10-15 sampler magnitude adjustment,
DISPLAY TESTS, 10-5 3-18
DIV FRAC N, lo-25 source spur avoidance tracking
Divide-by-N Circuit Check, 7-29 adjustment, 3-58
DONE, 19-6 test port frequency range and
DRAM cell, lo-15 accuracy test, 2-18
DSP ALU, 19-9 test port input noise floor level,
DSP Control, 10-9 2-37
DSP Intrpt, 10-9 test port output power accuracy,
DSP RAM, 10-9 2-24
DSP WrLRd, 10-9 test port output power range and
linearity, 2-27
E equipment for service, l-l
earth ground wire and static-control error
table mat, l-4 BATTERY FAZLED. STATEMEMORY
EDIT, 19-6 CLEARED, lo-50
edit iist menu, 10-6 BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS
equipment TO DISK, lo-50
automated system verification, 2-8 CALIBRATION ABORTED, lo-50
cavity osciliator frequency CALIBRATION REQUIRED, lo-51
adjustment, 3-28 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT
display intensity correction STORED, lo-51
constants adjustment, 6-7 CORRECTION TURNED OFF, lo-51
EEPROM backup dish procedure, CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN
3-38 CAL SET, lo-51
external source mode frequency DEADLOCK, lo-51
range, 2-21 DEVICE: not on, not connect,
fractional-N frequency range wrorvj addrs, lo-52
adjustment, 3-45 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM,
fractional-N spur avoidance and lo-52
FM sideband adjustment, 3-54 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR,
frequency accuracy adjustment, lo-52
3-48 DISK: not on, not connected, wrong
high/Iow band transition addrs, lo-52
ac@stment, 3-52 DISK READ/WRITE ERROR, 19-53
-ON FAILED, lo-53
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR PWR MTR: NOT ON/CONNECTED
MTR CAL OFF, lo-53 OR WRONG ADDRS, lo-59
NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT
PROGRESS, lo-53 MEMORY, lo-59
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT SELF TEST #II FAILED, lo-59
LEVEL, lo-54 SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF,
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT RESET UNDER POWER MENU,
LEVEL, 19-54 lo-59
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW
REGISTERS, 19-54 TIME SWEEP, lo-60
NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER TEST ABORTED, lo-60
METER CAL, lo-55 TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK START OVER, lo-60
FOR STORE, lo-53 WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER DISK, lo-60
REDUCED, lo-55 error-correction procedure, 1 l-3
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER error message for phase lock, 7-4
REDUCED, lo-55 error messages, 10-1, 10-50
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER error messages for receiver failure,
REDUCED, lo-55 8-3
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE error term inspection, 9-3
FOR COPY, lo-56 error terms, 11-l
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE directivity (EDF and EDR), 11-11
FOR GPIO, lo-55 isolation (crosstaik, EXF and EXR),
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED, lo-56 11-14
PHASE LOCK LOST, lo-56 load Match (ELF and ELR), 11-15
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK, lo-57 reflection Tracking (ERF and ERR),
POWER METER INVALID, lo-57 11-13
POWER METER NOT SETTLED, source match (ESF and ESR), 11-12
lo-57 transmission tracking (ETF and
POWER SUPPLY HOT!, lo-57 ETR), 11-16
POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!, E-terms, 1 l-l
lo-57 external source, l-3
POWER UNLEVELED, lo-58 external source mode frequency
PRINTER: error, 10-58 range, 2-21
PRINTER: not handshaking, 10-58 external tests, 193,10-11
PRINTER: not on, not connected, EXTERNAL TESTS, 19-4
wrong addrs, lo-58
PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!, F
19-58 failure

Index-9
 A11 phase lock andA3 source F’ractionai-N Check, 7-24
check, 7-8 fractional-N (digital), 10-43
Al/A2 front panel, 6-13 fractional-N frequency range
key stuck, 6-14 acijustment, 3-45
phase lock error, 7-4 F’ractionai-N Frequency Range
receiver, 8-3 Adjustment Sequence, 3-62
RF power from source, 7-3 fractional-N spur avoidance and F‘M
failures sideband a@stment, 3-54
HP-IB, 6-19 kactionai-N Spur Avoidance and F’M
fan Sideband Adjustment Sequence,
air flow detector, 12-7 3-62
variable fan circuit, 12-7 frequency accuracy adjustment, 3-48
fan speeds, 5-22 frequency counter, l-3, 10-23
fan troubleshooting, 5-22 frequency output in SRC tune mode,
fan voltages, 5-22 7-8
faulty analyzer repair, 42 frequency range and accuracy test,
faulty cables, 9-l 2-18
faulty calibration devices or frequency range for external source
CoMectors, 9-l mode, 2-21
faulty data, 417 frequency range of fractional-N
faulty group isolation, 49 adjustment, 3-45
filter (low pass), l-3 front panel
iirmware revision softkey, 19-47 assembly replacement, 148
floor level test, 2-37 digital control, 12-10
floppy disk, l-3 part numbers, 13-29-22
FM Coil - plot with 3 point sweep, front panel key codes, 6-14
7-37 front panel probe power voltages,
FM sideband and spur avoidance 5-19
adjustment, 3-54 front panel processor
FN count., lo-10 digitai control, 12-10
FN LO at Al2 check, 7-19 front panel troubleshooting, 6-13
F’N LO waveform at A12J1, 7-19 Fr Pan Biag., lo-11
FRAC N, lo-25 F’r Pan Wr/Rd, 19-9
frac-N analog fuIl two-port error-correction
source, 12-14 procedure, 1 l-3
Frac N Cont., 199 functional group fault location, 49
frac-N digitai functional groups
source, 12-14 theory of operation, 124
FRACN TUNE mode HI OUT. signal, fuse check, 5-7
7-34
FRACN TUNE ON OFT, lo-18

Index-10
G adjust fractional-N frequency range,
good trace display, 8-5 3-45
green LED on Al5 adjust fractional-N spur avoidance
power supply shutdown, 12-6 and FM sideband, 3-54
green LEDs on A8, 12-7 adjust frequency accuracy, 3-48
GSP adjust hig.hAow band transition,
digital control, 12-12 3-52
adjust IF ampiifIer correction
H constants, 3-16
hardkeys, 19-2 adjustment the analyzer, 3-l
hardware adjust option numbers correction
bottom view, 13-30 constants, 3-36
disk drive, 13-36 adjust RF output power correction
front view, 13-32 constants, 3-l 1
memory deck, 13-38 adjust sampler magnitude correction
part numbers, 13-28-49 constants, 3-18
preregulator, 13-40 adjust serial number correction
test set deck, 13-34 corl!stants,3-34
top view, 13-28 adjust source default correction
HB FITR SW ON OFF, 1919 constants, 3-7
Hewlett-Packard servicing, 42 adjust source pretune correction
high band REF signal, 7-17 constants, 3-10
high/Iow band transition adjustment, adjust source pretune default
3-52 correction constants, 3-8
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment adjust source spur avoidance
Sequence, 3-62 tracking, 3-58
high quality comb tooth at 3 GHz, adjust the anaIyzer using sequences,
7-33 3-62
high stabiiity frequency reference backup the EEPROM disk, 3-38
assembly replacement, 1458 check display intensity, 6-7
part numbers, 13-26 clean connectors, l-5
HI OUT signal in FRACN TUNE mode, identify the faulty functional group,
7-34 4-9
H MB line, 7-31 initialize EEPROMs, 3-37
how to load sequences from disk, 3-62
adjust ADC offset correction position the A9 Switch, 3-5
constants, 3-17 repair the analyzer, 4-l
adjust analog bus correction retrieve correction constant data
constanti, 3-9 from EEPROM backup disk,
adjust cavity oscillator frequency 3-40
correction constants, 3-28

IndlBx-11
 set up the fractional-N frequency I
range adjustment, 3-63 IF ampiifier correction constants
set up the fractional-N spur adjustment, 3-16
avoidance and FM sideband IF GAIN AUTO, 10-21
adjustment, 3-64 IF GAIN OFF, lo-21
set up the high/Iow band transition IF GAIN ON, lo-21
adjustments, 3-63 IF Step Cor., 19-13
test external source mode frequency improper calibration technique, 9-l
range, 2-21 Init EEPROM, lo-14
test frequency range and accuracy, INITlALIzATION FAILED, lo-53
2-18 initiaiize EEPROMs, 3-37
test minimum R channel level, initial observations, 43
2-31 input noise floor level test, 2-37
test port input noise floor level, inputs (A and B) check, 8-4
2-37 input traces check, 416
test port output frequency range inspect cables, 6-16
and accuracy, 2-18 inspect error terms, 9-3
test port output power accuracy, inspection of test port connectors
2-24 and calibration devices, 9-3
test port output power range and inspect the accessories, 9-3
linearity, 2-27 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR MTR
troubleshoot, 41 CAL OFF, lo-53
troubleshoot accessories, 9-l Inten DAC., 19-15
troubleshoot broadband power internal diagnostics, 10-2
problems, 7-39 inted diagnostic tests, 6-17
troubleshoot digital control group, internal tests, W-3,10-7
6-l INTERNAL TESTS, lo-4
troubleshoot receiver, 8-l inverter
troubleshoot source group, 7-l digital control, 12-12
verify an analyzer system invoking tests remotely, 10-48
automatically, 2-8 isolation (crosstaik, EXF and EXR),
HP 8753E adhistments, 3-l 11-14
HP 8753E block diagram, 4-19
HP-IB addresses, 46 K
HP-IB cable, l-4 key codes, 6-14
HP-B3 Failures, 6-19 key faihne identification, 6-14
HP-IB mnemonic for service, 10-l keys in service menu, 10-l
HP-IB service mnemonic defmitions, kit re-certiiication, 2-7
10-48 kits
HP-H3 system check, 46 calibration kit 7 mm, 50131, l-3
calibration kit Type-N, 75Q, l-3

Index-12
 tool, l-3 bottom view, 13-8
verification kit 7 mm, l-3 part numbers, 13-6-8
rebuilt-exchange, 13-3
L top view, 13-6
LED front panel, 12-26 measurement calibration coefficients,
L ENREF line, 7-23 11-l
L I-II3 and L LB Lines, 7-24 measurement calibration procedure,
Iight occiuder, l-3 11-3
LIMIT3 NORM/SPCL, 10-5 mechanical adjustment sequences,
linearity and range of power test, 3-62
2-27 memory
line fuse check, 5-7 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR
line power module MTR CAL OFF, lo-53
theory of operation, 12-6 menu
line voltage check, 5-7 analog in, lo-24
L INTCOP as trigger to observe control edit Iist, 10-6
lines, 8-10 peek/poke, lo-46
L INTCOP as trigger to observe data service keys, 19-18
lines, 8-10 service modes, 19-21
L LB and L III3 Lines, 7-24 test options, 10-5
LO (2ND) waveforms, 7-21 tests, 10-3
load device verification, 9-4 menus for service, 19-l
load Match (ELF and ELR), 11-15 message
location BATTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY
diagnostic LEDs for A15, 5-4 CLEARED, lo-50
post regulator test points, 5-5 BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS
power supply cable, 5-8 TO DISK, lo-50
lock error, 7-4 CALIBRATION ABORTED, lo-50
LO OUT waveform at Al4J2, 7-28 CALIBRATION REQUIRED, lo-51
Loss/sENsR LISTS, lo-5 CORRECTIONCONSl!ANTS N(YT
low band REF signal, 7-18 STORED, lo-51
low pass fiber, l-3 CORRECTION TURNED OFF, lo-51
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN
M CAL SET, lo-51
magnitude of sampler adjustment, DEADLOCK, lo-51
3-18 DEVICE: not on, not connect,
main ADC, lo-23 wrong addrs, lo-52
Main DRAM, lo-8 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM,
MAIN PWR DAC, lo-19 lo-52
Main VRAM, lo-15 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR,
major assemblies lo-52

Index-13
 DISK: not on, not connected, wrong PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!,
addrs, lo-52 lo-58
DISK READ/WRITE ERROR, lo-53 PWR MTR: NOT ON/CONNECTED
error, 10-50 OR WRONG ADDRS, lo-59
INIWON FAILED, lo-53 SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT
NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN MEMORY, lo-59
PROGRESS, lo-53 SELF TEST #n FAILED, lo-59
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF,
LEVEL, lo-54 RESET UNDER POWER MENU,
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT lo-59
LEVEL, lo-54 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR TIME SWEEP, lo-60
REGISTERS, 10-54 TEST ABORTED, lo-60
NOT -WED DURING POWER TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND
METER CAL, lo-55 START OVER, lo-60
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE
FOR STORE, lo-53 DISK, lo-60
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER message for phase lock error, 7-4
REDUCED, lo-55 messages
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER error, 10-l
REDUCED, lo-55 meter (power), l-3
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER microprocessor
REDUCED, lo-55 theory of operation, 12-3
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE microwave connector care, l-5
FOR COPY, lo-56 minimum loss pad, l-4
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE minimum R channel level, 2-31
FOR GPIO, lo-55 mnemonic definitions, 10-48
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED, lo-56 mnemonics for service keys, 10-l
PHASE LQCK LOST, lo-56 monitor ABUS node 16 for power,
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK, lo-57 4-15
POWER METER INVALID, lo-57 motherboard check, 5-13
POWER METER NOT SETTLED,
lo-57 N
POWER SUPPLY HOT!, lo-57 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN
POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!, PROGRESS, lo-53
lo-57 nodes for analog bus, 10-26
POWER UNLEVELED, lo-58 NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK, lo-54
PRINTER: error, 10-58 NO IF FOUND
PRINTER: not handshaking, 10-58 CHECK R INPUT LEVEL, 7-4,7-38,
PRINTER: not on, not connected, lo-54
wrong addrs, lo-58 noise floor level test, 2-37

Index-14
NO PHASE LOCK 1CP rack mount flange kit with
CHECK R INPUT LEVEL, 7-4,7-38, handles, l-8
10-54 lD5 high stabiity frequency
Normal and Alter switch position reference, l-7
adjustment, 3-5 descriptions of, 13-48
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR options available, l-7
REGISTERS, 19-54 osciiioscope, l-3
NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER oscilloscope check of reference
METER CAL, lo-55 frequencies, 7-15
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR output frequency in SRC tune mode,
STORE, lo-53 7-8
number (option) adjustment, 3-36 overah block diagram, 419
number (serial) adjustment, 3-34 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER
REDUCED, lo-55
0 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER
offset (ADC) acijustment, 3-17 REDUCED, lo-55
open and short device verification, OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER
9-6 REDUCED, lo-55
open loop compared to phase locked
output in SRC tune mode, 7-9 P
operating temperature check, 5-13 P?, lo-58
operation check of A9 CPU, 6-4 panel key codes, 6-14
operation veriikxtion, 2-l PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE
post-repair, 3-2, 1462 FOR COPY, lo-56
Operator’s Check, 4-4 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE
option FOR GPIO, lo-55
lDT, delete display, l-8 patterns test, 19-16
Option lD5 PEEK, 10-46
assembly replacement, 1458 PEEK/POKE, 10-46
part numbers, 13-26 PEEK/POKE ADDRESS, 10-46
Option Cor., 1914 peek/poke menu, 19-46
option numbers correction constants performance test record types, 2-6
adjustment, 3-36 performance tests
options 1. Test Port Output Frequency
002 harmonic mode, l-7 Range and Accuracy, 2-18
006 6 GHz operation, l-7 2. External Source Mode Frequency
010 time domain, l-7 Range, 2-21
011 receiver configuration, l-7 3. Test Port Output Power Accuracy,
075 75Q impedance, l-8 2-24
1CM rack mount flange kit without 4. l&t Port Output Power Range
handles, l-8 and Linearity, 2-27

Index-16
 5. Minimum R Channel Level, 2-31 display power, 12-8
6. Test Port Input Noise Floor green LEDs, 12-7
Level, 2-37 probe power, 12-8
chapter, 2-l shutdown circuit, 12-7
description of, 2-l theory of operation, 12-7
post-repair, 3-2, 1462 variable fan circuit, 12-7
peripheral equipment post regulator test point locations,
theory of operation, 12-3 5-5
peripheral HP-IB addresses, 4-6 post-repair procedures, 3-2, 14-62
peripheral troubleshooting, 4-8 power accuracy test, 2-24
phase lock, 10-34 power from source, 7-3
source, 12-15 POWER LOSS, lo-6
phase lock (All) check, 7-35 power meter (HP-IB), l-3
phase lock and A3 source check, 7-8 power meter HP-IB address, 46
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED, 7-4, POWER METER INVALID, lo-57
7-38, lo-56 POWER METER NOT SETTLED,
phase locked output compared to lo-57
open loop in SRC tune mode, power output check, 413
7-9 power problems (broadband), 7-39
phase lock error, 7-4 power range and linearity test, 2-27
phase lock error messages, 7-38 power sensor, l-3
phase lock error messages check, power splitter, l-4
413 power supply
PHASE LOCK LOST., 7-4, 7-38, lo-56 theory of operation, 12-5
photometer probe, l-3 power supply block diagram, 5-25
PLL AUTO ON OFF, lo-20 power supply cable location, 5-8
PLL DIAG ON OFF, lo-20 power supply check, 410
PLL PAUSE, lo-20 power supply functional group block
plotter HP-II3 address, 46 diagram, 5-3
plotter or printer check, 47 POWER SUPPLY HOT!, lo-57
PLREF waveforms, 7-17 power supply shutdown
POKE, lo-46 Al5 green LED, 12-6
Port 1 Op cl&., lo-11 Al5 red LED, 12-6
Port 2 Op chk., lo-11 theory of operation, 12-6
port input noise floor level test, 2-37 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!, lo-57
port output power accuracy test, power supply troubleshooting chapter,
2-24 5-l
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK, lo-57 POWER UNLEVELED, lo-58
Post Reg., 10-9 power up sequence check, 411
post regulator precision frequency reference
air flow detector, 12-7 assembly replacement, 1458

Index-16
 part numbers, 13-26 F’ractionai-N Frequency Range
prereguiated voltages Adjustment, 3-45
theory of operation, 12-6 Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and
preregulator PM Sideband Adjustment, 3-54
theory of operation, 12-5 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment,
prereguiator LEDs check, 4-10 3-48
preregulator voltages, 5-10 High/Low Band Transition
PRESET, lo-7 Adjustment, 3-52
preset sequence, 4-3, 6-14 IF AmpIifier Correction Constants
Pretune Cor., 10-13 (Test 51), 3-16
Pretune Def., 10-13 Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58), 3-37
preventive maintenance, 1 l-l minimum R channel level, 2-31
principles of microwave connector Option Numbers Correction
care, l-5 Constant (Test 56), 3-36
printer, l-3 retrieve correction constant data
PRINTER from EEPROM backup disk,
error, 19-58 3-40
not handshaking, 19-58 RF Output Power Correction
not on, not connected, wrong addrs, constants (l&t 47), 3-11
lo-58 Sampler Magnitude and Phase
printer HP-IB address, 46 Correction Constants (Test 53),
probe 3-18
power, 12-8 Sequences for Mechanical
probe (photometer), l-3 Adjustments, 3-62
PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!, lo-58 Serial Number Correction Constant
probe power voltages, 5-19 (Test 55), 3-34
procedure Source Default Correction Constants
spur search with a Alter, 3-30 (l&t 44), 3-7
spur search without a filter, 3-31 Source Pretune Correction
procedures Constants (Test 48), 3-10
A9 Switch Positions, 3-5 Source Pretune Defauit Correction
ADC Offset Correction Constants Constants (Test 45), 3-8
(Test 52), 3-17 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
Analog Bus Correction Constant Adjustment, 3-58
(!lkst 46), 3-9 Test Port Input Noise Floor Level,
Cavity Osciliator Prequency 2-37
Correction Constants (Test test port output frequency range
54), 3-28 and accuracy, 2-18
EEPROM Backup Disk, 3-38 test port output power accuracy,
external source mode frequency 2-24
range, 2-21

Index-17
 test port output power range and REP (4 MHz) signal check, 8-7
linearity, 2-27 reference
Unprotected Hardware Option source, 12-14
Numbers Correction Constants, reference, A12, 10-40
3-60 reference (A12) check, 7-13
verify an analyzer system reference frequencies check using
(automated), 2-8 analog bus, 7-13
pulse generator reference frequencies check using
source, 12-15 oscilloscope, 7-15
pulse generator (A7) check, 7-32 reference signal (4 MHz), 7-20
pulses (100 kHz), 7-16 reflection Tracking (ERF’ and ERR),
PWR LOSS, 10-5 11-13
PWRMTR REP signal At AllTP9, 7-17
NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG removing
ADDRS, lo-59 A8, 5-14
line fuse, 5-7
B repair procedure, 41
range and accuracy of frequency, REPEAT ON OFF, 10-5
2-18 replaceable parts, 13-l
R channel level, 2-31 abbreviations, 13-48
rear panel battery, 13-8
assembly replacement, 1416 cables, bottom, 13-12
digital control, 12-12 cables, front, 13-14
part numbers, 13-24-26 cables, rear, 13-16
Rear Panel, 10-9 cables, source, 13-18
rear panel interface cables, top, 13-10
assembly replacement, 14-20 chassis, inside, 13-44
rear panel LEDs check, 410 chwis, outside, 13-42
rebuilt-exchange assemblies, 13-3 documentation, 13-46
receiver ESD supplies, 1347
digital IF, 12-30 front panel, inside, 13-22
sampler/mixer, 12-29 front panel, outside, 13-20
theory of operation, 12-3, 12-28 fuse, preregulator, 1340
receiver check, 416 fuses, post regulator, 13-47
receiver error messages, 417 fuses, rear panel, 13-24
receiver failure error messages, 8-3 handles, 13-47
receiver troubleshooting chapter, hardware, bottom, 13-30
8-l hardware, disk drive support, 13-36
RECORD ON OFF, 10-5 hardware, front, 13-32
red LED on Al5 hardware, memory deck, 13-38
power supply shutdown, 12-6 hardware, preregulator, 13-40

Index-18
 hardware, test set deck, 13-34 search for spurs without a filter, 3-31
hardware, top, 13-28 SEGMENT, 10-6
major assemblies, bottom, 13-8 selector switch check, 5-7
major assemblies, top, 13-6 self diagnose softkey, 10-7
misceihineous, 1346, 13-47 self-test, 4-3
option descriptions, 13-48 SELF TEST #n FAILED, lo-59
ordering, 13-3 sensor (power), l-3
rear panel, 13-24 sequence check for power up, 4-11
rear panel, Option lD5, 13-26 sequence contents, 3-64
rebuilt-exchange assemblies, 13-3 sequence contents for Fractional-
reference designations, 13-48 N Avoidance and FM Sideband
service tools, 13-46 Acijustment, 3-66
touch-up paint, 1347 sequence contents for Fractional-N
upgrade kits, 13-46 Frequency Range Adjustment,
required tools, l-l 3-65
RESET MEMORY, lo-46 sequence contents for High/Low Band
return analyzer for repair, 42 Transition Adjustment, 3-64
revision (firmware) softkey, lo-47 sequence contents for VCO
RF cable set, l-4 adjustment, 3-65
RF output power correction constants sequences
adjustment, 3-l 1 Fractional-N Frequency Range
RF power from source, 7-3 Adjustment, 3-62
RGB outputs, lo-15 Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and
ROM, lo-7 FM Sideband Adjustment, 3-62
High/Low Band Transition
S Adjustment, 3-62
Sampler Cor., 19-13 Serial Cor., 10-13
SAMF’LER COR ON OFF, lo-21 serial number correction constants
sampler correction off when checking a4@rstment, 3-34
the trace, 8-12 service and support options, l-9
sampler magnitude correction service center procedure, 42
constants adjustment, 3-18 service features, 10-18
sampler/mixer, 12-29 service key menus, 10-l
2nd LO signal, 12-29 service features, 10-18
high band, 12-29 service key mnemonics, 10-l
low band, 12-29 service mnemonic definitions, 10-48
mixer circuit, 12-30 SERVICE MODES, lo-18
super low band, 12-29 service modes more menu, 10-21
SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT service test equipment, l-l
MEMORY, lo-59 service tools list, l-l
search for spurs with a filter, 3-30 servicing the anaiyzer, 42

Index-19
setup built-in test set, 12-26
cavity oscillator frequency theory of operation, 12-26
correction constant routine, signals required for Al0 assembly
3-29 operation, 8-8
external source mode frequency SLOPE DAC, lo-19
range, 2-22 softkeys, 10-2
fractional-N spur avoidance and source
F’M sideband adjustment, 3-55 All phase lock, 12-15
frequency accuracy adhrstment, Al2 reference, 12-14
3-49 Al3 frac-N analog, 12-14
insertion loss measurement, 3-20 Al4 frac-N digital, 12-14
intensity check, 6-9 A3 source, 12-15
minimum R channel level, 2-32 A7 pulse generator, 12-15
mismatch device verification, 2-16 external source mode, 12-23
phase lock error troubleshooting, frequency offset, 12-22
7-4 harmonic analysis, 12-22
RF output correction constants, high band theory, 12-19
3-14 low band theory, 12-16
sampler correction routine, 3-22 operation in other modes, 12-22
source power check, 414 source, 12-15
test port frequency range and super low band theory, 12-15
accuracy test, 2-19 theory of operation, 12-2, 12-14
test port input noise floor level, tuned receiver mode, 12-25
2-38 source and All phase lock check,
test port output power accuracy, 7-8
2-25 source attenuator
test port output power range and theory of operation, 12-2
linearity, 2-28 source check, 413
transmis&on calibration, 2-13 Source Cor., 10-13
setup check for disk drive, 4-7 Source Def., 10-13
setup check for plotter or printer, source default correction constants
47 adjustment, 3-7
short and open device verification, Source Ex., l@ll
9-6 source (external), l-3
shutdown circuit source group assemblies, 7-l
post regulator, 12-7 source group troubleshooting
shutdown circuit on A8, 12-7 appendix, 7-38
shutdown circuitry disable, 5-16 source match (ESP and ESR), 11-12
signal examination for phase lock, source mode frequency range, 2-21
7-36 SOURCE PLL ON OFT, lo-19
signal separation source power, 7-3

Index-20
SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF, SRC tune mode frequency output,
RESET UNDER POWER MENU, 7-8
lo-59 SRC tune mode phase locked output
source pretune correction constants compared to open loop, 7-9
adjustment, 3-10 SRC tune mode waveform integrity,
source prettme default correction 7-9
constants adjustment, 3-8 SRC TUNE ON OFF, lo-19
source spur avoidance tracking stable HI OUT signal in PRACN TUNE
adjustment, 3-58 mode, 7-34
source troubleshooting chapter, 7-l Start Troubleshooting chapter, 4-l
specifications static-control table mat and earth
external source mode frequency ground wire, l-4
range, 2-21 status terms for test, 19-4
minimum R channel level, 2-31 step attenuator, 1-3
test port input noise floor level, STORE EEPR ON OFF, lo-21
2-37 stuck key identification, 6-14
test port output frequency range support and service options, 1-9
and accuracy, 2-18 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW
test port output power accuracy, TIME SWEEP, lo-60
2-24 Sweep Trig., 19-10
test port output power range and switch position adjustment, 3-5
linearity, 2-27 symbol conventions, 19-48
spectrum analyzer, 1-3 system performance uncorrected,
speed 11-9
fan, 5-22 system verihcation
spikes display (acceptable versus description of, 2-l
excessive), 3-59 post-repair, 3-2, 14-62
splitter (power), l-4 system verification (automated), 2-8
spur avoidance and PM sideband system verification cycle, 2-7
adjustment, 3-54 system verification tests, 193,19-12
spur avoidance tracking adjustment, Sys Ver hut., 19-12
3-58 SYS VER TESTS, lo-4
SPUR AVOID ON OFF, lo-22
spurs displayed with a filter, 3-30 T
spur search with a filter, 3-30 table of service tools, l-l
spur search without a filter, 3-31 temperature check, 5-13
SPUR TEST ON OFF, lo-21 terms for test status, 19-4
SRAM RAM, lo-8 test 44, 3-7, 19-13
SRC ADJUST DACS, lo-19 test 45, 3-8, 19-13
SRC ADJUST MENU, lo-19 test 46, 3-9, lo-13
SRC TUNE FREQ, lo-19 test 47, 3-11, 19-13

Index-21
test 48, 3-10, 10-13 Test Pat 24., lo-16
test 50, 10-13 Test Pat 5., lo-16
test 51, 3-16, 10-13 Test Pat 6., lo-16
test 52, 3-17, 10-13 Test Pat 7., lo-16
test 53, 3-18, 10-13 Test Pat 8., lo-16
test 54, 3-28, lo-13 Test Pat 9, lo-16
test 55, 3-34, 10-13 test patterns, 10-3
test 56, 3-36, 10-14 test port connector inspection, 9-3
test 57, 10-14 test port couplers, 12-26
test 58, 3-37, 10-14 test port input noise floor level, 2-37
test 59, 10-15 test port output frequency range and
test 60, 10-15 accuracy test, 2-18
test 61, 10-15 test port output power accuracy,
test 62, 10-15 2-24
test 63, 10-15 test port output power range and
test 64,10-15 linearity, 2-27
test 65, lo-15 test record types, 2-6
test 66, 10-16 tests
test 67-69, 10-16 1. Test Port Output kequency
test 70, 10-16 Range and Accuracy, 2-18
test 71, 10-16 2. External Source Mode F’requency
test 72, 10-16 Range, 2-21
test 73, 10-16 adjustments, 10-13
test 74, 10-16 chapter, 2-l
test 75, 10-17 display, 10-15
test 76, 10-17 external, 10-11
test 77, 10-17 internal, 10-7
test 78, 10-17 minimum R channel level, 2-31
test 79-80, 1@17 patterns, 10-16
TEST ABORTED, lo-60 system verifkation, 10-12
test cables, 9-5 Test Port Input Noise Floor Level,
test descriptions, 10-7 2-37
test equipment for service, l-l l&t Port Output Power Accuracy,
TEST OPTIONS, 10-5 2-24
test options menu, 10-5 Test Port Output Power Range and
Test Pat l., lo-16 Linearity, 2-27
Test Pat lo., lo-17 tests (diagnostics), 6-17
Test Pat ll., lo-17 test set, 12-26
Test Pat 12., lo-17 LED front panel, 12-26
Test Pat 13., lo-17 test port couplers, 12-26
n?st Pat 14-15., lo-17 test set interface, 12-26

Index-22
 theory of operation, 12-3 TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND
transfer switch, 12-26 START OVER, lo-60
test set interface, 12-26 troubleshooting
tests menu, 10-3 1st LO signal at sampler/mixer,
test status terms, 104 8-14
theory of operation, 12-1 A10 by substitution or signal
+5 V digital supply, 12-6 examination, 8-8
Al5 green LED, 12-6 All phase lock, 7-35
Al5 preregulator, 12-5 All phase lock and A3 source
Al5 red LED, 12-6 check, 7-8
A3 source, 12-2, 12-14 Al2 reference, 7-13
A8 green LEDs, 12-7 A13/A14 Fractional-N, 7-24
A8 post regulator, 12-7 Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check,
A8 shutdown circuit, 12-7 7-29
air flow detector, 12-7 Al5 preregulator, 5-9
digitai control, 12-8 Al/A2 front panel, 6-13
display power, 12-8 A7 pulse generator, 7-32
functional groups, 124 accessories, 4-18, 9-l
line power module, 12-6 broadband power problems, 7-39
microprocessor, 12-3 diagnostics, 4-3
peripheral equipment, 12-3 digital control, 6-l
power supply, 12-5 disk drive, 47
power supply shutdown, 12-6 fan, 5-22
preregulated voltages, 12-6 faulty data, 417
probe power, 12-8 faulty group identification, 4-9
receiver, 12-3, 12-28 tist step, 41
signal separation, 12-26 front panel, 6-13
source attenuator, 12-2 HP-R3 systems, 46
test set, 12-3 one or more inputs look good, 8-l 1
variable fan circuit, 12-7 phase lock error, 74
tool kit, l-3 plotters or printers, 47
tools for service, l-l receiver, 8-l
trace (good) display, 8-5 receiver error messages, 4-17
trace with sampler correction on and self-test, 43
off, 8-13 source, 7-l
tracking for source spur avoidance start, 41
adjustment, 3-58 systems with controllers, 4-8
transfer switch, 12-26 systems with multiple peripherals,
transmission tracking (ETP and ETR), 48
11-16 when all inputs look bad, 8-6

Index-23
 YO coil drive check with analog post regulator, 12-7
bus, 7-11 voltages
troubleshooting power supply, 5-l Al5 preregulator check, 5-10
troubleshooting source group AS, 5-14
appendix, 7-38 fan, 5-22
two-port error-correction procedure, front panel probe power, 5-19
11-3 YO- and YO+ coil drive voltage
differences with& SOURCE
U PLL OFT, 7-13
uncorrected performance, 1 l-9 voltages for post regulator, 5-5
unprotected hardware option numbers voltmeter, l-3
correction constants, 3-60 VRAM bank., lo-15
USE SENSOR A/B, 10-6 VRAIWvideo, 10-15
V W
variable fan circuit, 12-7 warranty explanation, 42
VCO (A14) exercise, 7-27 waveform integrity in SRC tune mode,
VCO range check frequencies, 7-24 7-9
Ver Dev l., 10-12 wrist strap and cord (antistatic), 14
Ver Dev 2., lCL12 WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALTZE
Ver Dev 3., 10-12 DISK, lo-60
Ver Dev 4., 10-12
veriiication cycle, kit re-certification, Y
2-7 YO coil drive check with analog bus,
verification kit 7 mm, l-3 7-11
verification procedures YO- and YO+ coil drive voltage
post-repair, 3-2, 14-62 differences with& SOURCE PLL
verify calibration kit devices, 9-4 OFT, 7-13
voltage indications

Index-24